HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LIMITED (INDIA)

ICB No. WB/2008/G-08

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

OF

PACKAGE G-08(B)

66 KV GIS SUBSTATION SECTOR-5 PANCHKULA

VOLUME – II

Chief Engineer/MM,

Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Limited Shakti Bhawan, Sector-6, Panchkula-134109 Ph: 0172-2583724 / 2583744 Fax:- 0172-2583724 / 2565746

CONTENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

BID DOCUMENT NO. G-8 VOLUME-II FOR 66 kV GIS SUB-STATION MATERIAL

SECTION –1 GENERAL 1-15

SECTION –2 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1-77

SECTION-2A SPECIFICATION FOR SF-6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR (66 KV) 1-26

SECTION –3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF POWER TRANSFORMER

Chapter-1 31.5 MVA, 66/11kV Power Transformer 1-24

SECTION –4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF SWITCH GEAR

Chapter-1 60 & 9 kV Gapless SA 1-11

Chapter-2 11 kV Switchgear (VCB) 2000 Amp. 1-17

SECTION –5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PROTECTIVE GEAR

Chapter-1 72.5 kV NCTs and 12 kV NCTs 1-10

Chapter-2 72.5 kV CVT 1-12

Chapter-3 Control and Relay Panel with automation 1-21

Chapter-4 Substation Automation System 1-34

Chapter-6 Combined 11 KV Metering CTs & PTs Units 1-20

Chapter-5 Inter-utility Metering System 1-13

SECTION –6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL. AUX Chapter-1 66 kV XLPE Power Cable 1-8

Chapter-2 220V 100AH & 48V 120AH VRLA Batteries 1-6

Chapter-3 Battery Charger for VRLA Batteries 66 KV 1-5

Chapter-4 DCDB 1-6

Chapter-5 415V, LT Switch Board 1-8

Chapter-6 Fire Fighting equipment 1-5

Chapter-7 Un-armoured Control Cable 1-3

Chapter-8 11 KV Shunt Capacitor 1-6

Chapter-9 LT Power Cables 1-4

Chapter-10 200 KVA, 11/0.4 kV Distribution Transformer 1-9

Chapter-11 11 kV XLPE Power Cable 1-3

SECTION –7 SWITCH YARD ERECTION AND INSTALLATION 1-28

SECTION –8 STEEL STRUCTURE 1-4

SECTION –9 CIVIL WORKS 1-39

SECTION-10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF PLCC EQUIPMENT

Chapter-1 PLC Terminal with protection coupler 1-11

Chapter-2 Line Trap (400A) 1-3

Chapter-3 Coupling Device 1-2

Chapter-4 48 V 120AH Battery Charger 1-12

Chapter-5 HF Cable 150ohm (Balanced) 1-5

Chapter-6 Coupling Capacitor 1-5

LIST OF DRAWINGS 1-2

LIST OF GUARANTEED CHARACTERSTICS 1-94

1

Section-1 (General) 1.00 INTRODUCTION:

The scope of this specification covers construction of 66 kV GIS S/Stn. Sector-5, Panchkula of HVPNL on supply-cum-erection (turnkey) basis as per Annexure-I on single source responsibility basis.

1.00.1 a) Complete design and engineering of all the system, sub-systems, equipment, material and services.

b) Providing engineering data, drawings and O&M Manuals for purchasers review, approval and records

c) Packaging transportation and insurance from the manufacturers works to the site including port and custom clearance if required.

d) Receipt, storage, insurance, preservation and conservation of equipment at the site. e) All civil works as required. f) Fabrication, pre assembly (if any), erection, testing and putting in to satisfactory

operating of all the equipment/material including successful commissioning. g) Furnishing of spares on CIP basis. h) Satisfactory conclusion of the contract.

1.00.2 SCOPE:

Detailed scope of work under this package is listed at clause 1.02.0. In addition to the requirements indicated in this section (Technical Specification), all requirements as stated in other sections shall also be considered as a part of this specification as if completely bound herewith.

1.00.3 The bidder shall be responsible for providing all material, equipment and services specified or otherwise which are required to fulfill the intent of ensuring operatability, maintainability and the reliability of the complete work.

1.00.4 It is not intent to specify all aspects of design and construction of equipment

mentioned herein. The systems, subsystems and equipment shall confirm in all respects and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation.

1.00.5 Whenever a material or article is specified or described by the name of a particular

brand, manufacturer or trade mark, the specific item shall be understood as establishing type, function and quality desired. Products of other manufactures may also be considered, provided sufficient information is furnished so as to enable the purchaser to determine that the products are equivalent to those named.

1.00.6 The bidder may also make alternative offers provided such offers are superior in his

opinion, in which case adequate technical information, operational feed back etc., shall be submitted with the offer to enable the purchaser to asses the superiority and reliability of the alternative offered. For each alternative offer, its implications on the performance shall be clearly brought out in the bid for the Owner to make an overall assessment. In any case, the base offer shall necessarily be in line with specifications. Under no circumstances the specified equipment etc., shall be brought out as an alternative.

1.00.7 Any deviation or variation from the scope requirement and/or intent of this

specification shall be clearly mentioned under Deviation Schedule of the Bid Proposal Sheets irrespective of the fact that such deviation/variation may be standard practice or a possible interpretation of the specification by the bidder. Except for the deviation/variations which are accepted by the purchaser before the award of the contract, it will be the responsibility of the bidder to fully meet the intent and the requirements of the specification within the quoted price. No other departure from the specification except for the declared deviation indicated by the bidder in his proposal shall be considered. The interpretation of the purchaser in respect of the scope, details and services to be performed by the bidder shall be binding, unless

2

specifically clarified other wise by the purchaser in writing before the award of contract.

1.00.8 The drawing enclosed with the specification are preliminary drawings for bidding

purpose only and subject to changes that may be necessary during detailed engineering after award, keeping the basic parameters as specified.

1.01.0 Project information 1.01.1 The project information relating to the materialogical data, site conditions, site date

including preliminary soil data of the proposed substations are given in Section-B of this specification.

1.02.0 Scope of work 1.02.1 The Scope of turnkey basis shall comprise, but not limited to the design, engineering,

manufacture, testing and inspection at manufacturers works, packing supply , transportation, transit insurance, delivery to site, unloading, storage and equipment erection including associated civil works, fire detection hydrant systems, structural works, cabling, lighting , earthing, any other electrical, mechanical auxiliary equipment/system, supervision of erection, site testing and commissioning of the 66 KV Substation(s), training of purchasers personal as required.

1.02.2 The weed growth/ tree cutting shall be responsibility of the contractor. Contractor

may note that purchaser shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or for tree cutting due to contractor’s works.

1.02.3 The equipment and materials to be supplied by the contractor shall enable

completion of the substation(s) in all respects. The equipment and services as detailed in all sections of the bidding documents and as shown on the tender drawings shall be within the scope of supply of the contractor.

The scope of work shall cover in complete conformity with the specifications, the following specified equipment/items. Any equipment/items though not specifically mentioned below but which are required to make the substations complete in all respects for their safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free operation shall not be deemed to be included and the same shall be supplied and erected by the Contractor, unless they are specifically excluded elsewhere in this specifications.

• A single line schematic of the 66 kV SF-6 Gas insulated S/Stn. Sector-5, Panchkula with Double Bus Bar arrangement is enclosed with the specification. The major electrical equipment required with the switchgear are also shown in the schematic and listed at Annexure-1.The required mandatory maintenance equipment are listed as per Annexure-II. However, it may be noted that this list is not exhaustive and in case any additional equipment is required, the same should be included in the scope of the supply and the offer should be complete and comprehensive. In addition, all necessary platform, supports, ladder, cat walks etc. for maintenance works shall also be supplied.

• Tentative layout of 66KV GIS buildings are enclosed with this specification. Bidder shall treat the dimensions and functional details as a minimum i.e. required under the scope of specifications. They may however be required to optimize the same during detailed engineering without affecting any of the functional requirements specified.

• 2 No. 66/11 kV, 25/31.5 MVA Power Transformer

• Control relay & protection and metering equipment

• 66 KV XLPE Cable with termination arrangements from 66 KV Side of Transformer to 66 KV GIS and line to GIS Switchgear.

3

• 11 kV XLPE Cables between 11 kV switchgears and LT transformers, between

Transformer & LT Bus and 11 KV Switchgear and 11 KV Capacitor Bank along with their termination arrangements.

• 1 No. 11 KV/433 V 200 KVA Transformer along with switchgear.

• Grounding/earthing.

• Lighting (Indoor & Outdoor)

• 1.1 kV Power and control cables, instrumentation cables

• Lightening protection

• Erection testing and commissioning of all equipment at site.

• All civil works associated with erection of SF-6 Gas insulated metal clad, switchgear

including their foundation and cable trenches etc. Civil works shall also include construction of building, drains, sewerage works and septic tanks, requisite water facilities etc.

• Cable/Gas Insulated Bus duct sealing ends.

• Recommended spare parts, maintenance tools and other equipment necessary for maintenance purposes for five years of trouble free services.

• Electrical auxiliary equipment.

• Mechanical auxiliary equipment and services like fire protection, air conditioning and ventilation, EOT cranes etc.

• Training of purchaser’s design and O&M Personnel. 1.03.0 Services and items

The scope also includes but not limited to the following services/items described herein and elsewhere in specification.

a) System design and engineering b) Supply of equipment and material c) Civil Works d) Structural works e) Erection works f) Project management and site supervision g) Testing and commissioning h) Interface coordination

1.04.0 System Design and Engineering a) The Contractor shall be responsible for detailed design and engineering of overall

system, sub-systems, elements, system facilities, equipments, auxiliary services, etc. It shall include proper definition and execution of all interfaces with systems, equipment, material and services of purchaser for proper and correct design, performance and operation of the project.

b) Contractor shall provide complete engineering data, drawings, reports, manuals, etc. for purchaser’s review, approval and records.

c) The scope shall also include the design and engineering as per details elaborated elsewhere in this specification.

d) The Contractor shall carry out earth resistivity measurements at the substation site(s) (based on four electrode method)

e) For all structural works, the contractor shall prepare all fabrication drawings. Similarly for civil works, the detailed construction drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor.

1.05.0 Supply of Equipment and Material

4

a) The Contractor shall be responsible for design, engineering, manufacture, testing & inspection at manufacturer’s works, supply transportation, insurance, delivery at site, unloading, storage, in plant transportation at site, complete erection & supervision, site testing & inspection, and successful commissioning of all equipment and material listed at ‘Bill of Quantities’ enclosed as Annexure-1 of this section, detailed elsewhere in specification and as shown on the tender drawings. Any item though not specifically mentioned, but is required to complete the project works in all respects for its safe, reliable, efficient and trouble free operation shall also be taken to be included, and the same shall be supplied and erected by the Contractor without extra cost unless it is explicitly excluded elsewhere in the specifications.

b) All consumables, wastages and damages shall be to the account of contractor.

1.06.0 Civil Works a) The civil works to be executed by the contractor in accordance with specification

shall include design (wherever applicable), engineering, supply of material and construction of all items given under Bill of Quantities and all other items required for completing the substations in all respects.

b) The civil works shall include leveling/dressing, site surfacing (gravel filling), construction of control room building, roads as per HVPNL drawings and design and construction of GIS block building including foundation for all equipments, burying of pipes/cables (if required), drains and road culverts.

c) All civil works shall be carried out as per the specifications covered under Section-9 of the bid/contract documents and PWD specifications/latest IS Codes.

1.07.0 Erection Works

a) The contractor shall construct, erect and install all equipment and material required for completion of substation(s) covered under the project. He shall be responsible for provision of all labour, tools and tackles and supervisory staff for safe, reliable, proper and correct erection of all equipment required for successful completion of the substation(s).

b) The tools and plant shall include, but not limited to, special hoisting equipment, cranes, slings, consumables and all other articles and supplies as required.

c) The contractor shall ensure periodic cleaning of work site and removal of all waste material, packaging material, surplus earth and left-over and their proper disposal.

d) The contractor has to employ suitable manpower and supervision personnel. The contractor is solely and fully responsible for the safety of personnel and materials. Any damages to the existing facilities shall be made good by the contractor at no extra cost to the purchaser. The contractor shall coordinate with site personnel for arranging shut down for interconnection with the existing systems, if required.

1.08.0 Project management and site supervision

a) The contractor shall be responsible for the overall management and supervision of works. He shall experiences, skilled, knowledgeable and competent personnel for all phase of the project, so as to provide the purchaser with a high quality system.

b) The contractor’s supervisory personnel shall provide operation and maintenance assistance during the warranty period.

c) A Project execution schedule called Master Network (MNW) in the form of PERT chart/network shall be prepared by the contractor for purchaser’s approval. The MNW shall identify milestones of key event for each work/ component in the areas of engineering, procurement, manufacturer, dispatch, erection and commissioning. It shall indicate interfaces and inputs required to be given by Purchaser.

1.09.0 Testing and Commissioning

a) The scope includes testing and commissioning of all equipment, subsystems and systems of the project and putting them into successful commercial operation. The scope shall include but not limited to the requirements given elsewhere in the specification.

5

b) The contractor shall be responsible to provide all necessary testing and commissioning personnel, tools and plant, testing equipment, etc. All expenses for carrying out the routine tests as specified in relevant standard shall be to contractor’s account. However the expenses w.rt. purchaser/purchaser’s representative for witnessing these tests which contractor shall take into account shall be as follows:-

i) For Inspections/tests to be carried out for equipment offered from within purchaser’s country. All tour expenses shall be borne by purchaser.

ii) For inspections/tests to be carried out for equipment offered from outside purchaser’s country:-

It is envisaged that inspection/testing of all such equipment shall be witnessed. Each inspection shall be carried out by a team of 3 to 4 engineers nominated by the purchaser. Their TO & Fro travel expenditure from purchaser’s country to the place of inspection/testing shall be borne by the bidder. However all boarding and lodging charges for these engineers shall be borne by the purchaser.

1.10.0 Interface Coordination The contractor shall identify all interface issues with purchaser and other agencies, and shall be responsible for such interfacing, coordination and exchange of all necessary information.

1.11.0 Terminal Points a) The approach road up to the GIS substation area shall be provided by the

Purchaser. All internal roads (if any) shall have to be constructed by the contractor. b) Purchaser shall provide assistance to the contractor for obtaining statuary

clearances for providing temporary connections for construction of power and water. The contractor shall arrange for necessary meters etc. and shall pay applicable energy and water charges as per applicable rates to the purchaser/any other statutory body.

1.12.0 Arrangements by the contractor

Contractor shall make his own necessary arrangements for the following and for those listed anywhere else in this specification.

a) Construction power supply at all work areas. b) Construction water. c) Construction office and store (open and covered) d) Construction workshop and material/field testing laboratory e) Boarding & lodging arrangement for their personnel. f) Fire protection and security arrangements during construction stage. g) Any other requirements of the Haryana Governemnt and as per the purchaser’s

rules, regulations and practices.

1.13.0 Mandatory Maintenance Equipment The Bidder shall include in his scope mandatory maintenance equipment as specified. The prices of these shall be indicated in respective schedules. These would be considered in bid evaluation. A List of mandatory maintenance equipment is given at Annexure-II to section. The Owner reserves the right to buy any or all of these. The Bidder shall furnish the itemized and total prices for this equipment in the offer. In Compliance with the requirements of tender documents, the prices for mandatory maintenance equipment must be given separately, and shall be used for bid evaluation purposes. All mandatory maintenance equipment shall be delivered at site.

1.14.0 Commissioning spares

6

The contractor shall supply spares, which he expects to consume during installation, testing and commissioning of system. The quantity of these spares shall be decided based on his previous experience, such that site works shall not be hampered due to non-availability of these spares. Contractor shall submit a complete list of such spares along with the bid, the cost of which shall be deemed to have been included in the lumpsum proposal price of the package. The unused commissioning spares may be left at the site for use by the purchaser, if so agreed at a cost to be negotiated.

No mandatory or recommended spares will be used during the commissioning of the equipment/plant before take over by the purchaser.

1.15.0 Recommended spares 1.15.0.1 In addition to the mandatory maintenance equipment, the contractor shall also

provide a list of recommended spares giving unit prices and total prices for 5 years of normal operation of equipment in the relevant schedule of the BPS. The Purchaser reserves the right to buy any or all the recommended spares. The recommended spares parts shall be delivered at the site(s). The list of recommended spares to be furnished by the bidder should also contain the following:

a) Population of each item installed along with reference drawing number. b) Service life expectancy of each item. c) Offer validity period.

1.15.0.2 Price of recommended spares will not be used for evaluation of bids. The price of these spares will remain valid for a period of not less than 120 days after the date on which the validity of main bid expires. The prices of any recommended spares shall be subject to review by the purchaser and shall be finalized after mutual discussions.

1.16.0 Tools & Tackles

The Contractor shall also supply at each substation site one set of all special tool and tackles, etc. which are required by the purchaser’s maintenance staff to maintain the works successfully at no extra cost. The list of such tools and tackles shall be enclosed with the offer.

1.17.0 TYPE TEST, ROUTINE AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS 1.17.1 All equipment with their terminal connectors, control cabinets, main protective relays,

HT & LV cables etc. shall confirm of type tests and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance test in accordance with the requirements stipulated in relevant standard & respective equipment sections.

1.17.2 Contractor shall submit all type test reports and certificates according to the relevant

standards and/or specification for all the equipment/material for purchaser’s review as a proof of their conformity with the type test along with a certificate regarding conformity of the equipment, being supplied, with the type test reports/certificates as called for after award of contract. However, for GIS equipment & power transformers, these documents are tobe necessarily furnished along with the offer. The type test reports shall be for equipment having similar design, same voltage class and current rating etc. to that of the equipment offered now by the bidder in his bid and shall cover all the type tests as specified in relevant standard. The reports for 66KV GIS and power transformers shall be scrutinized during technical evaluation for their acceptability. The bids shall be rejected in case these test reports are not found acceptable.

1.17.3 The purchaser will have the right of getting any test of reasonable nature carried out

on any component or completely assembled equipment at Contractor’s premises or at site or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that the materials/equipment comply with the specification.

7

1.17.4 Failure of any equipment to meet the specified requirements of tests carried out at

works or at site shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the equipment. Rejection of any equipment will not be held as a valid reason for delay in the completion of the works as per schedule Contractor shall be responsible for removing all deficiencies, and supplying the equipment that meet the requirement.

1.18 REQUIREMENTS IN RESPECT OF SUPPLY ITEMS 1.18.1 Main Equipment

a) 66kV GIS, Control and Relay panels, 11 kV Switchgear and their control and relay panels

Makes of the above equipments are restricted to the pre-qualified bidders only.The proposed manufacturer of the equipment should have designed, manufactured, type tested and supplied, as per relevant IS/IEC or equivalent national/international standards, similar equipment (type and class) as specified. Such equipment should have been in successful operation in a 66kV system, as applicable, for a period of at least two (2) years as on date of bid opening.

b) Power transformers Make of offered power transformers shall preferably be of the perqualifed bidders only. The bidder shall ensure that the manufacturer of the transformers should have designed, manufactured type tested and supplied, as per relevant IS/IEC or equivalent national/international standards, similar equipment (type and class) as specified. Such transformers should have been in successful operation in a 66 kV system, as applicable, for a period of at least two (2) years as on date of bid opening.

1.18.2 For other items of supply

The bidder shall supply equipment/accessories from the reputed manufacturers who should have designed, manufactured type tested and supplied, as per relevant IS/IEC or equivalent national/international standards, similar equipment (type and class) as specified. Such equipment should have been in successful operation for a period of at least two (2) years as on date of bid opening.

1.18.3 As specified at para 1.17.2 above, the bidder must enclose the type test reports

along the conformity certificates for GIS equipment and power transformers along with the bid covering all the tests as specified in relevant standard. Bids not found enclosed with the test reports and compliance certificates shall be rejected.

Detailed type test reports and compliance certificates for all other equipment as detailed in relevant standard. shall be required to be submitted by the successful bidder during detailed engineering.

1.18.4 The Bidder shall clearly and unambiguously identify and name the proposed sub-vendors for various equipment and enclose detailed documents for each proposed sub-vendor with the bid to establish that such sub-vendors meet the above-stipulated requirements. Any vague statements like “…. make or equivalent” shall not be accepted. Any bidder who fails to comply with the above clauses 1.18.1 to 1.18.4 is liable to be disqualified and his bid is liable to be rejected.

1.19.0 Training of purchaser’s Personnel

(a) Training at Manufacturer’s works: The successful Bidder shall arrange for training of 2 engineers of the employer at the manufacturer’s works of GIS for 5 working days in Design, manufacture and testing

8

of GIS being supplied. To and fro air fare including boarding and lodging charges for the Employer’s Engineer shall be born by the Employer. (b) Training at Site: The Successful Bidder shall arrange for training to 5 engineers & operating field staff of Employer for seven days at the site in operation and maintenance of GIS. The charges of training shall include To and fro air fares, Boarding and lodgings, Training material etc. of the contractor’s personnel.

1.20.0 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES

The detailed description of various items/equipment and civil works are indicated at Annexure – I to VI & Schedule E1. The bill of quantity of major equipment is also indicated and wherever the quantities are not indicated the bidder is required to compute the quantity. Bidder is required to indicate unit rate and total price of the items under a particular head in bid proposal sheets. Bidder should include all such items in the bid proposal sheets, which may not be specifically mentioned but are essential for the execution of the contract.

1.21.0 GENERAL ELECTRICAL LAYOUT

The GELO for 66 kV Sub-stations Sector-5, Panchkula is enclosed as indicated at

Annexure-IV. 1.22.0 LOCATIONS OF THE SUBSTATION

The location of the substations is in Panchkula at Sector-5, Panchkula. 1.23.0 METEOROLOGICAL DATA.

The meteorological data of the substation is indicated at Annexure-III. However, for design purpose, ambient temperature should be considered as 50° C.

1.24.0 SOIL DATA

The earth resistivity for 66 kV Sub-stations Sector-5, Panchkula shall be ascertained by the bidder himself.

1.25.0 DRAWING

1. The bidder shall maintain inter equipment distances, bay length, bay width etc in accordance with the enclosed general/electrical layouts of the respective substations while doing so the bidder will ensure that the statutory electrical clearances required for substation are maintained. (Annexure-IV)

2. The drawing enclosed give the basic scheme, layout of substation, substation buildings, associated service etc. In case of any discrepancy between the drawing and text of specification the bidder is advised to get these clarified before submission of bid. No claim what-so-ever on this score shall be entertained after award of contract.

3. The bidder shall adopt HVPNL design of galvanized steel structure for tower, beam and equipment supporting structures for 66 kV S/Stn(s).

The PLCC equipments will be in the scope of the bidder for all the S/Stns. (Both ends) including supply, Erection and commissioning.

Notes: 1. The bidder or his authorised representative should visit the site of works and

its surroundings to obtain himself at his responsibility and expenses, all information regarding general site characteristics, accessibility, infrastructure

9

details and factual position in respect of scope of work viz-a-viz GELO drg. attached with the bid document. Any alteration/addition envisage in the document must be got clarified before submission of the bid.

2. No extra payment shall be made on account of any change in the layout drgs.

required for providing DSLP as per Rezvik method.

3. In addition to switch-yard lighting (as per Section-7) of Vol-II the successful bidder is required to provide fluorescent tube fitting (2x4 feet) along the periphery of fencing at a interval of 30 meters.

10

ANNEXURE-I

1.0 66 kV GIS

66 kV GIS with 8 (including one spare T/F bay & 2 spare line feeder bays) bays and associated local control panels, control cables all consumables and hardware etc. as per enclosed GELO Drawing and as per the technical specification.

Sr.No. Description Unit Qty.

1. 72.5 kV, 2000A, 31.5 kA for 1 sec, SF6 gas insulated transformer feeder bay module each comprising of SF6 gas insulated circuit breaker, current transformer, bus-bar disconnectors with common grounding switch, disconnectors with safety grounding switch(es), local control cubicle, SF6 gas monitoring system for complete bay, gas insulated terminal connection for connecting transformer (XLPE Cable/SF6) bushing with GIS module through XLPE cable/bus duct with termination kit and accessories etc. to complete Transformer Bay Module with following main equipment for each bay:- 1. 72.5 KV Circuit Breaker - 1 2. 72.5 KV Isolator (motor operated) - 2 with earth switch 3. High speed motor operated - 1 earth switch 4. CT (Single Phase)(300-150/0.577-1-1)- 3

set 2

2. 72.5 kV, 2000A, 31.5 kA for 1 sec, SF6 gas insulated Line feeder bay module each comprising of SF6 gas insulated circuit breaker, current transformer, bus-bar disconnectors with common grounding switch, disconnectors with safety grounding switch(es), high speed fault making grounding switch, local control cubicle, SF6 gas monitoring system for complete bay, gas insulated terminal connection for connecting Overhead line (Air) with GIS module through XLPE cable/bus duct with termination kit and accessories etc. to complete Feeder Bay Module with following main equipment for each bay:-

1. 72.5 KV Circuit Breaker - 1 2. 72.5 KV Isolator (motor operated) - 3 with earth switch 3. High speed motor operated - 1 earth switch 4. CT (Single Phase)(600-300-150/1-1-1)- 3

set 2

3. 72.5 kV, 31.5 kA for 1 sec, 3 phase, SF6 gas insulated, metal enclosed 2000A bus bars each enclosed in bus enclosures running along the length of the switchgear to interconnect each of circuit breaker bay module. Each bus bar set shall be complete with voltage transformer, disconnectors, bus bar grounding switch, SF6 gas monitoring system for the complete bus etc with following main equipment for each bay:- 1. High speed motor operated - 1 earth switch 2. Inductive Bus PTs (Single Phase) - 3

set 2

11

Sr.No. Description Unit Qty.

4. 72.5 kV, 2000A, 31.5 kA for 1 sec, SF6 gas insulated Bus Coupler Bay Module comprising of SF6 gas insulated circuit breaker, current transformer, disconnectors switches, disconnector with safety grounding switch(es). Local control cubicle, SF-6 gas monitoring system for the complete bay etc with following main equipment for each bay:- 1. 72.5 KV Circuit Breaker - 1 2. 72.5 KV Isolator (motor operated) - 2 with earth switch 3. CT (Single Phase)(600-300-150/1-1-1A) - 3

set 1

12

ANNEXURE-II

B.

MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT EACH AT SECTOR-5, PANCHKULA

1. MANDATORY:

i) SF-6 Gas filling and evacuating plant (5 kg capacity)

-

1 Set

ii) SF-6 Gas leak detector (Portable) - 1 iii) Tools for gas handling - 1 Set 2. OPTIONAL: i) Portable circuit breaker operation

analyzer - 1

ii) SF-6 Gas service cart i.e. SF-6 Gas purification and recycling plant with all accessories and spares for 5 years operation

- 1

iii) Measuring and analyzing equipment for moisture and air content in SF-6 Gas

- 1

iv) Micro ohm Meter Ranges (0-100 ohm)

(0-1 milliohm) (0-10 milliohm)

- 1

13

ANNEXURE-III METEOROLOGICAL DATA Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:

i) Location In the state of Haryana

ii)

Max. Ambient air temp. (deg. C)

50

iii) Min ambient air temp. (deg. C)

-2.5

iv) Daily average air temp. (deg. C)

35

v) Average no. of Thunder storm days per Annum

45

vi) Maximum Relative Humidity (%)

100

vii) Minimum Relative Humidity (%)

26

viii) Average annual rain fall (mm)

900

ix) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq m)

195

x) Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters)

1000

xi) Isoceraunic level (days/year)

45

xii) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)

0.3 g

xiii) Average no. of rainy days per Annum

120

NOTE: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus growth. The

climate conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient condition. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June to October.

14

ANNEXURE-IV

Sr. No.

NAME OF SUB STATION GELO No.

1. 66 kV GIS S/Stn.Sector-5, Panchkula HGD-3C/549

MODEL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

SEC-2 GTR

(GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT)

SECTION-2 GTR (GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS)

CLAUSE NO. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.

1.0 Foreword 1

2.0 General Requirement 1

3.0 Standards 2

4.0 Services to be performed by the 2

Equipment being furnished

5.0 Engineering Data and Drawings 11

6.0 Material/Workmanship 14

7.0 Design Improvements/Coordination 18

8.0 Quality Assurance Programme 19

9.0 Type Testing, Inspection & 20

Inspection Certificate

10.0 Tests 23

11.0 Packaging & Protection 23

12.0 Finishing of Metal Surfaces 24

13.0 Handling, Storing & Installation 26

14.0 Tools and Tackles 28

15.0 Auxiliary Supply 28

16.0 Support Structure 29

17.0 Clamps and Connectors including 30

Terminal Connectors

18.0 Control Cabinets, Junction Boxes, Terminal 32

Boxes & Marshalling Boxes for Outdoor Equipment

19.0 Auxiliary Switches 33

20.0 Terminal Blocks and Wiring 34

21.0 Lamps and Sockets 35

CLAUSE NO. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.

22.0 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, 36

Support Insulators

23.0 Motors 37

24.0 Technical Requirement of Equipments 39

Annexure-A Corona and Radio Interference Voltage 47

(RIV) Test

Annexure-B List of Specifications 50

SEC-GTR (GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS)

1.0 FOREWORD

1.1 The provisions under this section are intended to supplement general requirements for the materials, equipments and services covered under other sections of tender documents and is not exclusive. However in case of conflict between the requirements specified in this section and requirements specified under other sections, the requirements specified under respective sections shall prevail.

2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

2.1 The bidders shall submit the technical requirements, data and information as per the technical data sheets provided in the Volume II of bid documents.

2.2 The bidders shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical information, design documents, drawings etc.

2.3 It is recognised that the bidders may have standardised on the use of certain components, materials, processes or procedures different from those specified herein. Alternate proposals offering similar equipment based on the manufacturer’s standard practice will also be considered provided such proposals meet the specified designs, standard and performance requirements and are acceptable to the HVPNL.

2.4 Except for lighting fixtures, wherever a material or article is specified or defined by the name of a particular brand, Manufacturer or Vendor, the specific name mentioned shall be understood as establishing type, function and quality and not as limiting competition. For lighting fixtures , makes shall be as defined in Section- Lighting System.

2.5 Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings, fittings, fixtures and standard accessories normally provided with such equipment and/or needed for erection, completion and safe operation of the equipment as required by applicable codes though they may not have been specifically detailed in the Technical Specifications unless included in the list of exclusions. Materials and components not specifically stated in the specification but which are Page - 1

necessary for commissioning and satisfactory operation of the switchyard/substation unless specifically excluded shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the specification and shall be supplied without any extra cost. All similar standard components/parts of similar standard equipment provided, shall be inter-changeable with one another.

3.0 STANDARDS

3.1 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered, manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules, Laws and Regulations of India.

3.2 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue with all amendments (as on the date of bid opening) of standard specified under Annexure -B of this section, unless specifically mentioned in the specification.

3.3 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to compliment each other.

3.4 The Bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC.

3.5 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ than those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.

3.6 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better performance than that specified in the standards specified under Annexure B / individual sections for various equipments shall also, be accepted, however the salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out in additional information schedule of Vol III along with English language version of such standard. The equipment conforming to standards other than specified under Annexure-B / individual sections for various equipments shall be subject to HVPNL’s approval.

3.7 The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in accordance with which the works will be carried out.

4.0 SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED

4.1 The lighting impulse voltage shall be 1050kVp.

4.2 All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various other electrical, electromechanical and meteorological conditions of the site of installation. Page 2

4.3 All equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal mechanical, thermal and electromechanical forces due to various factors like wind load, temperature variation, ice & snow, (wherever applicable) short circuit etc for the equipment.

4.4 The bidder shall design terminal connectors of the equipment taking into account various forces that are required to withstand.

4.5 The equipment shall also comply to the following:

a) All outdoor EHV equipments except marshalling kiosks shall be suitable for hot line washing.

b) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled at site shall be “match marked”.

c) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet/ operating mechanism to marshalling box of the equipment, shall bear proper identification to facilitate the connection at site.

4.6 Operating times of circuit breakers, protective relays and PLCC equipment have been specified in respective sections.

4.7 EHV equipments and system shall be designed to meet the following major technical parameters as brought out hereunder.

4.7.1 System Parameter

S.NO Description of 66 kV 11 kV parameters System System

1. System operating 66kV 11kV

voltage 3. Rated frequency 50Hz 50Hz 4. No. of phase 3 3 Page - 3

S.NO Description of 66 kV 11 kV parameters System System

5. Rated Insulation levels

i) Full wave impulse 325kVp 75kVp withstand voltage(1.2/50 micro sec.)

ii) Switching impulse - -

withstandvoltage (250/2500micro sec.) dry and wet

Iii) One minute power 140kV 28kV

frequency dry and wet withstand voltage (rms)

6. Corona extinction - -

voltage 7. Max. radio 500 -

interference micro- voltage for volt frequency between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz 156kV rms for 220kV system & 92 kV rms for 132kV system

8. Minimum 25 mm/kV 25 mm/kV

creepage distance (1813 (300 mm) mm)

Page - 4

9. Min. clearances

S.NO Description of 66 kV 11 kV parameters System System

i) Phase to phase (for 800 mm Rod - conductor configuration) and (for conductor conductor configuration)

ii) Phase to earth 800mm - iii) Sectional 3000 mm -

clearances 10. Rated short circuit 31.5 kA 25 kA

current for 1 sec. duration

11. System neutral Effectively Effectively

earthing earthed earthed

4.7.2 Major Technical Parameters

The major technical parameters of the equipments are given below. For other parameters and features respective technical sections should be referred.

(A) 25/31.5 MVA 66/11KV Power Transformer

Maximum Continuous Capacity(MVA) ONAN ONAF

50 75

Rated Voltage HV LV

66KV 11KV

Percentage Impedance 12.5% at 100MVA Base

Vector Group YYO

Page 5

Insulation level HV LV Neutral

Lightning Impulse withstand voltage 325KV 95 KV 170

Power Frequency withstand voltage 140KV 38 KV 70

Page 6

(A) For 72.5 kV Circuit Breaker

Rated voltage kV (rms) 72.5

Rated frequency (Hz) 50

No. of Poles 3

Design ambinet 50 temperature (°C)

Rated insulation levels :

1) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec.)

- between line ±325 kVp terminals and ground

- between terminals ±325 kVp with circuit breaker open

- between terminals ±375 kVp with isolator open

2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage

- between line 140 kV (rms) terminals and ground

Page - 7

- between terminals

with circuit breaker open

- between terminals with Isolator open

Max. radio interference voltage (microvolts) for frequency between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz in all positions of the equipments.

Minimum creepage distance :-

Phase to ground (mm)

Between CB Terminals (mm)

System neutral earthing

Seismic acceleration

Rating of Auxiliary Contacts

Breaking capacity of Auxiliary Contacts

Phase to phase spacing (mm)

140 kV (rms)

160kV (rms)

500 (at 92 kV rms)

1813

1813

Effectively earthed

- 0.3g horizontal -

- 10 A at 220 V DC -

2 A DC with circuit time constant of not less than 20 ms.

2000

Auxiliary Switch shall also Comply with other clauses of this chapter.

(B) FOR 72.5 kV CT/CVT/SA

Rated voltage kV (rms) 72.5

Rated frequency (Hz) 50

No. of poles 1

Page - 8

Design ambient temperature (°C) 50

Rated insulation levels :

1) Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec.)

- between line terminals ±325 kVp and ground for CT and CVT

- for arrester housing ±325 kVp

2) One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage

- between line terminals 140 kV rms and ground for CT and CVT

- for arrester housing

Max. radio interference voltage (microvolts) for frequency between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz in all positions of the equipment.

Minimum creepage distance :-Phase to ground (mm)

System neutral earthing

Seismic acceleration

Partial discharge for :-

- Surge arrester at 1.05 COV

- for CT/CVT

Page 9 P

- Not exceeding 10 pc. –

(C) Technical Parameters of Bushings/Hollow Column insulators/support insulators :

For For

66 kV 11 kV System System

(a) Rated Voltage (kV) 72.5 12 Page-10

(b) Impulse withstand ±325 ±170 voltage(Dry& Wet) (kVp)

(c) Switching surge - - Withstandvoltage (dry and wet) (kVp)

(d) Power frequency 140 70 withstand voltage (dry and wet) (kV rms)

(e) Total creepage 1813 900 distance (mm)

(f) Pollution Class-III Heavy (as per IEC 71) and as specified in Section-2 for all class of equipment.

(g) Insulator shall also meet requirement of and IEC-815 for 220 kV system, as applicable having alternate long & short sheds.

5.0 ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS

5.1 The engineering data shall be furnished by the Contractor in accordance with the Schedule for each set of equipment as specified in the Bid Document.

5.2 The list of drawings/documents which are to be submitted to the HVPNL as detailed below/in individual sections.

The Contractor shall necessarily submit all the drawings/ documents unless anything is waived.

The Contractor shall submit 4 (four) sets of drawings/ design

documents /data/ test reports as may be required for the approval of the HVPNL.

5.3 Drawings

5.3.1 All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time of bid shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component, break-up for packing and shipment, dimensions, internal & the external connections, fixing arrangement required and any other information specifically requested in the specifications.

5.3.2 Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the HVPNL, the unit designation, the specifications title, the specification number and the name of the Project. If standard catalogue pages are submitted, the applicable items shall be indicated therein. All titles, noting, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be in metric units.

Page-11

5.3.3 Further work by the Contractor shall be in strict accordance with these drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the HVPNL, if so required.

5.4 The review of these data by the HVPNL will cover only general conformance of the data to the specifications and documents, interfaces with the equipment provided under the specifications, external connections and of the dimensions which might affect substation layout. This review by the HVPNL may not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities and details of the equipment, materials, any devices or items indicated or the accuracy of the information submitted. This review and/or approval by the HVPNL shall not be considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these specifications and documents.

5.5 All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The Contractor may make any changes in the design which are necessary to make the equipment conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such changes will again be subject to approval by the HVPNL. Approval of Contractor’s drawing or work by the HVPNL shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.

5.6 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including review and approval by the HVPNL shall form part of the Contract Document and the entire works performed under these

specifications shall be performed in strict conformity, unless otherwise expressly requested by the HVPNL in Writing.

5.7 Approval Procedure

The successful bidder shall submit 4 sets of drawings as detailed in relevant specifications complete in all respects for approval to HVPNL as per schedule given in bar-chart. The following schedule shall be followed generally for approval and for providing final documentation.

i) Approval/comments/ within 4 weeks of receipt of by HVPNL on initial drawings by HVPNL. submission

ii) Resubmission Within 3 (three) weeks (where ever from date of comments required) including both ways postal

time).

iii) Approval or comments Within 3 weeks of receipt of resubmission.

iv) Furnishing of final sets of Before commissioning of S/Stn. drawings (10 copies for each item per sub-station) Page-12

v) Furnishing of instruction & Before commissioning of S/Stn.

operation manual (10 copies for each item per sub-station)

vi) Furnishing of CD-ROM of final Before commissioning of S/Stn.

Drawings (2 Nos. for each item Per sub-station)

vii) Furnishing of CD-ROM of Instruction Before commissioning of S/Stn. Manual & operation (2 Nos. for each item per Sub-station)

(viii) Furnishing of CD-ROM of Automation Software(2 Nos. for each sub-station)

(ix) Furnishing of CD-ROM of Application software for numerical relays (2 Nos. for each sub-station)

Before commissioning of S/Stn.

Before commissioning of S/Stn.

Page-13

NOTE :

(1) The contractor may please note that all resubmissions must incorporate all comments given in the earlier submission by the HVPNL or adequate justification for not incorporating the same must be submitted failing which the submission of documents is likely to be returned.

(2) The drawings which are required to be referred frequently during execution should be submitted on cloth lined paper. The list of such drawings shall be intimated to the Contractor at the time of approval of drawings.

(3) All major drawings should be submitted in Auto Cad.

(4) The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of drawings of all equipment being supplied under this contract, their exploded diagrams with complete instructions for storage, handling, erection, commissioning, testing, operation, trouble shooting, servicing and overhauling procedures.

(5) If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the instruction manuals require any modifications/ additions/changes, the same shall be incorporated and the updated final instruction manuals shall be submitted by the Contractor to the HVPNL.

(6) The Contractor shall furnish to the HVPNL catalogues of spare parts.

5.8 List of drawings other than equipment drawings (detailed in relevant specifications) to be submitted for approval shall be as under:-

1) Earthmat design and layout

2) Switchyard structural layout and section (for reference and record of HVPNL).

3) DSLP Calculation and drawings (for reference and record of HVPNL). 4) Earth Resistivity measurement report (for reference & record of HVPNL). 5) Wiring diagram & cable schedule of each bay. 6) Trench Layout drawing.

6.0 MATERIAL/ WORKMANSHIP

6.1 General Requirement

6.1.1 Where the specification does not contain references to workmanship, equipment, materials and components of the covered equipment, it is essential that the same must be new, of highest grade of the best quality of their kind, conforming to best engineering practice and suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.

Page-14

6.1.2 Incase where the equipment, materials or components are indicated in the specification as “similar” to any special standard, the HVPNL shall decide upon the question of similarity. When required by the specification or when required by the HVPNL the Contractor shall submit, for approval, all the information concerning the materials or components to be used in manufacture. Machinery, equipment, materials and components supplied, installed or used without such approval shall run the risk of subsequent rejection, it being understood that the cost as well as the time delay associated with the rejection shall be borne by the Contractor.

6.1.3 The design of the Works shall be such that installation, future expansions, replacements and general maintenance may be undertaken with a minimum of time and expenses. Each component shall be designed to be consistent with its duty and suitable factors of safety, subject to mutual agreements. All joints and fastenings shall be devised, constructed and documented so that the component parts shall be accurately positioned and restrained to fulfill their required function. In general, screw threads shall be standard metric threads. The use of other thread forms will only be permitted when prior approval has been obtained from the HVPNL.

6.1.4 Whenever possible, all similar part of the Works shall be made to gauge and shall also be made interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall also be interchangeable and shall be made of the same materials and workmanship as the corresponding parts of the Equipment supplied under the Specification. Where feasible, common component units shall be employed in different pieces of equipment in order to minimize spare parts stocking requirements. All equipment of the same type and rating shall be physically and electrically interchangeable.

6.1.5 All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation(s). Only first-class work in accordance with the best modern practices will be accepted. Installation shall be considered as being the erection of equipment at its permanent location. This, unless otherwise specified, shall include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position, grouting, levelling,

Page-15

aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously installed equipment bases/foundations, performing the alignment check and final adjustment prior to initial operation, testing and commissioning in accordance with the manufacturer’s tolerances, instructions and the Specification. All factory assembled rotating machinery shall be checked for alignment and adjustments made as necessary to re- establish the manufacturer’s limits suitable guards shall be provided for the protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or moving machine parts and shall be designed for easy installation and removal for maintenance purposes. The spare equipment(s) shall be installed at designated locations and tested for healthiness.

6.1.6 The Contractor shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit the machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the equipment. Lubricants used for installation purposes shall be drained out and the system flushed through where necessary for applying the lubricant required for operation. The Contractor shall apply all operational lubricants to the equipment installed by him.

6.1.7 All oil, grease and other used in the Works/ Equipment shall be purchased in India unless the Contractor has any special requirement for the specific application of a type of oil or grease not available in India.

6.1.8 A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment which are to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the HVPNL. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive assembly, shall be of design with pads for anchoring the units, shall have a raised up all around and shall have threaded in air connections, if so required.

6.1.9 Corona and radio interference voltage test for equipments shall be in line with the procedure given at Annexure-A.

6.2 Provisions For Exposure to Hot and Humid climate

Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for service and storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, high humidity, heavy rainfall and environment favourable to the growth of fungi and mildew. The indoor equipments located in nonairconditioned areas shall also be of same type.

Page-16

6.2.1 Space Heaters

6.2.1.1 The heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240 V as supply voltage. On-off switch and fuse shall be provided.

6.2.1.2 One or more adequately rated thermostatically connected heaters shall be supplied to prevent condensation in any compartment. The heaters shall be installed in the compartment and electrical connections shall be made sufficiently away from below the heaters to minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent condensation.

6.2.1.3 Suitable anti condensation heaters with the provision of thermostat shall be provided.

6.2.2 FUNGI STATIC VARNISH

Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall be applied on parts which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due to the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any surface of part where the treatment will interfere with the operation or performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be protected against the application of the varnish.

6.2.3 Ventilation opening

Wherever ventilation is provided, the compartments shall have ventilation openings with fine wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust. Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds and suitable provision shall be made so as to avoid any communication of air / dust with any part in the enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels etc.

Page-17

6.2.4 Degree of Protection

The enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels etc. to be installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed here under:

a) Installed out door: IP- 55

b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP-31 c)

Installed in covered area: IP-52

d) Installed indoor in non air conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is limited: IP-41.

e) For LT Switchgear (AC & DC distribution Boards) : IP-52 The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS:13947 (Part-I) / IEC-947 (Part-I) / IS 12063 / IEC 529. Type test report for degree of protection test, on each type of the box shall be submitted for approval.

6.3 RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS

6.3.1 Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to have permanently attached to it in a conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive material upon which is to be engraved HVPNL PO No., manufacturer’s name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number together with details of the loading conditions under which the item of substation in question has been designed to operate, and such diagram plates as may be required by the HVPNL. The rating plate of each equipment shall be according to IEC requirement.

6.3.2 All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates of transformers, reactors, CB, CT, CVT, SA, Isolators, C & R panels and PLCC equipments shall be bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates one with Hindi and the other with English inscriptions may be provided.

6.4 FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLES, OIL AND LUBRICANTS

All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filling compounds, touch up paints, soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit breakers and essential chemicals etc. which will be required to put the equipment covered under the scope of the specifications, into successful Operation, shall be furnished by the Contractor unless specifically excluded under the exclusions in these specifications and documents.

7.0 DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS / COORDINATION

7.1 The bidder shall note that the equipment offered by him in the bid only shall be accepted for supply. However, the HVPNL or the Contractor may propose changes in the specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the HVPNL & contractor agree upon any such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly. Page-18

7.2 If any such agreed upon change is such that it affects the price and schedule of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change in the price and/or schedule of completion before the Contractor proceeds with the change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be deemed to have been amended accordingly.

7.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate equipments to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The basic design requirements are detailed out in this Specification. The design of various components, subassemblies and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.

7.4 The Contractor has to coordinate designs and terminations with the agencies (if any) who are Consultants/Contractor for the HVPNL. The names of agencies shall be intimated to the successful bidders.

7.5 The Contractor will be called upon to attend design co-ordination meetings with the Engineer, other Contractor’s and the Consultants of the HVPNL (if any) during the period of Contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at Panchkula or at mutually agreed venue as and when required and fully cooperate with such persons and agencies involved during those discussions.

8.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

8.1 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this Contract whether manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s Works or at his Sub-contractor’s premises or at the HVPNL’s site or at any other place of Work are in accordance with the specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control such activities at all points necessary. Such programme shall be broadly outlined by the contractor and finalised after discussions before the award of contract. The detailed programme shall be submitted by the contractor after the award of contract and finally accepted by HVPNL after discussion. However, in case detailed valid programme approved by HVPNL for the equipment already exist, same would be followed till its validity. A quality assurance programme of the contractor shall generally cover the following:

(a) His organisation structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality assurance programme :

(b) Documentation control system;

(c) Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel;

(d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and selection of sub-Contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of material purchases etc.

(e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process controls and fabrication and assembly control;

Page-19

(f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions;

(g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.

(h) Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities;

(i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status;

(j) System for quality audits;

(k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Purcahser.

(l) System for maintenance of records;

(m) System for handling storage and delivery; and

(n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of equipment furnished and/or services rendered.

The HVPNL or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the Contractor/his vendor’s quality management and control activities.

8.2 Quality Assurance Documents

The contractor would be required to submit all the Quality Assurance Documents as stipulated in the Quality Plan at the time of HVPNL’s inspection of equipment/material

9.0 TYPE TESTING, INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

9.1 All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests including additional type tests as per technical specification and shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with requirements stipulated under respective sections. HVPNL reserves the right to witness any or all the type tests. The Contractor shall intimate the HVPNL the detailed program about the tests atleast three (3) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies & six (6) weeks in advance in case of foreign supplies.

9.2 The reports for all type tests and additional type tests as per technical specification shall be furnished by the Contractor alongwith equipment / material drawings. The type tests conducted earlier should have either been conducted in accredited laboratory (accredited based on ISO / IEC Guide 25 / 17025 or EN 45001 by the national accredition body of the country where laboratory is located ) or witnessed by the

representative(s) of HVPNL or Utility. The test reports submitted shall be of the tests conducted within last 7 (Seven) years Page-20

prior to the date of bid opening. In case the test reports are of the test conducted earlier than 7 (Seven) years prior to the date of bid opening, the contractor shall repeat these test(s) at no extra cost to the HVPNL.

In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e. any test report not acceptable due to any design / manufacturing changes (including substitution of components) or due to non-compliance with the requirement stipulated in the Technical Specification or any/all additional type tests not carried out, same shall be carried out without any additional cost implication to the HVPNL.

9.3 The HVPNL intends to repeat the type tests and additional type tests on transformers for which test charges shall be payable as per provision of contract. The price of conducting type tests and additional type tests shall be included in Bid price and break up of these shall be given in the relevant schedule of Bid Proposal Sheets. These Type test charges would be considered in bid evaluation. In case Bidder does not indicate charges for any of the type tests or does not mention the name of any test in the price schedules, it will be presumed that the particular test has been offered free of charge. Further, in case any Bidder indicates that he shall not carry out a particular test, his offer shall be considered incomplete and shall be liable to be rejected.

For outdoor receptacles, trefoil clamps, diesel engine, alternator, motors, cable glands and junction boxes, type testing and type test reports as per relevant standard shall be submitted for HVPNL’s approval.

9.4 The HVPNL, his duly authorized representative and/or outside inspection agency acting on behalf of the HVPNL shall have at all reasonable times free access to the Contractor’s/sub-vendors premises or Works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the Works during its manufacture or erection if part of the Works is being manufactured or assembled at other premises or works, the Contractor shall obtain for the Engineer and for his duly authorized representative permission to inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Contractor’s own premises or works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture, despatch or at site at the option of the HVPNL and the equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is liable to be rejected.

Page - 21

9.5 The Contractor shall give the HVPNL /Inspector thirty (30) days written notice of any material being ready for joint testing including contractor and HVPNL. Such tests shall be to the Contractor’s account except for the expenses of the Inspector. The HVPNL /inspector, unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived, will attend such tests within thirty (30) days of the date of which the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection.

9.6 The HVPNL or Inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection as defined herein give notice in writing to the Contractor, of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment and workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall give due consideration to such objections and shall either make the modifications that may be necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to the HVPNL /Inspector giving reasons therein, that no modifications are necessary to comply with the Contract.

9.7 When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or Sub-Contractor’s works, the HVPNL/inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the HVPNL /Inspector, the certificate shall be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractor’s Test certificate by the HVPNL/Inspector. The completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the HVPNL to accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection, be found not to comply with the Contract. The equipment shall be dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and issuance of Despatch Instruction by the HVPNL .

9.8 In all cases where the Contract provides for tests whether at the premises or at the works of the Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the Contractor except where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded by the HVPNL /Inspector or his authorized representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the Contract and shall give facilities to the HVPNL /Inspector or to his authorized representative to accomplish testing. Page - 22

9.9 The inspection by HVPNL and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance programme forming a part of the Contract.

9.10 The HVPNL will have the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractor’s premises or at site or in any other place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that the material comply with the specification.

9.11 The HVPNL reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in respective sections of the technical specification conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site. The testing equipments for these tests shall be provided by the HVPNL.

10. TESTS

10.1 Pre-commissioning Tests

On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the HVPNL and the Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation and acceptability for charging, leading to initial pre-commissioning tests at Site. The list of pre-commissioning tests to be performed and shall be included in the Contractor’s quality assurance programme.

10.2 Commissioning Tests

10.2.1 The testing equipments required for testing and commissioning shall be arranged by the Contractor.

10.2.2 The specific tests requirement on equipment shall be included in quality assurance program.

10.2.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the switchyard. However necessary fee shall be reimbursed by HVPNL on production of requisite documents.

11.0 PACKAGING & PROTECTION

11.1 All the equipments shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the time of erection. On request of the HVPNL, the Contractor shall also submit packing details/associated drawing for any equipment/material under his scope of supply, to facilitate the HVPNL to repack any equipment/material at a later date, in case the need arises. While packing all the materials, the limitation from the point of view of availability of Railway wagon sizes in India should be taken into account. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage Page - 23

during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor. HVPNL takes no responsibility of the availability of the wagons.

11.2 All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discolouration and any other damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a non-metallic protecting device. All ends of all valves and pipings and conduit equipment connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to protect them from damage.

12.0 FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES

12.1 All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection. All ferrous surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification or specifically agreed, shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. High tensile steel nuts & bolts and spring washers shall be electro galvanized to service condition 4. All steel conductors including those used for earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall also be galvanized according to IS: 2629.

12.2 HOT DIP GALVANISING

12.2.1 The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m and minimum thickness of coating shall be 85 microns for all items thicker than 6mm. For items lower than 6mm thickness requirement of coating thickness shall be as per relevant Standard/Specification. For surface which shall be embedded in concrete, the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m minimum.

12.2.2 The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like discoloured patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surface, flaking or peeling off, etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.

12.2.3 After galvanizing. no drilling or welding shall be performed on the galvanized parts of the equipment excepting that nuts may be threaded after galvanizing. Sodium dichromate treatment shall be provided to avoid formation of white rust after hot dip galvanization.

12.2.4 The galvanized steel shall be subjected to six one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS-2633.

Page - 24

12.2.5 Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5 mm shall be able to withstand four immersions of the Standard Preece test. All other coatings shall withstand six immersions. The following galvanizing tests should essentially be performed as per relevant Indian Standards.

- Coating thickness

- Uniformity of zinc

- Adhesion test

- Mass of zinc coating

12.2.6 Galvanized material must be transported properly to ensure that galvanized surfaces are not damaged during transit. Application of zinc rich paint at site shall not be allowed.

12.3 PAINTING

12.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in accordance with the IS-6005 “Code of practice for phosphating iron and sheet”. All surfaces, which will not be easily accessible after shop assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected for the life of the equipment. The surfaces, which are to be finished painted after installation or require corrosion protection until installation, shall be shop painted with at least two coats of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swaf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

12.3.2 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat may be “flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.

12.3.3 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be applied after inspection of first coat of painting.

12.3.4 The exterior colour of the paint shall be as per shade no: 631 (for outdoor) & 631 (for indoor) of IS-5 and inside shall be glossy white for all equipment, marshalling boxes, junction boxes, control cabinets, panels etc. unless specifically mentioned under respective sections of the equipments. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of slightly different shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after installation of the equipments. Page - 25

12.3.5 In case the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and protection procedures or any other established painting procedures, like electrostatic painting etc., the procedure shall be submitted alongwith the Bids for HVPNL’s review & approval.

12.3.6 The colour scheme as given below shall be followed for Fire Protection and Air Conditioning systems

S.No. PIPE LINE Base colour Band colour

Fire Protection System 1 Hydrant and Emulsifier system FIRE RED -

pipeline 2 Emulsifier system detection line FIRE RED Sea Green

- water 3 Emulsifier system detection line FIRE RED Sky Blue

-Air 4 Pylon support pipes FIRE RED Air Conditioning System 5 Refrigerant gas pipeline - at Canary Yellow -

compressor suction 6 Refrigerant gas pipeline - at Canary Yellow Red

compressor discharge 7 Refrigerant liquid pipeline Dark -

Admiralty Green

8 Chilled water pipeline Sea Green - 9 Condenser water pipeline Sea Green Dark Blue

The direction of flow shall be marked by → (arrow) in black colour.

Base Colour Direction of flow Band Colour

13.0 HANDLING, STORING AND INSTALLATION

13.1 In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on manufacturer’s drawings or as directed by the HVPNL or his representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire, test and place into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract. Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of switchyard equipment means completion of all site tests specified and energisation at rated voltage.

Page - 26

13.2 Contractor may engage manufacturer’s Engineers to supervise the unloading, transportation to site, storing, testing and commissioning of the various equipment being procured by them separately. Contractor shall unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per instructions of the manufacturer’s supervisory Engineer(s) and shall extend full cooperation to them.

13.3 In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of manufacturer’s drawings or instructions, necessary clarifications shall be obtained from the HVPNL. Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to the equipment consequent to not following manufacturer’s drawings/instructions correctly.

13.4 Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary adjustments/alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit breakers, isolators and their operating mechanisms. All components shall be protected against damage during unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to negligence or carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

13.5 Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the HVPNL immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the purpose of HVPNL’s information only. The Contractor shall submit to the HVPNL every week a report detailing all the receipts during the weeks. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for any shortages or damages in transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment at Site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.

13.6 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the same is handed over to the HVPNL in an operating condition after commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the equipment/material while in storage as well as after erection until taken over by HVPNL, as well as protection of the same against theft, element of nature, corrosion, damages etc.

13.7 Where material / equipment is unloaded by HVPNL before the Contractor arrives at site or even when he is at site, HVPNL by right can hand over the same to Contractor and there upon it will be the responsibility of Contractor to store the material in an orderly and proper manner. Page - 27

13.8 The Contractor shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities, to store all equipment which require indoor storage.

13.9 The words ‘erection’ and ‘installation’ used in the specification are synonymous.

13.10 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the requirements of electrical and other statutory safety codes.

13.11 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life. If at any stage during the execution of the Contract, it is observed that the erected equipment(s) do not meet the above minimum clearances as given in clause 4.7.1 the Contractor shall immediately proceed to correct the discrepancy at his risks and cost.

13.12 Equipment Bases

A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment which is to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the HVPNL. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive assembly, shall be of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units, shall have a raised lip all around, and shall have threaded drain connections.

14.0 TOOLS AND TACKLES

The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special tools and tackles for the erection, assembly, dis-assembly and maintenance of the equipment. However, these tools and tackles shall be separately, packed and brought on to Site.

15.0 AUXILIARY SUPPLY

15.1 The sub-station auxiliary supply is normally met through a system indicated under section “Electrical & Mechanical Auxiliaries” having the following parameters. The auxiliary power for station supply, including the equipment drive, cooling system of any equipment, air- conditioning, lighting etc shall be designed for the specified Parameters as under. The DC supply for the instrumentation and PLCC system shall also conform the parameters as indicated in the following.

Page - 28

Normal Variation Frequency Phase Neutral Voltage in Voltage in HZ /Wire connection

415V +/- 10% 50 +/- 5% 3/ Solidly 4 Wire Earthed.

240V +/- 10% 50 +/- 5% 1/ Solidly 2 Wire Earthed.

220V 190V to240V DC - Isolated

2 wire

System

48V _ DC _ 2 wire system (+) earthed

Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to +/- 10%.

16.0 SUPPORT STRUCTURE

16.1 HVPNL has standardized the design of support structure and other control dimensions as given in standard structural (design) drawings enclosed with Section-Project. The Bidder shall strictly adhere to these dimensions. The Contractor is required to supply standard structures of various equipment. Bidder may also refer relevant Clauses of Section (Structure) in this regard. All brackets, angels, stool or other members necessary for attaching the operating mechanism to the supporting structure shall be engineered and supplied by the Contractor. The Support structures for all equipments shall be supplied by the Contractor.

16.2 The support structures should be hot dip galvanised with minimum 610 gram/sq.m net of zinc.

16.3 In case of any deviation in this regard the bid is liable to be considered technically non responsive and shall be liable to be rejected.

16.4 Support structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements :

16.4.1 The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of the bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting

Page - 29

insulators to the bottom of the equipment base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 metres.

17.0 CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL CONNECTORS

17.1 All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS:5561 & NEMA CC1 and shall be made of materials listed below :

a) For connecting Aluminum alloy casting, ACSR conductors conforming to designation A6

of IS:617 and all test shall

conform to IS:617

b) For connecting Bimetallic connectors made equipment ter- from aluminum alloy casting, minals made of conforming to designation A6 copper with of IS 617 with 2mm thick ACSR conductors bimetallic liner and all test

shall conform to IS:617

c) For connecting G.I Galvanised mild steel shield wire

d) i) Bolts, nuts & i) Electrogalvanised for sizes Plain, washers below M12, for others hot

dip galvanised.

ii) Spring washers ii) Electro-galvanised mild for items steel suitable for atleast ‘a’ to ‘c’ service condition-3 as per

IS:1573

17.2 Each equipment shall be supplied with the necessary terminals and connectors, as required by the ultimate design for the particular installation. The conductor terminations of equipment shall be either expansion, sliding or rigid type suitable for single/twin Tarantulla Conductor. The requirement regarding external corona and RIV as specified for any equipment shall include its terminal fittings and the equipment shall be factory tested with the connectors in position. If corona rings are required to meet these requirements they shall be considered as part of that equipment and included in the scope of work.

17.3 Where copper to aluminum connections are required, bi-metallic clamps shall be used, which shall be properly designed to ensure that any deterioration of the connection is kept to a minimum and

Page - 30

restricted to parts which are not current carrying or subjected to stress. The design details of the joint shall be furnished to the HVPNL by the Contractor.

17.4 Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for grounding all equipment as specified in each particular case, are also included in the scope of Work.

17.5 No current carrying part of any clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized. Copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness shall be cast integral with aluminum body for Bi-metallic clamps.

17.6 All casting shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.

17.7 Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps made for the terminal clamps for bus posts shall be suitable for both expansion or through (fixed/sliding) type connection of 4" IPS AL. tube as required. In both the cases the clamp height (top of the mounting pad to centre line of the tube) should be same.

17.8 Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the temperature rise shall be equal or less than that of the conductor at the specified ambient temperature. The rated current for which the clamp/connector is designed with respect to the specified reference ambient temperature, shall also be indelibly marked on each component of the clamp/connector, except on the hardware.

17.9 All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact resistance.

17.10 Clamps and connectors shall be designed to be corona controlled. Corona extinction voltage for 220 kV class clamps shall not be less than 156 kV and R.I.V. level shall not be more than 1000 micro volts at the test voltage specified in respective sections.

17.11 Tests

17.11.1 Clamps and connectors should be type tested as per IS:5561 and shall also be subjected to routine tests as per IS:5561. Following type test reports on three samples of similar type shall be submitted for approval as per clause 9.2 above except for sl. no.(ii) & (iii) for which type test once conducted shall be applicable (i.e. the requirement of test conducted within last five years shall not be applicable).

i) Temperature rise test (maximum temperature rise allowed is 35°C over 50°C ambient)

ii) Short time current test Page - 31

iii) Corona (dry) and RIV (dry) test (for 220 KV voltage level clamps)

iv) Resistance test and tensile test

18.0 CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES & MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT

18.1 All types of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be tested in accordance with IS-5039/IS-8623, IEC-439, as applicable, and the clauses given below:

18.2 Control cabinets, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be made of sheet steel or aluminum enclosure and shall be dust, water and vermin proof. Sheet steel used shall be at least 2.0 mm thick cold rolled or 2.5 mm hot rolled. The box shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity during transportation and installation. In case of aluminum enclosed box the thickness of aluminum shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity and long life as comparable with sheet steel of specified thickness.

18.3 Cabinet/boxes shall be free standing floor mounting type, wall mounting type or pedestal mounting type as per requirements. A canopy and sealing arrangements for operating rods shall be provided in marshalling boxes / Control cabinets to prevent ingress of rain water.

18.4 Cabinet/boxes shall be provided with double hinged doors with padlocking arrangements. The distance between two hinges shall be adequate to ensure uniform sealing pressure against atmosphere. The quality of the gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/cracked during the operation of the equipment.

18.5 All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with suitably profiled EPDM gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in accordance with approved quality plan. The quality of gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/cracked during the ten years of operation of the equipment or its major overhaul whichever is earlier. All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth straight and reinforced if necessary to minimize distortion and to make a tight seal. Ventilating Louvers, if provided, shall have screen and filters. The screen shall be fine wire mesh made of brass.

18.6 All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables from bottom by means of weather proof and dust-proof connections. Boxes and cabinets shall be designed with generous clearances to avoid interference between the wiring entering from below and any terminal blocks or accessories mounted within the box or cabinet. Page - 32

Suitable cable gland plate projecting at least 150 mm above the base of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided for this purpose along with the proper blanking plates. Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied and fitted on this gland plate. The gland shall project at least 25mm above gland plate to prevent entry of moisture in cable crutch. Gland plate shall have provision for some future glands to be provided later, if required. The Nickel plated glands shall be dust proof, screw on & double compression type and made of brass. The gland shall have provision for securing armour of the cable separately and shall be provided with earthing tag. The glands shall conform to BS:6121.

18.7 A 240V, single phase, 50 Hz, 15 amp AC plug and socket shall be provided in the cabinet with ON-OFF switch for connection of hand lamps. Plug and socket shall be of industrial grade.

18.8 For illumination of a 20 Watts fluorescent tube or 15 watts CFL shall be provided. The switching of the fittings shall be controlled by the door switch.

18.9 All control switches shall be of rotary switch type and Toggle/piano switches shall not be accepted.

18.10 Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on to the earthing pad and secured by the use of self etching washer. Earthing of hinged door shall be done by using a separate earth wire.

18.11 The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram showing the numbering/connection/feruling by pasting the same on the inside of the door.

18.12 a) The following routine tests alongwith the routine tests as per IS:5039 shall also be conducted:

i) Check for wiring

ii) Visual and dimension check

b) The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, junction box, terminal box shall conform to IP-55 as per IS:13947 including application of, 2.5 KV rms for 1 (one) minute, insulation resistance and functional test after IP-55 test.

19.0 Auxiliary Switches (Applicable for isolators and circuit breakers)

The following type test reports on auxiliary switches shall be submitted for approval:

(a) Electrical endurance test - A minimum of 2000 operation for 2A D. C. with a time constant greater than or equal to 20

Page - 33

millisecond with a subsequent examination of mV drop/visual defects/temperature rise test.

(b) Mechanical endurance test. A minimum of 1,00,000 operations with a subsequent checking of contact pressure test/visual examination.

(c) Heat run test on contacts.

(d) IR/HV test etc.

20.0 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING

20.1 Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other equipment will be brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in conduits. All interphase and external connections to equipment or to control cubicles will be made through terminal blocks.

20.2 Terminal blocks shall be 650 V grade and have continuous rating to carry the maximum expected current on the terminals. These shall be of moulded piece, complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated, insertion type, rail mounted terminals can be used in place of stud type terminals. But preferably the terminal blocks shall be non- disconnecting stud type equivalent to Elmex type CATM4, Phoenix cage clamp type of Wago or equivalent.

20.3 Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. The current transformer secondary leads shall also be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.

20.4 The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable from escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.

20.5 The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver plated however Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall also be acceptable.

20.6 The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design.

20.7 The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the mounting rails.

20.8 The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent, non-deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be provided between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the operator from carrying out the wiring without removing the barriers. Page - 34

20.9 Unless otherwise specified terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the following conductors on each side.

a) All circuits except Minimum of two of 2.5 sq mm CT circuits copper flexible.

b) All CT circuits Minimum of 4 nos. of 2.5 sq mm copper flexible.

20.10 The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely connect or disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is live.

20.11 Atleast 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel/cubicle/box and these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminals rows.

20.12 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the First/bottom row of terminal block and the associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm.

20.13 The Contractor shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the necessary inter phase electrical connections (where applicable) as well as between phases and common terminal boxes or control cabinets.

20.14 All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge withstand capability in accordance with the relevant IEC Publications, in both longitudinal and transverse modes. The Contractor shall also provide all necessary filtering, surge protection, interface relays and any other measures necessary to achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the equipment

21.0 LAMPS AND SOCKETS

21.1 Lamps

All incandescent lamps shall use a socket base as per IS-1258, except in the case of signal lamps.

21.2 Sockets

All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 Amp & 15 Amp pin round Standard Indian plugs. They shall be switched sockets with shutters.

21.3 Hand Lamp: Page - 35

A 240 Volts, single Phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand lamps.

21.4 Switches and Fuses:

21.4.1 Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving, distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control, signalling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with switchfuse units. Selection of the main and Sub-circuit fuse ratings shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuits for relaying and metering shall be protected by HRC fuses.

21.4.2 All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS:9228 mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with thermal protection and alarm contacts will also be accepted. All accessible live connection to fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for indicating blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse rating and voltage.

22.0 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators:

22.1 Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS: 2099 & IEC: 137 while hollow column insulators shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 233/IS 5621. The support insulators shall be manufactured and tested as per IS 2544/IEC 168 and IEC 273. The insulators shall also conform to IEC 815 as applicable.

The bidder may also offer composite silicon insulator, conforming to IEC-1109.

22.2 Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be manufactured from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified tough and impervious to moisture.

22.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs and similar other defects.

22.4 Support insulators/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to have ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions under which they will be used.

22.5 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between the conductors and bushing which would cause corrsion or injury to conductors, insulators or supports by the

Page - 36

formation of substances produced by chemical action. No radio interference shall be caused by the insulators/bushings when operating at the normal rated voltage.

22.6 Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal pressures likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps and the shape and the strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank shall be such that there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled porcelain enclosures and supports other than gaskets, which may in any way be exposed to the atmosphere shall be composed of completely non hygroscopic material such as metal or glazed porcelain.

22.7 All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air tight. Surface of joints shall be trued up porcelain parts by grinding and metal parts by machining. Insulator/bushing design shall be such as to ensure a uniform compressive pressure on the joints.

22.8 Tests

In bushing, hollow column insulators and support insulataors shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS: 2099 & IS: 2544 & IS : 5621. The type test reports shall be submitted for approval.

23.0 MOTORS

Motors shall be “Squirrel Cage” three phase induction motors of sufficient size capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the driven equipment and shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards. The motors shall be of approved make.

23.1 Enclosures

a) Motors to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose proof enclosure equivalent to IP 55 as per IS: 4691. For motors to be installed indoor i.e. inside a box, the motor enclosure, shall be dust proof equivalent to IP 44 as per IS: 4691.

b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.

c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water resulting from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casing.

d) Motors weighing more than 25 Kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other means to facilitate lifting.

23.2 Operational Features Page - 37

a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10) percent above the maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty point and the motor shall not be over loaded at any operating point of driven equipment that will rise in service.

b) Motor shall be capable at giving rated output without reduction in the expected life span when operated continuously in the system having the particulars as given in Clause 15.0 of this Section.

23.3 Starting Requirements:

a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on- line starting. These shall be capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed alongwith the driven equipment without exceeding the acceptable winding temperature even when the supply voltage drops down to 80% of the rated voltage.

b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and heating imposed if it is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.

c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load current for all motors, subject to tolerance as given in IS: 325.

d) Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque under the supply voltage conditions specified under Clause 15.0 shall be capable of withstanding atleast two successive starts from cold condition at room temperature and one start from hot condition without injurious heating of winding. The motors shall also be suitable for three equally spread starts per hour under the above referred supply condition.

e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage shall be more than starting time with the driven equipment of minimum permissible voltage by at least two seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is greater. In case it is not possible to meet the above requirement, the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the motor shaft which shall remain closed for speed lower than 20% and open for speeds above 20% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% of the rated speed in either direction of rotation.

23.4 Running Requirements:

a) The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature of 50 degree C shall be within the limits specified in

Page - 38

IS:325 (for 3 - phase induction motors) after adjustment due to increased ambient temperature specified.

b) The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in IS: 4729. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by the relevant standard for the driven equipment when measured at the motor bearings.

c) All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage for a period of 5 minutes with rated load commencing from hot condition.

23.5 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test based on specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./Instructions of the equipment Contractor or HVPNL without any extra cost to the HVPNL. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of instruments to the HVPNL for approval.

(a) Insulation resistance.

(b) Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation.

(c) Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine the cause and the conditions corrected.

24.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT OF EQUIPMENTS

24.1 Circuit Breakers

a. The manufacturer(s) whose SF6 Circuit Breaker are offered should have designed, manufactured tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard supplied the same for the specified system voltage and which are in satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.

Or

b. The manufacturer(s) whose SF6 Circuit Breaker are offered who have recently established production line in India for the specified system voltage or above class, based on technological support of a parent company or collaborator for the respective equipment(s) can also be considered provided the parent company (Principal) or collaborator meets qualifying requirements stipulated under clause no 24.1.a given above.

And

Furnishes (jointly with parent company or collaborator) a legally enforceable undertaking to guarantee quality, timely supply,

Page - 39

performance and warranty obligations as specified for the equipment(s)

And

Furnishes a confirmation letter from the parent company or collaborator along with the bid stating that parent company or collaborator shall furnish performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of the cost of such equipment(s). This performance guarantee shall be in addition to contract performance guarantee to be submitted by the Bidder

24.2 Isolators

The manufacturer whose isolators are offered, should have designed, manufactured, tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard and supplied the isolator for the specified system voltage and fault level and should be in satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.

24.3 Instrument Transformers

The manufacturer whose instrument transformers are offered, should have designed, manufactured & tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard and supplied the same for the specified system voltage for NCT, CT & CVT, PT and fault level in case of NCT, CT. These equipment should be in satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.

24.4 Surge Arresters

The manufacturer whose Surge Arresters are offered should have designed, manufactured and tested as per IEC/IS or equivalent standard and supplied the Surge Arrester for the specified energy capability with rated system voltage and which are in satisfactory operation for at least 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.

24.5 1.1 kV Grade Power & Control Cables

24.5.1 Applicable for PVC Control Cable

The manufacturers, whose PVC control cables are offered, should have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract at least 100 Kms of 1.1 kV grade PVC insulated control cables as on the date of bid opening . Further the manufacturer should also have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 16C x 2.5 Sq.mm or higher size as on the date of bid opening.

24.5.2 Applicable for PVC Power Cable

The manufacturer, whose PVC Power Cables are offered, should have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract

Page - 40

atleast 100 Kms of 1.1 kV or higher grade PVC insulated power cables as on the date of bid opening . Further the manufacturer should also have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 1C x 150 Sq. mm or higher size as on the date of bid opening.

24.5.3 Applicable for XLPE Power Cables

The Manufacturer, whose XLPE Power cables are offered, should have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract atleast 25 Kms of 1.1 kV or higher grade XLPE insulated power cables as on the date of bid opening . Further the manufacturer should also have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 1C x 630 Sq. mm or higher size as on the date of bid opening.

24.6 LT Switchgear

24.6.1 The Manufacturer whose LT Switchgear are offered, should be a manufacturer of LT Switchboards of the type and rating being offered. He should have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 50 nos. draw out circuit breaker panels, out of which at least 5 nos. should have been with relay and protection schemes with current transformer. He should have also manufactured at least 50 nos. motor control center panels of the type and rating being offered which should be in successful operation as on date of bid opening.

24.6.2 The Switchgear items (such as circuit breakers, fuse switch units, contactors etc.), may be of his own make or shall be procured from reputed manufacturers and of proven design. At least one hundred circuit breakers of the make and type being offered shall be operating satisfactory as on date of bid opening.

24.7 Battery and Battery Charger

24.7.1 Requirements for Battery Manufacturers

The manufacturer whose Batteries are offered should have designed, manufactured and supplied DC Batteries of the type specified and being offered, having a capacity of at least 600 AH and these shall be operating satisfactorily for two years in power sector and/or industrial installations as on date of bid opening.

24.7.2 Requirements for Battery Charger Manufacturers

The manufacturer, whose Battery Chargers are offered, should have designed, manufactured and supplied Battery Chargers generally of the type offered, with static automatic voltage regulators and having a continuous output of atleast ten (10) KW and these should be in successful as on the date of bid opening.

24.8 LT Transformers Page - 41

The manufacturer, whose transformers are offered should have designed, manufactured, type tested including short circuit test as per IEC/IS or equivalent standards and supplied transformers of at least 33 kV class of 800 kVA or higher. The transformer should have been in successful operation for at least 2 years as on the date of bid opening.

24.9 Fire Fighting System

The bidder or his sub-vendor should have designed, supplied, tested, erected and commissioned at least one number fire protection system of the each type described in (i), (ii) and (iii) below in installations such as power plants, substations, refineries, fertilizer plants or other industrial or commercial installations. Such systems must have been designed to the recommendations of Tariff Advisory Committee of India or any other international accredited authority like (FOC, London or NFPA, USA etc.) executed during last ten (10) years and should have been in successful operation for at least 2 years as on the date of bid opening.

(i) Automatic hydrant type fire protection system

(ii) Automatic high velocity or automatic medium velocity water spray type fire protection system

(iii) Smoke detection system.

In case bidder himself do not meet the requirement of design, he can engage a consultant(s) who must have designed i) Automatic hydrant type fire protection system, ii) Automatic high velocity or automatic medium velocity water spray type fire protection system and iii) Smoke detection system, which must be in successful operation for at least two years as on the date of bid opening.

24.10 Control and Relay Panels

24.10.1 The C&R Panels from a manufacturer who has designed, manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned C&R panels which are in satisfactory operation on 220KV system for at least 2 (two) years on the date of bid opening can be offered.

The contractor shall arrange C&R panels along with main relays from the same manufacturer. However, one of the distance protection schemes on each 220 kV feeder C&R panel and busbar protection on bus coupler cum bus bar protection panel can be of other make also. The manufacturer own make relays includes the relays manufactured by their Principals /Associates.

Page - 42

24.11 PLCC

24.11.1 The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered should have designed, manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned PLCC panels for the specified voltage level and the same should be in successful operation for atleast 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.

24.11.2 The manufacturer whose line traps are offered should have designed, manufactured tested, supplied and commissioned similar linetraps for the specified voltage and fault level and should be successful operation for atleast 2 (two) years as on the date of bid opening.

24.11.3 PLCC Panels/line traps manufactured by the the manufacturer meeting the requirements at Clause No. 24.11.1 & 24.11.2 except that the PLCC Panels/line traps manufactured, tested and supplied by them is not in operation for the stipulated period can also be offered provided the manufacturer furnishes an undertaking jointly executed by him and his collaborator, who in turn fully meets the requirement specified at 24.11.1 / 24.11.2 above as per the format enclosed in the bid document for successful performance of the equipment offered.

25 . Operating and maintenance instructions:

These instructions shall give sufficient details to enable the HVPNL to maintain, dismantle, reassemble and adjust all parts of the equipment and shall contain the following information.

• table of content

• list of illustration

• introduction the instruction shall contain:

- General technical characteristics - a brief general description of the equipment and - a definition of the technical terms used in subsequent pharagraphs of the instruction book

Detail description: This shall contain a complete and accurate description of the equipment, its assembly and dismantling, as well as components and accessories. An accurate list stating clearance, tolerances, temperatures, fits, etc. is required.

Page-43

Operating principles: A brief summary of the technical operating basis of the equipment,

including diagrams, circuit diagrams and similar ones. Operating instructions: The instructions shall be accurate and easy to understand and shall contain the sequence of individual manipulations required for operation of the equipment, table lists and graphic presentation, should be used as far as possible for making the description understood more readily. The operating and maintenance instructions shall be written and prepared in English by the Contractor. All labels, instructions on equipment shall be written in English by the Contractor. The following information for secondary equipment (distance relays, bus bar and breaker failure relay, differential relay, pilot wire differential relay, over current relays etc…) shall be given in CD-ROM’s in English

1. Operating manuals

2. Maintenance and setting instructions

3. Electrical circuits

4. Soft ware required for local and remote setting, testing, tele metering and getting information from the relays.

Contractor shall give 5 sets of CD-ROM for secondary and primary equipment.

Testing and adjustment: The entire testing and adjustment procedure for equipment after overhauls and during operation shall be dealt with Maintenance instructions are to be divided in to three parts.

1. Preventive maintenance indicating the inspection required at regular intervals, the inspection procedure, the routine cleaning and lubricating operations, the regular safety check and similar steps.

2. Repair and adjustment, describing the inspections fitting and dismantling of parts, fault tracing as well as repair and adjustment procedure.

3. Spare parts list, containing all the necessary data for ordering spare part. 26. MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORTS For the control of the works by the HVPNL, the Contractor shall prepared detailed monthly

progress reports in following form:

These reports show the progress of material orders and procurement, material shipments, construction and assembly works included in the contract. It will also include but not limited to commencement dates, percentage of completion (with regards to the affected payments vs. Total contract amount excluding escalation and to the physical realisation of works) and expected completion dates.

Progress reports shall show manufacture of goods and construction operations for each

item of work the time work under the contract started to the anticipated completion date, there by indicating the periods during which was previously underway as well as estimated future periods of manufacture and construction operations.

Page-44

Monthly progress reports which are prepared at the end of each calendar month by the

Contractor shall be submitted to the HVPNL in three (3) copies and two (2) of them shall be given to the HVPNL after approval of the regional department not later than seven (7) days after the close of the reporting period.

The HVPNL has the right to withhold an amount not exceeding 1000 US$ or equivalent Rs which are calculated by using selling exchange rates of the Central Bank of India per month from the earnings of the Contractor if proper monthly progress report are not submitted to the HVPNL in due course

MONTHLY PROGRESS REPORT

1 st page Contractor Sub-Contractor Contract No Contractor’s Site Engineering(s) name, telephone and fax number

1. Civil Engineer(s)

2. Electrical Engineer (s)

3. Supervisor(s)

4. Site test engineer(s)

5. Commissioning engineer(s) HVPNL’s Control Engineer(s) name,

Telephone and fax number

1. Civil Engineer:

2. Electrical Engineer Second and the following page

Project Report No: Month from.......to.....

CHAPTER-I General CHAPTER-II a) List of letters submitted by Consortium b) List of letters send by the HVPNL c) Photocopies of minutes of meeting

d) list of project submitted and stage Page-45

(indicate revision)

CHAPTER-III Work activity Delivery of goods (shipped, arrived to port, At customs, arrived to side in good condition not) * Supplied by Contractor a) Local b) Foreign

Civil Works

Erection Site test Overall function test CHAPTER-IV Problem and difficulties confronted with indicating agreements and disagreements CHAPTER V Work program expected to be done next month CHAPTER VI Monetary realization of the project and monthly monetary projection up to completion.

Page - 46

ANNEXURE-A

CORONA AND RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST

1. General

Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated connectors, where applicable, shall be tested for external corona both by observing the voltage level for the extinction of visible corona under falling power frequency voltage and by measurement of radio interference voltage (RIV).

2. Test Levels:

The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV and for corona extinction voltage are listed under the relevant clauses of the specification.

3. Test Methods for RIV:

3.1 RIV tests shall be made according to measuring circuit as per International Special-Committee on Radio Interference (CISPR) Publication 16-1(1993) Part -1. The measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10% of 0.5 Mhz but other frequencies in the range of 0.5 MHz to 2 MHz may be used, the measuring frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolts.

3.2 Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication No. 107-1964, except otherwise noted herein.

3.3 In measurement of, RIV, temporary additional external corona shielding may be provided. In measurements of RIV only standard fittings of identical type supplied with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the actual installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.

3.4 Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to ensure that there is no variation in ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be measured at increasing and decreasing voltages of 85%, 100%, 115% and 130% of the specified RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified. The specified RIV test voltage for 220 kV is listed in the detailed specification together with maximum permissible RIV level in micro volts. Page - 47

3.5 The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or equivalent device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.

3.6 The RIV measurement may be made with a noise meter. A calibration procedure of the frequency to which noise meter shall be tuned shall establish the ratio of voltage at the high voltage terminal to voltage read by noisel meter.

4. Test Methods for Visible Corona

The purpose of this test is to determine the corona extinction voltage of apparatus, connectors etc. The test shall be carried out in the same manner as RIV test described above with the exception that RIV measurements are not required during test and a search technique shall be used near the onset and extinction voltage, when the test voltage is raised and lowered to determine their precise values. The test voltage shall be raised to 130% of RIV test voltage and maintained there for five minutes. In case corona inception does not take place at 130 %, test shall be stopped, otherwise test shall be continued and the voltage will then be decreased slowly until all visible corona disappears. The procedure shall be repeated at least 4 times with corona inception and extinction voltage recorded each time. The corona extinction voltage for purposes of determining compliance with the specification shall be the lowest of the four values at which visible corona (negative or positive polarity) disappears. Photographs with laboratory in complete darkness shall be taken under test conditions, at all voltage steps i.e. 85%, 100%, 115% and 130%. Additional photographs shall be taken at corona inception and extinction voltages. At least two views shall be photographed in each case using Panchromatic film with an ASA daylight rating of 400 with an exposure of two minutes at a lens aperture of f/5.6 or equivalent. The photographic process shall be such that prints are available for inspection and comparison with conditions as determined from direct observation. Photographs shall be taken from above and below the level of connector so as to show corona on bushing, insulators and all parts of energised connectors. The photographs shall be framed such that test object essentially, fills the frame with no cut-off.

4.1 The test shall be recorded on each photograph. Additional photograph shall be taken from each camera position with lights on to show the relative position of test object to facilitate precise corona location from the photographic evidence.

4.2 In addition to photographs of the test object preferably four photographs shall be taken of the complete test assembly showing

Page - 48

relative positions of all the test equipment and test objects. These four photographs shall be taken from four points equally spaced around the test arrangement to show its features from all sides. Drawings of the laboratory and test set up locations shall be provided to indicate camera positions and angles. The precise location of camera shall be approved by HVPNL’s inspector, after determining the best camera locations by trial energisation of test object at a voltage which results in corona.

4.3 The test to determine the visible corona extinction voltage need not be carried out simultaneously with test to determine RIV levels.

4.4 However, both test shall be carried out with the same test set up and as little time duration between tests as possible. No modification on treatment of the sample between tests will be allowed. Simultaneous RIV and visible corona extinction voltage testing may be permitted at the discretion of HVPNL’s inspector if, in his opinion, it will not prejudice other test.

5. Test Records:

In addition to the information previously mentioned and the requirements specified as per CISPR or NEMA 107-1964 the following data shall be included in test report:

a) Background noise before and after test.

b) Detailed procedure of application of test voltage.

c) Measurements of RIV levels expressed in micro volts at each level.

d) Results and observations with regard to location and type of interference sources detected at each step.

e) Test voltage shall be recorded when measured RIV passes through 100 microvolts in each direction.

f) Onset and extinction of visual corona for each of the four tests required shall be recorded.

Page - 49

ANNEXURE - B

LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL STANDARDS AND CODES

Wherever Indian Standards have been mentioned, equivalent IEC or any other

Internationally recognized standard will also be applicable.

India Electricity Rules

Indian Electricity Act

Indian Electricity (Supply) Act

Indian Factories Act

IS-5, -

IS-335, -

IS-617, -

IS-1448 (P1 to P 145) -

IS-2071 (P1 to P3) -

IS-12063 -

IS-2165

P1:1997 -

P2:1983

IS-3043 -

IS-6103 -

IS-6104 -

IS-6262 -

IS-6792 -

IS-5578 -

IS-11353 -

IS-8263 -

Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels.

New Insulating Oils.

Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Ingots and Castings for General Engineering Purposes Methods of Test for Petroleum and its Products.

Methods of High Voltage Testing.

Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures of electrical equipment.

Insulation Coordination.

Code of Practice for Earthing

Method of Test for Specific Resistance (Resistivity) of Electrical Insulating Liquids Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil against Water by the Ring Method

Method of test for Power factor & Dielectric Constant of Electrical Insulating Liquids.

Method for determination of electric strength of insulating oils.

Guide for marking of insulated conductors. Guide for uniform system of marking & identification of conductors & apparatus terminals.

Methods for Radio Interference Test on High voltage Insulators.

Page - 50

IS-9224 (Part 1,2&4) -

IEC-60060 (Part 1 to P4) -

IEC 60068 -

IEC-60117 -

IEC-60156, -

IEC-60270, -

IEC-60376 -

IEC-60437 -

IEC-60507 -

IEC-60694 -

IEC-60815 -

IEC-60865 (P1 & P2) -

ANSI-C.1/NFPA.70 -

ANSI-C37.90A -

ANSI-C63.21, -

C63.3 -

C36.4ANSI-C68.1 -

ANSI-C76.1/EEE21 -

ANSI-SI-4 -

ANSI-Y32-2/C337.2 -

ANSI-Z55.11 -

NEMA-107T -

NEMA-ICS-II -

Low Voltage Fuses

High Voltage Test Techniques

Environmental Test

Graphical Symbols

Method for the Determination of the Electrical Strength of Insulation Oils.

Partial Discharge Measurements.

Specification and Acceptance of New Sulphur Hexafloride

Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators.

Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage Insulators to be used on AC Systems.

Common Specification for High Voltage Switchgear & Controlgear Standards. Guide for the Selection of Insulators in respect of Polluted Conditions.

Short Circuit Current - Calculation of effects.

National Electrical Code

Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests

Specification for Electromagnetic Noise and Field

Strength Instrumentation 10 KHz to 1 GHZ

Techniquest for Dielectric Tests

Standard General Requirements and Test Procedure for Outdoor Apparatus Bushings. Specification for Sound Level Metres Drawing Symbols

Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment No. 61 Light Gray

Methods of Measurements of RIV of High Voltage Apparatus

General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems Part ICSI-109

Page - 51

CISPR-1 -

CSA-Z299.1-1978h -

CSA-Z299.2-1979h -

CSA-Z299.3-1979h -

CSA-Z299.4-1979h -

TRANSFORMERS

IS:10028 (Part 2 & 3) -

IS-2026 (P1 to P4) -

IS-3347 (part 1 to Part 8) -

IS-3639 -

IS-6600 -

IEC-60076 (Part 1 to Part 5) -

IEC-60214 -

IEC- 60354 -

IEC-60076-10 -

ANSI-C571280 -

ANSI-C571290 -

ANSI-C5792 -

Specification for CISPR Radio Interference Measuring Apparatus for the frequency range 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz

Quality Assurance Program Requirements

Quality Control Program Requirements

Quality Verification Program Requirements

Inspection Program Requirements

Code of practice for selection, installation & maintenance of Transformers (P1:1993), (P2:1991), (P3:1991)

Power Transformers

Dimensions for Porcelain transformer Bushings for use in lightly polluted atmospheres. Fittings and Accessories for Power Transformers

Guide for Loading of OIl immersed Transformers.

Power Transformers

On-Load Tap-Changers.

Loading Guide for Oil - Immersed power trans formers

Determination of Transformer Sound Levels

General requirements for Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers

Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation Transformers

Guide for Loading Oil-Immersed Power Transformers upto and including 100 MVA with 55 deg C or 65 deg C Winding Rise

Page - 52

ANSI-CG,1EEE-4 -

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

IEC-62271-100 -

IEC-60427 -

IEC-61264 -

Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing

High Voltage Alternating Current Circuit Breakers

Synthetic Testing of High Voltage alternating current circuit Breakers.

Pressurized Hollow Column Insulators

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

IS-2705- (P1 to P4) -

IS:3156- (P1 to P4) -

IS-4379 -

IEC-60044-1 -

IEC-60044-2 -

IEC-60358 -

IEC-60044-4 -

IEC-60481 -

ANSI-C5713 -

ANSIC92.2 -

ANSI-C93.1 -

BUSHING

IS-2099 -

IEC-60137 -

SURGE ARRESTERS

IS-3070 (PART2) -

IEC-60099-4 -

Current Transformers.

Voltage Transformers.

Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders

Current transformers.

Voltage Transformers.

Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers.

Instrument Transformes : Measurement of Partial Discharges

Coupling Devices for power Line Carrier Systems.

Requirements for Instrument transformers Power Line Coupling voltage Transformers Requirements for Power Line Carrier Coupling Capacitors

Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V

Insulated Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V

Lightning arresters for alternating current systems : Metal oxide lightning arrestors without gaps.

Metal oxide surge arrestors without gaps

Page - 53

IEC-60099-5 - Selection and application recommendation

ANSI-C62.1 - IEE Standards for S A for AC Power Circuits

NEMA-LA 1 - Surge Arresters

CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS

IS-722, IS-1248, IS-3231, 3231 (P-3) -

IS:5039 -

IEC-60068.2.2 -

IEC-60529 -

IEC-60947-4-1 -

IEC-61095 -

IEC-60439 (P1 & 2) -

ANSI-C37.20 -

ANSI-C37.50 -

ANSI-C39 -

ANSI-C83 -

IS: 8623: (Part I to 3) -

NEMA-AB -

NEMA-CS -

NEMA-PB-1 -

NEMA-SG-5 -

NEMA-SG-3 -

NEMA-SG-6 -

NEMA-5E-3 -

1248 (P1 to P9) -

Disconnecting switches

Electrical relays for power system protection

Distributed pillars for Voltages not Exceeding 1000 Volts.

Basic environmental testing procedures Part 2: Test B: Dry heat

Degree of Protection provided by enclosures. Low voltage switchgear and control gear. Electromechanical Contactors for household and similar purposes.

Low Voltage Swtichgear and control gear assemblies

Switchgear Assemblies, including metal enclosed bus.

Test Procedures for Low Voltage Alternating Current Power Circuit Breakers

Electric Measuring instrument

Components for Electric Equipment Specification for Switchgear & Control Assemblies.

Moulded Case Circuit and Systems

Industrial Controls and Systems

Panel Boards

Low voltage Power Circuit breakers

Power Switchgear Assemblies

Power switching Equipment

Motor Control Centers

Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments & their accessories.

Page - 54

IEC-60129 -

IEC-1129 -

IEC-60265 (Part 1 & Part 2) -

ANSI-C37.32 -

ANSI-C37.34 -

NEMA-SG6 -

PLCC and line traps

IS-8792 -

IS-8793 -

IS-8997 -

IS-8998 -

IEC-60353 -

IEC-60481 -

IEC-60495 -

IEC-60683 -

CIGRE -

CIGRE -

CCIR -

CCITT -

EIA -

Protection and control equipment

IEC-60051 : (P1 to P9) -

IEC-60255 (Part 1 to part 23) -

IEC-60297

Alternating Current Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing switches

Alternating Current Earthing Switches Induced Current switching

High Voltage switches

Schedule of preferred Ratings, Manufacturing Specifications and Application Guide for high voltage Air Switches, Bus supports and switch accessories

Test Code for high voltage air switches

Power switching equipment

Line traps for AC power system.

Methods of tests for line traps.

Coupling devices for PLC systems.

Methods of test for coupling devices for PLC systems.

Line traps for A.C. power systems.

Coupling Devices for power line carrier systems.

Single sideboard power line carrier terminals

Planning of (single Side-Band) power line carrier systems.

Teleprotection report by Committee 34 & 35.

Guide on power line carrier 1979.

International Radio Consultative Committee

International Telegraph & Telephone Consultative Committee

Electric Industries Association

Recommendations for Direct Acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments and their accessories.

Electrical relays.

Page - 55

(P1 to P4) -

IEC-60359 -

IEC-60387 -

IEC-60447 -

IEC-60521 -

IEC-60547 -

ANSI-81 -

ANSI-B18 -

ANSI-C37.1 -

ANSI-C37.2 -

ANSI-C37.2 -

ANSI-C39.1 -

MOTORS

IS-325 -

IS-4691 -

IEC-60034 (P1 to P19:) -

IEC-Document 2 -

(Central Office) NEMA-MGI

Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6mm (19 inches) series.

Expression of the performance of electrical & electronic measuring equipment.

Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters.

Man machine interface (MMI) - Actuating principles.

Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour metres

Modular plug-in Unit and standard 19-inch rack mounting unit based on NIM Standard (for electronic nuclear instruments) Screw threads Bolts and Nuts

Relays, Station Controls etc.

Manual and automatic station control, supervisory and associated telemetering equipment

Relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus

Requirements for electrical analog indicating instruments

Three phase induction motors.

Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical machinery.

Rotating electrical machines

Three phase induction motors

Motors and Generators

Electronic equipment and components

MIL-21B, MIL-833 & MIL-2750

IEC-60068 (P1 to P5) Environmental testing

IEC-60326 (P1 to P2) : Printed boards

Material and workmanship standards Page - 56

IS-1363 (P1 to P3) -

IS-1364 (P1 to P5) -

IS-3138 -

ISO-898 -

ASTM -

Clamps & connectors

IS-5561 -

NEMA-CC1 -

NEMA-CC 3 -

Bus hardware and insulators

IS: 2121 -

IS-731 -

IS-2486 (P1 to P4) -

IEC-60120 -

IEC-60137 -

IEC-60168 -

IEC-60233 -

IEC-60273 -

IEC-60305 -

Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of product grade C.

Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of products grades A and B.

Hexagonal Bolts and Nuts (M42 to M150)

Fasteners: Bolts, screws and studs

Specification and tests for materials

Electric power connectors.

Electric Power connectors for sub station

Connectors for Use between aluminium or aluminum- Copper Overhead Conductors

Fittings for Aluminum and steel cored Al conductors for overhead power lines. Porcelain insulators for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.

Insulator fittings for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V. Dimensions of Ball and Socket Couplings of string insulator units.

Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V.

Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for Systems with Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000 V.

Tests on Hollow Insulators for use in electrical equipment.

Characteristices of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000V.

Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000V-ceramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems Characteristics of String Insulator Units of the cap and pintype.

Page - 57

IEC-60372 (1984) -

IEC-60383 (P1 and P2) -

IEC-60433 -

IEC-60471 -

ANSI-C29 -

ANSI-C29.1 -

ANSI-C92.2 -

ANSI-C29.8 -

ANSI-G.8 -

CISPR-7B -

ASTM A-153 -

Strain and rigid bus-conductor

IS-2678 -

IS-5082 -

ASTM-B 230-82 -

ASTM-B 231-81 -

ASTM-B 221 -

ASTM-B 236-83 -

Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator units : dimensions and tests.

Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V.

Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type.

Dimensions of Clevis and tongue couplings of string insulator units.

Wet process porcelain insulators

Test methods for electrical power insulators For insulators, wet-process porcelain and toughened glass suspension type

For wet-process porcelain insulators apparatus, post-type

Iron and steel hardware

Recommendations of the CISPR, tolerances of form and of Position, Part 1

Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel hardware

Dimensions & tolerances for Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys drawn round tube.

Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bars. Rods, Tubes and Sections for Electrical purposes.

Aluminum 1350 H19 Wire for electrical purposes

Concentric - lay - stranded, aluminum 1350 conductors

Aluminum - Alloy extruded bar, road, wire, shape

Aluminum bars for electrical purpose (Bus- bars)

Page - 58

ASTM-B 317-83 -

Batteries and batteries charger

Battery

IS:1651 -

IS:1652 -

IS:1146 -

IS:6071 -

IS:266 -

IS:1069 -

IS:3116 -

IS:1248 -

Battery Charger

IS:3895 -

IS:4540 -

IS:6619 -

IS:2026 -

IS:2959 -

IS:1248 -

IS:2208 -

IS:13947 (Part-3) -

IS:2147 -

IS:6005 -

Aluminum-Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and structural shapes for electrical purposes (Bus Conductors)

Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Tubular Positive Plates)

Stationary Cells and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Plante Positive Plates)

Rubber and Plastic Containers for Lead-Acid Storage Batteries

Synthetic Separators for Lead-Acid Batteries

Specification for Sulphuric Acid

Specification for Water for Storage Batteries Specification for Sealing Compound for Lead- Acid Batteries

Indicating Instruments

Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells and Stacks

Mono-crystalline Semiconductor Rectifier Assemblies and Equipment.

Safety Code for Semiconductor Rectifier Equipment

Power Transformers

AC Contactors for Voltages not Exceeding 1000 Volts

Indicating Instruments

HRC Fuses

Air break switches, air break disconnectors & fuse combination units for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1200V DC

Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and controlgear. Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and Steel

Page - 59

IS:3231 -

IS:3842 -

IS:5 -

IEEE-484 -

IEEE-485 -

Wires and cables

ASTMD-2863 -

IS-694 -

IS-1255 -

IS-1554 (P1 and P2) -

-

IS:1753 -

IS:2982 -

IS-3961 (P1 to P5) -

IS-3975 -

IS-5831 -

IS-6380 -

IS-7098 -

IS-7098 -

Electrical relays for power system protection

Electrical relay for AC Systems

Colours for ready mix paint

Recommended Design for installation design and installation of large lead storage batteries for generating stations and substations.

Sizing large lead storage batteries for generating stations and substations

Measuring the minimum oxygen concentration to support candle like combustion of plastics (oxygen index)

PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including 1100 Volts.

Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables, upto and including 33 kV rating

PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (part 1) for working voltage upto and including 1100 V.

Part (2) for working voltage from 3.3 kV upto and including 11kV.

Aluminium conductor for insulated cables

Copper Conductor in insulated cables.

Recommended current ratings for cables.

Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for

armouring of cables.

PVC insulating and sheath of electric cables. Elastometric insulating and sheath of electric cables.

Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for working voltage upto and including 1100 volts.

Cross-linked polyethyle insulated PVC sheathed cables for working voltage from 3.3kV upto and including 33 kV.

Page - 60

IS-8130 -

IS-1753 -

IS-10418 -

IEC-60096 (part 0 to p4) -

IEC-60183 -

IEC-60189 (P1 to P7) -

IEC-60227 (P1 to P7) -

IEC-60228 -

IEC-60230 -

IEC-60287 (P1 to P3) -

IEC-60304 -

IEC-60331 -

IEC-60332 (P1 to P3) -

IEC-60502 -

IEC-754 (P1 and P2) -

AIR conditioning and ventilation

IS-659 -

IS-660 -

ARI:520 -

IS:4503 -

ASHRAE-24 -

ANSI-B-31.5 -

IS:2062 -

IS:655 -

IS:277 -

Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords.

Aluminum Conductors for insulated cables.

Specification for drums for electric cables.

Radio Frequency cables.

Guide to the Selection of High Voltage Cables. Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC sheath.

Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including 450/750V. Conductors of insulated cables

Impulse tests on cables and their accessories. Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load factor).

Standard colours for insulation for low- frequency cables and wires.

Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables. Tests on electric cables under fire conditions. Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV upto to 30 kV

Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables.

Safety code for air conditioning

Safety code for Mechanical Refrigeration

Standard for Positive Displacement RefrigerationCompressor and Condensing Units

Shell and tube type heat exchanger

Method of testing for rating of liquid coolers

Refrigeration Piping

Steel for general structural purposes

Specification for Metal Air Dust

Specification for Galvanised Steel Sheets

Page - 61

IS-737 -

IS-1079 -

IS-3588 -

IS-2312 -

BS-848 -

BS-6540 Part-I -

BS-3928 -

US-PED-2098 -

MIL-STD-282 -

ASHRAE-52 -

IS:3069 -

IS:4671 -

IS:8183 -

IS:3346 -

ASTM-C-591-69 -

IS:4894 -

BS:848 -

IS:325 -

IS:4722 -

IS:1231 -

IS:2233 -

IS:2254 -

Specification for Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium Sheet & Strip

Hot rolled cast steel sheet & strip

Specification for Electrical Axial Flow Fans

Propeller Type AC VentilationFans

Methods of Performance Test for Fans

Air Filters used in Air Conditioning and General

Ventilation

Sodium Flame Test for Air Filters (Other than for Air Supply to I.C. Engines and Compressors)

Method of cold DOP & hot DOP test

DOP smoke penetration method

Air cleaning device used in general ventilation for removing particle matter

Glossary of Terms, Symbols and Units Relating to Thermal Insulation Materials.

Expanded Polystyrene for Thermal Insulation Purposes

Bonded Mineral Wool

Evaluation of Thermal Conductivity properties by means of guarded hot plate method Standard specification for rigid preformed cellular urethane thermal insulation Centrifugal Fans

Method of Performance Test for Centrifugal Fans

Induction motors, three-phase

Rotating electrical machines

Three phase foot mounted Induction motors, dimensions of

Designations of types of construction and mounting arrangements of rotating electrical machines

Vertical shaft motors for pumps, dimensions of

Page - 62

IS:7816 -

IS:4029 -

IS:4729 -

IS:4691 -

IS:7572 -

IS:2148 -

BS:4999 -

(Part-51)

Galvanizing

IS-209 -

IS-2629 -

IS-2633 -

ASTM-A-123 -

ASTM-A-121-77 -

Painting

IS-6005 -

ANSI-Z551 -

SSPEC -

Fire protection system

Guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines

Guide for testing three phase induction motors Rotating electrical machines, vibration of, Measurement and evaluation of

Degree of protection provided by enclosures for rotating electrical machinery

Guide for testing single-phase a.c. motors

Flame proof enclosure for electrical apparatus

Noise levels

Zinc Ingot

Recommended Practice for Hot-Dip galvanizing on iron and steel.

Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles.

Specification for zinc (Hot Galvanizing) Coatings, on products Fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips.

Zinc-coated (Galvanized) steel barbed wire

Code of practice for phosphating of iron and steel.

Gray finishes for industrial apparatus and equipment

Steel structure painting council

Fire protection manual issued by tariff advisory committee (TAC) of India

HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

IS:1520 - Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear, cold and fresh water

IS:9137 - Code for acceptance test for centrifugal & axial pumps

Page - 63

IS:5120 -

API-610 -

-

BS:599 -

PTC-8.2 -

DIESEL ENGINES

IS:10000 -

IS:10002 -

BS:5514 -

ISO:3046 -

IS:554 -

ASME Power Test Code -

-

PIPING VALVES & SPECIALITIES

IS:636 -

IS:638 -

IS:778 -

IS:780 -

IS:901 -

IS:902 -

Technical requirement - Rotodynamic special purpose pumps

Centrifugal pumps for general services

Hydraulic Institutes Standards

Methods of testing pumps

Power Test Codes - Centrifugal pumps

Methods of tests for internal combustion engines

Specification for performance requirements for constant speed compression ignition engines for general purposes (above 20 kW) The performance of reciprocating compression ignition (Diesel) engines, utilising liquid fuel only, for general purposes

Reciprocating internal combustion engines performance

Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are required on threads Internal combustion engine PTC-17 Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturer’s Association, USA

Non percolating flexible fire fighting delivery hose

Sheet rubber jointing and rubber inserting jointing

Gun metal gate, globe and check valves for general purpose

Sluice valves for water works purposes (50 to 300 mm)

Couplings, double male and double female instantaneous pattern for fire fighting Suction hose couplings for fire fighting purposes

Page - 64

IS:903 - Fire hose delivery couplings branch pipe nozzles and nozzle spanner

IS:1538 - Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage

IS:1903 - Ball valve (horizontal plunger type) including floats for water supply purposes

IS:2062 - SP for weldable structural steel

IS:2379 - Colour Code for the identification of pipelines

IS:2643 - Dimensions of pipe threads for fastening purposes

IS:2685 - Code of Practice for selection, installation and maintenance of sluice valves

IS:2906 - Sluice valves for water-works purposes (350 to 1200 mm size)

IS:3582 - Basket strainers for fire fighting purposes (cylindrical type)

IS:3589 - Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage (150 to 2000 mm nominal diameter)

IS:4038 - Foot valves for water works purposes

IS:4927 - Unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting

IS:5290 - Landing valves (internal hydrant)

IS:5312 - Swing check type reflex (non-return) valves

(Part-I)

IS:5306 - Code of practice for fire extinguishing installations and equipment on premises

Part-I - Hydrant systems, hose reels and foam inlets

Part-II - Sprinkler systems

BS:5150 - Specification for cast iron gate valves

MOTORS & ANNUNCIATION PANELS

IS:325 -

IS:900 -

IS:996 -

Three phase induction motors

Code of practice for installation and maintenance of induction motors

Single phase small AC and universal electric motors

Page - 65

IS:1231 -

IS:2148 -

IS:2223 -

IS:2253 -

IS:2254 -

IS:3202 -

IS:4029 -

IS:4691 -

IS:4722 -

IS:4729 -

IS:5572 -

IS:6362 -

IS:6381 -

IS:7816 -

IS:4064 -

IEC DOCUMENT 2 -

(Control Office) 432

VDE 0530 Part I/66 -

IS:9224 -

(Part-II)

IS:6875 -

IS:694 -

IS:1248 -

Dimensions of three phase foot mounted induction motors

Flame proof enclosure of electrical apparatus Dimensions of flange mounted AC induction motors

Designations for types of construction and mounting arrangements of rotating electrical machines

Dimensions of vertical shaft motors for pumps Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment

Guide for testing three phase induction motors Degree of protection provided by enclosure for rotating electrical machinery

Rotating electrical machines

Measurement and evaluation of vibration of rotating electrical machines

Classification of hazardous areas for electrical (Part-I) installations (Areas having gases and vapours)

Designation of methods of cooling for rotating electrical machines

Construction and testing of electrical apparatus with type of protection ‘e’

Guide for testing insulation for rotating machine

Air break switches

Three Phase Induction Motor

Three Phase Induction Motor

HRC Fuses

Push Button and Control Switches

PVC Insulated cables

Indicating instruments

Page - 66

IS:375 - Auxiliary wiring & busbar markings

IS:2147 - Degree of protection

IS:5 - Colour Relay and timers

IS:2959 - Contactors

PG Test Procedures

NFPA-13 - Standard for the installation of sprinkler system

NFPA-15 - Standard for water spray fixed system for the fire protection

NFPA-12A - Standard for Halong 1301 Fire Extinguishing System

NFPA-72E - Standard on Antomatic Fire Detectors

Fire Protection Manual by TAC (Latest Edition)

NFPA-12 - Standard on Carbon dioxide extinguisher systems

IS:3034 - Fire of industrial building:

Electrical generating and distributing stations code of practice

IS:2878 -

IS:2171 -

IS:940 -

D.G. SET

IS:10002 -

IS:10000 -

IS:4722 -

IS:12063 -

IS:12065 -

-

Steel structures

IS-228 (1992) -

CO2 (Carbon dioxide) Type Extinguisher

DC (Dry Chemical Powder) type

Pressurised Water Type

Specification for performance requirements for constant speed compression ignition (diesel engine) for general purposes Method of tests for internal combustion engines Rotating electrical machines-specification Degree of protection provided by enclosures Permissible limit of noise levels for rotating electrical machines.

Indian Explosive Act 1932

Method of Chemical Analysis of pig iron, cast iron and plain carbon and low alloy steels.

Page - 67

IS-802 (P1 to 3:) -

IS-806 -

IS-808 -

IS-814 -

IS-816 -

IS-817 -

IS-875 (P1 to P4) -

IS-1161 -

IS-1182 -

IS-1363 (P1 to P3) -

IS-1364 -

IS-1367 (P1 to P18) -

IS-1599 -

IS-1608 -

IS-1893 -

IS-1978 -

IS-2062 -

IS-2595 -

IS-3063 -

IS-3664 -

Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead transmission line towers.

Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building construction

Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column channel and angle sections.

Covered electrodes for manual arc welding of carbon of carbon manganese steel. Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in Mild steel

Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders. Part 1 : Manual Metal arc welding.

Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures. Steel tubes for structural purposes. Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel plates.

Hexagonal head bolts, screws & nuts of products grade C.

Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B.

Technical supply condition for threaded steel fasteners.

Methods for bend test.

Method for tensile testing of steel products. Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.

Line Pipe.

Steel for general structural purposes. Code of practice for Radiographic testing. Single coil rectagular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and screws.

Code of practice for ultrasonic pulse echo testing by contact and immersion methods.

Page - 68

IS-7205 -

IS-9595 -

ANSI-B18.2.1 -

ANSI-B18.2.2 -

ANSI-G8.14 -

ASTM-A6 -

ASTM-A36 -

ASTM-A47 -

ASTM-A143 -

ASTM-A242 -

ASTM-A283 -

ASTM-A394 -

ASTM-441 -

ASTM-A572 -

AWS D1-0 -

AWS D1-1 -

AISC -

NEMA-CG1 -

Piping and pressure vessels

IS-1239 (Part 1 and 2) -

Safety code for erection of structural steel work.

Recommendations for metal arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels. Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and screws

Square and hexagonal nuts

Round head bolts

Specification for General Requirements for rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet piling and bars of structural use

Specifications of structural steel

Specification for malleable iron castings Practice for safeguarding against embilement of Hot Galvanized structural steel products and procedure for detaching embrilement Specification for high strength low alloy structural steel

Specification for low and intermediate tensile strength carbon steel plates of structural quality

Specification for Galvanized steel transmission tower bolts and nuts

Specification for High strength low alloy structural manganese vanadium steel. Specification for High strength low alloy colombium- Vanadium steel of structural quality

Code for welding in building construction welding inspection

Structural welding code

American institute of steel construction

Manufactured graphite electrodes

Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings

Page - 69

IS-3589 -

IS-6392 -

ASME -

ASTM-A120 -

ASTM-A53 -

ASTM-A106 -

ASTM-A284 -

ASTM-A234 -

ASTM-S181 -

ASTM-A105 -

ASTM-A307 -

ASTM-A193 -

ASTM-A345 -

ASTM-A197 -

ANSI-B2.1 -

ANSI-B16.1 -

ANSI-B16.1 -

ANSI-B16.5 -

ANSI-B16.9 -

ANSI-B16.11 -

Seamless Electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage.

Steel pipe flanges

Boiler and pressure vessel code

Specification for pipe steel, black and hot dipped, zinc-coated (Galvanized) welded and seamless steel pipe for ordinary use

Specification for pipe, steel, black, and hot- dipped, zinc coated welded and seamless Seamless carbon steel pipe for high temperature service

Low and intermediate tensile strength carbon- silicon steel plates for machine parts and general construction.

Pipe fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy steel for moderate and elevated temperatures Specification for forgings, carbon steel for general purpose piping

Forgings, carbon steel for piping components Carbon steel externally threated standard fasteners

Alloy steel and stainless steel bolting materials for high temperature service

Flat rolled electrical steel for magnetic applications

Cupola malleable iron

Pipe threads (Except dry seal)

Cast iron pipe flangesand glanged fitting. Class 25, 125, 250 and 800

Malleable iron threaded fittings, class 150 and 300

Pipe flanges and flanged fittings, steel nickel alloy and other special alloys

Factory-made wrought steel butt welding fittings

Forged steel fittings, socket-welding and threaded

Page - 70

ANSI-B16.14 -

ANSI-B16.25 -

ANSI-B18.1.1 -

ANSI-B18.2.1 -

ANSI-B18.2.2 -

NSI-B18.21.1 -

ANSI-B18.21.2 -

ANSI-B31.1 -

ANSI-B36.10 -

ANSI-B36.9 -

Other civil works standards

IS-269 -

IS2721 -

IS-278 -

IS-383 -

IS-432 (P1 and P2) -

IS-456 -

IS-516 -

IS-800 -

IS-806 -

IS-1172 -

IS-1199 -

IS-1566 -

IS-1742 -

IS-1785 -

Ferrous pipe plug, bushings and locknuts with piple threads

Butt welding ends

Fire hose couplings screw thread.

Inch series square and hexagonal bolts and screws

Square and hexagonal nuts

Lock washers

Plain washers

Power piping

Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe

Stainless steel pipe

43 grade ordinary port-land cement.

Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric

Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing.

Coarse and fine aggregates from natural

sources for concrete.

Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-dawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.

Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.

Method of test for strength of concrete. Code of practice for general construction in steel.

Steel tubes for structural purposes.

Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation.

Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete. Hard-dawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement.

Code of Practice for Building drainage. Plain hard-drawn steel wire for pre stressed concrete.

Page - 71

IS-1786 - High strength deformed Steel Bars and wires for concrete reinforcement.

IS-1811 - Methods of sampling Foundry sands.

IS-1893 - Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.

IS-2062 - Steel for general structural purposes.

IS-2064 - Selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary appliances-code of practices.

IS-2065 - Code of practice for water supply in buildings.

IS-2090 - High tension steel bars used in prestressed concrete.

IS-2140 - Standard Galvanized steel wire for fencing.

IS-2470 (P1 & P2) - Code of practice for installation of septic tanks.

IS-2514 - Concrete vibrating tables.

IS-2645 - Integral cement waterproofing compounds.

IS-3025 (Part 1 to

Part 48) - Methods of sampling and test (Physical and chemical) for water and waste water.

IS-4091 - Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for transmission line towers and poles.

IS-4111

(Part 1 to P5) - Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewerage system.

IS-4990 - Plywood for concrete shuttering work.

IS-5600 - Sewage and drainage pumps.

National buiding code of India 1970

USBR E12 -

ASTM-A392-81 -

ASTM-D1557-80 -

ASTM-D1586 -

Earth Manual by United States Department of the interior Bureau of Reclamation Zinc/Coated steel chain link fence fabric test for moisture-density relation of soils using 10-lb (4.5 kg) rame land 18-in. (457 mm) Drop.

Penetration Test and Split-Barrel

Page - 72

(1967)

ASTM-D2049-69 -

ASTM-D2435 -

-

BS-5075 -

CPWD -

ACSR MOOSE/AAC TARANTULLA CONDUCTOR

IS:6745

IS:8263

IS:209

IS:398

Part – V

IS: 5484

IS:1778

IS:1521

IS:2629

IS:2633

IS:4826 IS:1841

GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE

- Sampling of Soils

Test Method for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils

Test method for Unconsolidated, (1982) Undrained Strengths of Cohesive Soils in Triaxial Compression.

Specification for accelerating Part I Admixtures, Retarding Admixtures and Water Reducing Admixtures.

Latest CPWD specifications

Methods for Determination of BS:443-1969 Mass of zinc coating on zinc coated Iron and Steel Articles

Methods for Radio Interference IEC:437- 1973 Test on High Voltage Insulators NEMA:107-1964 CISPR

Zinc Ingot BS:3436-1961

Aluminum Conductors for IEC:209-1966

Overhead Transmission Purposes

EC grade Aluminium rod produced by continuous casting rod

and rolling.

Reels and Drums forBS:1559-1949 Bare Conductors

Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R89- 1959 of steel wire

Recommended practice for Hot dip Galvanising on Iron and Steel.

Method for Testing Uniformity

of coating of zinc Coated Articles.

Hot dip galvanised coatings on round steel wires ASTMA-472-729 EC grade Aluminium rod produced by rolling.

Page - 73

IS:1521

IS:1778

IS:2629

IS:2633

IS:4826

IS:6745

IS:209

IS:398 (Pt. I to

P5:1992)

Lighting Fixtures and Accessories

(i) IS:1913

(ii) IS:3528

(iii) IS:4012

(iv) IS:4013

(v) IS:10322

(vi) IS:10322

(vii) IS:2206

(viii) IS:10322

(ix) IS:10322

(x) IS:10322

(xi) IS:2418

(xii) IS:9900

(xiii) IS:1258

Method for Tensile Testing ISO/R:89-1959 of Steel Wire

Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors Recommended practice forHot Dip Galvanising on Ironand Steel.

Methods for testing Uniformityof Coating of Zinc Coated Articles.

Hot dip Galvanised Coatings ASTM:A 475- 72a on Round Steel Wires BS:443-1969

Method for Determination BS:443-1969of mass of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated Iron and Steel Articles.

Zinc ingot BS:3463-1961

Aluminum Conductors for BS:215 (Part-II)

overhead transmission purposes.

General and safety requirements for electric lighting fittings.

Water proof electric lighting fittings.

Dust proof electric lighting fittings.

Dust tight proof electric lighting fittings.

Industrial lighting fittings with metal reflectors.

Industrial lighting fittings with plastic reflectors.

Well glass lighting fittings for use under ground in mines (non-flameproof type). Specification for flood light.

Specification for decorative lighting outfits.

Lumanaries for street lighting

Tubular flourescent lamps

High pressure mercury vapour lamps. Specification for Bayonet lamp flourescent lamp.

Page - 74

(xiv) IS:3323 Bi-pin lamp holder tubular flourescent lamps.

(xv) IS:1534 Ballasts for use in flourescent lighting fittings. (Part-I)

(xvi) IS:1569 Capacitors for use in flourescent lighting fittings.

(xvii)IS:2215 Starters for flourescent lamps.

(xviii)IS:3324 Holders for starters for tubular flourescent lamps

(xix) IS:418 GLS lamps

(xx) IS:3553 Water tight electric fittings

(xxi) IS:2713 Tubular steel poles

(xxii)IS:280 MS wire for general engg. purposes

Conduits, Accessories and Junction Boxes

(1) IS:9537 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring

(2) IS:3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring

(3) IS:2667 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring

(4) IS:3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring

(5) IS:4649 Adaptors for flexible steel conduits.

(6) IS:5133 Steel and Cast Iron Boxes

(7) IS:2629 Hot dip galvanising of Iron & Steel.

Lighting Panels

(1) IS:13947 LV Switchgear and Control gear(Part 1 to 5)

(2) IS:8828 Circuit breakers for over current protection for house hold and similar installations.

(3) IS:5 Ready mix paints

(4) IS:2551 Danger notice plates

(5) IS:2705 Current transformers

(6) IS:9224 HRC Cartridge fuse links for voltage above 650V(Part-2)

(7)IS:5082 Wrought aluminium and Al. alloys, bars, rods, tubes and sections for electrical purposes.

(8)IS:8623 Factory built Assemblies of Switchgear and Control Gear for voltages upto and including 1000V AC and 1200V DC.

(9)IS:1248 Direct Acting electrical indicating instruments Page - 75

Electrical Installation

(1) IS:1293

(2) IS:371

(3) IS:3854

(4) IS:5216

(5) IS:732

(6) IS:3043

(7) IS:3646

(8) IS:1944

(9) IS:5571

(10) IS:800

(11) IS:2633

(12) IS:6005

(13)

(14)

LT SWITCHGEAR

IS:8623 (Part-I)

IS:13947 (Part-I)

IS:13947 (part-2)

IS:13947 (part-3)

IS:13947 (part-4)

3 pin plug

Two to three ceiling roses

Switches for domestic and similar purposes Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work.

Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (system voltage not exceeding 650 Volts.) Code of practice for earthing.

Code of practice of interior illumination part II & III. Code of practice for lighting of public through fares. Guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building construction.

Methods of Testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated articles.

Code of practice for phosphating iron and steel.

INDIAN ELECTRICITY ACT

INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES

Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies

Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 1 General Rules

Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear, Part 2 circuit breakers.

Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 3 Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-disconnectors and fuse combination units

Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 4 Contactors and motors starters.

Page - 76

IS:13947 (part-5) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 5 Control-circuit devices and switching elements

IS:13947 (part-6) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 6 Multiple function switching devices.

IS:13947 (part-7) Specification for low voltage switchgear and control gear. Part 7 Ancillary equipments

IS:12063 Degree of protection provided by enclosures

IS:2705 Current Transformers

IS:3156 Voltage Transformers

IS:3231 Electrical relays for power system protection

IS:1248 Electrical indicating instruments

IS:722 AC Electricity meters

IS:5578 Guide for Marking of insulated conductors of apparatus terminals

IS:13703 (part 1) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V DC Part 1 General Requirements

IS:13703 (part 2) Low voltage fuses for voltage not exceeding 1000V AC or 1500V DC Part 2 Fuses for use of authorized persons

IS:6005 Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel

IS:5082 Wrought Aluminum and Aluminum alloys for electrical purposes

IS:2633 Hot dip galvanizing

Page - 77

SPECIFICATION FOR SF6 GAS INSULATED 72.5 kV SWITCHGEAR

Section 1 - General page 2

Section 2 - Particular requirements for SF6 Metalclad Equipment page 3

Section 3 - Particular Requirements for Primary Electrical Equipment page 9

Section 4 - Particular Requirements for Secondary Equipment page 19

Section 5 - Inspection and Maintenance page 23

Section 6 - Switch House Building page 22

Annexure A Principal Parameters for CTs Page 23

Annexure B(i) Corewise Detail for 66kV T/F CT Page 24

Annexure B(ii) Corewise Detail for 66kV Line/Bus Coupler CT Page 24

Annexure C Principal Parameters for PTs Page 25

Annexure D(i) Corewise Detail for 66kV PT Page 26

⎯ 2 ⎯

Section-2A

Section 1 - General

1.1 Introduction

This specification provides for the supply and installation of SF6 gas insulated switchgear

(SF6 GIS), at one or more of the substations in high voltage transmission and

subtransmission networks operating at 72.5kV.

1.2 Extent of Main Contract Works

The contract works shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of this

specification and shall include the design, manufacture, supply, testing at works, transport

to site, erection and testing, commissioning of SF6 GIS and associated equipment,

construction of the switch house, control room and complementary buildings and civil works

as detailed in the specification.

Where specified the H.V. bushings, bus ducts, cable end units, overhead line terminations

and cables shall be included in the tender and form part of the contract works.

1.3 Standards and Ratings

All electrical switchgear and associated equipment shall conform to the relevant IEC

standards and publications of latest issue, first of all IEC 60694 and IEC 60517. The

bidder’s attention is drawn to the climatic conditions as stipulated in the relevant contract

clauses.

In particular the switchgear current rating as specified in the schedules corresponds to an

ambient day time mean temperature between - 5 °C and + 50 °C.

The switchgear shall be designed for a maximum operating voltage of 72.5kV and a rated

impulse withstand voltage of 325kV according to IEC. The design fault rating shall not be

less than 31.5 kA. The switchgear is to be installed in a city subtransmission network with

predominantly underground cable interconnection. Circuit breakers shall therefore be

capable of interrupting line and cable charging currents of the magnitude indicated in the

data schedules.

The SF6 GIS shall be located in a permanent building which will be ventilated and

maintained reasonably dust free.

⎯ 3 ⎯

Section 2 - Particular Requirements for SF6 Metalclad Equipment

2.1 Design Concept of SF6 GIS

It is understood that each manufacturer has his own particular SF6 GIS design concept and

it is not the purpose of the specification to impose unreasonable restrictions. However, in

the interest of safety, reliability and easy service, the switchgear offered shall meet the

following minimum requirements:

(a) The switching station shall be of modular design and capable of extension in the

future by the addition of extra feeders, bus couplers, busbars, circuit breakers,

disconnectors, and other switchgear components without necessarily dismantling any

major parts of the equipment.

(b) Where a double busbar system is specified it shall be possible to extend the

switchgear by adding further feeders with at least one of the busbar systems and the

existing feeders remaining in service continuously. The tenderer is required to

demonstrate clearly in his submitted documents the suitability of the switchgear

design in these respects.

(c) Where a double busbar system is specified: In case of any internal arc fault in a

busbar, busbar disconnector or circuit breaker, repair works must be possible without

shutting down the complete substation and at least one busbar and the undisturbed

feeders must remain in operation. In the submitted documents, clear demonstration

concerning this requirement shall be given by the tenderer, i.e. sequence of repair

work steps and description of necessary restrictions during these works.

(d) Where a bus sectionalizer is specified: In case of any internal arc fault in a busbar,

busbar disconnector or sectionalizer, repair work must be possible without shutting

down the complete substation and at least one half of the substation must remain in

operation. In the submitted documents, clear demonstration concerning this

requirement shall be given by the tenderer, i.e. sequence of repair work steps and

description of necessary restrictions during these works.

⎯ 4 ⎯

(e) Automatic pressure relief shall be incorporated in the basic design of the enclosures

as a precaution against explosion in the event of an internal arc fault. Pressure relief

shall be by means of bursting discs with deflection devices to ensure that personnel

who may be present will not be endangered.

2.2 Sectionalization

The switchgear gas enclosures must be sectionalised, with gas tight barriers between

sections or compartments.

The sections shall be so designed as to minimise the extent of plant rendered inoperative

when gas pressure is reduced, either by excessive leakage or for maintenance purposes,

and to minimise the quantity of gas that has to be evacuated and then recharged before and

after maintaining any item of equipment.

The arrangement of gas sections or compartments shall be such that it is possible to extend

existing busbars without having to take out of service more than one busbar at any time. For

limitation of any internal arc to the concerned bay and to reduce the extent of necessary gas

works each busbar must be sectionalised bay by bay.

The electrical connections between the various gas sections shall preferably be made by

means of multiple contact connectors so that electrical connection is automatically achieved

when bolting one section to another. The surface of the connector fingers and conductor

tubes on such connections shall be silverplated.

Each gas compartment must be independent, external gas pipe connections are not

acceptable.

2.3 Support Insulators and Section Barriers

The support insulators and section barriers / insulators shall be manufactured from the

highest quality material. They shall be free from all voids and the design shall be such as to

reduce the electrical stresses in the insulators to a minimum. They shall also be of sufficient

strength to ensure that the conductor spacings and clearances are maintained when short

circuit faults occur.

⎯ 5 ⎯

Tests shall be carried out during the manufacture of the switchgear to ensure that all parts

of the equipment are free of partial discharge with a partial discharge extinction voltage

which is at least 10 % higher than the rated voltage.

Gas section barriers including seals to the conductor and enclosure wall shall be gas-tight

and shall be capable of withstanding the maximum pressure differential that could occur

across the barrier, i.e. with vacuum drawn on the one side of the barrier and on the other

side, at least the maximum gas pressure that can exist under normal operating or

maintenance conditions and in case of internal arc fault with a safety factor ≥ 2.0.

2.4 Gas Seals

All gas seals shall be designed to ensure that leakage rates are kept to an absolute

minimum under all normal pressure, temperature, electrical load and fault conditions. All

gas seals located in the flanges of the equipment enclosures shall be of the O-ring type.

The material and method of sealing used and the maximum gas leakage rate that can

normally be tolerated under working conditions shall be stated in the tender.

2.5 SF6 Gas Density and Pressure

The rated pressure of the SF6 insulating gas in the metal clad equipment shall be as low as

is compatible with the requirements for electrical insulation and space limitations to reduce

the effects of leaks and to ensure that there is no chance of the gas liquefying at the lowest

ambient temperature. The initial gas pressure or density at the time of charging the

equipment shall provide a sufficient margin above the minimum allowable operating

pressure for the plant to be safely operated for a reasonably long period before recharging

is necessary.

2.6 SF6 Gas Purity

The SF6 switchgear shall be designed for use with SF6 gas complying with the

recommendations of IEC 60376 at the time of the first charging with gas. All SF6 gas

supplied as part of the contract shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60376 as a

minimum.

2.7 Gas Monitoring Devices

⎯ 6 ⎯

Gas density or pressure monitoring devices shall be provided for each gas compartment.

The devices shall provide continuous and automatic monitoring of the state of the gas. The

monitoring device shall have two alarm settings. These shall be set so that:

(a) advanced warning can be given that the gas density / pressure is reducing to an

unacceptable level;

(b) after an urgent alarm, operative measures can be taken to immediately isolate the

particular compartment electrically by tripping circuit breakers and opening

disconnectors.

2.8 SF6 Gas Treatment

Under normal operating conditions it shall not be necessary to treat the insulating SF6 gas

between major overhauls. Self sealing vacuum couplings shall, however, be provided on

each individual equipment module to facilitate cycling and recharging. In all gas

compartments permanent efficient filters and desiccants shall be installed to remove any

residual impurities in the gas and to reduce the moisture content. The filters and desiccants

shall be effective for the duration of time between major overhauls.

Notwithstanding this, the insulators in the circuit breaker shall be made of any epoxy resin

composition that will resist decomposition products in contact with moisture in the circuit

breaker.

External gas pipes between different gas compartments as well as any kind of centralised

gas supply and/or gas control system are not acceptable.

2.9 Metal-clothing

The metal enclosures for the SF6 gas insulated equipment modules shall be made from

non-magnetic material which does not require protective painting, either internal or external,

aluminium alloy. The tenderer shall state the material used for his particular design. All

enclosures shall be of three-phase common enclosure concept.

All flanges shall be directly connected with good metallic contact. Insulators or insulating

material between the flanges shall be avoided in order to get the best electrical connection

between the different enclosure modules.

⎯ 7 ⎯

The gas-filled enclosures shall conform to the pressure vessel code applied in the country

of manufacturer. The material and thickness of enclosure shall be such as to withstand an internal flashover

without burn through for a period of 500 ms till the back-up relay protection clears the fault.

The material shall be such that it has no effect of environment as well as from the by-

products of SF6 breakdown under arcing condition.

2.10 Expansion Joints and Flexible Connections

If necessary, the number and position of expansion joints or flexible connections are to be

determined by the manufacturer to ensure that the complete installation will not be subject

to any expansion stresses which could lead to distortion or premature failure of any piece of

the SF6 equipment, support structures or foundations.

Expansion joints, flexible connections and adjustable mountings shall be provided to

compensate for reasonable tolerances in the manufacture of associated equipment to which

the SF6 switchgear may be connected and to ensure that unreasonably excessive accuracy

is not required when installing such equipment and constructing the associated foundations

or support structures, e.g. transformers or the interconnection of isolated sections of

switchgear by means of long SF6 busbar or duct installations.

2.11 Finish of Interior Surfaces and Cleaning

The finish of interior surfaces of the metal clad enclosures shall facilitate cleaning and

inspection. Any paints or other coatings that may be used shall be such that they will not

deteriorate when exposed to the SF6 gas and other vapours, arc products, etc., that may be

present in the enclosures. They shall also not contain any substances which could

contaminate the enclosed SF6 gas or affect its insulating properties over a period of time.

The equipment shall be manufactured and assembled at the manufacturer's works under

conditions of the utmost cleanliness.

In general, dusty conditions will exist at all sites in the country of destination, so that,

wherever possible, at least complete feeders should be shipped as transport units.

Before the metal clad enclosed sections are joined together and charged with the SF6 gas

they must be thoroughly cleaned to the manufacturer's satisfaction.

2.12 Supply of SF6 Gas

⎯ 8 ⎯

The contract shall include the supply of all SF6 gas necessary for filling and putting into

commercial operation the complete switchgear installation being supplied.

2.13 Gas Filling and Evacuating Apparatus

All apparatus necessary for filling evacuating, and recycling the SF6 gas into and from the

switchgear equipment shall be supplied by the contractor to enable any maintenance work

to be carried out.

Where any item of the filling and evacuating apparatus is of such a weight that it cannot

easily be carried by maintenance personnel, it shall be provided with facilities for lifting and

moving with the overhead cranes.

The apparatus for filling, evacuating, and recycling all gases to be used shall be provided

with all necessary pipes, couplings, flexible tubes and valves for coupling to the switchgear

equipment.

The gas compartments shall preferably be fitted with permanent vacuum couplings through

which the gas is pumped into or evacuated from the compartments.

Details of the filling and evacuating apparatus that will be supplied, as well as a description

of the filling, evacuating, and recycling procedures, shall be provided at the time of

tendering.

For reasons of environmental protection the evacuating apparatus must allow to evacuate

all gas compartments to a residual pressure of less than 10 mbar, and to store the

evacuated gas with a capacity of gas from 2 bays completely.

Rated and filling densities or pressures and filling SF6 mass must be clearly indicated and

labelled at each gas compartment.

Section 3 - Particular Requirements of Primary Electrical Equipment

3.1 Circuit Breakers

3.1.1 General

⎯ 9 ⎯

The circuit breaker must be designed in accordance with the latest state of technology. Due

to their advantageous switching and breaking behaviour CB's of the self-blast or auto-puffer

principle shall be offered.

The SF6 metal clad circuit-breakers for the circuits detailed below shall comply with the

following general requirements for circuit-breakers and the latest revisions of the relevant

specifications IEC 62271-100 and others.

Circuit-breakers shall be equipped with factory assembled, independent spring/electro

spring operating mechanisms.

The total break time from energising the trip coil at rated control voltage to final arc

extinction shall be as short as possible, but in any event not greater than 60 ms.

The circuit-breaker shall be capable of breaking all currents from zero up to the specified

maximum fault current in accordance with the relevant IEC publications. Official test reports

shall be submitted with the tender as evidence that the offered circuit-breaker meets the

specified rating.

The breakers are to be restrike-free.

3.1.2 Auto-Reclosing

If auto-reclosing is required, the circuit-breakers shall be capable of tripping and reclosing

according to the specified IEC duty cycle

O - 0.3 s - CO - 3 min - CO.

The operating mechanisms shall have sufficient stored energy for completing an O-CO-duty

cycle with auxiliary power switched off.

3.1.3 Closing Devices

All electrically operated closing devices and any mechanism charging motors or devices

shall be suitable for operation at any voltage between 110 % and 85 % of the nominal

control voltage measured at the device terminals.

The breaker shall close correctly when an electrical closing pulse of 50 ms duration is

applied to the closing solenoid.

⎯ 10 ⎯

The total wattage drawn by the closing solenoid at nominal control voltage when closing

shall not exceed 500 W per circuit-breaker.

3.1.4 Tripping Devices

All electrical tripping devices shall be suitable for operation at any voltage between 110 %

and 85 % of the nominal voltage, measured at the device terminals.

The tripping devices of a circuit-breaker, when the circuit-breaker is not carrying current,

shall be capable of operating satisfactorily down to 50 % of the normal control voltage,

measured at the device terminals.

The total wattage drawn by the opening solenoid at nominal control voltage when tripping

shall not exceed 500 W per circuit-breaker.

Each circuit-breaker shall be equipped with two trip coils systems per mechanism. The one

trip system shall be electrically separate from the other trip system.

An emergency hand tripping (mechanical) device shall be provided in the operating

mechanism.

3.1.5 Anti-Pumping

All circuit-breaker mechanisms shall be provided with means to prevent pumping while the

closing circuit remains energised, should the circuit breaker either fail to latch, or be tripped

during closing due to the operation of the protective relays.

3.1.6 Operating Mechanisms

In order to reduce maintenance work and outage time hydraulic or pneumatic operating

mechanisms will not be accepted. Spring/electro spring mechanisms shall be complete with

all control equipment and the only external requirement for operation shall be electrical

supply.

Operating oil pressure shall be maintained automatically and a high reliable device shall be

provided to give indication of the available operating energy.

⎯ 11 ⎯

Low oil pressure shall be detected by some suitable method and dependent on the pressure

of the oil, shall initiate one or more of the following operations:

(a) start pump motor,

(b) block auto-reclosing if pressure is insufficient to complete a break-make-break

operation,

(c) block closing if pressure is insufficient to complete a make-break operation,

(d) block tripping if pressure is insufficient to complete a break operation.

Circuit-breakers having independent operating mechanisms on each phase shall block

tripping, closing and auto-reclosing of all phases if the operating oil pressure is low in one or

more of the mechanisms.

Means shall be provided for detecting loss of nitrogen (or other accumulator gas) from the

main accumulator(s) and, in the event of excessive loss, all hydraulic operations of the

circuit-breaker shall be blocked. An alarm contact shall be provided to indicate this

condition.

In any case hydraulic systems not using accumulator gas for energy storage will be

preferred. Manual charging of the operating mechanism(s) shall be possible in the event of

failure of the motor drive.

3.1.7 Auxiliary Switches

The minimum number of normally open and normally closed auxiliary contacts on each

circuit-breaker auxiliary switch, additional to those required for control and interlocking, shall

be as specified.

The fitting of additional auxiliary relays to achieve the number of auxiliary contacts required

will not be acceptable.

3.1.8 Indicating Devices

Devices shall be provided to clearly indicate whether a circuit-breaker is open or closed.

⎯ 12 ⎯

Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with an operation counter per mechanism to record

the number of tripping operations performed.

3.1.9 Testing Facilities

Facilities shall be provided with the switchgear to enable timing tests to be carried out after

all switchgear has been charged with SF6 gas. The facilities shall be such that it is not

necessary to open up any gas section to make test connections to the circuit-breaker

primary terminals.

All details of the test facilities to be provided with the switchgear shall be submitted with the

tender.

3.2 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches

3.2.1 General

The SF6 metal clad disconnectors and earthing switches shall comply with the following

general requirements of disconnectors and earthing switches and the latest revision of the

relevant IEC publications.

All disconnectors and earthing switches shall be provided with motor-driven or motor-

charged mechanisms as applicable. They shall also have facilities for manual operation and

the necessary operating handles shall be provided.

Where specified, the busbar and line earthing switches shall be fully insulated and

connected to earth by a removable bolted link in order that the earthing switch may be used

for various test purposes. The insulation shall be capable of withstanding an applied power

frequency voltage of 2 kV. In addition they must have fault making capacity and must be

capable to switch capacitive currents not less than 5 A at 30 kV and inductive currents not

less than 50 A at 3 kV. The continuous current carrying capacity at least should be suitable

for rated busbar current and 15 min.

All main contacts, male and female, shall either be silver plated or shall have silver inserts.

3.2.2 Operating Mechanisms

Mechanisms shall be arranged either mechanically or electrically so that all three phases of

any particular disconnector or earthing switch operate simultaneously.

⎯ 13 ⎯

(a) Hand operation

Handles or levers shall be provided, together with all necessary operating rods and

rod guides. The mechanisms shall be arranged for locking in the open or closed

position.

(b) Spring operation

Spring-operated mechanisms shall also be suitable for hand operation. The

mechanisms shall be arranged for locking.

The mechanism of fault making earthing switches shall be equipped with a motor

suitable for operation from the auxiliary supply specified, and a set of springs so

arranged that energising of the motors will cause the springs to be charged and then

released. The springs in turn shall close the earthing switch.

Spring charging motors shall be suitable for operation at any voltage between 85 %

and 110 % of the voltage specified, measured at the motor terminals.

(c) Electric motor operation

Electric motor-operated mechanisms shall also be suitable for hand operation,

independent of the power supply. Facilities shall be provided for locking the

mechanism in each position.

For disconnectors and earthing switches having three mechanisms (i.e. one per

phase) it shall be possible to electrically interlock all three phases to ensure that all

three phases open or close if any one phase is to be electrically operated either by

remote or local means.

3.2.4 Auxiliary Switches

Spare auxiliary switches shall be provided with the disconnectors and earthing switches as

specified. The number of auxiliary switches specified shall be in addition to any switches

required for interlocking, and any other control schemes being supplied as part of this

contract.

3.3 Current Transformers

⎯ 14 ⎯

3.3.1 General

The current transformers shall be supplied in accordance with the following general

requirements and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC publications.

Only current transformers with SF6 high voltage insulation will be accepted. The Principal

Parameters shall be as per Annexure-A

3.3.2 Position of Current Transformers and Cores, Ratios and Characteristics

The position of the current transformers relative to the circuit-breakers, disconnectors and

earthing switches shall be as detailed in the attached relevant Station Electric Diagram.

The number, rating, ratio, accuracy class, etc. for the individual current transformer

secondary cores shall be as specified in Annexure-B(i) & B(ii).

Where multi-ratio current transformers are required, the various ratios shall be obtained by

changing the effective number of turns on the secondary winding.

3.3.3 Secondary Terminals and Earthing

The beginning and end of each secondary winding and all secondary taps shall be wired to

suitable terminals accommodated in a terminal box mounted directly on the current

transformer section of the SF6 switchgear.

All terminals shall be stamped or otherwise marked to correspond with the marking on the

diagram plate.

Provision shall be made for earthing of the secondary windings .

3.4 Voltage Transformers

3.4.1 General

The voltage transformers shall be supplied in accordance with the following general

requirements and the latest revisions of the relevant IEC specifications.

⎯ 15 ⎯

The voltage transformers are to be connected as shown in the attached Station Electric

Diagram.

Voltage transformers must be of the electromagnetic type, and with SF6 gas insulation. The

Principal Parameters shall be as per Annexure-C

3.4.2 Ratios and Characteristics

The rating, ratio, accuracy class, connection, etc. for the voltage transformers shall be as

specified in Annexure-D(i).

3.4.3 Secondary Terminals, Earthing and Fuses

The beginning and end of each secondary winding and all secondary taps shall be wired to

suitable terminals accommodated in a terminal box mounted directly on the voltage

transformer section of the SF6 switchgear.

All terminals shall be stamped or otherwise marked to correspond with the marking on the

diagram plate.

Provision shall be made for earthing of the secondary windings inside the terminal box.

3.5 Bushings

3.5.1 General

Outdoor bushings, for the connection of conventional external conductors to the SF6 metal

clad switchgear, shall be provided where specified.

Bushings shall generally be in accordance with the requirements of IEC.

Where specified, the SF6 switchgear shall be connected via SF6 insulated ducting directly to

transformers and reactors. The basic bushings will be supplied by the transformer or reactor

contractor as part of his contract.

The clamps or contact for connecting the switchgear conductor to the transformer or reactor

bushing and the metal clad enclosure coupling onto the bushing flange shall be

manufactured as part of this contract. The dimensional and clearance requirements for the

⎯ 16 ⎯

metal clad enclosure will be in the responsibility of the bushing designer / manufacturer in

order that the design of the enclosure may be completed. The switchgear manufacturer

shall in turn provide the bushing designer / manufacturer with the necessary design details

for the bushing flange to ensure that a suitable gastight connection for the metal clad

enclosure can be obtained.

The switchgear contractor shall negotiate and collaborate directly with the transformer and

reactor manufacturers when designing the above items of equipment. The names of the

transformer and reactor manufacturers will be advised after the placing of the contract.

3.5.2 Insulation Levels and Creepage Distances

All bushings shall have an impulse and power frequency withstand level that is higher than

or equal to the level specified. The levels are applicable to normal sea level atmospheric

conditions.

The creepage distance over the external surface of outdoor bushings shall not be less than

specified.

3.5.3 Bushing Types and Fittings

Only bushings being SF6 insulated will be accepted; conventional condenser types will be

rejected. Due to the better mechanical and electrical behaviour a composite silicon bushing

will be preferred to a porcelain type. Bushing arc gaps are not required.

The terminals on the outdoor bushings shall be a solid circular stem with the dimensions

specified. Stems shall be either copper or aluminium and the copper stems shall be electro-

tinned. The clamps for connecting the outdoor conductor(s) to the stem will be provided by

the Authority.

3.5.4 Mechanical Forces on Bushing Terminals

Outdoor bushings must be capable of withstanding a cantilever force applied to the terminal

of at least 5000 N.

3.6 H.V. Power Cable Circuits

3.6.1 General

⎯ 17 ⎯

The following requirements are applicable to the switchgear equipment where the H.V.

power cables are terminated directly in the SF6 metal clad switchgear using cable sealing

ends designed for use in SF6 gas.

The H.V. power cables will be supplied and laid by the contractor, the type and size of cable

should be as specified. The final connection of the H.V. cable circuits in the switch house

will be by means of individual single-phase cables, with one cable per phase.

All cable end modules shall be suitable for connecting single core XLPE cables for 72.5kV

maximum continuous voltage and a core cross section of 1000 mm2. Bidders are requested

to offer pluggable cable sealing termination, consisting of a gastight socket insulator and a

completely dry, prefabricated cable plug connector. The design of the cable termination

shall allow plugging and unplugging the H.V. cable without need of opening the GIS and

without any gas work. Exact details of the type and size of cable to be connected is given in

bill of material. Where the H.V. power cable does not form part of the switchgear, the

tenderer shall include in his offer the epoxy resin cone for fitting into the cable end unit.

3.6.2 Cable Test Facilities

The cable end unit design shall include a facility for H.V. DC. testing of the connected power

cable on site. The tenderer shall explain the method proposed. Where line disconnectors

are provided, only the disconnector shall be opened during cable tests. Removable bolted

links or similar connections will be accepted only in case of transformer feeders without line

disconnectors. The design of the link and connections shall ensure that when removed the

resulting gap can withstand the impulse and power frequency test voltages applicable to the

switchgear and the cable H.V. DC. test voltage, for a period of 15 minutes, when the

chamber is filled to the minimum rated working SF6 gas density or pressure.

3.7 Test Facilities for Switchgear Testing

After erection the complete switchgear shall be H.V. power frequency tested with a voltage

level which is at least 80 % of the rated insulation level.

The supplier is requested to provide all necessary test facilities and equipment, i.e. test

bushing, test adapter, test transformer or resonant test set etc.

⎯ 18 ⎯

Section 4 - Secondary Electrical Equipment

4.1 Local Control / Marshalling Kiosks

A local control and marshalling kiosk shall be provided with each primary circuit.

Each kiosk shall contain the local control and indication devices for the associated SF6

circuit-breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches and the DC. protection fuses, links

and supervisory relays specified. The kiosk shall also be a marshalling or junction point for

all protection, control, alarm, indication and DC. power supply circuits from the associated

SF6 circuit-breakers, disconnectors, earthing switches and gas monitoring, alarm and

protection system. All cables being provided by the Authority will be terminated in the

marshalling kiosks.

For the above facilities the local control / marshalling kiosk shall generally be provided with

the following features:

(a) A mimic diagram, on or adjacent to which shall be mounted the indicating switches

and local / off / remote switches.

(b) Any interposing relays associated with the circuit-breaker, disconnector etc. control

switches.

(c) The alarm and indication equipment specified.

(d) Fuses and links. These shall be mounted in the interior of the local control /

marshalling kiosk.

(e) Cable terminal blocks for terminating and marshalling auxiliary supply cables, control,

indication and alarm circuit cables from the switchgear and the remote control room.

The kiosks shall be located on the switch house floor. A general arrangement drawing of the

kiosk showing the position of all important features and the mounting position shall be

submitted at the tendering stage.

⎯ 19 ⎯

All cable connections between control cubicle and circuit-breakers, disconnectors and

earthing switches shall be by prefabricated multicore cables with multi-point plug-in

connections on both ends.

The local control and marshalling kiosk will be installed indoors but care must be taken with

the design to ensure that all kiosks are drip and splash proof. The kiosks shall also be dust

and vermin proof.

4.2 AC Supplies and Circuits

410 V, 3-phase, 4-wire AC supplies will be derived from an AC distribution panel to be

provided by the Authority in the switch house.

The normal maximum and minimum voltages that will occur in the supply are as specified.

All equipment supplied shall be capable of running continuously or switching the AC current

within the range of the normal maximum and minimum voltages specified.

4.3 DC Supplies and Circuits

DC supplies as specified will be provided by the Authority for all control, protection,

interlocking, alarm, indication and power supply circuits. The normal maximum and

minimum voltage levels that will occur on the supply are specified.

Each control and protection panel to be provided by the Authority will have its own

separately fused supply from the substation DC. distribution board.

At least one single fused outlet from the substation DC. distribution board will be provided

for each local control and marshalling kiosk.

The design of all circuits must be such that separately fused or subfused circuits are always

kept electrically separate.

4.4 TYPE TESTS The GIS equipment offered should be type tested. Test reports of all the following tests

as per provision in relevant IEC should not be more than seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as per schedule given in Bar Chart:-

1. Tests to verify the insulation level of the equipment and dielectric tests on auxiliary circuits.

2. Tests to prove the radio interference voltage (RIV) level (if applicable)

⎯ 20 ⎯

3. Tests to prove the temperature rise of any part of the equipment and measurement of the resistance of the main circuit

4. Tests to prove the ability of the main and earthing circuits to carry the rated peak and rated short-time withstand current

5. Tests to verify the making and breaking capacity of the included switching devices 6. Tests to prove the satisfactory operation of the included switching devices 7. Tests to prove the strength of enclosures 8. verification of the degree of protection of the enclosure 9. Gas tightness tests

10. Electromagnetic compatibility tests (EMC) 11. Additional tests on auxiliary and control circuits 12. Tests on partitions 13. Tests to prove the satisfactory operation at limit temperatures 14. Tests to prove performance under thermal cycling and gas tightness tests on insulators 15. Corrosion test on earthing connections (if applicable) 16. Tests to assess the effects of arcing due to an internal fault

4.4.1 ROUTINE TESTS:

As per quality assurance program (QAP).

4.4.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

All the acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IEC listed below shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

1. Dielectric test on main circuit 2. Tests on auxiliary and control circuits 3. Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit 4. Tightness tests 5. Design and visual checks 6. Pressure tests of enclosures 7. Mechanical operation tests 8. Tests on auxiliary circuits, equipment and interlocks in the control mechanism 9. Pressure test on partitions.

Section 5 - Inspection and maintenance

5.1 General

Due to the fact that the operational integrity of the fully metal clad SF6 insulated switchgear

is not subject to external influences, such as pollution, moisture, dust, etc. the switchgear

should be practically maintenance-free.

Visual inspection of switchgear and control gear shall be required not below 2 years

intervals. Inspection should be made not often than every 10 years. During inspection it

must be not necessary to open the switchgear enclosures, thus avoiding interruption of

substation operations. Inspection involves as maximum checking the SF6 gas densities or

pressures, checking of hydraulic fluids and lubrication of the moving components in the

operating mechanisms outside of the enclosure. Functional testing of the close and trip

coils, auxiliary switches, pressure and control switches etc. should also be made.

⎯ 21 ⎯

As minimum the following maintenance period can be accepted:

- circuit breaker: 2000 closing and opening or

20 interruptions at max. current

- disconnector: 2000 closing and opening operations

- fast acting earthing switch: 2000 closing and opening operations or

2 making operations onto max. rated fault current.

Section 6 - GIS Building

6.1 General

The Authority will provide a switch house building of reinforced concrete or steel frame

construction with brick or sheet steel clothing in which the SF6 switchgear shall be installed.

The proposed arrangement of the switch house building and the positions(s) in which the

switchgear shall be installed relative to lines, transformers and reactors, cable circuits and

any other switchgear of other voltage ratings, are as shown in the general arrangement plan

and section drawing(s) attached to the specification.

The width of the building and overall height will be determined primarily by the design and

layout of the SF6 switchgear in the switch house, but shall not exceed the maximum

dimensions shown in the attached plan and section drawings. The overall height of the

building shall allow for an overhead travelling crane.

6.2 Design Information to be Provided by the Contractor

The contractor shall assist the Authority as part of this contract with the general layout

design of the H.V. switch house to ensure that the most suitable arrangement is obtained

for housing, fixing and supporting the SF6 switchgear.

The contractor shall also provide a complete floor plan detailing the fixing positions, level

and size of fixing bolt pockets and foundation rails required for all equipment to be installed

under this contract. Drawings giving similar details for any fixing positions, bolt hole pockets

and apertures in the walls of the switch house shall also be provided.

⎯ 22 ⎯

All static and dynamic loads plus dimensional tolerances shall be given on these drawings

to enable the civil work designs to be completed.

The information must be provided in due time to ensure that the civil design work can be

completed and the switch house and foundations built and finished in time for access to be

granted as required for the erection of the SF6 switchgear and associated equipment..

⎯ 23 ⎯

ANNEXURE-A PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS of CTs:

Sr. No.

Item 72.5 kV

1. Type of CT/installation Single phase, SF6 insulated 2. 3. Suitable for system frequency 50 Hz 4. Highest system voltage (kV rms) 72.5 5. Current ratio A/A a. Transformer CT 300-150/0.577-1-1A b. Line / Bus Coupler CT 600-300-150/1-1-1A 6. Method of earthing Solidly earthed 7. Rated continuous Thermal current 125 % for all taps 8. Ratio taps The tapings shall be only on

secondary winding. 9. Acceptable limit of temperature rise above

the specified ambient temperature for continuous operation at rated current.

As per IS:2705 or equivalent IEC

10. Acceptance partial discharge level at 1.1 times the rated voltage

As per IS:11322-1985 or equivalent IEC

11. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp) a. CT 325

12. 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand voltage primary (kV rms) a. CT 140

13. Power frequency over voltage withstand requirement for secondary winding (kV rms) (for 1 minute)

3

14. Rated short time withstand current (kA rms) for 1 second.

31.5

15. Rated dynamic withstand current (kAp) 78.75

⎯ 24 ⎯

ANNEXURE B(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER CT

(300-150/.577-1-1)

No. OF CORES = 3 Core No.

Application Current Ratio (A)

Output burden(VA)

Accuracy class as per IEC 185

Formula for minimum knee-point voltage At CT Secondary resistance at 750C at 300A tap (Volt)

MaximumExciting Current (mA)

A.L.F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 DIFFERENTIAL

PROTECTION 300-150/0.577 - PS 40(RCT+1)

30AT VK/4 -

2 REF PROTECTION 300-150/1 - PS 20(RCT+1)

30AT VK/2 -

3 OVER CURRENT PROTECTION

300-150/1 25 5P - - 10

ANNEXURE B(ii)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV LINE CT/BUS COUPLER CT

(600-300-150/1-1-1)

No. OF CORES = 3

Core No.

Application Current Ratio (A)

Output burden(VA)

Accuracy class as per IEC 185

Formula for minimum knee point voltage At CT Secondary resistance at 750C at 300A tap (Volt)

Maximum Exciting Current (mA)

A.L.F./ I.S.F.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 DISTANCE

PROTECTION 600-300-150/1

- PS 110 (RCT+11)

80ATVKP -

2 OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT PROTECTION

600-300-150/1

15 5P - - ALF 10

3 METERING 600-300-150/1 20 1.0 - - ISF <5

⎯ 25 ⎯

ANNEXURE-C PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS of PTs:-

Specification Sr.

No. Item

72.5kV 1. Type/Installation Single Phase, SF6 insulated 2. Highest system voltage (kV rms) 72.5 3. Suitable for system frequency 50Hz 4. Voltage ratio

a) Rated primary voltage (kV rms). b) Secondary voltage (volts).

66/√3

5. PT Core I,II 110/√3

6. Method of earthing the system Solidly Earthed 7. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning

impulse withstand voltage (kVp) 325

8. 1 Minute dry & wet power frequency withstand voltage primary (kV rms)

140

9. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds 10. One minute power frequency

withstand voltage for secondary winding (kV rms)

3.0

11. Max. temperature rise over ambient of 50°C

As per IS:3156 or equivalent IEC

⎯ 26 ⎯

ANNEXURE- D(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT).

Sl. No.

Particulars Requirement

1. Rated Primary voltage 66/√3kV 2. Type Single phase 3. No. of Secondaries 2 4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds 5. Rated voltage (volts) Secondary-I

110/√3 Secondary-II 110/√3

6. Application Protection & Measurement

Protection

7. Accuracy 1/3P 3P 8. Output burden (VA) 250 25 9. Percentage voltage error &

phase displacement (minutes) for respective specified accuracy classes.

As per ISS/IEC

Note:- Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement

within its specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.

- 1 -

SECTION-3 CHAPTER-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 31.5 MVA, 66/11 kV POWER TRANSFORMERS

1.0 SCOPE: a) This specification covers the Design, Engineering, manufacture, testing, supply on CIP

basis, transportation to site, insurance, storage, testing of 31.5 MVA 66/11 kV Power Transformers

b) All drawings, schedules and annexures appended to this specification shall form part of the

specification and supplement the requirements specified. The equipment/materials offered by the bidder shall be complete in all respects and whether called for specifically or not, all accessories, hardware and services required for normal satisfactory operation of the system shall be deemed to be included in unit rates quoted. Design and manufacture shall also be such that equipment/accessories of the same type and rating would be interchangeable. Specific reference in this specification and documents to any material by trade name, make or catalogue number shall be construed as establishing standard of quality and performance and not as limiting competition. All equipment/accessories offered shall also be of proven design and manufacture. The make of all accessories and hardware shall be subject to purchaser’s approval.

2.0 Codes & Standards :

All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions as on date of opening of bid. The following standard and codes shall be applicable : IS : 5 Colour for ready mix paints. IS : 325 Three phase induction motors IS : 335 New insulating oils for transformer. IS : 375 Marking & arrangement of switch-gear bus bars main

connections and auxiliary wiring. IS : 1866 Code of practice for maintenance of insulation oil. IS : 2026 & IEC : 76 Specification Power transformers IS : 2099 & 3347 Bushing for alternative voltages above 1000 volts IS : 2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage

switchgear and control gear IS : 2705 Current transformer IS : 3637 Gas operated relay. IS : 3639 Fittings and accessories for Power Transformers IS : 6600 & IEC : 354 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers IS : 8468 & IEC : 214 On load tap changer. IS : 5561 Electric power connectors IS : 617 Aluminium Alloy grade. IS : 2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising IS : 8478 On load tap changer application guide. IS : 8603 Dimensions for porcelain transformer bushings for use in heavily

polluted atmosphere (36 kV Class) Dimensions for oil filled porcelain transformer bushings for use in medium polluted atmosphere.

- 2 -

IS : 9434 Guide for sampling and analysis of free and dissolved gas in oil

filled equipment. IS : 10028 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of

transformers IS : 12676 Dimensions for OIP insulated condenser bushings CBIP Manual on transformer

Equipment complying with other internationally accepted standard will also be considered if these ensure performance and constructional features equivalent or superior to standard listed above. In such a case, the bidder shall clearly indicate the standards adopted, furnish a copy in English of the latest revision of standard alongwith copies of all official amendments and revisions in force as on date of opening of bid and clearly bring out the salient features for comparison.

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

The transformers are required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions : Max. Temperature 500 C Min. Temperature - 2.50 C Max. Relative Humidity 100% Min. Relative Humidity 26% Average number of rainy days per annum nearly 120 days Average annual rainfall 900 m Average number of dust storm days per annum 35 Isoceraunic level 45 Max. wind pressure 195-kg-sq.m Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 m.

4.0 TYPE AND RATING 4.1 The transformer shall be of two winding 3-phase oil immersed core type with ONAN/ONAF

cooling suitable for outdoor service as step down transformers.

These transformers shall not be provided with the tertiary delta winding.

4.2 The ratings and other characteristics which are not covered elsewhere shall be, as detailed in following clauses :

4.2.1 Max. continuous capacity :

a) ONAN 25 MVA b) ONAF 31.5 MVA

4.2.2 Number of phases 3 4.2.3 Frequency 50 Hz

s(± 5%) 4.2.4 Rated Voltage :

a) HV side. 66 kV b) LV side. 11 kV

- 3 -

4.2.5 Connections :

a) HV side. Star b) LV side. Star

4.2.6 Vector group YYO 4.2.7 %age Impedance 10% at 31.5 MVA base 4.2.8 ON load taps on HV side. +5% to –15% in steps of 1.25% each 4.2.9 a) Insulation level 66 kV 11 kV

i) Impulse withstand test voltage. 325 kV (P) 95 kV (P) ii) Power frequency withstand voltage. 140 kV 38 kV

(rms) (rms) b) Insulation level of Bushings. Impulse voltage. 325 kV(P) 95 kV(P) Power frequency voltage. 140 kV 38 kV

(rms) (rms)

4.2.10 Creepage Distance :

a) Total 25 mm per kV corresponding to highest system voltage i.e.72.5 kV

b) Protected 50% of the total creepage distance

5.0 GENERAL DESIGN OF TRANSFORMER : 5.1 The transformer and accessories shall be so designed as to facilitate inspection cleaning

and repairs. The requirement of Indian Electricity Rules shall be kept in view. 5.2 The design shall ensure satisfactory operation under severe working conditions due to

fluctuating load of steel furnaces and voltage variations in the system including those due to short circuits. The transformers shall be designed so as to minimize the risk of accidental short circuits caused by animals, birds or vermins.

The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment keeping in view the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules.

5.3 All material used shall be of the best quality and of class most suitable for working under specified conditions and shall withstand the atmospheric conditions and temperature variations without undue deterioration or distortion or setting up of undue stress in any part thereof.

5.4 Cast iron shall not be used for any parts other than the large valve bodies. 5.5 Corresponding parts liable to be replaced shall be interchangeable. 5.6 All taper pins to be used in the mechanism shall be split type as per latest edition of IS :

2393. 5.7 All mechanism should be rust and corrosion proof. Means shall be provided for lubrications

of moving parts not immersed in oil.

- 4 -

5.8 The construction shall be such as to avoid air or water pockets. Special care shall be

exercised to reduce noise and vibration to the minimum level. 5.9 Steel bolts of suitable finish will be used for diameters above 6 mm brass bolts or studs

used for electrical connections shall not be of less than 6 mm diameter. On outdoor equipment, all bolts, nuts and washers in contact with current carrying non-ferrous parts shall be phosphor bronze.

5.10 All nuts, bolts and pins shall be locked except those, which are external to the transformer.

If bolts and nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, suitable special spanners shall be provided by the supplier.

5.11 Labels shall be provided for all apparatus like relays, switches, fuses etc. housed in any

cubicle or marshalling kiosks. These shall be of in corrodible material with matt/satin finish and permanent lettering. Labels mounted on black surface shall have white letters and danger notices shall have red lettering on a white background. The labels shall be secured by means of brass screws or rust protected steel screws.

5.12 Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated. 5.13 Before painting, all un-galvanized parts shall be cleaned, made free from rust, scale and

grease and external wrought surfaces smoothened (filled with metal deposition). The interior of the tank and other oil filled chambers shall be cleaned by shot blasting or any other suitable method.

5.14 All external surfaces shall be given three coats of paints except for nuts, bolts and washers

which may be given one coat after assembly transformer at works. The final coat shall be glossy oil and weather proof, non fading paint of shade 631 of IS : 5.

5.15 The interior of mechanism chambers and kiosks shall be given 3 coats of paint, the final

coat being of a light colored anti-condensation mixture. 5.16 The outer most radial spacers of the winding shall be locked in position by means of vertical

strips so that the same cannot fall off/got displaced. 5.17 Proper & complete tightening of the nuts of the coil clamping bolts must be ensured by the

manufacturers. The nuts of all the coil clamping bolts will be tightened to designed value and the job be carried out with torque spanners.

The devices used for locking the nuts of coil clamping bolts must be of such a quality and such care should be taken first in tightening the nuts and next in locking them in position so that the arrangement does not become loose due to stresses caused by short circuits and fluctuating loads etc.

5.18 The noise level shall not be more than 5 dB above NEMA standard publication TR:1. 5.19 The transformers shall be designed to have short circuit rating of five seconds as per

IS:2026.

- 5 -

6.0 INSULATING OIL :

Sufficient insulating oil conforming to IS:335/98 (latest edition) shall be supplied for first filling of each transformer plus 10% extra oil of the total quantity of oil. Particular attention shall be paid to deliver the oil at site free from moisture and of uniform quality through out in non returnable steel drums. The quantity of oil for first filling of each transformer shall be stated in tender, alongwith trade mark of the oil to be supplied. Use of inhibitors in oil shall not be resorted to.

7.0 LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE 7.1 With the above climatic conditions, given in clause-3 each transformer shall be capable of

operating continuously on any tap at their normal rating without exceeding following temperature rises : i) 350 C in oil by thermometer. ii) 450 C in winding by resistance. iii) Winding gradient i.e. the difference between average winding and average oil

temperature not to exceed 130 C. iv) Temperature of hot spot in winding not to exceed 950C when calculated over max.

Annual weighted average temperature of 400 C

7.2 The limits of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by the manufacturer by carrying out the heat run test at the lowest negative tap. This test shall be carried out by feeding 1.1 times the total losses at 750 C at highest current tap.

7.3 OVERLOAD CAPACITY & CONTINUOUS RATING.

The safe over load capacity of the transformer and the duration of overload under maximum temperature conditions without any damage to the winding or harmful effects on the insulation shall be clearly stated in the tender which must be as per IEC-354/IS:6600, guide for loading of oil immersed transformer.

8.0 IMPEDANCE:

The transformer shall have 10% impedance on 31.5 MVA base with tolerance as per IS:2026/Part-1 (1983). Impedance shall include positive and zero sequence and shall be expressed in terms of the branches of the star connected equivalent diagram, all on the same kVA base and range shall be given for each branch of the equivalent circuit in turn. The percentage impedance on normal tap should be 10% and on extreme taps i.e at tap No.1 it should be 10.3% and on tap No.17 it should be 9.5%. Percentage tolerance allowed at extreme tap be as applicable to normal tap.

9.0 FREQUENCY: The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a +/-5% frequency variation from a normal of 50 Hz without exceeding the temperature rise as specified in Clause 7.1 above.

10.0 FLUX DENSITY: 10.1 The primary voltage variation, which may effect the flux density at every tap, shall be kept in

view while designing the transformer.

- 6 -

10.2 The transformer should be so designed that the working flux density should not exceed 1.57 Tesla (15700 Lines per sq. cm) at normal voltage, frequency & ratio. Tenders with higher flux density than specified shall not be considered. The tenderers should indicate the continuous allowable maximum flux density as well as for time interval of one minute and five seconds. The limit of flux density at which core material used by them saturates will also be stated in the tender. The name of core material must be mentioned in the tender. The successful tenderer shall be required to furnish magnetization curve of the core material, design calculations and such other data/documents deemed fit by the purchaser for being satisfied that flux density is as desired.

NOTE: The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the core due to

temporary over voltage of the orders of 25% for one minute and 40% for five seconds that may appear in abnormal conditions such as the one obtained following sudden loss of large loads.

11.0 CORE : 11.1 The cores shall be constructed from the laminations of high grade cold rolled non-ageing

grain oriented silicon steel known as M4 High B Grade or superior grade CRGO steels of maximum 0.27 mm or low lamination thickness especially suitable for transformer core.

11.2 The design shall be such as to avoid static discharge short circuit paths within itself or to

earthed clamping devices and production of flux component at right angles to the plane of the lamination, which may cause local heating.

11.3 Adequate oil ducts shall be provided in the core for cooling. Tinned copper strip bridging

pieces shall be used for maintaining electrical continuity wherever the magnetic circuit is provided into pockets by such ducts or insulating material thicker than 0.25 mm.

11.4 There should be no movement of the core assembly relative to the tank during transport as

well as in service due to sudden jerks caused by short circuits and fluctuating loads. 11.5 Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable core and winding to be lifted. 11.6 The insulation structure for the core to bolts and core to clamp plate shall be such as to

withstand a voltage of 2000V AC for one minute. 12.0 SUPPRESSION OF HARMONICS:

The transformer shall be so designed as to suppress the harmonics voltage specially the 3rd & 5th, to eliminate wave form distortion and interference with communication circuits due to higher frequency disturbances. Percentage of harmonics at normal voltage and at maximum system voltage shall be stated in the tender.

13.0 WINDING: 13.1 The 66 kV winding shall have graded insulation whereas all other windings shall be fully

insulated and the neutral points shall be insulated as amended in IS:2026. 13.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular tapping at

the rated KVA when the voltage may vary by +/- 10% of the voltage corresponding to the tapping.

- 7 -

13.3 The windings and connections as well as the insulations material shall not soften ooze,

shrink or collapse during service. 13.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness.

The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize eddy currents and equalize the current and temperature distribution along the windings.

13.5 The windings and connections shall be properly brazed to withstand shocks during

transportation or transient conditions during service. 13.6 The adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board

material having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by the manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to frequent short circuits on the transformers.

13.7 All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the

construction of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated with hot oil. In addition to this the drying process be sufficiently extended for proper stabilization of the coil assembly. More than one cycle of soaking in oil followed by re-tightening of the coil assembly should be adopted.

13.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel laminations.

Axial laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used. 13.9 The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers of the

transformer windings built of sections or disc-coils separated by spacers. In no case, spiral winding will be used either for HV or LV windings.

13.10 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material. Which will

not soften out while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or edges. The slots should be so dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots. Uniform distribution of coil clamping force shall be designed by using an adequately large number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping force from clamping bolts to the clamping plates through intermediate members which can spread the clamping force over a large area.

13.11 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and load fluctuations.

14.0 CURRENT DENSITY:

The transformer shall be so designed that the current density at any tap should not exceed 250 Amp./cm. Sq. in HV and regulating winding and 200Amp./cm. Sq. in LV winding. The purchaser shall be at liberty to inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight of copper, insulation and overall weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor used for different windings shall also be checked during stage inspection to check the current density vis-à-vis guaranteed values.

15.0 INTERNAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS:

- 8 -

15.1 All metal parts of the transformer except individual core lamination, core blots and individual

clamping plates shall be maintained at a fixed potential. 15.2 The earthing connections shall have a minimum area of cross-section of 0.8 sq. cm. Except

connections inserted between the laminations and in close terminal connection with them which may have area of cross section of 0.2 sq. cm.

15.3 The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper strip.

The bottom clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following methods. (a) By connection through vertical tie-rods to the top structure. (b) By direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of the

core and windings. (c) By a connection to the top structure on the same side of the core and main earth

connection to the tank. 15.4 The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to clamping structure by a link connection from the top

yoke near the bridging pieces referred to in Cl.11.3 in the side of main earth. An inspection hatch shall be provided over the link in the tank cover.

15.5 For the individual insulated section of the magnetic circuit separate links shall be provided.

The bridged construction as per C1.11.3 shall not be taken as being of sectional construction.

16.1 TANK CONSTRUCTION : 16.1.1 The tank shall be fabricated of a suitable grade steel and strong enough to allow the lifting

of complete transformer with oil by means of a crane or jacks and transported to site without over-straining the joints etc.

16.1.2 The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 100.64 kNm2 (760 mm of

Hg.) 16.1.3 The base shall be so designed as to allow the transformer to be moved by skidding without

any injury. 16.1.4 All channeled constructions and stiffeners shall be designed to avoid retention of water. 16.1.5 The tank construction shall be free of air pockets. Where such pockets cannot be avoided,

vent pipes of 15-mm internal diameter shall be provided to vent gases into the main expansion pipes. In case of short branch pipes, however, minimum diameter may be taken as 6mm.

16.1.6 All joints other than those, which may have to be broken, shall be welded. When required

they shall be double welded. All bolted joints to the tank shall be fitted with suitable oil tight gaskets, which shall give satisfactory service under the operating conditions and guaranteed temperature rise conditions. Special attention shall be given to the methods of making hot oil tight joints between the tank and the cover and also, between the cover and the bushings and all other out-lets to ensure that the joints can be remade satisfactorily at site and with ease by semi-skilled labour.

16.1.7 Suitable lifting lugs for lifting the transformer filled with oil shall be provided on the tank.

- 9 -

16.1.8 Four jacking lugs shall be provided to enable the transformer complete with oil to be lifted or lowered by means of jacks. The lugs shall be fitted at a minimum height (excluding under base if detachable) of 300mm for transformer upto 10 tonnes weight and of 500 mm for transformer above 10 tonnes weights.

16.1.9 The transformer shall be provided with detachable steel flanged wheels of 250 mm dia and

suitable for moving transformer complete with oil. These shall be bi-directional and mounted on swivels which may be turned through 900 when the tank is jacked up and capable of being locked in position paralled to and at right angles to the longitudinal axis. The wheel be suitable for standard gauge track of 1676mm.

16.1.10 The Transformer tank should be designed in such a way that over all length of transformer

does not exceed 7 meters. 16.2 TANK COVER: 16.2.1 The tank cover shall be of bolted type and of adequate strength so as not to distort, when

lifted. Suitable inspection cover shall be provided with lifting arrangements to give access to bushings, winding connections or testing the earth connections. The weight of each inspection cover shall not exceed 25 Kg.

16.2.2 Pockets shall be provided in the position of Max. oil temperature at CMR for fitting a

thermometer and for bolts of oil and winding temperature indicators. The thermometer pockets shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent ingress of water.

16.2.3 Suitable No. of jacking bolts shall be provided on tank cover, inspection covers/windows

including OLTC. 16.3 CONSERVATOR TANK, OIL GUAGE AND BREATHER : 16.3.1 An adequate conservator tank complete with sump and drain valves shall be provided in

such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the transformer. 16.3.2 If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator, this extension shall

be atleast 25mm. 16.3.3 One end of the conservator shall be bolted type to facilitate cleaning. 16.3.4 The conservator shall be provided with a magnetic oil level gauge. 16.3.5 The oil connections from the transformer tank to the conservator shall be at rising angle of 3

to 9 degrees to the horizontal upto Buchholz relay. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be 80 mm. the buchholz relay will have suitable valves on its both side so as to facilitate its testing at site as well as cut off oil supply to the transformer.

16.3.6 The conservator shall be provided with oil preservation system, which should be suitable

either to remove moisture continuously from air entering the air space with which they are connected or may not allow direct contact of atmospheric air with oil during operation, in addition to silica gel breather.

- 10 -

16.4 VALVES : 16.4.1 The transformers shall be provided with a filter valve of 50 mm size mounted on top of the

main tank oil circulations and one drain valve of 80 mm size with plug. The conservator shall have drain plug of 25 mm size.

16.4.2 Three robust sampling valves with spouts suitable for taking samples of top middle and

bottom oil shall be provided. The top and middle sampling valves shall be brought down by internal pipe connections. Suitable nameplates shall be affixed to the sampling valves. The sampling device shall not be fitted on the filter valve.

16.4.3 Two – air release plug of 15 mm shall be provided. 16.4.4 Plugs shall be supplied for all valves opening to atmosphere. 16.4.5 All valves shall comply with the latest edition of IS:3639. 16.5 PRESSURE RELIEF DEICES:-

A suitable pressure relief device of 6” dia shall be provided on the main tank and of 3” dia shall be provided on OLTC for rapid release of any pressure in transformers which may endanger the equipment. The device(s) shall operate at static pressure of less than hydraulic test pressure for transformers tank OLTC chamber. If the device is mounted on tank cover, it shall be fitted with a skirt projecting 25 mm inside the tank and of such construction as to avoid gas accumulation. In addition to pressure relief device(s) the provision of explosion vent should also be made and the diaphragm shall be situated above max. oil level.

16.6 EARTHING TERMINAL:- 16.6.1 Two earthing pads suitable for connecting 50x8 mm mild steel flat shall be provided at

positions close to the two diagonally opposite bottom corners of tank. These grounding terminal shall be suitable for bolted connection. Two earthing terminal shall also be provided each on marshalling box an any other equipment mounted separately.

16.7 JOINTS AND GASKETS:- 16.7.1 All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of granulated cork bonded with synthetic

rubber. Metal tops shall be provided for preventing over compression wherever compressible gaskets are provided.

16.8 RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES:- 16.8.1 Each transformer shall carry a diagram plate showing internal connections, voltage vector

relationship of different windings, plan view of the transformers showing physical relationship of the terminals and no load voltage for each tap.

16.8.2 Each transformers shall be provided with a rating plate & diagram as specified in IS:2026. 16.8.3 I. R. values along with oil temperature at the time of testing at manufacturer’s works shall

be indicated on rating plate or separate plate, to be provided on transformers. 16.9 THERMOSYPHON FILTER ARRANGEMENT

Thermosyphon filter arrangement shall be provided on the transformer for preserving the quality of Transformer Oil. The filter assembly shall be mounted on the Transformer as well

- 11 -

as ground supported and connected with pipes and shut off valves. Suitable instructions required to be followed for commissioning, dismantlement & maintenance of the filter arrangement, re-generation and storage of the adsorbent etc. must be included in the instruction manual. A detailed drawing showing internal arrangement, shall also be required to be submitted. Suitable capacity pump (alongwith motor) shall also be provided to boost circulation of oil. The pump and motor should not be in main pipe line. It should be in bypass pipe line having suitable valve to isolate from main pipe line. The main pipe line should have two shut off valves at the bottom.

NOTE : - The pump and motor should be weather proof(Flow well Type).

The oil & sorbent capacity required in the Thermosyphon Filter is as under : - (i) Quantity of oil 2.0% of total oil by weight. (ii) Quantity of adsorbent 1.25% of total oil by weight. 17.0 COOLING PLANT:- 17.1 Detachable radiators shall be fitted on the main tank with machined flanged outlet and inlet.

Each radiator shall be provided with 19 mm drain plug at bottom and 19 mm air release plug at the top. Valves shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to radiators.

17.2 In case separate cooler banks are used, they shall be suitable for mounting on a flat

concrete base. These shall be provided with a valve (25mm) at each point of connection to the transformers tank, removable blanking plates to blank off main oil connections to each cooler. Thermometer pockets with captive screwed cap at inlet and outlet of each separate cooler, filter value at top and bottom and air release plug of 15 mm shall be provided.

17.3 The motor blowers shall be direct driven suitable for continuous out door operation and

complete with necessary air dusting. These shall be mounted independently from the radiator and in case, these are radiator mounting type use shall be made of some anti-vibration means. Care shall be taken that the lower unit is capable of being removed without disturbing the radiator structure. The blades shall be suitably painted and shall not be of hollow sections. Suitably painted wire mesh guards with mesh not greater than 25 mm shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with the blades.

17.4 MOTORS:- 17.4.1 The motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed weatherproof type suitable for direct

starting and for continuous running from 415/240 volts, three phase/single phase 50 HZ supply. The motors shall comply with IS as applicable for continuous rated machine.

17.4.2 All motors shall be capable of continuous operation at frequency 50 Hz with variation of “5%

and 415/240 V AC” 10% variation of the normal voltage without injurious over heating. 17.4.3 All motors shall have ball or roller bearing with hexagonal nipples for greasing. In case of

vertical spindle, motor shall have bearing capable of withstanding thrust, due to weight of the moving parts.

17.4.4 Varnished cambric or glass insulator shall be used for connections from stator winding to

the terminal suitable for external wiring. The motor terminals shall be of stud type and totally enclosed.

- 12 -

17.5 COOLER CONTROL:- 17.5.1 Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a 3 pole electrically operated

contractor with control gear for motor operation by hand and automatically through winding temperature indicator. Provision shall be made for over load protection but no volt release coil shall not be provided.

17.5.2 All connection shall be so arranged as to allow either individual or collective operation of the

motors. Alarm indication (audio and visual) for failure of fans and to indicate failure of power supply shall be provided.

17.5.3 The control equipment shall be installed in the marshalling box as specified in CL:23 in a

readily accessible position. 17.5.4 The alarm indication for failure of power supply and failure of individual fans be provided

through independent non trip alarm scheme to be wired on the remote tap change control cubicle conforming to the following:-

i) The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be accompanied

by a flag indication on the concerned auxiliary relay. ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp, which will not reset until the

fault has been cleared. iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing ‘Accept’ push button. If, after

canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault persists the buzzer shall be suppressed.

iv) If after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, some other fault takes place, the alarm accompanied by flat indication on appropriate auxiliary relay shall take place.

v) If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same fault appears or some other fault take place, the alarm, flag indication and non-trip lamp indication shall reappear as usual.

vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of push button and resetting of visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button.

vii) Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at frequent intervals.

viii) The equipment shall be suitable for 220 Volt DC operation. Static facia annunciator conforming to the foregoing requirements of non-trip alarm scheme too would be acceptable.

18.0 VOLTAGE CONTROL (ON LOAD TYPE) : 18.1 The transformers shall be provided with voltage control equipment of the tap changing type

for varying its effective transformation ratio while the transformers are on loan and without producing phase displacement.

18.2 Equipment for ‘local’ an ‘remote’ electrical and ‘local’ manual operation shall be provided

and shall comply with the following conditions. Local/remote switch may be housed in remote control panel or in tap changer drive mechanism.

18.2.1 It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating gear in use. 18.2.2 It shall not be possible for any two electric controls to be in operation at the same time.

- 13 -

18.2.3 The equipment suitable for supervisory control and indication on a multi way switch, make-before break. having one fixed contact for each tap position, shall be provided and wired to the tap changer drive gear. This switch shall be provided in addition to any, which may be required for remote tap change position indication purpose. Supervisory indication shall also be provided in the form of contacts to close on. “Tap change incomplete” condition. All other components of the supervisory gear, if required be specified separately.

18.2.4 Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only. The control switch shall be returned to the ‘neutral’ position between successive operations.

18.2.5 All Electrical control switches on the local operation gear shall be clearly labeled in a

suitable manner to indicate the direction of tap changing. 18.2.6 The local control switches shall be mounted, in the drive gear housing. 18.3 The equipment shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change has commenced,

it shall be competed independent to the operation of the control relays or switches. In case of failure of the auxiliary supply while the tap change is in progress or any other contingency such as stuck tap changer, adequate means shall be provided to safe guard the transformers and its auxiliary equipment.

18.4 Suitable apparatus shall be provided for each transformer to give indications as follows:- 18.4.1 To give indication, mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote control

cubicle of the position of tap in use. 18.4.2 To give an indication at the remote control cubicle that a tap change is in progress, by

means of an illuminated lamp. 18.5 For remote control, the switches, tap position indicator, etc shall be supplied duly mounted

on remote control cubicle. 18.6 All relays and operating devices shall be operated correctly at any voltage between the

limits specified in the relevant ISS. 18.7 The tap changing mechanism shall be mounted in the oil tank or compartment mounted in

an accessible position on the transformer. 18.8 Any non-oil filled compartment shall be adequately ventilated, Thermostatically controlled

heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism chamber and in the marshalling box. All contactors & auxiliary relay coils or other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due to condensation, fungi etc.

18.9 The tap changer contacts which are not used for making or breaking current like separate

selector switch contacts inside main transformer tank where tap changer construction permits such as arrangement. In case of on load tap changer having separate compartment for selector contacts the oil in such compartment shall be maintained under conservator head by means of pipe connection from the highest point of the chamber to the conservator. Such pipe connection shall be controlled by suitable valve and shall be arranged so that any gas leaving the chamber will pass into the gas oil actuated relay. A separate buchholz relay may be provided for this compartment.

18.10 It shall not be possible for the oil in these compartments of the tap change equipment which

contain contacts used for making or breaking current, to mix with the oil in the compartments containing contacts and not used for making or breaking current.

- 14 -

18.11 Any ‘DROP DOWN’ tanks associated with the tap changing apparatus shall be fitted with

guide rods to control the movement during lifting or lowering operations. The guide rods shall be so designed as to take support of the associated tank when in the fully lowered position with oil. Lifting gear fitted to ‘Drop Down’ tanks shall include suitable device to prevent run-away during lifting & lowering operations. They shall be provided with adequate breathing arrangement. The tap changer shall be mounted in such a way that the cover of the transformer can be lifted without removing connections between windings and tap changer.

18.12 Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall be

provided with a suitable direct reading oil gauge. 18.13 The alternating supply for electrical operation of the control and indicating gear shall be

standard 415 Volts, three-phase, 3 Wire, 50 HZ. alongwith 240 Volts single phase, 2 wire 50 HZ, subject to a variation of + 5 percent so that the equipment offered can withstand variation in AC.

18.14 Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism and except

where modified in clause 18.15 shall be directly connected in the circuit of the operating motor. In addition a mechanical stopper or other approved device shall be provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism under any condition.

18.15 Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor provided that a

mechanical de-clutching mechanism is incorporated. 18.16 Thermal devices or other means like motor circuit breakers with shunt trip coil shall be

provided to protect the motor and control circuits. All relays , switches, fuses, etc. shall be mounted in the marshalling box or driving gear housing. These shall be clearly marked for purpose of identification. They shall withstand the viberation associated with tap changer gear operation.

18.17 The control circuits shall operate at 110V single phase to be supplied from a transformer

having a ratio of 415 0r 240/55-0-55 V with the center point earthed through a removable link mounted in tap changer drive.

18.18 The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving satisfactory

service under conditions to be met in service including frequent operation. 18.19 A five-digit counter shall be fitted to the tap changing mechanism to indicate the number of

operations completed by the equipment. 18.20 A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism

chamber, where applicable. 18.21 The indigenous make OLTC suitable for 66 kV voltage class & current rating 200-300 Amp.

should be duly. Type tested from CPRI or other Govt. Test House or reputed lab abroad to the extent the facilities of Type test available in CPRI.

- 15 -

19.0 PARALLEL OPERATION: 19.1 In addition to individual control of tap changer, provision shall be made to enable parallel

operation of the tap changer when one unit is running in parallel with another similar unit of same rating.

19.2 Suitable selector switch and controls shall be provided so that any transformer of the group

can at a time be selected as master, follower or independent. Arrangement shall be made that only one of the transformers can be selected as master at a time.

19.3 An out of step device shall an indicating lamp be provided for each transformer indicating

out of step condition by an indicating lamp and buzzer. It shall be arranged to prevent further tap changing when transformers in a group operating in parallel control are one tap out of step.

20.0 BUSHING INSULATORS AND TERMINALS: 20.1 Transformer shall be fitted with bushing insulators as follows:-

L.V. Bushing : 36 kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 2000 Amp. rating with suitable arcing horns. LV-N Bushing: 36 kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 2000 Amp. rating but without arcing horns. HV Bushing: 72.5 kV class. Condenser bushing of 800 Amp. rating with arcing horns. HV-N Bushing: 36 kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 630 Amp. rating but without arcing horns.

20.2 The characteristics of the bushings shall be in accordance with IS: 2099 and IS: 3347.

20.3 The bushing insulators except for neutral bushing shall be provided with adjustable arcing

horns and the bidder shall furnish calibration gap to decide actual gap setting. 20.4 A continuous flexible pull through lead suitably sweated to the end of winding copper shall

be connected to the connector in the helmet of the 66 kV Bushing. The bushings may be filled with oil, which may not be in communication with the oil in transformer.

20.5 All porcelain shall be free from defects and thoroughly vitrified with a smooth, hard and

uniform brown glaze. It should be capable of satisfactory use under the climatic conditions as specified in clause-3.0.

20.6 In case of paper insulation care shall be taken to prevent ingress of moisture and a final

coat of non-hygroscopic varnish shall be given to them. 20.7 All clamps and fittings made of malleable iron or steel shall be galvanized as per IS: 2629.

The bushing flanges shall not be of re-entrant shape, which may trap air. 20.8 Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied suitable for single 0.4 Sq. inch ACSR

Zebra conductor for HV side, LV Neutral & HV Neutral. For LV side the terminal connectors shall be suitable for triple 0.4 sq. inch ACSR ZEBRA conductor. The take off for H.V & L.V connectors will be Vertical and for H.V Neutral and L.V. Neutral, it should be suitable for horizontal take off.

- 16 -

The connectors shall have six number bolts provided with check nuts & washers. The connectors shall have rating corresponding to those equipment or higher and shall be designed most liberally with a higher factor of safety to comply in all respects with temperatures rise. Resistance, tensile strength short-circuit withstand capability tests as specified in IS: 5561-1970 or amendment thereof (Latest edition). Aluminum alloy used in the manufacture of bimetallic connectors shall conform to designation Grade 4600 of IS: 617-1975. The steel bolts, nuts washers and check nuts shall be hot dip galvanized marked with ISI certification mark or of GKW make.

21.0 TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICES: 21.1 All transformers shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating oil

temperature. The indicator shall be fitted with a pointer to register maximum temp recorded and adjustable set of mercury contact for alarm and trip.

21.2 In addition, all the transformer shall be provided with a dial type Hot Spot winding

temperature indicator in HV and LV winding. The indicator shall have a pointer to register maximum temperature reached and four sets of adjustable mercury contacts for alarm trip for automatic control of fans. The static remote repeater (for winding temperature indicator) suitable for flush mounting shall be installed on remote tap change control cubicle.

21.3 The temperature indicators shall be housed in marshalling box. 21.4 The alarm (mercury) contact of WTI & OTI shall be adjustable between 500C to 1000C

where as their trip (mercury) contacts shall be adjustable between 600C and 1200C. The temperature differential between opening & closing of these mercury contacts shall not be more than 100C.

21.5 The mercury contacts used for controlling cooling plant motors shall be adjustable to close

between 500C and 1000C. The temperature differential between opening & closing of this mercury contact shall be between 100C to 150C .

21.6 All contacts should be accessible on removal of the cover adjustable to scale. It shall also

be possible to move the pointers by hand for checking the operation of contacts and associated equipment.

21.7 In addition each transformer shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating

the ambient temperature. 22.0 GAS AND OIL ACTUATED RELAYS: 22.1 The transformer shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay fitted with alarm and trip

contacts for main tank & a oil surge relay for its OLTC as per IS 3637. 22.2 Each such relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible connection for checking

relay operation. 22.3 A machined surface shall be provided on top of checking mounting angles in the pipe cross-

level of relay and its setting.

- 17 -

22.4 The pipe work shall be such as to allow any gas formed in the tank to pass through the relay. The oil circuit through the relay shall not form a parallel delivery path with any circulating oil pipe, nor shall be tied into or connected through the pressure relief vent.

22.5 Adequate clearance between oil pipe work and live metal parts shall be provided. 23.0 MARSHALING BOX : 23.1 A sheet steel (of 10 SWG size) vermin proof well ventilated and weather proof marshaling

box of suitable construction shall be provided for the transformer auxiliary apparatus. The box shall have domed or sloping roofs. Ventilation louvers, suitably padded with felt shall also be provided. It shall be painted as per Cl.5.14.

23.2 The marshaling box shall accommodate temperature indicators. Local electrical control of

tap changer (if same cannot be housed in motor drive housing.), control & protection equipment for cooling plant, terminal boards and gland plants for cable etc. The equipment shall be mounted on panels and panels wiring shall be done at the back for interconnections.

23.3 The temperature indicators shall be mounted at about 1600mm from ground level. 23.4 A metal clad heater with thermostat, controlled by a waterproof rotary switch on the outside

of the both, shall be provided. 23.5 The incoming cables shall enter from the bottom with gland plate not less than 450mm from

the base of the box. Care shall be taken to avoid ingress of water from the cable trench. 24.0 CONTROL CONNECTIONS, INSTRUMENTS WIRING, TERMINAL BOARD AND FUSES: 24.1 All cables and wiring shall be suitable for use under the conditions as specified in Clause

3.0. Any wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall be of oil resisting insulation. The bare ends of stranded wire shall be sweated together to prevent oil from creeping along the wire.

24.2 The instrument and panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non-rusting metal cleats of limited

compression type. 24.3 The box wiring shall be as per relevant ISS. All wiring shall be of stranded copper of 660V

grade and size not less than 4 sq. mm. For CT leads and not less than 2.5 sq. mm. for other connections. The panels wires and multi core cable shall bear ferrules of white insulation material with indelible marking in black and as per relevant ISS. Same ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits. Double ferrules may be provided where a change in number is required.

24.4 Stranded wires shall be terminated with tinned Ross Courtney terminals, washers or

crimped tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be used for each wire. Wire shall not be jointed/tied between terminal points.

24.5 Where apparatus is mounted on panels all metal cases shall be separately earthed by copper wire of strip not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The screens of screened pairs of multi core cables shall be earthed at one end of the cable only.

24.6 All terminal boards shall be of stud-type & mounted obliquely towards the rear door and

these boards shall be spaced not less than 100mm apart. Suitable insulation barriers shall

- 18 -

be provided between adjacent connections. No live metal shall be exposed at the back of terminal boards.

24.7 All fuses shall be of cartridge type and fuses and links shall be properly labelled. 25.0 Losses:-

The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender for OFAF rating (at full load at 75 deg. C) which shall be less than:- Sr. No. Type of Losses 31.5 MVA, 66/11 KV T/F 1 No Load Losses 17.70 KW (Max) 2 Load Losses 118.00 KW(Max) 3 Auxiliary Losses 2.00 KW (Max)

25.1 Noise level : 80 dB

Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than max. 80 dB. 26.0 TESTS: 26.1 ROUTINE TESTS:

All routine tests shall be carried out on each transformer as per IS-2026/IEC-76.

26.2 TYPE TEST: Following type tests and over load withstand capacity test (as per IEC-354) shall be carried out on one of units ordered on the successful bidder as per IEC-76/ISS:2026. i. Temp. rise test (Along with DGA test before and after temp. rise test). ii. Impulse voltage withstand test with chopped impulse on any one phase. iii. Power drawn by cooling fans/oil pumps as perISS:2026.

26.3 In addition, the following tests shall be carried out on the transformer tank. 26.3.1 OIL LEAKAGE TEST:

All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness by being completely filled with oil of viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil to IS:335 at ambient temperature and subjected to a pressure equal to normal pressure plus 35KN/M2 (5Ibs/Sq. inch.) measured at the base of the tank. This pressure shall be maintained for period not less than 12 hours, during which period no leakage shall occur.

26.3.2 Following tests shall be carried out on each Transformer as reference test. i. Measurement of tan delta and capacitance of T/F Winding and bushings at 5 kV &

10 kV. ii. Magnetic balance test. iii. Magnetising current at low voltage. iv. Measurement of percentage impedance at all taps at low voltage.

- 19 -

26.3.3 TRANSFORMER OIL : The bidder shall indicate in detail facility available at his works for carrying out various tests on transformer oil as per ISS:335 (Latest) and oxidation stability test as per AS TM:D-1934. It is contemplated that the oil test as per ISS:335 shall be carried out on the transformer oil at the works of the transformer manufacturer before and after pouring of oil. New transformer oil before pouring in tanks, should conform to values specified in ISS-335/93 and after pouring in the tank but before energisation. The transformer oil should conform ISS:1866/83 Amendment No. 1 issued in December, 1987.

26.3.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST Short circuit test in accordance with clause 16 of ISS-2026 or latest edition shall be got conducted on one of the units at any test Agencies where facilities exist in the presence of Purchaser's representative .However, in case of those manufacturers who have already got short circuit test in accordance with Cl. 16 of ISS-2026 or latest edition conducted during the last 5 years on same design and capacity of the Transformer, fresh short circuit test is not required to be conducted. The bidder in such a case shall submit the copy of type test report along with the bid. If this test is not conducted by the firm earlier, then charges for this test shall be borne by the bidder.

26.3.5 The purchaser reserves the right to have any other, reasonable test carried out at his

expense either before shipment or at site to ensure that the transformer complies with the requirement of this specification.

26.4 STAGE INSPECTION :

The purchaser reserves the right for stage inspection of one or all the transformers at following stages, to ensure that the internal details are in accordance with the data/information supplied, for which the supplier would give 30 days prior notice and the supplier would not go ahead with further production schedule without obtaining concurrence from the purchaser.

(a) CORE :

i. Measurement of flux density. ii. No load loss measurement by providing dummy coils at 90%, 100% and

110% rated voltage and frequency. iii. Tests on CRGO sample taken from the core shall be carried out for carlite

test (Resistance Measurement) watt loss test, lamination thickness & ageing tests.

iv. Physical inspection for quality of workmanship. (b) WINDINGS :

i. Measurement of cross-sectional area for current density. ii. Measurement of weight of bare copper/cover by resistance methods. iii. Test may be carried out on sample of copper for assessing its quality.

(c) TANK : i. Vacuum Test

One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subjected to vacuum pressure of 100.64 kN (760 mm of Hg.). the tanks to be designed for full vacuum shall be tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/M2 (25mm of Hg.) for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall not exceed the values given below without affecting the performance of the transformer.

- 20 -

Horizontal length of flat plate(mm). Permanent deflection (mm) Upto & including 750 5.0 751-1250 6.5 1251-1750 8.0 1751-2000 9.5 2001-2250 11.0 2251-2500 12.5 2501-3000 16.0

above 3000 19.0 ii. PRESSURE TEST:

One transformer out of the lot shall be subjected to the pressure corresponding to twice the normal head of oil or normal pressure plus 35KN/M2 (which ever is lower) measured at the base of the tank and maintained for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after removal of excess pressure shall not exceed the figures specified as above.

(d) RADIATORS:

Radiators shall be routine type tested at sub-supplier’s works as per relevant standard. Test reports are required to be supplied at the time of final inspection.

NOTE: (a) The insulation resistance values of the transformer windings will be recorded at the

time of carrying out routine tests, for 20 seconds, one minute, two minutes with the help of 5000V motorised meggar (preferably EVERSHED/AVO & VIGNOLE MAKE). The polarisation index values (ratio of 120/20-Sec. Value) will be accordingly calculated and recorded in the test certificates and it should not be less than 1.5.

(b) Dissolved gas analysis test shall be got carried out before and after heat run test at

CPRI Bangalore. (c) Capacitance and Tan Delta values for each transformer and condenser bushings

will be taken and recorded in the test certificates at 5 kV & 10 kV. Insulation resistance value of condenser bushings shall also be recorded.

(d) Lightening impulse test with the chopped wave applications as per clause 13 of

IS:2026/1981 (Part-III) amended upto date. This test will be carried out on one of the limbs of HV and LV winding with positive polarity.

(e) The tenderer should clearly indicate the testing facilities available with them and

tests, which are to be arranged outside. Supplier shall submit in-house test certificates at lest 15 days in advance for final testing of T/F. for testing T/F : all measuring instruments shall be of highest efficiency and best quality. These shall be got calibrated from NPL/Govt. Agency and be got sealed by calibrating agency. HVPN reserves the right to calibrate the instruments in the manner it desires. Losses shall be measured with 3-wattmeter method only. Resistance shall be taken with Double-Kelvin Bridge. Losses can be measured directly from CTs and PTs and not through

- 21 -

the panel. Ratio of the measuring instrument shall be such that the multiplying factor is the minimum. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the purchaser before despatching the material. Test certificates in quadruplicate will be submitted to the purchaser for approval. No material shall be despatched without prior inspection and approval of test certificates unless otherwise agreed to. Type and routine test certificates of all bought out items from recognised testing agency shall be submitted for approval before commencing supplies. OLTC scheme including the master follower functioning shall also be checked. Only fully assembled transformer including mounting of radiators shall be put-up for inspection.

27.0 DRAWINGS :

27.1 The following drawings shall be supplied as part of the tender. 27.1.1 Outline dimensional drawing of transformer and accessories. 27.1.2 Bushing and terminal connectors drawings. 27.2 The successful bidder shall submit final version of drawings complete in all respects as

detailed in the following sub-clauses, in quadruplicate, within four weeks of placement of order for Purchaser's approval. The Purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the Supplier within four weeks of their receipt. The manufacturer shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and resubmit the same for purchaser’s approval within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such duly revised drawings will be approved by the purchaser within two weeks of their receipt. After receipt of purchaser’s approval to drawings, the manufacturer will submit a set of re-producibles of all the approved drawings and will also supply five sets of all approved drawings and five sets of manual of instructions per transformer to sub-station Design Directorate, HVPNL, Panchkula.

One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be supplied along with each transformer without which the supply will not be considered as complete supply.

27.2.1 Outline general arrangement drawings showing plan, front elevation & side elevation with

all fittings and accessories etc. The following information must be specifically included on drawings.

(a) Make of transformer oil. (b) Electrical clearances, minimum as well as actual. (c) The no. of radiator headers, number of radiator element in each header. (d) Small sketch showing un-tanking details. (e) Thickness of transformer tank bottom, sides & top plates. (f) Type, shade and shade No. and thickness of transformer paints. (g) Roller, rail gauge sketch. (h) Weight of oil, bare copper weight windings core, un-tanking mass, transportation

mass and dimensions etc. 27.2.2 Detailed drawing of bushings showing plan, elevation, terminal details, mounting details

make and type number incorporating electrical characteristics, description of various parts, total creepage & protected creepage distance, weight of oil, total weight of bushing, dimensions, short time current rating etc.

- 22 -

27.2.3 Drawing showing HV & LV windings with arrangement of insulation and terminal connections.

27.2.4 Schematic control and wiring diagram for auxiliary equipment like OLTC control gear, cooler

control gear, marshaling kiosk. Detailed write-up for schematic shall also be supplied. 27.2.5 Combined rating & diagram plate. 27.2.6 Valve schedule plate. 27.2.7 Core assembly drawing with flux density calculations. 27.2.8 Interconnection diagram between OLTC panel, drive mechanism and marshalling kiosk. 27.2.9 Detailed calculations showing short circuit withstand capacity due to radial and axial forces

during short circuit also calculation for thermal withstand capability during short circuit will be supplied.

27.2.10 Cable arrangement on the transformers. 27.2.11 Drawings showing connection of HV, LV lead with the respective bushing and their place

of storage during transportation.

- 23 -

FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

Each transformer shall be complete with the following fittings and accessories: 1. One 150mm (16”) dial type indicating thermometer (OTI) of robust construction mounted

on the side of the transformer at a convenient height to read the temperature of oil and fitted with alarm and trip contacts. Provision in the OTI for connection to repeater in RTCC shall also be provided.

2. 2 Nos. 150mm dial type winding hot spot temperature indicators (WTI) one each placed in

HV & LV winding, as described below. “It shall be indicating type responsive to the combination of top oil temperature and winding current calibrated to follow the hot spot temperature of transformer winding. The device shall have on additional pointer to register the highest temperature reached. Each winding temperature indicator should have four sets of contacts. Two contacts of one of the WTI shall be used for trip and alarm purpose, wiring of which will go to the main control and relay panel of the transformer (External control cables from the marshalling box to the C&R panel to be provided by the purchaser).

Third set of contacts shall be spare. Provision in the WTI for connection to repeater in RTCC shall also be provided. The contacts of each WTI should be adjustable to close between 600C to 120 0C and shall reopen when the temperature has fallen by 100C-150C. However, supplier should mention in the their manuals the actual adjustable settings of these contacts.” Repeater for both WTIs shall also be provided in the RTCC Panel.

3. One conservator alongwith 2 no. shut off valves, oil surge relay, breather connecting pipe etc. exclusively for OLTC.

4. One pressure relief valve/device (PRV) of minimum 6 inch size for main tank and

1 No. PRV for OLTC of size 3 inch (approx.) with provision for trip contacts. 5. Inspection covers with jacking bolts in the top cover plate of the tank. 6. One drain valve with plug or blanking flange at the bottom of the tank size 80 mm. 7. One filter valve each at top & bottom of transformer tank size 50mm 8. Three oil sampling valves for taking samples of top, middle and bottom oil. 9. Set of lifting lugs/jacking lugs and eyebolts on all parts for ease of handling. 10. One double float gas/oil surge detecting (Buchholz) relay in the pipe connecting the

conservator with tank, complete with alarm and tripping contacts to detect accumulation of gas and sudden changes of oil pressure, complete with shut off valves on conservator side as well as tank side. Th size of shut off valve shall be 80 mm.

- 24 -

11. Two grounding terminals on diagonally opposite bottom corners of tank. However, if provided on the length side of tank, then these grounding terminal shall be out side the rail gauge.

12. a. One ONAN cooling equipment comprising of suitable radiators with shut off

valves, air release and drain plugs. One ONAF cooling equipment comprising of fan motors with auto & manual control.

13. Skids and pulling eyes on both sides. 14. One marshalling box housing dial type thermometers for winding and oil temperature

indicators, heater, fan, control switches with fan fail alarm and complete wiring and local/auto selector switch, and supply isolating switches with HRC fuses.

15. Two thermometer pockets for mercury in glass thermometer. 16. A set of universal type bi-metallic multi-bolt double grooved conductor clamps each capable

of receiving single ACSR Zebra/ double ACSR ZEBRA conductor respectively for HV side LV side.

17. Suitable bi-metallic flexible connectors for neutral terminals. 18. Suitable size bi-directional wheels for 1676 mm rail gauge in both direction-4 No. 19. One OLTC alongwith remote control panel with each transformer complete with wiring, oil

surge relay etc. a) OLTC conservator pipe and valve diameter should be 25mm. b) The height of RTCC panel should be 2312 mm & shade of paint should be of 631 of

IS:5. 20. The following plates in English shall be fixed to the transformer tank at about 1750-mm

above ground level: a) Rating Plate bearing data as specified in IS: 2026/1977. It must contain insulation

levels of various windings, impedance at tap 1/5/17 & short circuit duration. b) Terminal marking plate showing the internal connections and voltage vector

relationship of various windings in accordance with IS: 2026/1977 (Latest Edition). c) Valve schedule plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release

cocks/plugs. 21. A plate showing the rated no load voltage at various taps shall be affixed on the RTCC in

order to facilitate the operator in deciding the tap position on which the transformer is to be operated corresponding to the incoming voltage.

22. Oil conservator (for main tank) fitted with flexible separator (as oil preservative system)

complete with magnetic type oil level gauge, filling hole and cap, drain valve-size 19mm, shut off valve, inter connecting pipes etc. Magnetic type oil level gauge shall be provided with low oil level alarm contacts and a dial showing minimum, maximum and normal oil level. The gauge shall be readable from the transformer base level. Silica gel breather with oil seal, shall be fitted as already prescribed. Breather should be made of see through material. One drain pipe upto floor level with one valve may be provided.

23. One No. ladder with provision for anti-climbing. 24. Any other item which is not included above but it is essential for the satisfactory operation

of the equipment.

- 1 -

SECTION-4 CHAPTER-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

SURGE ARRESTORS (LIGHTNING ARRESTORS) 1.0 SCOPE: 1.1 This specification provides for the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage

testing, inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of Metal Oxide (gapless) 60 kV & 9 kV Surge Arrestors complete with discharge counter, insulating base and other accessories for all rating arrester except 9 kV surge arrester as specified hereunder.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and construction of

Surge Arrestors. However, Surge Arrestors shall conform in all respects to the high Standard of design and workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation upto Bidder's guarantee in a manner acceptable to HVPNL. The Arrestors offered shall be complete with all parts, necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply, irrespective of whether they are specifically brought out in the commercial order or not.

2.0 STANDARDS: 2.1 The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the latest editions and amendments available at

the time of supply, of the standards listed hereunder. ______________________________________________________________

Sl. Standard Title No. Ref. No. ______________________________________________________________ 1. IEC:99-4 Specification Part-4 for Surge Arrestors without gap for AC

system.

2. IS:3070 Specification for Lightning Arrestors (Part-III) for alternating current system

3. IS: 2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron

and steel. 4. IS: 2633 Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated

articles. 5. IS:5621 Specification for large hollow porcelain for use in electrical

installation. 6. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage

switchgear and control. 7. Indian Electricity Rules, 1956. ______________________________________________________________________________

- 2 -

Note:

i) For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used hereinafter shall have the meaning as per IEC/ISS specification.

ii) For the parameters of the Arrestor which are not specified in IEC specification for

Surge Arrestors, the provisions of IS: 3070 (Part-I) shall be applicable. 2.1 Surge Arrestors meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which

ensure equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other standards, salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specified standards shall be clearly brought out in the offer. Four (4) copies of the reference standards in English language shall be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:

As per section-1 Vol-II

3.1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:

The equipment offered under this specification shall be suitable for the following auxiliary power supplies.

a) Power Devices (like drive motors) 415V, 3 Phase, 4 wire 50 Hz, neutral grounded AC supply

b) AC Control and protective

devices, lighting fixtures, space heaters

240V, single space, 2 wire 50 Hz, neutral grounded AC supply

c) DC alarm,control and protective devices

220V, DC 2-Wire

Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the HVPNL at the terminal point for each equipment for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder’s scope shall include supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes, etc., The above supply voltages may vary as below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over entire range of voltages.

i) AC Supply-voltage+10%&-15% frequency + 5% ii) DC Supply-15% to +10%

4.0 SYSTEM PARAMETERS:

The Surge Arrestors offered under this specification shall conform to the parameters given below:

- 3 -

___________________________________________________________________ Sl. Particulars System Voltage (KV rms) No. 66 11 ___________________________________________________________________ 1. Nominal system voltage 66 11 (kV rms) 2. Highest system voltage 72.5 12 (kV rms) 3. 1.2/50 microsecond impulse voltage withstand level a. Transformers and 325 75 Reactors (kVp) b. Other equipment 325 75 and lines (kVp)

4. Minimum prospective 31.5 18.4 symmetrical fault current for 1 second at Arrestor location (kA rms) 5. Anticipated levels of temporary overvoltage and its duration

a) Voltage (p.u.) 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2

b) Duration (Seconds) 1/10 1/10 6. System frequency(Hz) --------------------- 50 ± 2.5 C/S ---------------------- 7. Neutral Grounding E.E* E.E* 8. Number of Phases ----------------------- Three -------------------- *E/E = Effectively earth __________________________________________________________________ 5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: 5.1 The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the technical requirements as per Annexure-II 5.2 The energy handling capability of each rating of Arrestor offered, supported by

calculations, shall be furnished in the offer. 5.3 The Surge Arrestors shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and arc diverting ports and

shall be tested as per the requirements of IEC specification for minimum prospective symmetrical fault current as specified in Clause 4.0 (4).

5.4 The grading ring on each complete Arrestor for proper stress distribution shall be

provided if required for attaining all the relevant technical parameters.

- 4 -

5.5 PROTECTIVE LEVELS: The basic insulation levels and switching impulse withstand levels of the lines and

equipment to be protected, have been specified in clause 4.0, "Principal Parameters". The protective characteristics of the Arrestors offered shall be clearly specified in the schedule of guaranteed technical particulars.

5.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 5.6.1 The materials and components not specifically stated in this specification but which are

necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment are deemed to be included in the scope of supply unless specifically excluded.

5.6.2 Unless otherwise brought out separately by the Bidder in the schedule of deviations the

Surge Arrestors offered shall conform to the specification scrupulously. All deviations from the specification shall be brought out in the schedule of deviations. The discrepancies between the specification and the catalogues or literature submitted as part of the offer shall not be considered as valid deviations unless specifically brought out in the schedule of deviations.

5.6.3 Any deviation which has not been specifically brought out in the schedule of deviations

of the Bid Proposal Sheets, shall not be given effect to. The deviations brought out in the schedule shall be supported by authentic documents, standards and other references.

5.6.4 Each individual unit of Surge Arrestor shall be hermetically sealed and fully protected

against ingress of moisture. The hermetic seal shall be effective for the entire life time of the Arrestor and under the service conditions as specified. The Bidder shall furnish sectional view of the Arrestor, showing details of sealing employed.

5.6.5 The Bidder shall furnish in the offer, a sectional view of pressure relief device employed

in the Surge Arrestors offered. 5.6.6 The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for hot line washing. 5.7 CONSTRUCTION: 5.7.1 All the units of Arrestors of same rating shall be inter changeable without adversely

affecting the performance. 5.7.2 The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for pedestal type mounting. 5.7.3 All the necessary flanges, bolts, nuts, clamps etc., required for assembly of complete

Arrestor with accessories and mounting on support structure to be supplied by the HVPNL, shall be included in Bidder's scope of supply.

5.7.4 The drilling details for mounting the Arrestor on HVPNL's support shall be supplied by the

Contractor. 5.7.5 The minimum permissible separation between the Surge Arrestor and any earthed object

shall be indicated by the Bidder in his offer. 5.8 PORCELAIN HOUSING:

- 5 -

5.8.1 All porcelain housings shall be free from lamination cavities or other flaws affecting the maximum level of mechanical and electrical strengths.

5.8.2 The porcelain shall be well vitrified and nonporous. 5.8.3 The Creepage distance of the Arrestor housing shall be as per Annexure-I. 5.8.4 The porcelain petticoat shall be preferably of self-cleaning type (Aerofoil design). The

details of the porcelain housing such as height, angle of inclination, shape of petticoats, gap between the petticoats, diameter (ID and OD) etc., shall be indicated by the Bidder in his offer in the form of a detailed drawing.

5.8.5 The Arrestor housing shall conform to the requirements of IEC/ISS specification. 5.9 GALVANISATION, NICKEL PLATING ETC.: 5.9.1 All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS:2629 as

amended from time to time., Tinned copper/brass lugs shall be used for internal wiring of discharge counter. Screws used for electrical connections shall be either made of brass or nickel plated.

5.9.2 Ground terminal pads and name plate brackets shall be hot dip galvanised. 5.9.3 The material shall be galvanised only after completing all shop operations. 5.10 ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS: 5.10.1 Discharge counters shall be provided for the Arrestors except for 9 kV Arresters The

discharge counter shall be provided with milli-ammeter for measuring the leakage current and shall not require any DC or AC Aux. supply. It shall be suitable for outdoor use. The installation of discharge counter shall not adversely affect the Arrestor performance.

5.10.2 The discharge counter shall register operation whenever lightning or any other

type of surge strikes the Surge Arrestor. 5.10.3 All necessary accessories and Earthing connection leads between the bottom of

the Arrestor and the discharge counter shall be in the Bidder's scope of supply. The connecting lead between discharge counter and Surge Arrestor shall be of copper flexible tape of size 25x4 mm and minimum of 1.5 meter length. The discharge counter shall be so designed that the readings of discharges recorded by the counter and the readings of milli-ammeter shall be clearly visible through an inspection window to a person standing on ground. The minimum height of HVPNL's support shall be 2.5 Mts. Terminal connector conforming to IS:5561 shall be supplied alongwith the arrester.

5.11 Each Surge Counter shall have terminals of robust construction for connection to

Earthing lead and these shall be suitably arranged so as to enable the incoming and outgoing connections to be made with minimum bends.

5.11.1 Suitable grounding terminal shall be provided for earthing of surge arrestors up to water

level. Proper functioning of the Surge counter with Surge Arrestor shall be ensured by the Contractor.

- 6 -

5.12 NAME PLATE:

The arrestor shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name plate indelibly marked with the following information:

1. Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd.

2. Order No.

3. Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification no. of the Arrestor being supplied.

4. Rated voltage.

5. Maximum continuous operating voltage.

6. Type.

7. Rated Frequency.

8. Nominal discharge current.

9. Long duration discharge class. 10. Pressure relief current in kA rms. 11. Year of manufacture. 6.0 TESTS: 6.1 TYPE TESTS: The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years

old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart. i) Insulation withstand test ii) Residual voltage test iii) Long duration current impulse withstand test iv) Operating duty test v) Pressure relief test vi) Test of arrestor dis-connector vii) Artificial pollution test on porcelain housed arrestors viii) Temperature cycle test on porcelain housed arrestors) ix) Porosity test on porcelain house arrestors x) Galvanising test on exposed ferrous metal parts

- 7 -

6.2 ROUTINE TESTS: As per quality assurance program (QAP).

6.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS: The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:3070 (PART-III) 1993 shall

be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL. i) Measurement of power frequency reference voltage ii) Lightening impulse residual voltage test ii) Partial discharge test

6.4 SURGE MONITOR

The following routine test shall be performed in the presence of HVPNL’s representative:

i) Tests for satisfactory operation of surge counter while discharging surges. ii) Test for correctness of leakage current meter before and after the passage of

surges. iii) Visual examination tests.

8.0 DOCUMENTATION: 8.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL approval. List of drawings:- i) General outline drawings of the complete Arrestors with technical parameters. ii) Drawing showing clearance from grounded and other live objects and between

adjacent poles of Surge Arrestors, required at various heights of Surge Arrestors. iii) Drawings showing details of pressure relief devices. iv) Detailed drawing of discharge counters along with the wiring and schematic

drawing of discharge counter and meter. v) Outline drawing of insulating base. vi) Details of grading rings, if used.

vii) Mounting details of Surge Arrestors. viii) Details of line terminal and ground terminals. ix) Volt-time characteristics of Surge Arrestors. x) Details of galvanising being provided on different ferrous parts.

- 8 -

xi) The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing such as ID, OD, thickness and insulator details such height, profile of petticoats, angle of inclination and gap between successive petticoats, total Creepage distance etc.,

NOTE: All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the

approval of drawings by HVPNL.

- 9 -

ANNEXURE - I (Surge Arrestors) SHEET 1 OF 3

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE (GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS

______________________________________________________________________ Sl. Particulars System voltage wise requirement of parameters No. 66 kV 11KV ______________________________________________________________________ 1. Rated Arrestor 60 9 Voltage 2. M.C.O.V. (kV rms) 49 7 3. Installation ----------------------- Outdoor ----------------------- 4. Class --------- ------------------ Station Class --------------------- 5. Type of cons- ------------------ ---------- Single Column, Single Phase---------- truction for 10 kA rated Arrestor. 6. Nominal discharge 10KA 10 kA current corres- ponding to 8/20 microsec wave shape (kA rms) 7. Min. discharge 5 KJ/kV (Referred to rated arrester voltage capability. corresponding to Min. discharge characteristics) 8. Type of mounting ------------------------------------------ Pedestal ------------------------- 9. Connection (Between phase P/E P/E to earth P/E)

(Between phase to phase P/P)

- 10 -

ANNEXURE - I (Surge Arrestors) SHEET 2 OF 3

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE (GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS

______________________________________________________________________ Sl. Particulars System voltagewise requirement of parameters No. 66 kV 11KV ______________________________________________________________________ 10. Long duration 3 1 discharge class 11. Max. Switching Surge 140 21 kV(P) Protective level voltage at 1000 Amp. 12. Max. residual voltage 170 25

kV(P) for nominal discharge current 10 KA with 8/20

micro second wave

13. Max.residual voltage 186 28 kV(P) steep fronted current impulse of 10 KA. 14. Minimum pros- 31.5 18.4 symmetrical fault current for pressure relief test (kA rms) 15. a) Terminal Connector -------------------Single Zebra------------------------ suitable for ACSR conductor size b) Take off vertical vertical 16. Voltage (kV rms) Rated voltage of the Arrestor (corona extinction)

- 11 -

ANNEXURE - I (Surge Arrestors) SHEET 3 OF 3

TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE (GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS

_____________________________________________________________________ Sl. Particulars System voltagewise requirement of parameters No. 66 kV 11KV 17. Maximum radio -------------------------- 500 ---------------------------- interference voltage (Microvolt)

when energised at MCOV 18. Whether insulating Yes yes base and discharge counter with milli-ammeter are required. 19. Minimum creepage 1813 300 distance of Arrestor housing (mm) ______________________________________________________________________

1

SECTION-4

CHAPTER-2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 kV SWITCHGEAR PANELS VACUUM TYPE

2000 AMP RATING

1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer's works before despatch, supply and delivery F.O.R. destination as per schedule of requirement (Annexure 'B') of Vacuum Type, 14 Panel 11 kV Switch boards having normal current rating of 2000 Amps. with rupturing capacity of 500 MVA.

2.0 STANDARDS:

The switchgear panels shall comply in all respects the requirement laid down in the latest editions of IS: 13118-1991, IS: 3427 & IS: 3231.

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:

3.1 Max. temperature 500C 3.2 Min. Temperature -2.50C 3.3 Max. relative humidity 100% 3.4 Min. relative humidity 26% 3.5 Average number of rainy days per Nearly 120 days annum. 3.6 Average annual rainfall 900mm 3.7 Average number of dust storm days 35 per annum. 3.8 Isoceraunic level 45 3.9 Max. wind pressure 195 kg/Sq.mt. 3.10 Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 mts.

4.0 TYPE & RATING:

The panels 11 kV switchgear panels shall comprise of 11 kV Vacuum Type

circuit breakers, instrument panels and instrument transformers etc. suitable for indoor use. The equipment shall be totally enclosed in a metal clad cubicle, dust and vermin proof with necessary isolation arrangement. Each panel shall be easily extensible on either side and should be complete with necessary internal copper connections, small wiring, L.T. fuses and supporting frame work with bolts to secure it to the floor. The Circuit Breakers shall be draw out type in horizontal position.

2

Principal parameters

The breakers shall have the following ratings : 4.1 Type Vacuum 4.2 No of poles 3

4.3 Nominal system voltage 11 kV

4.4 Highest system voltage 12 kV

4.5 Rated frequency 50 +/- 1.5 Hz

4.6 Rated continuous current 2000 Amp for incoming & 400 Amp

rating at an ambient for outgoing feeders. temp. as specified in IS : 13118-1991 (Latest edition)

4.7 Symmetrical breaking 500 MVA capacity

4.8 Impulse withstand test 75 kV (Peak) voltage

4.9 One minute power 28 kV (rms) frequency withstand test voltage

4.10 Short time current Not less than 26.2 kA current rating corresponding to 500 MVA for 1 sec.

4.11 System neutral Solidly earthed.

5.0 GENERAL DESIGN OF SWITCHGEAR PANELS : 5.1 OPERATING MECHANISM :

The vacuum type circuit breaker shall be draw out type & trip free. The VCBs shall be suitable for operation from 220 V DC auxiliary supply. The operating mechanism shall be motor operated spring charged type. There shall be provision(s) for manual charging of closing spring and emergency hand trip. The motor used for the purpose will be suitable for 240 V AC as well as for 220 V DC. The operating mechanism shall work satisfactorily at 85 % - 110 % of rated supply voltage. The VCB shall have 2 normally open & 2 normally-closed auxiliary contacts over & above the ones required for various control & supervision circuits.

3

5.2 INSTRUMENT PANELS :

Each unit shall have its own instrument panel provided at the top & complete with small wiring connections from relays, instrument transformers, metering instruments, indicating instruments, selector switches & circuit breaker control switch. All wiring shall be carried out by using stranded single annealed copper conductor insulated with poly vinyl chloride insulation suitable for 650 V service and in accordance with IS:732-1963. CT/PT circuit shall use wire of not less than 4.0 mm2 cross-sectional area whereas control/alarm/supervision circuit shall use wire of not less than 2.5 mm2 cross-sectional area. All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and, also will have no Tee-junction enroute. The connections shall be securely made with the help of connecting lugs duly crimped on to the copper conductor. The meters and relays shall be mounted in a convenient position so as to be readily accessible for inspection or repair. The terminal board provided in the instrument panel of VCBs will be made of moulded dielectric having brass studs, washers, holding nuts & locking nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connection studs shall project 6 mm from the lock nut surface. NO OTHER TYPE OF TERMINAL BOARD IS ACCEPTABLE. The panels shall have a degree of protection of IP-4x. The leads from metering CTs shall be directly terminated at TTB & there from at the KWH meter with a provision to seal TTB and KWH meter. The said CT leads will be concealed to prevent their tempering enroute. Similarly PT leads from secondary box of the PT to TTB & there from to energy meter including inter panel PT leads will also be concealed to prevent their tempering. The mode & extent of concealing the metering leads of CTs & PTs to prevent their tempering (by unscrupulous operating personnel) will be discussed & mutually agreed upon with the successful bidder(s). TTB used on the instrument panel should be suitable for front connections. Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the relays/switches mounted on the instrument panel and metal enclosed switchgear shall be done by a suitably sized copper conductor. Earth bus made of 25x3 mm bare copper flat will be extended through entire length of 11 kV switch-board with suitable provision to connect it to the sub-station earth at the extremities. The earthing arrangement will meet with the requirements laid down in IS : 3427 read with its latest amendment.

5.3 VACUUM INTERRUPTER :

The Vacuum interrupter of 12 kV minimum 26.2 kA short time current rating, 2000 Amp. normal current rating capable of withstanding minimum 100 full short circuit operations as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56. Vacuum Interrupters for incomers as well as outgoing shall be of same type. These vacuum interrupters shall be of approved make only.

4

5.4 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER :

The secondary voltage & current rating of the instrument transformers shall match with the metering or protective equipment. The CTs shall have ratio & accuracy class as mentioned in the schedule of requirement. The CTs shall be wound/ring type in accordance with their ratings. The terminal boards associated with differential CTs, REF CTs & over current / earth fault protection CTs will be of disconnecting type having short circuiting facility & thus facilitate secondary testing of concerned protective relay without disturbing the associated small wiring. Inter- changeability of housing of CTs from one panel to another must be ensured.

A resin cast potential transformer of ratio (11000/√3)/(110/√3) volts having

100 VA output per phase with accuracy class 1.0 as per ISS : 3156 (part-II)-1965 shall be provided on the incoming side of each panel set and shall be star/star connected.

The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers shall be earthed to the main earth bus referred to in the concluding paragraph of clause 5.2. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformers shall be avoided.

5.5 BUS - BARS:

All the panels shall be provided with one set of 3 phase 2000 Amps. heat shrunk PVC Sleeves insulated Main electrolytic copper bus bars for all switchboards and shall be connected in a separate moisture and vermin proof sheet metal chamber. The bus-bars connections & insulator supports shall be mechanically strung & rigidly supported so as to withstand the stresses generated by vibrations, variations in temperature and due to severe short circuits. The bus bars shall be Heat shrunk PVC Sleeves insulated type and supported on insulators at short intervals keeping adequate clearance as per IE rules between bus bars and earth. The bus bar chamber shall be provided with inspection covers with gaskets & bus bar shutters. Provision shall be made for future extension of bus bar & switch board.

5.6 LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE : The temperature rise of the current carrying parts shall not exceed the permissible limits above the ambient temperature as per relevant standards (latest edition). However, the reference maximum ambient temperature may be taken as 500C.

5.7 BUSHING INSULATORS :

These shall comply with the latest issue of IS : 2099 in all respects.

5

5.8 DISCONNECTORS OF CIRCUIT BREAKER & THEIR INTERLOCKS :

All disconnectors (isolators) of the 11 kV VCBs & interlocks between different pieces of apparatus provided for reasons of safety & for convenience of operation of switchgear shall meet with the requirement of IS : 3427-1969 read with its latest amendment. Efficient mechanical interlocking shall be provided to meet the following conditions i) It shall be possible to insert/withdraw the breaker only after circuit

breaker has been opened. ii) It shall be possible to insert/withdraw the breaker only when it is fully

open position as well as it is in Isolated/test position. iii) It shall not be possible to remove the breaker until the moveable plug

unit having secondary connections has been withdrawn. iv) It shall not be possible to replace in position moveable plug unit

unless the circuit breaker has been racked in. v) Provision of shutters or locks shall be made to prevent access to bus

bar chambers and receptacles when the circuit breaker is withdrawn. vi) Provision shall be made for locking the circuit breaker closing

mechanism in open position.

5.9 CABLE BOXES :

Each 11 kV incoming VCB shall be provided with cable boxes suitable for receiving 3 sets of cable each comprising 3 nos 630 mm2, 11 kV single core XLPE, outer PVC sheathed cables. However, joining kits and sealing material shall be provided for 2 sets of cables only. The outgoing 11 kV VCBs including 11 kV capacitor controlling VCB shall be provided with cable boxes suitable to receive 3 core, 11 kV XLPE PVC Sheathed cables of size upto 400 mm2 (panel with CT ratio 300-150/5 A & 400-200/5A), upto 185 mm2 (panel with CT ratio 200/100/5 A). The 11 kV station transformer VCB shall be provided with cable boxes (EPOXY RESIN TYPE) suitable to receive 3 core, 11 kV, XLPE cables of size upto 50 mm2 (panel with CT ratio 60-30/5 A). Each cable box shall have vertical entry from below. These cable boxes shall be complete in all respects including cable glands of requisite size. The cable boxes should only be either heat shrinkable or push on type. The cable boxes for outgoing panels are not in the scope of this specification.

5.9 A EARTHING TRUCK:

One no. earthing trolley should be provided for incomer panel. Earthing

trolley must be full fault make type device which is capable of making fault at 65.5 KA(peak) and carry 26.2 KA for one second. The earthing truck for incoming panel must be so designed that it is impossible to earth a live circuit.

6

5.10 SUPERVISION SCHEME :

5.10.1 Instrument panels on each of the 11 kV VCB covered by this specification

shall be provided with the following indicating lamps/relay:- Circuit breaker `open' Green Circuit breaker `close' Red Auto trip White Circuit breaker spring charged Blue

For monitoring of trip circuit both in pre-close and post- close position of the circuit breaker, 1 no. automatic trip circuit supervision relay will be provided on each of the 11 kV (incoming) instrument panel. In case of trip circuit becoming faulty, the operation of this relay shall be accompanied by visual and audio annunciation in accordance with clause 5.10.1 of the specification.

However, the trip circuit of each of the 11 kV outgoing / capacitor / Stn. VCB will be monitored `on demand' with the help of an indicating lamp & a push button both when the VCB is `open & closed'. The lamp will be `amber' coloured.

Circuit breaker `close' & `open' lamps will be wired so as to be on 240 V AC under `normal' condition. These lamps will be switched over to 220 V DC automatically in the event of failure of 240 V AC supply. Each of 11 kV (incoming) instrument panel will be equipped with a suitable relay for the purpose.

5.11 ALARM SCHEME:

5.11.1 NON TRIP ALARM SCHEME:

Each of 11 kV (incoming) panel will be provided with a non-trip alarm scheme comprising suitable auxiliary relay (rated for 220 V DC), accept push button, reset push button & a buzzer. It will cater to non-trip condition such as trip circuit faulty & PT secondary fuses blow `off'. The non-trip alarm scheme will meet with the following requirements:- i) The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be

accompanied by a flag indication on the concerned auxiliary relay.

ii) The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp which will not reset until the fault has cleared.

iii) It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing `accept' push

button. If after cancelling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault persists the buzzer shall be suppressed.

7

iv) If after canceling the alarm but before resetting visual signal some other fault takes place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate auxiliary relay shall take place.

v) If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the

same fault appears or some other fault take place, the alarm, flag indication and non-trip lamp indication shall reappear as usual.

vi) The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of a push button

and resetting of visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button.

vii) Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit

at frequent intervals.

viii) The equipment shall be suitable for 220 Volts DC operation.

5.11.2. TRIP ALARM SCHEME:

Trip commands due to operation of protective relay on any of 11 kV VCB constituting the switchboard will trip the concerned VCB. Its auxiliary contact will actuate a bell (provided in each of the 11 kV incoming VCB) & will be cancelled by the associated circuit breaker control handle. Auto trip lamp will glow on the concerned 11 kV VCB & there will be flag indication on the concerned protective relay.

5.12 PT FUSE FAIL ALARM SCHEME:

Each of the 11 kV (incoming) instrument panel is to be provided with a relay to monitor the fuses on the secondary side of 11 kV metering PT. The failure of any of secondary fuse on the 11 kV PT will be accompanied by visual & audio indication in accordance with clause 5.10.1 of the specification. None of the 11 kV outgoing/capacitor/Stn. VCB will be provided with fuses & inter-circuit PT leads may run from one bus wire board to the other.

5.13. METERING SCHEME : 5.13.1 Each of the 11 kV VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed ammeter

(additional dials, if any, required to cover all the taps of the CTs shall be included at the time of bidding) with a selector switch facilitating measurement of phase currents as well as unbalance current. The coil of ammeter shall be rated for 5 Amp. The instrument shall be of moving iron spring controlled type of industrial grade `A' classification having accuracy class 1.0 & shall conform to IS:1248(1968).

8

5.13.2 Each of the 11 kV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed voltmeter with a selector switch. The selector switch shall facilitate the measurement of phase to phase & phase to neutral voltage of all the three phases one by one. The coil of the voltmeter shall be rated for 110 V (phase to phase). The instrument shall be of moving iron spring controlled type of industrial grade `A' classification with accuracy class 1.0 & shall conform to IS:1248(1968).

5.13.3 Each of the 11 kV VCB except the 11 kV capacitor VCB will be equipped

with a three-phase four-wire Electronic KWH meter. The KWH meter shall be rated for 5 A CT secondary and 110 V/√3 (phase to neutral) available from 11 kV PT mounted on each of the incoming VCB. The instrument shall be iron-cored dynamometer type having accuracy class 1.0.

5.13.4 Each of the 11 kV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a power factor

meter. The PF meter having a range of 0.5Lag - one - 0.5lead shall be of 2 element type suitable for use on three phase three wire unbalanced system. It shall be rated for 5 A CT secondary & 110 V (phase to phase) available from 11 kV PT mounted on each of the 11 kV incoming VCB. The instrument shall be iron-cored dynamometer type having accuracy class 1.0.

N.B. Routine test certificates of all the indicating & integrating instruments will be

submitted alongwith the routine test certificates of 11 kV switchgear.

5.14 CONTROL SCHEME :

5.14.1 The instrument panel of each of the 11 kV VCB will be equipped with a circuit breaker control handle of pistol grip type with spring return to neutral position and having bell alarm cancellation contacts. The control handle shall be so designed that after being operated to `close' a VCB the operation can not be repeated until the control handle has been turned to `trip' position making it impossible to perform two closing operation consecutively.

5.14 .2 The rating of the control handle shall be suitable for the duty imposed by the

closing and opening mechanism of VCB. The moving and fixed contacts shall be of such a shape & material to ensure good contact and long life under service operating duty. All contacts shall be readily renewable.

5.14.3 The number of contacts in the control handle will be decided by the bidder

keeping in view the requirements of this specification. Two pairs of contacts shall be kept spare. The total number of contacts proposed to be provided shall be stated in the bid.

5.14.4 Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch on the control handle

shall be ensured.

9

5.15 PROTECTION SCHEME:

5.15.1 FOR INCOMING PANELS:

Each incoming instrument panel shall be provided with a single pole restricted earth fault relay suitable for 5 A CT (Secondary) with a setting range of 10 % to 40 % of 5 Amp.( Strictly in steps of 5%). In case, the bidder offers voltage-operated REF relay, the same shall be technically justified with aid of sample calculations which will also form a part of the instruction manual for the said relay. The relay shall be housed in draw out flush mounting case. The back up protection shall be in the form of a combined over current and earth fault relay(two over current and one earth fault). This shall be triple pole having Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) characteristics with a 3/10 time current curve i.e. the relay operating time shall be 3 second at 10 times the plug setting at TMS 1. The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and shall have a setting range of 50-200 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall have a setting range of 20-80 % of 5 A) and adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 20-80 % of 5 A adjustable in suitable equal steps by means of a plug board (for station transformer panels, the setting range shall be 10-40% of 5 A ) Each of the three elements shall be fitted with shunt reinforcing unit with hand reset operation indicator.

5.15.2 FOR OUTGOING FEEDERS PANELS:

Each outgoing feeder panel shall be provided with a triple pole IDMTL type combined over current and earth fault relay (two over current and one earth fault element) conforming to the technical specification stated in the clause: 5.14.1 above and one set of triple pole instantaneous relay (high set element) in the form of two over current and one earth fault element.

The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and shall have a setting range of 500-2000 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall have a setting range of 200-800 % of 5 A) and adjustable in suitable steps.

The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of 200-800 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall have setting range of 100-400 % of 5 A) adjustable in suitable steps.

The relay shall have low transient over reach with a high pick-up/ drop of ratio. The relay will be connected in series with the triple pole combined over-current and earth fault relay referred to above and shall be so wired so as to take this (instantaneous) out, if so desired by the purchaser at any time during operation of the equipment.

10

5.15.3 FOR CAPACITOR PANEL:

Each capacitor panel shall be provided with the following relays for protection of capacitor banks:-

i) Triple pole non-directional IDMTL type combined over current & earth

fault relay (two over current & one earth fault element) conforming to the technical specification stated in clause 5.14.1 above.

ii) 1 no. inverse time over voltage relay with setting range 100 % to 130

% of 110 V available from 11 kV PT mounted in the 11 kV (incoming) VCB alongwith auxiliary transformers(for external mounting) of ratio 110/103.5 to 116.5 V ( in steps of one volt) to be used for compensating the error of over voltage relay.

iii) 1 no. inverse time under voltage relay with setting range of 50 % to

90 % of 110 V (phase to phase connections). iv) 1 no. neutral displacement rely with settings 5.4, 7.5, 12.5 & 20 volts

and to be fed from open delta winding of three phase (11000//3/(110//3) Volts. Residual voltage transformer (Residual voltage transformer is not a part of this specification). The bidders offering relays with different settings than above shall technically justify their offer.

v) 5 minute timer to ensure that the capacitor bank is fully discharged

once it has been switched "OFF" before it can be switched "ON" again.

5.15.4 COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILTY OF RELAYS

All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or other applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush mounting on the front with connections from the rear. All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type modular cases with proper testing facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in contractor’s scope of supply. All main protective relays (viz over current and earth fault, Restricted Earth Fault, Over voltage and neutral displacement) shall be numerical type and communication protocol shall be as per IEC 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC 61850 shall be applicable to these.

For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following : a) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from

the relay from/to personal computer installed in the substation. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.

11

b) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 61850 protocol (with optical port).

N.B. The relay shall be suitable for 220 V DC auxiliary supply. The relay cover &

case shall be dust proof, water proof & vermin proof. Operating indicators shall be provided on all protective relays/ on their immediate auxiliary units to indicate the type of fault & phase / phases involved. It shall be possible to reset the operation indication without opening the relay case. The routine test certificates of all protective & auxiliary relays will be submitted along with routine test certificates of 11 kV switchgear covered by the specification.

5.16 D.C. FAIL ALARM SCHEME :

A suitable relay for monitoring the DC supply to the 11 kV switchboard shall be mounted on each of the 11 kV incoming instrument panel. The operation of DC fail scheme shall be accompanied by visual (indicating lamp on the instrument panel) & audio (ringing of hooter) annunciation. It shall be possible to silence the hooter by pressing the `accept' push button while the lamp shall continue to glow till the fault has been attended to & DC supply restored. A DC fail `Test' push button may be provided to test the lamp circuit of the scheme.

6.0 TEST

All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 13118-1991 (latest edition thereof).

6.1 TYPE TESTS

The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of the following tests, carried out in accordance with ISS-13118/IEC-56, from Govt./ Govt. approved test house, shall be submitted along with bid:

i) Impulse with-stand voltage tests. ii) Power frequency voltage dry & wet tests on main circuits. iii) Short circuit with stand capability tests.

iv) Mechanical endurance tests. v) Temperature rise test However Mechanical endurance tests and Temperature rise test conducted at Firm’s works in the presence of representative of any of the SEBs/State Power Utilities shall also be acceptable. The remaining type test report as per clause 6.0 of ISS-13118/IEC-56 shall be submitted by the successful bidder with in three month from the date of

12

placement of Purchase Order. These type test reports will also be from Govt./ Govt. approved test house & shall not be more than seven years old reckoned from the date of placement of order. Voltage transformers & current transformers shall comply with the type tests as stipulated in the latest version of IS : 3156 & IS: 2705 respectively. The reports of all type tests conducted shall be supplied. The 11 kV VCB & associated CTs & PTs shall be subjected to routine tests as specified in the latest version of the relevant ISS in the presence of purchaser's representative, if so desired by the purchaser. The routine test certificates of bought out components such as relays, switches, indicating instruments & KWH Meter will also be presented to HVPNL's inspecting officer who will forward them to the purchaser along with his inspection report for the main equipment. All test reports should be got approved from the purchaser before despatch of equipment.

7.0 DRAWINGS :

In addition to any other drawing which the tenderer may like to furnish to explain the merits of his proposal, following drawings shall be submitted with the tender in quadruplicate :

i Principal dimensional details of 11 kV Switchgear. ii General arrangement of 14 Panel 11kV switchboard including its

foundation details.

iii Schematic drawings of control, metering & protection circuits in respect of 11kV incoming VCB, 11kV outgoing VCB including station transformer VCB & 11 kV capacitor VCB alongwith detailed write-up.

iv Drawing showing height of 11 kV bus bars & arrangement of bus bars

v Vacuum interrupter drawing.

Four copies of the descriptive literature in respect of 11 kV switchgear, relays, KWH meters, voltmeters, ammeters, selector switches etc. proposed to be used shall also be supplied.

The bidder shall submit four sets of final version of all the above drawings for Purchaser's approval alongwith the tender in a separate seal cover. These drawings will be opened in the event of order. The Purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the Supplier within four weeks of the issue of LOI. The supplier shall, if necessary, modify the drawings & resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for purchaser's approval within two weeks from the date of receipt of purchaser's comments. The modified drawings will be approved within 15 days of their receipt by the purchaser. After receipt of purchaser's approval to drawings, a set of reproducibles of approved drawings & five sets of all the approved drawings and operating manuals containing, erection, operation & maintenance instructions per 11 kV switchboard shall be supplied to CE/D&P, S/Stn. Design Dte., HVPNL, Power Colony, Panchkula for use by various agencies of the purchaser. However, one set of drawings and operating manual will be despatched alongwith each 11 kV switch board. The 11 kV switchgear will not be fabricated without getting the drawings approved from the purchaser.

13

In order to ensure timely receipt of all the drawings, literature & reproducibles etc., the purchase section of D&P organisation will issue despatch instruction for despatch of 11 kV switchgear.

8.0 SPECIAL TOOLS :

The tenderer shall separately quote for a set of special tools, if so required, for erection and maintenance of the switchgear panels.

9.0 DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATION:

Should the tenderer wish to deviate from the provisions of the specification either on account of manufacturing practice, or any other reasons, he shall draw attention to the proposed point of deviation in the tender and submit such full information drawing and specification so that merits of his proposal may be fully understood. The specification shall be held binding unless the deviation have been fully recorded as required above.

10.0 TRAINING FACILITIES :VOID

11.0 GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS : These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure-A. Any deviation from this specification shall be clearly brought out separately.

12.0 STANDARD MAKE(S) OF RELAYS/OTHER FITMENTS:

14

ANNEXURE -'B' SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT

VACUUM TYPE 15 PANELS, 11 kV SWITCH BOARDS AND EACH SWITCH BOARD COMPRISING OF THE FOLLOWING: -

1.01. 1 NO. INCOMING PANEL EQUIPPED AS BELOW: -1 No. Triple pole 500 MVA, 11 kV 2000 A draw out type vacuum circuit breaker fitted with

arc control device, interlocks, auxiliary switches isolating contacts, emergency hand trip device, mechanical `ON' & `Off' indicator and motor operated spring charged mechanism.

-1 Set Bus bars 3 phase 2000 A. Cable boxes located at the rear of the unit for receiving

2 set of power cables each comprising 3 no. single core 630 mm2 11 kV XLPE PVC sheathed cables & complete in all respect with jointing kits etc. as per clause 5.9 of the specification.

-3 No. CTs of ratio 1800-900/0.577-5 A with first core for differential protection having a

minimum knee point voltage equal to 40 RCT (neglecting lead resistance) and the 2nd core for REF protection having a minimum knee point voltage of 92(RCT)V on 1800 A tap where RCT secondary winding resistance. These CTs shall conform to accuracy class PS of ISS:2705 (Part-IV) and shall have Magnetising current as low as possible but in no case exceeding the value corresponding to class 5 P of IS:2705 (Part-III).

-3 No. CTs of 1800-900/5 A of 15 VA output and 5P10 accuracy for over current and earth

fault protection -3 No. CTs of 1800-900/5 A of 15 VA output, accuracy class 1 & ISF less than 5 for

metering instrument.

-1 No. 3 phase star/star connected resin cast voltage transformer of ratio 11000/%3 /110/%3 volts having 100 VA output for phase with accuracy class 0.5 as per IS: 3156 (Part-II)1965 complete with HT & LT fuses, isolating plugs and sockets for HT & LT copper connectors, current limiting resistances.

-1 set Vermin and dust proof fitments. -1 NO. INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED ON TOP AND EQUIPPED AS BELOW: -1 No. Ammeter with selector switch as per clause: 5.13.1 of the specification. -1 No. Voltmeter with selector switch as per clause: 5.13.2 of the specification. -1 No. KWH meter with TTB as per clause: 5.13.3 & 5.2 of the specification. -1 No. PF meter with TTB as per clause: 5.13.4 of the specification. -1 Set Triple pole combined over current and earth fault IDMTL relay as per clause:

5.15.1 of the specification.

15

-1 No. Single pole restricted E/F relay as per clause: 5.15.1 of the specification. This relay will have one of its main contacts used for inter-tripping the H.V. transformer controlling circuit breaker.

-1 Set Over voltage relay for incomer panels only. -1 No. Tripping relay with hand reset contacts suitable for 220 V DC auxiliary supply. -4 No. Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker `open', `close', `auto trip' & spring

charged as per clause 5.10 of the specification. -1 No. Automatic trip circuit supervision scheme as per clause 5.10 of the specification. -1 No. PT fuse alarm scheme as per clause 5.12 of the specification. -1 No. DC fail alarm scheme as per clause 5.16 of the specification. -1 No. Circuit breaker control handle as per clause 5.14 of the specification. -1 No. Alarm equipment for non-trip & trip fault annunciation as per clause 5.11.1 & 5.11.2

of the specification. -1 No. Cubicle illumination lamp with door operated ON/OFF switch. -1 No. 15 A power socket with switch. -1 No. Anti-condensation tubular space heater suitable for connection to 240 V AC supply

with a thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker. 1.02 7 N0. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS EACH COMPRISING OF: -1 No. Triple pole 400 A, 500 MVA 11 kV circuit breaker fitted with Arc control devices,

interlock arrangement, auxiliary switches, isolating contacts, emergency hand trip device, mechanical ON & OFF indicator & motor operated spring charged mechanism operate at 220 V DC.

-1 Set Bus bars 3 phase 2000 A. -1 No. Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE PVC sheathed cable upto

300 mm2 size & complete in all respects with cable glands and jointing kits etc. as per clause 5.9 of the specification.

-3 No. CTs of ratio 300-150/5-5 A with first core of 15 VA output & 5P10 accuracy for O/C

& E/F protection & second core 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering. -1 No. Anti-condensation tubular space heater for connection to 240 V AC supply with a

thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker. -1 Set Vermin proof & dust proof fitments. -1 No. Instrument panel mounted on top & equipped as below:- -1 No. Ammeter with selector switch as per clause: 5.13.1 of specification.

16

-1 No. KWH meter with TTB as per clause: 5.13.3 & 5.2 of the specification. -1 set Triple pole combined 2 O/C & 1 E/F IDMTL relay supplemented with triple pole

instantaneous relay (high set element) in the form of 2 O/C & 1 E/F as per clause : 5.14.2 of the specification.

-1 No. Tripping relay with hand reset contacts suitable for 220 V DC auxiliary supply. -4 No. Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker `open', `close', `auto-trip' & 'spring

charged' as per clause 5.10 of the specification. -1 No. Indicating lamp with fittings & push button switch to indicate trip circuit healthy in

pre-close & post-close conditions as per clause : 5.10 of the specification. -1 No. Circuit breaker control handle as per clause : 5.14 of the specification. -1 No. Cubicle illumination lamp with door operated ON/OFF switch. -1 No. 15 A power socket with switch. -1 No. Anti-condensation tubular heater suitable for connection to 240 V AC supply with a

thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker. 1.03 2 NOS. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS:-

Similar to item 1.02 but with following cable box/CTs :- -1 No. Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE, PVC sheathed cable upto

185 mm2 size and complete with cable glands and jointing kits etc. as per clause : 5.8 of the specification.

-3 No. CTs of ratio 200-100/5/5 A with first core of 15 VA output & class 5P10 accuracy

for O/C & E/F protection & second core of 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.

1.04 1 NO. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS:

Similar to item 1.02 but with the following cable box/CTs: - -1 No. Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE, PVC sheathed cable upto

300 mm2 size and complete with cable glands and jointing kits etc. as per clause : 5.8 of the specification.

-3 No. CTs of ratio 400-200/5/5 A with first core of 15 VA output & class 5P10 accuracy

for O/C & E/F protection & second core of 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.

1.05 2 NO. PANEL FOR CAPACITOR BANK :

The capacitor controlling breaker should be suitable to meet all conditions required for capacitor operation & should be suitable for controlling capacitive current upto 400 A at 11 kV which is equivalent to 7.5 MVAR approx. & equipped similar to item No. 1.02 except KWH meter but with the following changes/additions:

17

- 3 No. CTs of ratio 400-200/5A output & 5P10 accuracy for over current & earth fault protection.

- Protection scheme including closing circuit interlock timer shall be as per clause:

5.15.3 of the specification. 1.06 1 NO. STATION TRANSFORMER FEEDER PANEL : Similar to item No. 1.02 but with the following cable box & CTs :- -1 No. Trifurcating main cable box (EPOXY resin type ) for receiving 3 core XLPE cable

upto 50 mm2 size & complete in all respect as per clause : 5.8 of the specification. -3 No. CTs of ratio 60-30/5-5 A with first core of 15 VA output & class 5P10

accuracy for O/C & E/F protection & second core of 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.

1.07 1 No. INCOMING PANEL EQUIPPED EXACTLY IDENTICAL TO ITEM 1.01 DETAILED

ABOVE NOTE : The two incoming panels at Sr. No. 1.01 & 1.06 shall be placed at the two extreme

ends of the switch board. Provision shall be made to split the 12 panels boards into two parts each having an incoming panel at its end with complete non-trip alarm, trip alarm & protection schemes.

2. 11 kV INCOMING & OUTGOING FEEDER VCBs. 2.1 11 kV incoming VCBs equipped exactly identical to the item 1.01 detailed above. 2.2 11 kV outgoing VCBs equipped identical to either 1.02 or 1.03 detailed above. The

precise split up will be intimated to the successful bidder. NOTE : These incoming & outgoing panels' bus orientation, physical dimension and

auxiliary wiring etc. shall be such that these can be connected with the already installed/running 11 kV switchgear.

VACUUM TYPE 8 PANELS, 11 KV SWITCH BOARD AND EACH SWITCH BOARD COMPRISING OF THE FOLLOWING:- 2.01 2 No. INCOMING PANELS EQUIPPED EXACTLY IDENTICAL TO ITEM 1.01 & shall

be placed at the two extreme ends of the switch board. 2.02 5 No. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS EQUIPPED EXACTLY IDENTICAL TO ITEM

1.02. 2.03 1 No. PANEL FOR CAPACITOR BANK EQUIPPED EXACTLY IDENTICAL TO ITEM

1.05.

1

SECTION-5

CHAPTER-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

72.5kV NEUTRAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

& 12kV NEUTRAL CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

2

CONTENTS

CLAUSE NO. TITLE PAGE NO.

1.0 SCOPE 3 2.0 STANDARDS 3 3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 4 4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 5 5.0 TESTS 8 6.0 DOCUMENTATION 9

ANNEXURE

1. CORE-WISE DETAILS FOR

A-(i) 72.5kV T/F NCTs (300-150/1A) 10 B-(i) 11kV NCT (1800-900/5A) 10

3

1.0 SCOPE :

1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site for 72.5kV NCTs and 11kV NCTs complete with all fittings.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify complete herein all details of the design and

construction of equipments. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering design and workmanship and shall be acceptable of performing in continuous commercial operation up-to the bidders guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS

The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant IS/IEC listed hereunder or their equivalent IEC/IS.

2.1 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:

Sr. No. Standard No. Title 1. IS:2165 Insulation Co-ordination for equipment of 100kV and above.

2. IS:2705 Current Transformers. (I to IV)

3. IS:2099 Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000Volts.

4. IS:3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings.

5. IS:2071 Method of High Voltage Testing.

6. IS:335 Insulating oil for transformers Switchgears.

7. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control.

8. IS:2633 Method of testing hot dipped galvanized articles.

9. IS:4800 Enameled round winding wires.

10. IS:5561 Terminal connectors. 11. IS:11065 Drawings. 12. IEC 44-1 Current Transformers. 13. IEC-270 Partial Discharge Measurement (or IS:11322) 14. IEC-44(4) Instrument Transformer measurement of PDs. 15. IEC-171 Insulation co-ordination. 16. IEC-60 High voltage testing techniques. 17. IEC-8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators. 18. Indian Electricity Rules 1956. 19. IS:5621 Hollow porcelain insulators.

4

2.2 The bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC. When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ than those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.

2.3 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which

ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

The current transformers covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed hereunder.

PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS :-

Sr.No. Item 72.5kV 12kV 1. Type of C.T./ installation. single phase, oil filled, hermetically sealed,

outdoor type, 2. Type of mounting Steel structures 3. Suitable for system frequency 50Hz 4. Minimum Neutral CT Insulating

Voltage 15 8.66

5. Current ratio A/A a) NCT 300-150/1 1800-900/5 6. Method of earthing the system

Solidly earthed

7. Rated Continuous Thermal current

125% for all taps

8. Ratio taps The tapings shall be only on secondary winding

9. Acceptable limit of temperature rise above the specified ambient temperature for continuous operation at rated current.

As per IS:2705 or equivalent IEC

10. Acceptance partial discharge level at 1.1 times the rated voltage

As per IS:11322-1985 or equivalent IEC

11. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp) a) NCTs 95 75 12. 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand Voltage primary (kV rms) a) NCTs 38 28 13. Power frequency over voltage

withstand requirement for secondary winding (kV rms) (for 1 minute)

3.0

5

Sr.No. Item 72.5kV 12kV 14. Min. creepage distance of porcelain housing (mm) a) NCTs 440 250 15. Rated short time withstand

current (kArms) for 1 second 31.5 18.4

16. Rated dynamic withstand current (kAp)

78.75 46

17. Maximum Creepage factor 4.0 4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: 4.1 The insulation of the instrument transformer shall be so designed that the internal

insulation shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation.The designed dielectric withstands values of external and internal insulation's shall be clearly brought out in the guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in this specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.

4.2 PORCELAIN HOUSING: 4.2.1. The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be

furnished by the Supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength, glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog).

4.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the

offer. 4.3 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize

possible locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made out of mild steel/stainless steel/aluminum alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at this location may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any horizontal welding used in the bottom tank.

4.4 SURFACE FINISH:

The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanized or shall be coated with atleast two coats of Zinc Rich Epoxy painting. All nuts, Bolts and washers shall be of stainless steel.

4.5 INSULATING OIL:

Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be covered in Supplier's scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition IS: 335 or equivalent IEC.

4.6 PREVENTION OF OIL LEAKAGE & ENTRY OF MOISTURE:

4.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is properly achieved. In this connection the arrangement provided by the Supplier at various locations including the following ones shall be described, supported by sectional drawings.

6

i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals. ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tank/s. iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.

4.6.2 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for taking out terminals shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.

4.6.3 For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the gasket under compression.

4.7 OIL LEVEL INDICATORS:

Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window (Prismatic Type) at suitable location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level.

4.8 EARTHING:

Metal tank of instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing terminals for bolted connection to 50x8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for connection to station earth mat.

4.9 Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift the entire unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawing. Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way as to avoid any damage to the porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. Necessary string guides, if required shall be offered which shall be removable type.

4.10 NAME PLATE:

The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate with the information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In addition to these the following specific points shall also be marked on the name plate.

i) P.O. No. with date and (item No, if any) ii) Connection diagram. iii) Rated continuous thermal current. iv) General knee point voltage formula.

The size of nameplate and its location on the equipment should be such that it is clearly readable with naked eyes while standing on ground.

4.11 Suitable terminal connectors for connecting conductor shall be supplied. Suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be provided.

4.11.1. The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements: 1) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS: 5561 or equivalent

IEC. 2) All castings shall be free from blowholes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All

sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off. 3) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick. 4) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS: 2633 or equivalent

IEC. 5) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall be

7

cast integral with aluminium body. 6) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium sheets. 7) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum

contact resistance. 8) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements

stipulated in IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.

4.12 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyvinyl acetate type and shall meet the requirements of IS: 4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with oil.

4.13 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum temperature rise specified in IS: 2705 or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible temperature rise is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50o C.

4.14 The CT/NCT shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitations so demand.

4.15 Suitable arrangement shall be made for compensation of variation in the oil volume due to ambient variation and to take care of internal abnormal pressures. The pressure variation shall be kept within limits, which do not impair the tightness of the instrument transformer. A pressure relief device capable of releasing abnormal internal pressure shall be provided.

4.16 The CT secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal box. The terminal box shall be provided with removable gland plate.

The terminal box/boxes shall be dust and vermin proof. The dimensions of the terminal box/boxes and its/their openings shall be adequate to enable easy access and working space with use of normal tools.

4.17 Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each primary and secondary terminal. Facility shall be provided for short-circuiting and grounding of the secondary terminals inside the terminal box.

4.18 The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture from entering the tanks. Sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be provided with facility to reseal the same. The method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer.

4.19 The castings of base, collar etc shall be diecast and tested before assembly to detect cracks and voids if any.

4.20 The instrument security factor of metering core shall be low enough and less than 5. This shall be demonstrated on all the ratios of the metering core, in accordance with procedure specified in IS: 2705 or equivalent IEC. In case the instrument security factor of less than 5 is not possible to be achieved on higher ratios, auxiliary CTs of ratio 1/1 shall be deemed to be included in the supplier's scope of supply. This shall also be specifically brought out by the supplier in his offer.

4.21 PRIMARY WINDING:

The design density for short circuit current as well as conductivity of the metal used for primary winding shall meet the requirement of IS: 2705 or equivalent IEC. The

8

supplier shall in his offer furnish detailed calculations for selection of winding cross-sections.

4.22 SECONDARY WINDING:

Suitably insulated wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary windings. Type of insulation used shall be described in the offer. For multi ratio design, suitable tapping shall be provided on secondary winding only. Ratio tap selection through primary side shall not be acceptable.

4.23 The exciting current of the CT shall be as low as possible. The supplier shall furnish alongwith his offer the magnetization curve/s for all the core/s. The cores shall be of high grade, non-ageing electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysterisis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over current.

4.24 PRIMARY TERMINALS:

Each primary terminal shall be made out of rods of not less than 30mm dia copper or equivalent as per IS/IEC.

4.25 Any deviation from the specification shall be clearly brought out separately. In the absence of any specific mention, it shall be implied that the equipment offered is entirely according to this specification.

4.26. The 72.5 kV and above voltage level instrument transformers shall be provided with suitable test tap for measurement of tests such as partial discharges etc. in factory as well as at site. Provision shall be made of a screw on cap for solid and secured earthing of the test tap connection, when not in use. A suitable caution plate shall be provided duly fixed on the cover of the secondary terminal box indicating the purpose of the test tap and necessity of its solid earthing as per prescribed method before energising the equipment.

5.0 TESTS : 5.1 TYPE TESTS

The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart. Temperature-rise Test.

i) Short time current tests. ii) Lighting impulse test. iii) High voltage power frequency wet withstand voltage test. iv) Determination of errors or other characteristic according to the requirement so of the

appropriate designation or accuracy class.

5.2 ROUTINE TESTS :

As per quality assurance program (QAP).

5.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-2705 shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

i) Verification of terminal marking and polarity.

9

ii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for primary winding. iii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for secondary winding. iv) Over voltage inter-turn test. v) Partial discharge tests vi) Determination of errors or other characteristic according to the requirement so of the appropriate designation or accuracy class.

6.0 DOCUMENTATION:

6.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings except 6.1(b) below (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for HVPNL approval.

List of drawings:

a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment. b) Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to magnetisation

characteristics; ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves. c) Sectional views showing:

i) General Constructional Features. ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used. iii) The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the

primary / secondary winding to the primary / secondary terminals etc. iv) Porcelain used and its dimensions.

d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided. e) Name plate. f) Schematic drawing. g) Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature h) Terminal connector drawing.

NOTE:- All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

10

ANNEXURE I-A(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5 kV NEURAL CT

(300-150/1)

No. OF CORE = 1

Core No.

Application Current Ratio (A)

Output burden (VA)

Accuracy class as per IEC 185

Formula for minimum knee point voltage at CT secondary resistance at 750 at 300A tap (Volt)

Maximum exciting current (mA)

Minimum Insulation voltage (kV)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1. REF

PROTECTION 300-150/1

- PS 20 (RCT+1) 30AT Vk/2 15

ANNEXURE I-B(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 12 kV NEUTRAL CT

(1800-900/5)

No. OF CORE = 1

Core No.

Application Current Ratio (A)

Accuracy class as per IEC 185

Formula for minimum knee point voltage at CT secondary resistance at 750 at 1800A tap (Volt)

Maximum exciting current (mA)

Minimum Insulation voltage (kV)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. REF

PROTECTION 1800-900/5

PS 95 (RCT+1) 75AT Vk/2 8.66

1

SECTION -5

CHAPTER-2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

72.5 kV CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVTs)

2

CONTENTS CLAUSE NO. TITLE PAGE NO. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1.0 SCOPE 3 2.0 STANDARDS 3 3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 4

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 5

5.0 TESTS 10 6.0 DOCUMENTATION 11 ANNEXURES I. COREWISE DETAILS FOR

A-(i) 72.5 kV CVTs 12

3

1.0 SCOPE : 1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture,

stage testing, inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 72.5kV CVTs complete with all fittings.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design

and construction of equipments. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation upto the bidders guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete in all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS:

The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant IS/IEC listed hereunder or their equivalent IEC/IS. Sr. No. Standard No. Title.

1. IS : 3156 (Part-I to Part-III)

Voltage transformer

2. IS : 3156 (Part-IV) Capacitor Voltage Transformer 3. IS : 2099 High Voltage porcelain bushing.

4. IS : 3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings

5. IS : 2071 Method of High Voltage Testing 6. IS : 335 Insulating oil for transformers and

switchgears 7. IS : 2165 Insulation Co-ordination for

equipments of 100 kV and above. 8. IS : 2147 Degree of protection provided by

enclosures for low voltage switchgear and control.

9. IEC- 186 Voltage Transformers 10. IEC - 186A First supplement to IEC publication

186 11. IEC - 270 Partial discharge Measurement

4

12. IS - 5561 Terminal Connectors 13. IS -4800 Enameled round winding wires 14. IEC- 44 (4) Instrument Transformer

measurement of PDs 15. IEC-171 Insulation Co-ordination 16. IEC - 358 Coupling capacitor divider. 17. IEC-60 High Voltage testing techniques. 18. IEC-8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage

insulators. 19. IS: 9348 Coupling capacitors and capacitor

dividers 20. IS: 2633 Methods of testing hot dipped

galvanized articles 21. IS: 11065 Drawings. 22. Indian Electricity Rules 1956 23. IS: 5621 Hollow porcelain insulators.

2.2 The bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this

specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC. When the specific requirements stipulated in these specifications exceed or differ than those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.

2.3 Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative

standards, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.

3.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :

The capacitor voltage transformers and potential transformers covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed hereunder.

5

3.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:-

Specification Sr. No.

Item 72.5kV

1. Type/Installation Single Phase Oil filled Self cooled, Hermetically sealed Outdoor type

2. Type of mounting Steel structure 3. Highest system voltage (kV rms) 72.5 4. Suitable for system frequency 50Hz 5. a)

Voltage ratio Rated primary voltage (kV rms).

66/√3

b)

Secondary Voltage (volts) for CVT Core I 110/√3

6. Method of earthing the system Solidly Earthed 7. 1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse

withstand voltage (kVp) 325

8. 1 Minute dry & wet power frequency withstand voltage primary (kV rms)

140

9. Min. creepage distance of porcelain housing (mm)

1815

10. Creepage factor (max.) 4.0 11. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds12. Equivalent capacitance at power

frequency for carrier coupling for CVT (PF)

8800+10% - 5%

13. Resultant high frequency capacitance for CVT (PF)

8800 in carrier frequency range of 40 KHz N.A to 500 KHz with variation in capacitance as contained in IEC-358 (i.e- 20% & +50%)

14. One minute power frequency withstand voltage for secondary winding (kV rms)

3.0

15. Max. temperature rise over ambient of 50°C

As per IS:3156 or equivalent IEC

4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

4.1 CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT): 4.1.1 The insulation of the instrument transformers shall be so designed that the

internal insulation shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation. The designed dielectric withstand values of external and internal insulations shall be clearly withstand values specified in this guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in this specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.

6

4.1.2 Porcelain Housing :

4.1.2.1 The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be furnished by the supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength, blazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog).

4.1.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out

in the offer. 4.1.3 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to

minimize possible locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made out of mild steel/Stainless steel/aluminium alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at this location may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any horizontal welding used in the bottom tank.

4.1.4 Surface Finish: The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised or shall be coated with atleast two coats of zinc rich epoxy painting. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be made out of stainless steel.

4.1.5 Insulating Oil: Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be covered in supplier's scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition IS:335 or equivalent IEC.

4.1.6 Prevention of Oil leakages and Entry of Moisture:

4.1.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is

properly achieved. In this connection the arrangement provided by the supplier at various locations including the following ones shall be described, supported by sectional drawings. i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals. ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tanks. iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.

4.1.6.2 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain

bushings for taking out terminals, shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.

4.1.6.3 For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the gasket under compression.

7

4.1.7 Oil level indicators: Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window at suitable location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level.

4.1.8. Earthing:

Metal tank of the instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing terminal for bolted connection to 50X8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for connection to station earth-mate.

4.1.9 Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement, to lift the entire unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawings. Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way so as to avoid any damage to the porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. If necessary, string guides shall be offered which shall be of removable type.

4.1.10 NAME PLATE:

The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate with the information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In addition to these P.O. with the date, Item No. P.O. & Connection diagram shall also be marked in rating plate.

4.1.11 Suitable terminal connectors for connecting conductor shall be supplied. Suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be provided.

4.1.12 The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:

1) Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.

2) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.

3) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick. 4) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2633 or

equivalent IEC. 5) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall

be cast integral with aluminium body. 6) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium body. 7) All currents carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have

minimum contact resistance. 8) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the

requirements stipulated in IS: 5561 or equivalent IEC.

4.1.13 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be either polyvinyl acetate type or amide emide type and shall meet the requirements of IS:4800 or

8

equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with oil.

4.1.14 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum

temperature rise specified in IS:3156 o or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible temperature rise indicated is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C.

4.1.15 The instrument transformers shall be so constructed that it can be easily

transported to site within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitations so demand.

4.1.16 The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing

and thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture from entering the tanks, sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be provided with facility to reseal the same. The method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer.

4.1.17 Suitable arrangement shall be made to accommodate the expansion and

contraction of oil due to temperature variation. The pressure variation shall be kept within limits which do not impair the tightness of the instrument transformer. A pressure relief device capable of releasing abnormal internal pressure shall be provided.

4.2 CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT):

4.2.1 The CVTs comprising of a capacitor divider unit and electromagnetic unit shall be single phase, oil filled hermetically sealed, self cooled, outdoor type and suitable for direct line connection without any fuse and isolating switches, These CVTs are required to be used on interlinking substations in Haryana power system for the purpose of protection, synchronising, interlocking, carrier coupling and metering. CVTs shall be suitable for connecting the carrier terminals to single circuit and double circuit transmission lines for phase to phase coupling for power line carrier, voice communication, telemetering & teleprinting services.

4.2.2 The secondary terminals of potential unit, high frequency coupling terminal and the earthing terminals shall be brought out separately and housed in a water proof cabinet outside the main steel chamber.

4.2.3 The capacitor voltage transformer shall be suitable for simultaneous use as measuring unit, for feeding voltage supply to protective relays and as coupling capacitor for carrier transmission i.e. for voice communication, carrier protective relays, telemetering, teleprinting services over one or more carrier channels in the frequency range of 40 to 500KHz.

9

4.2.4 The capacitors shall be designed for wide frequency band and low dielectric loss. Their natural frequency shall be considerably higher than the carrier frequency range of 40 KHz to 500 KHz.

4.2.5 The unit capacitors shall be so designed that no damage to internal elements

or change in electrostatic capacitance is resulted by the application of impulse voltage.

4.2.6 Each CVT including its emvt unit shall be filled with insulating oil conforming to IS:335 or equivalent IEC. And shall be hermetically sealed against moisture and dust.

4.2.7 The electromagnetic voltage transformer unit of CVT intended for out-door

installation whose primary is to be fed by the inter-mediate tapping of capacitor divider shall be of oil immersed, self cooled design and shall be suitable for metering, relaying & synchronising services. The core of this transformer shall be of high grade, nonageing, cold rolled, laminated electrical silicon steel of low hysteresls loss & of high permeability so as to ensure high accuracy at normat & high voltages. The primary winding shall be connected through a compensating reactor to compensate the voltage increase at inter-mediate tapping, whatever is the load within range of rated burden.

4.2.8 The design shall be free from corona effect to keep noise level of carrier

frequency link very low. Use may be made of grading rings or Electrostatic screen for this purpose if required.

4.2.9 The design shall be suitable for rapid reclosing of the circuit and shall be

capable of accurate and proportionate transmission of sudden variation in the primary voltage.

4.2.10 Each CVT shall be provided with a suitable damping device so that ferro

resonance oscillation due to saturation of iron core of transformer or any inductance connected in parallel with it and initiated by either over voltages on the net work side or by opening of the short circuited primary or secondaries, shall be practically zero. Oscillations of the secondary voltages which may arise as a result of breakdown of primary voltages due to short circuts shall not affect the proper working of protective relays. This shall confirm to provisions of clause:42 of IEC recommendations 186-A.

4.2.11 Design of the potential units of the CVT shall be based on the following

requirements in connection with protective relaying. i) They must transmit accurately sudden drops of primary voltage. ii) The CVTs must not enter into sub-harmonic resonance and transient

oscillations during energisation. They must be damped out with sufficient rapidness.

iii) They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from secondary.

10

4.2.12 A device shall be incorporated in a capacitor voltage transformer for the purpose of limiting over voltages which may appear across one or more of its components and/or to prevent sustained ferro resonance.

The device may include a spark gap and may be located in several different ways according to its nature. *(Clause 2.12 of IS:3156 (Part-IV)-1978 or IEC-186A Clause 37.12)

4.2.13 Suitable terminal boxes with removable gland plate for facilitating the entry of H.F. Cable & VT control cables shall be provided at an accessible position.

5.0 TESTS:

5.1 TYPE TEST

5.1.1 TYPE TESTS OF CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVT's): The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart. i) Temperature Rise Test. ii) Impulse test. iii) Ferro-resonance test. iv) Transient response test. v) High voltage power frequency wet withstand voltage test. vi) Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the

requirements of the appropriate designation or accuracy class. vii) Capacitance measurement before voltage test. viii) Voltage test between terminals. ix) Measurement of capacitance and tangent of the loss angle after

voltage test. x) Voltage test between the low-voltage terminal and the earth terminal. xi) Oil leakage test. xii) High frequency test. xiii) Determination of temperature co-efficient.

5.2 ROUTINE TESTS :

As per quality assurance program (QAP). 5.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-3156 shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

i) Verification of terminal marking and polarity. ii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for Primary winding. iii) High voltage power frequency dry withstand voltage test for Secondary

11

winding. iv) Partial discharge tests v) Determination of errors or other characteristics according to the requirements

the appropriate designation or accuracy class.

6.0 DOCUMENTATION:

6.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings except 6.1(b) below (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for HVPNL approval.

List of drawings:

a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment. b) Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to

magnetization characteristics; ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves.

c) Sectional views showing: i) General Constructional Features. ii) Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used. iii) The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the

primary / secondary winding to the primary/secondary terminals etc. iv) Porcelain used and its dimensions.

d) Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided. e) Name plate. f) Schematic drawing. g) Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature h) Terminal connector drawing.

NOTE:- All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the

approval of drawings by HVPNL.

12

ANNEXURE- IA(i)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT).

Sl. No.

Requirement Particulars

1. Rated Primary voltage 66/√3kV 2. Type Single phase 3. No. of Secondaries 1 4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds 5. Capacitance (minimum) 8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads 6. Rated voltage (volts) 110/√3 7. Application Protection metering, carrier coupling &

interlocking of line cum earthswitch 8. Accuracy 1/3P 9. Output burden (VA) 50 10. Percentage voltage error &

phase displacement (minutes) for respective specified accuracy classes.

As per ISS/IEC

1

SECTION-5

CHAPTER-3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

66kV CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

FOR SUBSTATIONS HAVING SUBSTATION AUTOMATION

SYSTEM

2

CONTENTS CLAUSE NO. TITLE PAGE NO. ------------------------------------- 1.0 SCOPE 3 2.0 STANDARDS 3 3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS 4 4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 5 5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 5 6.0 TESTS 17 7.0 DOCUMENTATION 18 ANNEXURES

A. TRANSMISSION LINE DATA 20

B. LINE PARAMETERS 21

3

1.0 SCOPE:

1.1 This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection & testing at manufacturer’s work before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 66kV control & relay panels for S/Stns. having substation automation system.

1.2 Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not

specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory operation of the scheme or to complete the work in a good workman like manner shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply of the Bidder.

1.3 CO-ORDINATION :

Circuit Breakers, CT's, PT's/CVT's & Isolating Switches, etc. are being purchased against separate specification. The Contractor of control & relay panels shall be responsible for preparing complete wiring diagram of 66kV C&R panel boards and shall also undertake to mount & wire any equipment received from other supplier. The schematic of breakers & isolators are required to be incorporated in the panel schematic.

1.4 EXPERIENCE:

The contractor shall arrange C&R panels along with main relays from the same manufacturer. The manufacturer own make relays includes the relays manufactured by their Principals /Associates.

2.0 STANDARDS : 2.1 The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant Indian Standards listed

hereunder or equivalent IEC :- Sr. No.

Standard

Title

1.

IS: 5

Colour for ready mix paints.

2.

IS: 375

Marking & arrangements for switchgear, bus bars, main connections & auxiliary wiring.

3.

IS: 694

PVC insulated cable for working voltage upto and including 1100 V.

4.

IS: 722

AC Electricity meters.

5.

IS: 1248 Part-I& IV

Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments & their accessories.

6.

IS: 2419

Dimensions for panel mounted indicating & recording electrical instruments.

7.

IS :3231

Electrical relays for power system protection.

8.

IS :8686

Static protective relays.

9.

IS :2147

Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear & control gear.

4

2.2 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered, manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules, Laws and Regulations of India.

2.3 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue

with all amendments of standard specified above. 2.4 In addition to meeting the specific requirement called for in the Technical

Specification, the equipment shall also conform to the general requirement of the relevant standards and shall form an integral part of Specification.

2.5 The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually

exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to compliment each other. 2.6 The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is

not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC.

2.7 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ than

those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.

2.8 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better

performance than that specified in the standard referred shall also be accepted. 2.9 In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the

salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out alongwith English language version of standard or relevant extract of the same. The equipment conforming to standards other than IS/IEC shall be subject to HVPNL's approval.

2.10 The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in accordance with

which the works will be conformed. 3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS: 3.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory

continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:-

i) Location IN THE STATE OF HARYANA ii) Max. ambient air temp (°C) 50 iii) Min. ambient air temp (°C) -2.5

iv) Maximum Relative humidity (%) 100 v) Minimum Relative humidity (%) 26 vi) Average annual rainfall (mm) 900

vii) Max. wind pressure (kg/sq. m.) 195 viii) Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters). 1000 ix) Isoceraunic level (days/Year) 50 x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3 g xi) Average number of dust storm 35 (days per annum)

5

Note:-i) Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions.

ii) Air conditioning or any special arrangement for making the control room dust proof shall not be provided in any of the S/Stn.

3.2 All control wiring, equipment & accessories shall be protected against fungus

growth, condensation, vermin & other harmful effects due to tropical environments. 3.3 AUX. POWER SUPPLY : i) A.C. Supply : 415/240 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz Voltage variation : ± 10% Frequency variation : ± 3%

ii) D C Supply : 220 Volts, 2 wire available from S/Stn. battery(insulated) Variation : ±10%.

3.4 66kV voltages will be three phase having normal frequency of 50 Hz subject to a variation of ± 3%. Neutrals of the Power Transformers at the S/Stn. covered in this specification are solidly earthed.

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS : 4.1 The panel shall have the principal dimensions as detailed below:-

i). Depth of panels = 610 mm ii). a) Height of panels above base frame = 2210 mm

b) Height of base frame = 102 mm iii). Type of panels: Simplex control & relay panels

Note:- The offer of the bidder not conforming to above requirement shall be out rightly rejected.

4.2 ARRANGEMENT OF PANELS:

The panels shall be fabricated so that even if the serial of panels is changed no difficulty will be faced in the placement of panels and cabling etc. The sequence of various panels in a panel board at a S/Stn. shall be supplied to successful bidder.

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.1 MATERIAL & WORKMANSHIP :

All material used in the construction of the panels/relays shall be of the best quality obtainable of their respective kind and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well finished and of approved design and make.

Castings shall be free from blow-holes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be smooth grained and of true dimensions and forms.

The draw out mechanism in respect of draw out relays should be smooth and convenient so as to give adequate service during their use.

6

5.2 DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATION:

Should the bidder wish to depart from the provisions of this specification either on account of manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw specific attention to the proposed points of departure on the prescribed Performa in his tender and submit such full information, drawings and specifications as will enable the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.

In the event of contractor drawings, specification and tables etc. disagreeing with this specification during the execution of the contract this specification shall be held binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.

5.3 PAINTING:

All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame works shall be sand blasted to remove rust scale, foreign adhering matter & grease. A suitable rust resistance primer shall be applied on the interior & exterior of steel which will be followed by application of an under coat suitable to serve as base for finishing coat. The finishing coat shall be as under :- Exterior - Stove enameled light grey as per shade No.631 of IS:5.

Interior - stove enameled white. Base frame - Stove enameled glossy black. 5.4. TESTING EQUIPMENT AND TESTING FACILITIES ON THE RELAYS :

The bidder shall recommend suitable testing equipment (alongwith quantity) required for field testing of protective schemes and other relays offered against this specification. The actual quantity to be ordered shall be determined by the HVPNL. Also adequate testing facilities should be provided on the relay so as to test them without the necessity of their removal or making any extra connections. The Bidder will clearly indicate the testing procedure to be followed in respect of relays offered.

5.5 The transmission lines shall be either in form of overhead conductor or combination of overhead conductor & underground cable. The tentative transmission line data in respect of 66kV lines covered in this specification is given at Annexure-A. The standard chart providing the details of per unit values of Z1, Z2 & Z0 on 100 MVA base per 100 km of overhead line for calculating these values for full lengths of lines are enclosed at Annexure-B. he suitability of distance scheme offered with reference to the above parameters may be seen. Guaranteed test sheets shall be submitted by the bidder. Relevant literature shall be supplied along with the bid for proper appreciation of the offered equipment.

5.6 TRANINING OF PERSONNEL : as per clause 12 of section I General. 5.7 GENERAL DESCRIPTION : 5.7.1. SIMPLEX C&R PANEL BOARDS :

The panels shall be of `simplex' type & consisting of separate cubicles (for each circuit complete with side covers) made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 10 SWG for the base frame, door frame and front portions of the cubicles and not less than 14 SWG for door, side, top & bottom portion having provision for extension at both ends with internal wiring, illumination with door operated off & on switch. The

7

cubicle shall be suitable for floor mounting with its bottom open. Each cubicle shall be fitted with flush mounted steel hinged door & lock at the back & all the equipments will be mounted in front. All holes and extension windows shall be blanked and access doors shall be provided with compressible liners at the edges.

These simplex panels offered may, therefore, match in following respects:-

i) Height-wise and depth wise matching.

The control & relay boards shall be completely dust & vermin proof. The enclosure shall provide degree of protection not less than IP-31 in accordance with IS:2147 and shall be suitable for tropical use.

5.8 COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILTY OF RELAYS FOR SUBSTATION

AUTOMATION

All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or other applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush mounting on the front with connections from the rear. All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type modular cases with proper testing facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in contractor’s scope of supply.

All main protective relays shall be numerical type and communication protocol shall be as per IEC 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC 61850 shall be applicable to these.

For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following :

a) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay from/to personal computer installed in the substation. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.

b) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 61850 protocol (with optical port).

5.9 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY:

The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of each trip coil and associated circuit of circuit breaker during "on & off" conditions. The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of min. 200 milli seconds and shall be provided with operation indicator.

For monitoring of entire trip circuit (from control & relay panel terminal to the trip coil of circuit breaker) both in `open' & `close' position of the circuit, 2 No. automatic trip circuit supervision relays are proposed for 66kV panels.

5.10.1 D.C. FAIL ALARM SCHEME:

A suitable relay for monitoring the Trip Circuit D.C. wiring of the control and relay panels shall be provided. The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of min. 100 milli seconds and shall be provided with operation indicator.

5.10.2 VOLTAGE SELECTION SCHEME: The 66 kV bus PTs exist on all the phases of both the 66 kV buses at substations

having double bus arrangement. Proper voltage selection scheme shall be provided on panels.

8

5.11 PROTECTION SCHEME : 5.11.1 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS .

A) TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION : The relay shall i) Be triple pole numerical type. ii) Have 3 instantaneous high set over-current units. iii) Have second harmonic restraint or other inrush proof feature and be stable

under normal over fluxing condition. iv) Have fifth harmonic by pass filter or similar other arrangement to prevent

maloperation of the relay under operating conditions. v) Be suitable for rated current of 1A and include necessary ICTs for ratio &

phase angle correction. vi) Have operating current setting sufficiently low (15% or less) so as to cover

practically the whole of the transformer against all types of faults. vii) Have adjustable bias setting range of 20- 50%. viii) Have maximum operating time of 30 milli seconds at 5 times the rated

current. ix) Be provided with necessary terminals & links to measure current in

restraining circuits & in the operating circuits of all the phases under load without making any wiring changes.

x) Cover the lightning arrestors (proposed to be provided very close to the transformer) in the zone of protection. xi) The Scheme shall have in-built features of disturbance recorder and event logger. The scope of the relay shall include necessary software and hardware to down load the DR & EL data from relay to the PC installed in S/Stn. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.

For disturbance recorder and event logger features, it shall have 8 analog and 16 digital channels (out of which at least 8 shall be external digital inputs). It shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if allowed to run without synchronization. Further, it shall have facility to synchronize its time generator from Time Synchronization Equipment having output of following types.

• Voltage signal: (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse

duration) • Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.) • IRIG-B • RS232C

The recorder shall give alarm in case of absence of synchronising pulse within specified time.

a) The disturbance recorder shall meet the following requirements: • The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better on

upper side. • Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/Channel or better. • Pre–fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault time

shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also be able to

9

record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit shall not be less than 5.0 seconds.

b) The event logger shall meet the following requirements: • The time resolution shall be 1 milli second. • Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 milli seconds interval. • The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 milli second followed

by a message describing the point which has operated. • Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are to

be stored to await printing.

B) NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:

The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min. time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of 50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of 500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting range of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of 200% to 800% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. The relay shall be numerical type.

C) RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION :

It shall be single pole type for the clearance of earth faults in the protected zone. The relay shall be of high impedance type with a suitable setting to cover at least 90% of the winding & shall have a setting range of 10% to 40% of 1 Amp. or suitable voltage setting. The relay shall be complete with tuned 50 Hz circuit & stabilizing resistance. The tuned circuit will help reject harmonics produced by CT saturation and thus make the relay operative for fundamental frequency only. The stabilizing resistance may appropriately be set to avoid mal-operation under through fault conditions. The relay shall be numerical type.

D) 8 No. auxiliary relays for various transformer trip functions (Main Buch. Trip, OLTC Oil Temp. Trip, Winding Temperature Trip, Oil Temp Trip, Pressure Relief Trip, Surge Relay Trip and two no. spare) shall be provided.

E) OVER FLUXING PROTECTION:

An over fluxing detecting relay for the protection of the transformer against over- fluxing conditions is proposed to be provided on each of the transformer C&R panels covered by this specification. The relay shall be numerical in design with adjustable setting so as to avoid its operation on momentary system disturbances. The relay shall be suitable for 110 Volts. The relay shall have inverse time characteristics, matching with transformer overfluxing withstand capability curve. The relay shall provide an alarm with v/f setting range of 100% to 130% of rated values and time delay continuously settable from 0.1 to 6 seconds to draw the operator's attention about the existence of over-fluxing conditions. The tripping time shall be governed by v/f versus time characteristics to cause tripping of transformer controlling circuit breaker if the over-fluxing conditions continue to exist.

Note:- The over fluxing relay in built with the numerical differential protection relay is acceptable provided it meets the above specification.

10

F) OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY:

It is proposed to provide an over current (i.e. single phase) relay for initiating an alarm during transformer overload condition on the T/F C&R panels. The relay shall have CONTINUOUS VARIABLE setting range of 50-120% of 1Amp. and shall be supplemented by a continuously variable timer of 1 to 10 seconds. The relay shall be arranged to sound an alarm when the transformer exceeds the setting for a given period of time to draw the operator's attention.

Note:- The over load alarm relay in built with the numerical differential protection relay is acceptable provided it meets the above specification.

5.11.2 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR LINES:

A) NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION SCHEME [FOR 66kV LINES] :

The main protection scheme for these lines will be distance scheme working on definite distance measuring principle both for phase & earth faults. The scheme shall :-

i) be numerical & modular in construction. Relay shall have continuous self monitoring & diagnostic feature.

ii) have high speed non-switched distance relays for three phase systems to clear all type of line faults within the set reach of the relay.

iii) It should cover at least line sections completely with 20% in hand margin. iv) measure all type of faults without the need to switch the measuring

elements to the faulty phase or phases. Zone switching to extend the reach of the measuring elements is not allowed. The reach of each zone shall be independently & individually adjustable and shall have setting in steps of 1%. Memory circuits with defined characteristics shall be provided in all three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults and other adverse conditions.

v) have a max. operating time upto trip impulse to circuit breaker (complete protn. time including trip relay time) under source to line impedance ratios (SIR) :0.01-4 as 50ms under all possible combinations of fault at 50% of zone-1 reach.

vi) have stepped time-distance characteristics and shall have at least two directional and one non-directional independently variable time graded distance protection zones to cover two adjacent line sections.

vii) The relay shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped characteristics for zone-1,2,3. The relay shall have an adjustable characteristics angle setting range of 30 - 85 degree or shall have independent resistance(R) & reactance(X) setting..

viii) ensure that this long coverage is consistent with limitations imposed by heavy loading and sound phase component of fault current. If the characteristics of starting relays are such that it cannot pick-up because of very low infeed, under-voltage relays may also be used as supplementary relays.

ix) have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3 seconds for zone-2 and 0-5 seconds for zone-3.

11

x) have a maximum resetting time of less than 55 milli-seconds (including the resetting time of trip relays). xi) have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting. xii) For correct measurement of earth faults necessary equipment for residual

compensation shall be included. It shall have residual compensation variable from 30-150%.

xiii) operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase fault.

xiv) be suitable for three phase tripping. xv) have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage

circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay shall also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 80 times rated current without damage for a period of 1 sec.

xvi) have adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirements & if required incorporate separate high speed self reset trip relays.

xvii) have suitable number of potential free contacts. Multiplication relays, if required, shall be provided for Event Logger, Disturbance recorder & Data acquisition system.

xviii) include power swing blocking protection which shall a1) be of triple pole type a2) have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described above. a3) have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range 0-2 seconds. a4) block tripping during power swing conditions. a5) be of numerical type xix) include fuse failure protection which shall a1) monitor all the three fuses of PTs/CVTs and associated cable against open circuit. a2) inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation. a3) remain inoperative for system earth faults. a4) be of numerical type.

xx) be suitable for 1 Amp. rated CT secondary, 110V (phase to phase ) VT supply and 220 V DC supply. Mode of conversation of DC supply from 220 V DC to the voltage level required for their scheme may be mentioned in detail. Requirement of CTs & VTs for the satisfactory working of the scheme may also be indicated in the tender.

xxi) The Scheme shall have in-built features of broken conductor detection, distance to fault locator, disturbance recorder and event logger. The scope of the relay shall include necessary software and hardware to down load the DR & EL data from relay to the PC installed in S/Stn. However, the supply of PC is not covered under this clause.

B) THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION: The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. It shall include VT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes.

DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT RELAY :

The relay shall i) be numerical type.

12

ii) have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times setting.

iii) have a variable setting range of 50-200% of 1 Amp. iv) have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lead. v) include operatio indicator. vi) be suitable for 110V VT secondary.

DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT RELAY:

The relay shall i) be numerical type. ii) have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10

times setting. iii) have a variable setting range of 20-80% of 1 Amp. iv) have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lag. v) include operation indicator. vi) be suitable for connection across open delta formed by 110/√3 volt rated

secondary of VT.

C) FEEDER OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY :

It is proposed to provide a single pole over current relay for the purpose of monitoring the load flow on feeders to sound an alarm whenever load flow in the line exceeds the setting for a given period of time to draw the operator's attention. The relay shall have CONTINUOUS VARIABLE setting range of 50-200% of 1 Amp. and shall be supplemented by a continuously variable timer of 1 to 10 seconds.

Note:- The Feeder over Load Alarm Relay in built with numerical distance protection relay

is acceptable provided it meets the above specification. 5.11.3 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR BUS COUPLER:

NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:

The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min. time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of 50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of 500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting range of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of 200% to 800% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. The relay shall be numerical type.

5.11.4TRIPPING RELAY: High speed tripping relay shall

i) be instantaneous ( operating time not to exceed 10 milli-seconds.) ii) reset within 20 milli-seconds. iii) Be 220 Volt DC operated. iv) Have adequate contacts to meet the scheme requirement v) Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.

13

5.12 RELAY SETTINGS :

The successful bidder will be responsible for calculating the relay setting of the protection schemes included in the bid and obtain HVPN's M&P wing clearance before their adoption. Any data\ information in regard to the power system required by the supplier for this purpose shall be supplied by HVPN.

5.13 TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUIPMENT: i) The Time synchronisation equipment shall receive the co-ordinated Universal Time (UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronise equipments to the Indian Standard Time in a substation. ii) Time synchronisation equipment shall include antenna, all special cables and processing equipment etc. iii) It shall be compatible for synchronisation of Event Loggers, Disturbance recorders and SCADA at a substation through individual port or through Ethernet realised through optic fibre bus. iv) The synchronisation equipment shall have 2 micro second accuracy. Equipment shall give real time corresponding to IST (taking into consideration all factors like voltage, & temperature variations, propagation & processing delays etc). v) Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for storage & operation. vi) The system shall be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of synchronisation signal. vii) The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site for either one hour, half hour, minute or second pulse, as per requirement. viii) The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various combinations of output ports shall be selected by the customer, during detailed engineering, from the following : · Voltage signal : Normally 0-5V with 50 milli Seconds minimum pulse duration. In case any other voltage signal required, it shall be decided during detailed engineering. · Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 milli Seconds.) · IRIG-B · RS232C ix) The equipment shall have a periodic time correction facility of one second periodicity. x) Time synchronisation equipment shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC DC as available at Substation. xi) Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute, second (24 hour mode) & have a separate time display unit to be mounted on the top of control panels having display size of approx. 100 mm height.

5.14. SMALL WIRING :

a) All wiring shall be of switch board type consisting of stranded /single annealed copper conductor insulated with polyvinyl chloride insulation suitable for 650 volts service and in accordance with IS : 694.

b) The wiring of the following circuits shall not be less than the size specified below:

CTs, PTs & CVTs circuits : 2.5 mm2 Control, alarm & supervision circuits etc. : 1.5 mm2

14

c) All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and also will have no tee - junction enroute. The connections shall be securely made with the help of connecting lugs to ensure non-oxidation of the bare copper conductor. At the terminal connections, washers shall be interposed between stud type terminals and holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connection studs shall project at least 6 mm from the lock nut surface.

d) Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately. Fuses and links shall be provided to enable all the circuits in a panel to be isolated from the bus wire. Wherever practicable, all circuits in which the voltage exceeds 125 volts shall be kept physically separated from the remaining wiring. The function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal boards.

e) All wiring diagrams for the control and relay boards shall be drawn as viewed from the back of the cubicle and shall be in accordance with IS:375 or equivalent IEC. Multi core cable tails shall be so bound to its cable that each wire may be traced without difficulty.

f) All potential bus wiring, non-trip and trip alarm bus wiring, AC & DC control supply, panel lighting bus wires and such other wiring which runs from panel to panel within a C&R panel board shall be laid out in gutters and shall be suitably screened. In case of `simplex' type C&R boards these common wires will run through bus wire holes.

5.15. TERMINAL BOARDS, TEST BLOCKS & SPARE CONTACTS : a) Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass

stud inserts shall be provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the panel wiring and the corresponding tail ends of control cables. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. The height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals. Provision shall be made on each pillar for holding 10% extra connectors.

b) The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 650 Volts service and for connection with both copper and aluminum wires.

c) Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy access to terminations and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty. Wire ends shall be so connected at the terminals that no wire terminal gets marked due to succeeding connections. Terminal board rows shall be adequately spaced and shall not be less than 100 mm apart so as to permit convenient access to wires and terminations. Labels in the form of engraved plastic plates shall be provided on the fixed portion of terminal boards. No live metal parts shall be exposed at the back of terminal boards.

d) Switch board type back connected test block with contacts shall be provided with links or other devices for shorting terminals of CT leads before interrupting the normal circuit for injection from an external source or for inserting testing instruments in the circuit without causing open circuit of the CT. The potential testing studs shall preferably be housed in narrow recesses of the block, wherever required, shall be placed as close to the equipments as possible. Test blocks shall be of flush mounting pattern and the number of test blocks being provided on each control and relay panel shall be stated in the tender.

15

e) The purpose of all the relays (including the auxiliary relays) switches, lamps & push buttons etc. is required to be indicated just below the respective equipment through engraving or painting.

f) Spare contacts of relays are required to be brought on T.B's and shall be indicated on the drawings.

5.16. BUS WIRES :

The VT, DC, AC, trip alarm , non-trip alarm & DC fail etc. inter panel bus wire terminals shall be brought on Bus T.B's as well as on T.B's so that any panel specified herein can be used separately at the Substation specified in this specification. The said bus wires for the panels specified in case of existing substations shall be matched with the bus wires of the C&R panels already available at site, the drawing for matching purposes for which shall be supplied to the successful bidder. The bus wire terminals shall be indicated on the panel schematic drawings as well. The bus wire diagram shall also be supplied alongwith the schematic drawings for each panel.

5.17. FERRULES :

Wire No. shall be indicated on panel schematic and wiring diagrams and accordingly engraved ferrules with the same numbers and letters as indicated in the said diagrams shall be provided on the terminal ends of all wires for easy identification of circuits for inspection and maintenance. Ferrules shall be of strong & flexible insulating material with glossy finish to prevent adhesion. These shall be engraved and marked clearly and shall not be effected by dampness. Ferrule numbering shall be in accordance with IS:375. The same ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits on a panel. At those points of interconnection between the wiring carried for equipments of different suppliers where a change of number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire with the appropriate connection diagram of the equipment.

5.18. SPACE HEATERS :

Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 220 Volts AC supply complete with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at the bottom of each control and relay panel to prevent condensation of moisture. The watt loss per unit surface of heater shall be low enough to keep surface temperature well below visible heat.

5.19. ILLUMINATION :

The C&R panel shall be provided with 220/240 Volts AC interior lighting. The lamp shall be free from hand shadows. A door operated button switch shall be provided in each simplex panel. Each simplex panel shall be provided with one no. illumination lamp with door switch.

5.20 POWER SOCKET :

Single phase 240 volt AC, 5/15A, 5Pin power socket with power on/off switch shall be provided in each simplex panel.

16

5.21 SAFETY EARTHING :

Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipment mounted on the switch boards shall be done with bare copper conductor. Copper bus of size 25 mm x 6 mm extending through entire length of a control and relay board shall be provided. The earthing conductor shall be connected by Rose Countney terminals and clamp junctions .

The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers and one corner of the open delta connected LV side of potential transformer, if used shall be similarly earthed with the main earth bar of the switch board earthing system. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformer shall be avoided. An electrostatic discharge point shall be provided in each panel connected to earth bus via 1 Mega Ohm resistor.

5.22. NAME PLATE : An easily accessible engraved or painted panel name plate shall be provided inside

each panel. It must include G.A. drawing No., purchase order No., Contractor's reference No., name of s/stn. as per purchase order and name of circuit. In addition to this, an engraved plate indicating the purchase order no. alongwith name of s/stn. is required to be affixed on the panel at appropriate height so that it is readable while standing in front of the panel. These are required to be indicated on the G.A. drawings also.

An engraved label indicating the purpose of all the relays & switches shall also be provided.

5.23 PANEL DETAILS: The mountings on various 66kV C&R panels against various Substations specified

herein shall be as under. The bidders shall give the details of the various panel mountings in the same serial as specified herein as under for the convenience of checking of the same w.r.t. the provision in the specification. Any trip relay, auxiliary relay, timers, contact multiplication relay, ICT, IVT & test block etc. required for the completeness of the scheme shall be added by the Bidder as per scheme requirements and no cost addition on these accounts shall be considered at a later date.

The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each type of panel. (A) LINE PROTECTION PANEL Each Line Protection panel for transmission lines shall consist of following:

Sl. No. Description 66kV 1. Main-1 Numerical Distance protection

Scheme 1 Set 2. Directional back up Overcurrent and E/F 1Set

protection scheme 3. Overload alarm scheme 1Set

4. 3 phase Trip Relays 1 No. 5. Flag relays, carrier receive relays ,aux.

Relays timers etc as per scheme

17

Requirements Lot 6. Under Voltage relay for isolator/earth

Switch 1 Nos 7. Voltage Selection Scheme 1Set (B) TRANSFORMER PROTECTION PANEL Each protection panel for Transformer shall consist of the following:

Sl.No. Description HV side LVside 1. Transformer Differential Protection scheme 1 Set Nil 2. Restricted Earth fault protection scheme 1 Set 1Set 3. Non-Directional back up O/C and E/F scheme with high set feature 1 set 1 set 4. Over Fluxing Protection scheme 1 Set - 5. Overload alarm scheme 1 Set NIL 6. Three phase trip relays 2 nos. 1 nos. 7. Flag relays ,aux .relays, timers etc as per scheme requirement including transformer alarms and trip functions Lot Lot 8. Over Voltage Protection relay NIL 1 nos.* * applicable only for 11kV 9. Voltage Selection Scheme 1Set - (C) BREAKER RELAY PANEL Each breaker relay panel shall consist of the following Sl.No. Description With out A/R 1. DC supply Supervision scheme 1 set 2. Trip Circuit supervision relays 2 Nos. 3. Flag relays, aux relays, timers, trip relays as per scheme requirements Lot (D) BUS COUPLER PROTECTION PANEL Each bus coupler Protection panel shall consist of following: Sl. No. Description 66kV 1. Non-Directional Overcurrent and E/F protection scheme 1Set 2. 3 phase Trip Relays 1 No. 3. Flag relays , aux.Relays timers etc as per scheme Requirements Lot Note:- The CT secondary current is 5A for 11kV in all panels. 6.0 TESTS: 6.1 TYPE TESTS:

The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.

a) Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5 b) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255-4 (Appendix -E) -Class III (not applicable for electromechanical relays)

18

c) Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level III(not applicable for electromechanical relays)

d) Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255. e) Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6 f) Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6 g) Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20 h) Conformance tests as per IEC 61850

6.2 ROUTINE TESTS:

As per quality assurance program (QAP). 6.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

Following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s works after complete assembly in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL:-

i) Checking wiring of circuits and their continuity. ii) One minute high voltage test. iii) Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipment

mounted on panel. iv) Checking the operation of protection schemes.

7.0 DOCUMENTATION:

7.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of G.A. and schematic drawings for HVPNL’s approval incorporating following details also.

a) Schematic drawings of breakers are to be incorporated in the panel schematic drawings.

b) Trip details of transformer are to be incorporated in the panel schematic drawings. After receipt of HVPNL’s approval, the bidder shall submit final drawings for each circuit of the following drawings:- i) Boardwise arrangement drawing (applicable for the panel board at a

Substation having more than one panel). ii) G.A.drawing alongwith G.A. legend and foundation details. iii) Schematic drawings alongwith legend & internal wiring details of main relays

like transformer differential relay, REF relay, local breaker back up schemes, distance protection scheme, bus-bar protection scheme, voltage selection scheme etc.

iv) Equipment-wise & wire-wise wiring diagrams. Each set of drawings shall be bound separately.

7.2 The bidder shall furnish specified no. of nicely printed and bound volumes of the

instruction manuals in English language of the equipment. The instruction manual shall contain step by step instructions for all operational & maintenance requirements for all the protective and aux. relays, switches, instruments etc. mounted on the panel and shall include the following aspects.

i) Storage for prolonged duration. ii) Unpacking. iii) Erection. iv) Handling at site. v) Pre commissioning tests.

19

vi) Operating procedures. vii) Maintenance procedure. viii) Precautions to be taken during operation & maintenance work. ix) Catalogue numbers of all the components liable to be replaced during the

life of the panels. x) Internal wiring diagrams of all the relays.

Each set of instruction manuals shall be bound separately.

NOTE:- One master set for all the substations shall be supplied with in a week of placement of order to the Design Directorate to facilitate the checking and approval of drawings.

20

ANNEXURE-A TRANSMISSION LINE DATA (TENTATIVE) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Sr. Name of Circuit O.H. Line U.G. Cable No. Line Conductor size Cable Size in length Sq. inch ACSR length Sq. mm In km(approx) copper equivalent in km(approx.) (Al.) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

21

ANNEXURE-B

LINE PARAMETERS (per UNIT)/100 MVA BASE/100 km

WITH CONDUCTOR SIZE & POWER CAPACITY

Remarks:

1. Size of Earth wire for:-

66 kV=7/2..5 mm

2. Resistance of conductor at 200 C.

3. Resistivity of Earth Assumed= 100

Voltage (kV)

No. of Ckt.

Conductor size (inch2)

Resistance R Ω

Reactance X Ω

Susceptance Y Ω

Resistance R0

Ω

Reactance X0

Ω

Line Capacity (MW)

66

D/C

0.15

0.2347

0.4637

0.0272

0.71210

2.70857

50

66

S/C

0.15

0.4695

0.9275

0.0136

0.93744

3.20761

25

1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

2.

SECTION – V CHAPTER – 4

SECTION: SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM GENERAL The substation automation system shall be offered from a manufacturer who must have designed, manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned substation automation system which must be in satisfactory operation on 220kV system or higher for at least 2 (Two) years as on the date of bid opening. The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be installed to control and monitor all the sub-station equipment from remote control centre (RCC) as well as from local control centre. The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts: • Bay control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IED s) for control and monitoring. • Station Human Machine Interface (HMI) • Redundant managed switched Ethernet Local Area Network communication

infrastructure with hot standby. • Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards, Mouse etc. It shall enable local station control via a PC by means of human machine interface (HMI) and control software package, which shall contain an extensive range of supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) functions. It shall include communication gateway, intelligent electronic devices (IED) for bay control and inter IED communication infrastructure. An architecture drawing for SAS is enclosed. The communication gateway shall facilitate the information flow with remote control centres. The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control shal provide the direct connection to the switchgear without the need of interposing components and perform control, protection, and monitoring functions. System design

Page 1 of 28

2.1 2.2

General system design The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation and monitoring of the complete substation including future extensions as given in Section-Project. The systems shal be of the state-of-the art suitable for operation under electrical environment present in Extra high voltage substations, follow the latest engineering practice, ensure long-term compatibility requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff. The offered SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from Remote Control centres via gateways. The system shall be designed such that personnel without any background knowledge in Microprocessor-based technology are able to operate the system. The operator interface shall be intuitive such that operating personnel shall be able to operate the system easily after having received some basic training. The system shall incorporate the control, monitoring and protection functions specified, self-monitoring, signalling and testing facilities, measuring as well as memory functions, event recording and evaluation of disturbance records. Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shutdown of the whole substation automation system. Self-monitoring of components, modules and communication shall be incorporated to increase the availability and the reliability of the equipment and minimize maintenance. Bidder shall offer the Bay level unit (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer), bay mimic along with relay and protection panels and PLCC panels (described in other sections of technical specifications) housed in Panel room suitably located in switchyard and Station HMI in Control Room building for overall optimisation in respect of cabling and control room building..

System architecture The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-oriented, distributed intelligence.

Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to the process.

The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases. The typical SAS architecture shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a station and a bay level.

At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level functions regarding control, monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication and outputs for commands. The IEDs should be directly connected to the to the switchgear without any need for

interposition or transducer.

Page 2 of 28

Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its functioning shall not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control units of the station. The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level shall take place via the communication infrastructure. This shall be realized using fibre-optic cables, thereby guaranteeing disturbance free communication. The fibre optic cables shall be run in G.I conduit pipes. Data exchange is to be realised using IEC 61850 protocol with a redundant managed switched Ethernet communication infrastructure. The communication shal be made in 1+1 mode, excluding the links between individual bay IEDs to switch, such that failure of one set of fibre shall not affect the normal operation of the SAS. However it shall be alarmed in SAS. Each fibre optic cable shall have four (4) spare fibres. At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the station HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay level equipment at all times. Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch at the same time from more than one of the various control levels, i.e. RCC, station HMI, bay level or apparatus level. The priority shall always be on the lowest enabled control level. The station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be realised at bay level, e.g. alarm list or event list related to the entire substation, gateway for the communication with remote control centres. The GPS time synchronising signal ( as specified in the section relay & protection) for the synchronization of the entire system shall be provided.

The SAS shall contain the functional parts as described in para 1.2 above. 2.3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS

The high-voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different places:

�

�

�

Remote control

Station HMI.

Local Bay controller IED (in the bays)

2.3.1

Operation shall be possible by only one operator at a time.

The operation shal depend on the conditions of other functions, such as interlocking, synchrocheck, etc. (see description in ”Bay level control functions”).

Select-before-execute

Page 3 of 28

2.3.2

2.3.3 2.3.4

2.3.5

3.1

For security reasons the command is always to be given in two stages: selection of the object and command for operation under all mode of operation except emergency operation. Final execution shall take place only when selection and command are actuated.

Command supervision

Bay/station interlocking and blocking Software Interlocking is to be provided to ensure that inadvertent incorrect operation of switchgear causing damage and accidents in case of false operation does not take place. In addition to software interlocking hardwired interlocking are to be provided for:

(a) Bus Earth switch Interlocking (b) Transfer Bus interlocking (if applicable)

It shall be a simple layout, easy to test and simple to handle when upgrading the station with future bays. For software interlocking the bidder shall describe the scenario while an IED of another bay is switched off or fails.

A software interlock override function shall be provided which can be enabled to bypass the interlocking function.

Run Time Command cancellation

Command execution timer (configurable) must be available for each control level connection. If the control action is not completed within a specified time, the command should get cancelled. Self-supervision

Continuous self-supervision function with self-diagnostic feature shall be included. User configuration The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical signals and binary inputs and relay outputs for al built-in functions and signals shall be possible both locally and remotely. It shall also be possible to interconnect and derive input and output signals, logic functions, using built-In functions, complex voltage and currents, additional logics (AND-gates, OR gates and timers). (Multi-activation of these additional functions should be possible).

The Functional requirement shall be divided into following levels:

a. Bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer) Level Functions

b. System Level Functions

Bay level functions

Page 4 of 28

3.1.1.

3.1.1.1.

3.1.1.2.

In a decentralized architecture the functionality shall be as close to the process as possible. In this respect, the following functions can be allocated at bay level: � Bay control functions including data collection functionality.

� Bay protection functions

Separate IEDs shall be provided for bay control function and bay protection function.

Bay control functions

Overview

Functions

� Control mode selection � Select-before-execute principle � Command supervision:

o Interlocking and blocking o Double command

� Synchrocheck, voltage selection � Run Time Command cancellation � Transformer tap changer control (for power transformer bays) � Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps � Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor control and runtime supervision � Operating pressure supervision � Display of interlocking and blocking � Breaker position indication per phase � Alarm annunciation � Measurement display � Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode) � Interface to the station HMI. � Data storage for at least 200 events � Extension possibilities with additional I/O's inside the unit or via fibre-optic

communication and process bus Control mode selection

Bay : As soon as the operator receives the operation access at bay level the operation is normally performed via bay control IED. During normal operation bay control unit allows the safe operation of all switching devices via the bay control IED.

EMERGENCY Operation It shall be possible to close or open the selected Circuit Breaker with ON or OFF push buttons even during the outage of bay IED. REMOTE mode

Page 5 of 28

3.1.1.3.

3.1.1.4.

3.1.2.

3.1.2.1.

3.2. 3.2.1.

Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (Remote Control Centre) and the installation can be controlled only remotely. Control operation from lower levels shal not be possible in this operating mode. Synchronism and energizing check The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be bay-oriented and distributed to the bay control and/or protection devices. These features are: � Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference. � Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line – dead bus with no synchro-check function. � Synchronising between live line and live bus with synchro-check function

Voltage selection The voltages relevant for the Synchrocheck functions are dependent on the station topology, i.e. on the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The correct voltage for synchronizing and energizing is derived from the auxiliary switches of the circuit breakers, the isolator, and earthing switch and shall be selected automatically by the bay control and protection IEDs. Transformer tap changer control Raise and lower operation of OLTC taps of transformer shall be facilitated through Bay controller IED.

Bay protection functions

General

The protection functions are independent of bay control function. The protection shall be provided by separate protection IEDs (numerical relays) and other protection devices as per section Relay & Protection. IEDs, shall be connected to the communication infrastructure for data sharing and meet the real-time communication requirements for automatic functions. The data presentation and the configuration of the various IEDs shall be compatible with the overal system communication and data exchange requirements. Event and disturbance recording function Each IED should contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 200 time-tagged events. This shall give alarm if 70% memory is full. The disturbance recorder function shall be as per detailed in section C&R

System level functions Status supervision

Page 6 of 28

3.2.2. 3.2.3.

3.2.4.

3.2.4.1.

3.2.4.2

3.2.4.2. The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch, transformer tap changer etc., shall be supervised continuously. Every detected change of position shall be immediately displayed in the single-line diagram on the station HMI screen, recorded in the event list, and a hard copy printout shall be produced. Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes. The switchgear positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches, normally closed (NC) and normally open (NO), which shall give ambivalent signals. An alarm shall be initiated if these position indications are inconsistent or if the time required for operating mechanism to change position exceeds a predefined limit. The SAS shall also monitor the status of sub-station auxiliaries. The status and control of auxiliaries shall be done through separate one or more IED and all alarm and analogue values shall be monitored and recoded through this IED. Measurements Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected directly to the voltage transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without intermediate transducers. The values of active power (W), reactive power (VAR), frequency (Hz), and the rms values for voltage (U) and current (I) shall be calculated. The measured values shall be displayed locally on the station HMI and in the control centre. The abnormal values must be discarded.

The analogue values shall be updated every 2 seconds.

Threshold limit values shall be selectable for alarm indications.

Event and alarm handling Events and alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the control IEDs, or by the station level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI. Alarms shall be recorded in a separate alarm list and appear on the screen. All, or a freely selectable group of events and alarms shall also be printed out on an event printer.

The alarms and events shall be time-tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms. Station HMI

Substation HMI Operation: On the HMI the object has to be selected first. In case of a blocking or interlocking conditions are not met, the selection shall not be possible and an appropriate alarm annunciation shall occur. If a selection is valid the position indication will show the possible direction, and the appropriate control execution button shall be pressed in order to close or open the corresponding object. Control operation from other places (e.g. REMOTE) shall not be possible in this operating mode. Presentation and dialogues

Page 7 of 28

3.2.4.3. 3.2.4.4.

General The operator station HMI shall be a redundant with hot standby and shall provide basic functions for supervision and control of the substation. The operator shall give commands to the switchgear on the screen via mouse clicks or keyboard commands. The HMI shall give the operator access to alarms and events displayed on the screen. Aside from these lists on the screen, there shall be a printout of alarms or events in an event log. An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities, and all unacknowledged alarms shall be accessible from any screen selected by the operator. The following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI:

� Single-line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured values � Control dialogues with interlocking and blocking details. This control dialogue shall tell the operator whether the device operation is permitted or blocked. � Measurement dialogues � Alarm list, station / bay-oriented � Event list, station / bay-oriented � System status

HMI design principles Consistent design principles shall be adopted with the HMI concerning labels, colours, dialogues and fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out. The object status shal be indicated using different status colours for:

� Selected object under command � Selected on the screen � Not updated, obsolete values, not in use or not sampled � Alarm or faulty state � Warning or blocked � Update blocked or manually updated � Control blocked � Normal state

Process status displays and command procedures

The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages, frequency, active and reactive powers as well as the positions of circuit breakers, isolators and transformer tap-changers shall be displayed in the station single-line diagram. In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired operation, a "select-before-execute" command procedure shall be provided. After the "selection" of a switch, the operator shall be able to recognize the selected device on the screen, and all other

Page 8 of 28

3.2.4.5.

3.2.4.6.

switchgear shall be blocked. As communication between control centre and device to be controlled is established, the operator shall be prompted to confirm the control action and only then final execute command shall be accepted. After the “execution” of the command the operated switching symbol shall flash until the switch has reached its new position.

The operator shal be in a position to execute a command only, if the switch is not blocked and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated. The interlocking statements shall be checked by the interlocking scheme implemented at bay and station level. After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new switching position has been reached or an indication that the switching procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for non-functioning. System supervision & display The SAS system shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults are immediately indicated to the operator, possibly before they develop into serious situations. Such faults are recorded as a faulty status in a system supervision display. This display shall cover the status of the entire substation including all switchgear, IEDs, communication infrastructure and remote communication links, and printers at the station level, etc. Event list The event list shall contain events that are important for the control and monitoring of the substation.

The event and associated time (with1 ms resolution) of its occurrence has to be displayed for each event. The operator shal be able to call up the chronological event list on the monitor at any time for the whole substation or sections of it.

A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.

The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of event and its time of occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the computer for at least one month.

The information shall be obtainable also from a printed event log. The chronological event list shall contain:

� Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices � Indication of protective relay operations � Fault signals from the switchgear � Indication when analogue measured values exceed upper and lower limits. Suitable provision shall be made in the system to define two level of alarm on either side of the value or which shall be user defined for each measurand.

Page 9 of 28

3.2.4.7.

3.2.4.8.

� Loss of communication. Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters shall be designed to enable viewing of events grouped per:

� Date and time � Bay � Device � Function e.g. trips, protection operations etc. � Alarm class

Alarm list Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and shall be immediately transmitted to the control centre.

The alarm list shall substitute a conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an evaluation of all station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults. The date and time of occurrence shall be indicated.

The alarm list shal consist of a summary display of the present alarm situation. Each alarm shall be reported on one line that contains:

� The date and time of the alarm � The name of the alarming object � A descriptive text � The acknowledgement state.

Whenever an alarm condition occurs, the alarm condition must be shown on the alarm list and must be displayed in a flashing state along with an audible alarm. After acknowledgement of the alarm, it should appear in a steady (i.e. not flashing) state and the audible alarm shall stop. The alarm should disappear only if the alarm condition has physically cleared and the operator has reset the alarm with a reset command. The state of the alarms shall be shown in the alarm list (Unacknowledged and persistent, Unacknowledged and cleared, Acknowledged and persistent).

Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events.

Object picture When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single-line diagram, the associated bay picture shall be presented first. In the selected object picture, all attributes like

� Type of blocking � Authority � Local / remote control � RSCC / SAS control � Errors

Page 10 of 28

3.2.4.9.

3.2.5.

3.2.6.

� etc., shall be displayed.

Control dialogues The operator shall give commands to the system by means of mouse click located on the single-line diagram. It shall also be possible to use the keyboard for command activation. Data entry is performed with the keyboard. Dedicated control dialogues for controlling at least the foll owing devices shall be available:

� Breaker and disconnector � Transformer tap-changer

User-authority levels It shall be possible to restrict activation of the process pictures of each object (bays, apparatus...) within a certain user authorisation group. Each user shall then be given access rights to each group of objects, e.g.:

� Display only � Normal operation (e.g. open/close of switchgear) � Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking) � System administrator

For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following authorisation levels shall be available:

� No engineering allowed � Engineering/configuration allowed � Entire system management allowed

The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the log-in procedure. Only the system administrator shall be able to add/remove users and change access rights. Reports The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and calculated values. The data displayed shall comprise:

� Trend reports: • Day (mean, peak) • Month (mean, peak) • Semi-annual (mean, peak) • Year (mean, peak)

� Historical reports of selected analogue Values: • Day (at 15 minutes interval) • Week • Month

Page 11 of 28

3.2.7.

3.2.8.

3.2.9.

• Year

It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in the process display on-line. Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall be indicated. It shall be possible to select the time period for which the specific data are kept in the memory. Following printouts shall be available from the printer and shall be printed on demand:

i. Daily voltage and frequency curves depicting time on X-axis and the appropriate

parameters on the Y-axis. The time duration of the curve is 24 hours.

ii. Weekly trend curves for real and derived analogue values. iii. Printouts of the maximum and minimum values and frequency of occurrence and

duration of maximum and minimum values for each analogue parameter for each circuit in 24 hr period.

iv. Provision shall be made for logging information about breaker status like number

of operation with date and time indications.

v. Equipment operation details shift wise and during 24 hours. vi. Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand for MW, MVAR, Current,

Voltage on each feeder and transformer as well as Tap Positions, temperature and status of pumps and fans for transformers.

vii. Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand system frequency and

average frequency. viii. Reports in specified formats which shall be handed over to successful bidder. Trend display (historical data) It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends - input and output data, binary and analogue data. The trends shall be displayed in graphical form as column or curve diagrams with a maximum of 10 trends per screen. Adjustable time span and scaling ranges must be provided.

It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum, or difference) on-line in the window. It shall also be possible to change the update intervals on-line in the picture as well as the selection of threshold values for alarming purposes. Automatic disturbance file transfer All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder as well as dedicated disturbance recording systems shall be automatically uploaded (event triggered or once per day) to a dedicated computer and be stored on the hard disc. Disturbance analysis

Page 12 of 28

3.2.10.

3.2.11. 3.3. 3.3.1

3.3.2 3.3.3

The PC-based work station shall have necessary software to evaluate all the required information for proper fault analysis. IED parameter setting It shall be possible to access al protection and control IEDs for reading the parameters (settings) from the station HMI or from a dedicated monitoring computer. The setting of parameters or the activation of parameter sets shall only be allowed after entering a password. Automatic sequences The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and described, (e.g. sequences related to the bus transfer). It must be possible to initiate pre-defined automatic sequences by the operator and also define new automatic sequences. Gateway

Communication Interface The Substation Automation System shall have the capability to support simultaneous communications with multiple independent remote master stations,

The Substation Automation System shall have communication ports as follows:

(a) Two ports for Remote Control Centre (b) Two ports for Regional System Coordination Centre (RSCC) The communication interface to the SAS shall allow scanning and control of defined points within the substation automation system independently for each control centre. The substation automation system shall simultaneously respond to independent scans and commands from employer's control centres (RCC & RSCC). The substation automation system shall support the use of a different communication data exchange rate (bits per second), scanning cycle, and/or communication protocol to each remote control centre. Also, each control centre’s data scan and control commands may be different for different data points within the substation automation system's database.

Remote Control Centre Communication Interface

Employer will supply communication channels between the Substation Automation System and the remote control centre. The communication channels provided by Employer will consist either of power line carrier, microwave, optical fibre, VSAT or leased line , the details of which shal be provided during detailed Engineering . Interface equipment: The Contractor shall provide interface equipment for communicating between Substation Automation system and Remote control centre

Page 13 of 28

3.3.4

4.0 S

4.1 4.1.1

and between Substation Automation system and Regional System Coordination Centre (RSCC). However, the communication channels available for this purpose are specified in section project. In case of PLCC communication any modem supplied shall not require manual equalization and shall include self-test features such as manual mark/space keying, analogue loop-back, and digital loop-back. The modems shall provide for convenient adjustment of output level and receive sensitivity. The modem should be stand alone complete in all respects including power supply to interface the SAS with communication channel. The configuration of tones and speed shall be programmable and maintained in non-volatile memory in the modem. All necessary hardware and software shal also be in the scope of bidder except the communication link along with communication equipment between substation control room and Remote Control Centre.

Communication Protocol The communication protocol for gateway to control centre must be open protocol and shall support IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 61850 for all levels of communication for sub-station automation such as Bay to station HMI, gateway to remote station etc..

System Hardware :

Redundant Station HMI, HMI View Node, Remote HMI and Disturbance Recorder Work station:

The contractor shall provide redundant station HMI in hot standby mode.

It shal be capable to perform all functions for entire substation including future requirements as indicated in the SLD. It shal use industrial grade components. Processor and RAM shall be selected in such a manner that during normal operation not more than 30% capacity of processing and memory are used. Supplier shall demonstrate these features. The capacity of hard disk shall be selected such that the following requirement should occupy less than 50% of disk space: 1. Storage of al analogue data (at 15 Minutes interval)and digital data including

alarm , event and trend data for thirty(30) days, 2. Storage of all necessary software, 3. 20GB space for OWNER'S use.

Supplier shall demonstrate that the capacity of hard disk is sufficient to meet the above requirement.

HMI (Human Machine Interface)

The VDU shall show overview diagrams (Single Line Diagrams) and complete details of the switchgear with a colour display. Al event and

Page 14 of 28

4.1.2

4.1.3 4.1.4

alarm annunciation shall be selectable in the form of lists. Operation shall be by a user friendly function keyboard and a cursor positioning device. The user interface shall be based on WINDOWS concepts with graphics & facility for panning, scrolling, zooming, decluttering etc. Visual Display Units/TFT's ( Thin Film Technology)

The contractor shall provide three display units, one for station HMI, one for redundant HMI and one for DR work station. These shall have high resolution and reflection protected picture screen. High stability of the picture geometry shall be ensured. The screen shall be at least 21" diagonally in size and capable of colour graphic displays. The display shall accommodate resolution of 1280 X 1024 pixels. The HMI shall be able to switch the key board and cursor positioning device, as unit among all the monitors at a consol vis push button or other controls.

Printer It shall be robust & suitable for operation with a minimum of 132 characters per line. The printing operation shall be quiet with a noise level of less than 45 dB suitable for location in the control room. Printer shall accept and print al ASCII characters via master control computer unit interface. The printer shall have in built testing facility. Failure of the printer shal be indicated in the Station HMI. The printer shall have an off line mode selector switch to enable safe maintenance. The maintenance should be simple with provisions for ease of change of print head, ribbon changing, paper insertion etc. All printers mounted in the control room shall be provided with a separate printer enclosure each. The enclosure shal be designed to permit full enclosure of the printers at a convenient level. Plexiglas windows shall be used to provide visual inspection of the printers and ease of reading. The printer enclosures shall be designed to protect the printers from accidental external contact & each should be removable from hinges at the back and shall be provided with lock at the front. All reports and graphics prints shal be printed on laser printer. One dot matrix printer shall be exclusively used for hourly log printing. All printers shall be continuously online.

Mass Storage Unit The mass storage unit shall be built-in to the Station HMI. All operational measured values, and indications shall be stored in a mass-storage unit of CD-ROM / DVD-ROM with 700 MB or more capacity. The unit should support at least Read (48X), Write(24X), and Re-Write (10X) operations, with Multi-Session capability. It should

Page 15 of 28

4.1.5

4.2 4.2.1

support ISO9660, Rockridge and Joliet File systems. It should support formatting and use under the operating system provided for Station HMI. The monthly back up of data shall be taken on disc. The facility of back up of data shall be inherent in the software.

Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure: The bidder shall provide the redundant switched optical Ethernet communication infrastructure for SAS. The bidder shall keep provision of 100% spare capacity for employer use. One switch shall be provided to connect all IEDs for two adjacent bays of 66kV yard to communication infrastructure.

Bay level unit The bay unit shall use industrial grade components. The bay level unit, based on microprocessor technology, shall use numerical techniques for the calculation and evaluation of externally input analogue signals. They shall incorporate select-before-operate control principles as safety measures for operation via the HMI. They shall perform all bay related functions, such as control commands, bay interlocking, data acquisition, data storage, event recording and shall provide inputs for status indication and outputs for commands. They shall be directly connected to the switchgear. The bay unit shall acquire and process all data for the bay (Equipment status, fault indications, measured values, alarms etc.) and transmit these to the other devices in sub-station automation system. In addition, this shall receive the operation commands from station HMI and control centre. The bay unit shall have the capability to store all the data for at least 24 hours.

One no. Bay level unit shall be provided for supervision and control of each 66kV bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer). The Bay level unit shall be equipped with analogue and binary inputs/outputs for handling the control, status monitoring and analogue measurement functions. All bay level interlocks are to be incorporated in the Bay level unit so as to permit control from the Bay level unit/ local bay mimic panel, with all bay interlocks in place, during maintenance and commissioning or in case of contingencies when the Station HMI is out of service. The Bay level unit shall meet the requirements for withstanding electromagnetic interference according to relevant parts of IEC 61850. Failure of any single component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted operation nor lead to a complete system breakdown.

Input/Output (I/O) modules The I/O modules shall form a part of the bay level unit and shall provide coupling to the substation equipment. The I/O modules shall acquire all switchgear information (i.e. data coming directly from the switchgear or from switchgear interlocking devices) and transmit

Page 16 of 28

4.3

4.4

5.0 5.1.1 5.1.1.1

commands for operation of the switchgear. The measured values of voltage and current shall be from the secondaries of instrument transformers. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1 ms resolution. Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed as change of state Panel Rooms The Panel rooms shall house Bay level units, bay mimic, relay and protection panels, PLCC panels etc. The layout of equipment/panel shall be subject to Owner’s approval. Extendibility in future Offered substation automation system shall be suitable for extension in future for additional bays. During such requirement, all the drawings and configurations, alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed in such a manner that its extension shall be easily performed by the employer. During such event, normal operation of the existing substation shall be unaffected and system shall not require a shutdown. The contractor shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes to perform addition of bays in future and complete integration with SAS by the user. These software tools shall be able to configure IED, add additional analogue variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for additional bays/equipment which shall be added in future. Software structure The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture and strictly divided in various levels. Necessary firewall shall be provided at suitable points in software to protect the system.

An extension of the station shall be possible with lowest possible efforts. Maintenance, modification or an extension of components of any feeder may not force a shut-down of the parts of the system which are not affected by the system adaptation.

Station level software

Human-machine interface (HMI) The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main SAS functions and it shall be independent of project specific hardware version and operating system. It shall further include tools for picture editing, engineering and system configuration. The system shall be easy to use, to maintain, and to adapt according to specific user requirements. Systems shall contain a library with standard functions and applications.

Page 17 of 28

5.1.2 5.1.1.1

5.1.1.2 5.1.1.3

Bay level software

System software The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be placed in a non-volatile memory. The lowest level shall assure system performance and contain basic functions, which shall not be accessible by the application and maintenance engineer for modifications. The system shall support the generation of typical control macros and a process database for user specific data storage. In case of restoration of links after failure, the software along with hardware shall be capable of automatically synchronising with the remaining system without any manual interface. This shall be demonstrated by contractor during integrated system test. Application software In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of the application software shall consist of standard software modules built as functional block elements. The functional blocks shall be documented and thoroughly tested. They form part of a library. The application software within the control/protection devices shall be programmed in a functional block language. Network Management System:

The contractor shall provide a network management system software for following management functions: a. Configuration Management b. Fault Management c. Performance Monitoring

This system shall be used for management of communication devices and other IEDs in the system. This NMS can be loaded in DR work-station and shall be easy to use, user friendly and menu based. The NMS shall monitor all the devices in the SAS and report if there is any fault in the monitored devices. The NMS shall

(a) Maintain performance, resource usage, and error statistics for all managed links and devices and present this information via displays, periodic reports and on demand reports.

(b) Maintain a graphical display of SAS connectivity and device status. (c) Issue alarms when error conditions occurs (d) Provide facility to add and delete addresses and links

Page 18 of 28

5.1.1.4 6.0

6.1 6.1.1

The contractor shal provide each software in two copies in CD to load into the system in case of any problem related with Hardware/Communication etc.

TESTS The substation automation system offered by the bidder shall be subjected to following tests to establish compliance with IEC 61850 for EHV sub-station equipment installed in sheltered area in the outdoor switchyard and specified ambient conditions:

Type Tests: Control IEDs and Communication Equipment:

a. Power Input:

i. Auxiliary Voltage ii. Current Circuits iii. Voltage Circuits iv. Indications

b. Accuracy Tests: i. Operational Measured Values ii. Currents iii. Voltages iv. Time resolution

c. Insulation Tests: i. Dielectric Tests ii. Impulse Voltage withstand Test

d. Influencing Quantities i. Limits of operation ii. Permissible ripples iii. Interruption of input voltage

e. Electromagnetic Compatibility Test: i. 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test ii. Electrostatic Discharge Test iii. Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test iv. Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test v. Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field vi. Magnetic Field Test vii. Emission (Radio interference level) Test. viii. Conducted Interference Test

f. Function Tests: i. Indication ii. Commands iii. Measured value Acquisition iv. Display Indications

g. Environmental tests: i. Cold Temperature ii. Dry Heat i i. Wet heat iv. Humidity (Damp heat Cycle) v. Vibration vi. Bump

Page 19 of 28

6.2 6.3

vii. Shock Factory Acceptance Tests:

The supplier shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test (FAT) and commissioning tests of the station automation system for approval. For the individual bay level IED’s applicable type test certificates shall be submitted. The manufacturing phase of the SAS shall be concluded by the factory acceptance test (FAT). The purpose is to ensure that the Contractor has interpreted the specified requirements correctly and that the FAT includes checking to the degree required by the user. The general philosophy shall be to deliver a system to site only after it has been thoroughly tested and its specified performance has been verified, as far as site conditions can be simulated in a test lab. If the FAT comprises only a certain portion of the system for practical reason, it has to be assured that this test configuration contains at least one unit of each and every type of equipment incorporated in the delivered system. If the complete system consists of parts from various suppliers or some parts are already installed on site, the FAT shall be limited to sub-system tests. In such a case, the complete system test shall be performed on site together with the site acceptance test (SAT).

6.3 Integrated Testing;

The integrated system tests shall be performed as detailed in subsequent clauses as per following configuration:

• Redundant Station HMI, DR work station, two switches (i.e. for two diameter)

along with all IEDs for the Dia and printers. All other switches for complete sub-station as detailed in section project shall be simulated as needed.

6.3.1 Hardware Integration Tests:

The hardware integration test shall be performed on the specified systems to be used for Factory tests when the hardware has been installed in the factory. The operation of each item shall be verified as an integral part of system. Applicable hardware diagnostics shall be used to verify that each hardware component is completely operational and assembled into a configuration capable of supporting software integration and factory testing of the system. The equipment expansion capability shall also be verified during the hardware integration tests.

6.3.2 Integrated System Tests:

Page 20 of 28

6.4

7.0 7.1 7.1.1

Integrated system tests shall verify the stability of the hardware and the software. During the tests all functions shall run concurrently and all equipment shall operate a continuous 100 Hours period. The integrated system test shall ensure the SAS is free of improper interactions between software and hardware while the system is operating as a whole.

6.4 Field Tests:

The field tests shall completely verify all the features of SAS hardware and software. SYSTEM OPERATION

Substation Operation NORMALOPERATION Operation of the system by the operator from the remote RCC or at the substation shall take place via industry standard HMI (Human Machine interface) subsystem consisting of graphic colour VDU, a standard keyboard and a cursor positioning device (mouse).

The coloured screen shall be divided into 3 fields: i) Message field with display of present time and date ii) Display field for single line diagrams iii) Navigation bar with alarm/condition indication For display of alarm annunciation, lists of events etc a separate HMI View node shall be provided. All operations shall be performed with mouse and/or a minimum number of function keys and cursor keys. The function keys shall have different meanings depending on the operation. The operator shall see the relevant meanings as function tests displayed in the command field (i.e. operator prompting). For control actions, the switchgear (i.e. circuit breaker etc.) requested shal be selectable on the display by means of the cursor keys. The switching element selected shall then appear on the background that shall be flashing in a different color. The operator prompting shall distinguish between:-

- Prompting of indications e.g. fault indications in the switchgear, and

- prompting of operational sequences e.g. execution of switching operations The summary information displayed in the message field shall give a rapid display of alarm/message of the system in which a fault has occurred and alarm annunciation lists in which the fault is described more fully.

Each operational sequence shal be divided into single operation steps which are

initiated by means of the function keys/WINDOW command

Page 21 of 28

8.0 9.0

by mouse. Operator prompting shall be designed in such a manner that only the permissible keys are available in the command field related to the specific operation step. Only those switching elements shall be accessed for which control actions are possible. If the operation step is rejected by the system, the operator prompting shall be supported by additional comments in the message field. The operation status shall be reset to the corresponding preceding step in the operation sequence by pressing one of the function keys. All operations shall be verified. Incorrect operations shall be indicated by comments in the message field and must not be executed. The offer shall include a comprehensive description of the system. The above operation shall also be possible via WINDOWS based system by mouse. POWER SUPPLY Power for the substation automation system shall be derived from substation 220V DC system. Inverter of suitable capacity shall be provided for station HMI and its peripheral devices e.g. printer etc. In the event of Power failure, necessary safeguard software shall be built for proper shutdown and restart. DOCUMENTATION The following documents shall be submitted for employer’s approval during detailed engineering:

(a) System Architecture Drawing (b) Hardware Specification (c) Sizing Calculations of various components (d) Response Time Calculation (e) Functional Design Document

The following documentation to be provided for the system in the course of the project shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel. All CAD drawings t be provide in “dxf” format. • List of Drawings • Substation automation system architecture • Block Diagram • Guaranteed technical parameters, Functional Design Specification and Guaranteed availability and reliability • Calculation for power supply dimensioning • I/O Signal lists • Schematic diagrams • List of Apparatus • List of Labels • Logic Diagram (hardware & software ) • Panel Room Layout drawing

Page 22 of 28

10.0 10.1 10.2

• Control Room Lay-out • Test Specification for Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) • Product Manuals • Assembly Drawing • Operator’s Manual • Complete documentation of implemented protocols between various elements • Listing of software and loadable in CD ROM • Other documents as may be required during detailed engineering

Two sets of hard copy and Four sets of CD ROM containing all the as built documents/drawings shall be provided. TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND SPARES Training Contractor personnel who are experienced instructors and who speak understandable English shall conduct training. The contractor shall arrange on its own cost al hardware training platform required for successful training and understanding in India. The Contractor shall provide all necessary training material. Each trainee shall receive individual copies of al technical manuals and al other documents used for training. These materials shall be sent to Employer at least two months before the scheduled commencement of the particular training course. Class materials, including the documents sent before the training courses as well as class handouts, shall become the property of Employer. Employer reserves the right to copy such materials, but for in-house training and use only. Hands-on training shall utilize equipment identical to that being supplied to Employer. For all training courses, the travel (e.g., airfare) and per-diem expenses will be borne by the participants. The Contractor shal quote training prices individual y for each of the courses as indicated in BPS. Employer will have the option to cancel any or all-training courses. In the case of cancellation, the rate quoted against the respective course will not be paid to the Contractor. The schedule, location, and detailed contents of each course will be finalized during Employer and Contractor discussions. Computer System Hardware Course A computer system hardware course shall be offered, but at the system level only. The training course shall be designed to give Employer hardware personnel sufficient knowledge of the overall design and operation of the system so that they can correct obvious problems, configure the hardware, perform preventive maintenance, run diagnostic programs, and communicate with contract maintenance personnel. The following subjects shall be covered:

Page 23 of 28

(a) System Hardware Overview: Configuration of the system hardware. (b) Equipment Maintenance: Basic theory of operation, maintenance

techniques and diagnostic procedures for each element of the computer system, e.g., processors, auxiliary memories, LANs, routers and printers. Configuration of all the hardware equipments.

(c) System Expansion: Techniques and procedures to expand and add equipment such as loggers, monitors, and communication channels.

(d) System Maintenance: Theory of operation and maintenance of the redundant hardware configuration, failover hardware, configuration control panels, and failover switches. Maintenance of protective devices and power supplies.

(e) Subsystem Maintenance: Theory of design and operation, maintenance techniques and practices, diagnostic procedures, and (where applicable) expansion techniques and procedures. Classes shall include hands-on training for the specific subsystems that are part of Employer's equipment or part of similarly designed and configured subsystems. All interfaces to the computing equipment shall be taught in detail.

(f) Operational Training: Practical training on preventive and corrective maintenance of all equipment, including use of special tools and instruments. This training shall be provided on Employer equipment, or on similarly configured systems.

10.3

Computer System Software Course

The Contractor shall provide a computer system software course that covers the following subjects:

(a) System Programming: Including all applicable programming languages and all

stand-alone service and utility packages provided with the system. An introduction to software architecture, Effect of tuning parameters (OS software, Network software, database software etc.) on the performance of the system.

(b) Operating System: Including the user aspects of the operating system, such as program loading and integrating procedures; scheduling, management, service, and utility functions; and system expansion techniques and procedures

(c) System Initialization and Failover: Including design, theory of operation, and practice

(d) Diagnostics: Including the execution of diagnostic procedures and the interpretation of diagnostic outputs,

(e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of system software documentation.

(f) Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available for assistance as necessary.

Page 24 of 28

10.4 10.5

11.0 11.1 12.0

Application Software Course The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive application software courses covering all applications including the database and display building course. The training shall include: (a) Overview: Block diagrams of the application software and data flows. Programming standards and program interface conventions. (b) Application Functions: Functional capabilities, design, and major algorithms.

Associated maintenance and expansion techniques. (c) Software Development: Techniques and conventions to be used for the

preparation and integration of new software functions. (d) Software Generation: Generation of application software from source code and

associated software configuration control procedures. (e) Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of functional

and detailed design documentation and of programmer and user manuals. (f) Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee

performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available for assistance as necessary.

Requirement of training: The contractor shall provide training for two batches for two weeks each for following courses.

S. No. Name of Course 1 Computer System Hardware 2 Computer System Software 3 Application Software Maintenance

Maintenance Responsibility during the Guaranteed Availability Period. During Guaranteed Availability Period, the Contractor shall take continual actions to ensure the guaranteed availability and shall make available all the necessary resources such as specialist personnel, spare parts, tools, test devices etc. for replacement or repair of all defective parts and shall have prime responsibility for keeping the system operational. RELIABILITYAND AVAILABILITY The SAS shall be designed so that the failure of any single component, processor, or device shall not render the system unavailable. The SAS shall be designed to satisfy the very high demands for reliability and availability concerning: • Mechanical and electrical design

Page 25 of 28

12.1

• Security against electrical interference (EMI) • High quality components and boards • Modular, wel -tested hardware • Thoroughly developed and tested modular software • Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming • Detailed graphical documentation and application software • Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions • Security

− Experience of security requirements − Process know-how − Select before execute at operation − Process status representation as double indications

• Distributed solution • Independent units connected to the local area network • Back-up functions • Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient conditions • Panel grounding immune against transient ground potential rise

Outage 1) Outage

The state in which substation automation system or a unit of SAS is unavailable for Normal Operation as defined in the clause 7.1 due to an event directly related to the SAS or unit of SAS. In the event, the owner has taken any equipment/ system other than Sub-station Automation System for schedule/forced maintenance, the consequent outage to SAS shall not be considered as outage for the purpose of availability.

2) Actual outage duration (AOD)

The time elapsed in hours between the start and the end of an outage. The time shall be counted to the nearest 1/4th of an hour. Time less than 1/4th of an hour shall be counted as having duration of 1/4th of an hour.

3) Period Hours (PH) The number of hours in the reporting period. In a full year the period hour are 8760h (8784h for a leap year).

4) Actual Outage hours (AOH)

The sum of actual outage duration within the reporting period AOH = ∑ AOD

5) Availability:

Each SAS shall have a total availability of 99.98 % i.e. the ratio of total time duration minus the actual outage duration to total time duration.

Guarantees Required The availability for the complete SAS shall be guaranteed by the

Page 26 of 28

13.0 13.1

13.2 14.0

Contractor. Bidder shall include in their offer the detailed calculation for the availability. The contractor shall demonstrate their availability guaranteed by conducting the availability test on the total sub-station automation system as a whole after commissioning of total Sub-station Automation system. The test shall verify the reliability and integrity of all sub-systems. Under these conditions the test shall establish an overall availability of 99.98%. After the lapse of 1000 Hours of cumulative test time, test records shall be examined to determine the conformance with availability criterion. In case of any outage during the availability test, the contractor shall rectify the problem and after rectification, the 1000 Hours period start after such rectification. If test object has not been met the test shall continue until the specified availability is achieved.

The contractor has to establish the availability in a maximum period of three months from the date of commencement of the availability test. After the satisfactory conclusion of test both contractor and employer shall mutually agree to the test results and if these results satisfy the availability criterion, the test is considered to be completed successfully. After that the system shall be taken over by the employer and then the guarantee period shall start.

Spares Consumables:

All consumables such as paper, cartridges shall be supplied by the contractor till the SAS is taken over by the owner. . Availability Spares: In addition to mandatory spares as listed in section project for SAS, the bidder is required to list the spares, which may be required for ensuring the guaranteed availability during the guaranteed availability period. The final list of spares shall form part of scope of supply and accordingly the price thereof shall be quoted by the bidder and shall be considered in the evaluation of the bids. During the guaranteed availability period, the spare parts supplied by the Contractor shall be made available to the Contractor for usage subject to replenishment at the earliest. Thus, at the end of availability period the inventory of spares with the Employer shall be fully replenished by the Contractor. However, any additional spares required to meet the availability of the system (which are not a part of the above spares supplied by the Contractor) would have to be supplied immediately by the Contractor free of cost to the Employer. LIST OF EQUIPMENTS Quantity of equipments shall be decided by bidder in order to achieve guaranteed reliability and availability as declared by bidder. i) Station HMI

Page 27 of 28

ii) iii) iv) v) vi)

Redundant Station HMI (in Hot-stand by mode) Bay level units along with bay mimic Disturbance Recorder Work Station(Maintenance HMI) Colour Laser Printer – 1 No. (For Reports & Disturbance records) Dot matrix printers - (one each for Alarms and log sheets)

vii) All interface equipment for gateway to RCC and RSCC viii) Communication infrastructure between Bay level units, Station HMI, Printers,

gateways, redundant LAN etc. as required ix)

Any other equipment as necessary.

Page 28 of 28

Basic Monitoring requirements are:

- Switchgear status indication

- Measurements (U, I, P, Q, f)

- Event

- Alarm

- Winding temperature of transformers

- ambient temperature

Annexure-I

-

-

- -

-

-

Status and display of 415V LT system, 220V & 48V DC system

Acquisition of all counters in PLCC panels through potential free contacts from PLCC or independently by counting the receive/send commands. Acquisition of alarm and fault record from protection relays

Disturbance

Monitoring the state of batteries by displaying DC voltage, charging current and load current etc. Tap-position of Transformer

List of Inputs The list of input for typical bays is as below:- Analogue inputs i)

For line Current R phase

Y phase B phase

Voltage Y-B phase B-R phase

ii) For transformer

Current R phase Y phase B phase

WTI (for transformer ) Tap position (for transformer only)

iii)

For bus coupler

Current R phase

Y phase B phase

Page 1 of 5

iv)

Common a) Voltage for Bus-I, Bus-II and Transfer bus wherever

applicable Voltage R-Y phase

Y-B phase B-R phase

b) Frequency for Bus-I and Bus-II c) Ambient temperature (switchyard). d) LT system

i) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-I

ii) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-II

iii) Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Diesel Generator iv) Current from LT transformer-I v) Current from LT transformer-II vi) Current from Diesel Generator vii) Voltage of 220V DCDB-I viii) Voltage of 220V DCDB-II ix) Current from 220V Battery set-I x) Current from 220V Battery set-II xi) Current from 220V Battery charger-I xii) Current from 220V Battery charger-I xiii) Voltage of 48V DCDB-I xiv) Voltage of 48V DCDB-II xv) Current from 48V Battery set-I xvi) Current from 48V Battery set-II xvii) Current from 48V Battery charger-I xviii) Current from 48V Battery charger-I

Digital Inputs The list of input for various bays/SYSTEM is as follows: 1. Line bays

i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix)

Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch CB trouble CB operation/closing lockout Pole discrepancy optd Trip coil faulty LBB optd Bus bar protn trip relay optd Main bkr auto recloser operated Tie/transfer auto recloser operated

x) A/r lockout xi) xii) xiii) xiv) xv) xvi)

Tie/transfer bkr a/r lockout Direct trip-I/II sent Direct trip-I/II received Main I/II blocking Main I/II-Inter trip send Main I/II-Inter trip received

Page 2 of 5

xvii) xviii) xix) xx) xxi) xxii) xxiii)

O/V STAGE – I operated O/V STAGE – II operated FAULT LOCATOR FAULTY MAIN-I/II CVT FUSE FAIL MAIN-I PROTN TRIP MAIN-II PROTN TRIP MAIN-I PSB ALARM

xxiv) MAIN-I SOTF TRIP xxv) xxvi)

MAIN-I R-PH TRIP MAIN-I Y-PH TRIP

xxvii) MAIN-I B-PH TRIP xxviii) MAIN-I START xxix) xxx) xxxi) xxxii) xxxiii) xxxiv) xxxv) xxxvi) xxxvii) xxxviii)

MAIN-I/II Carrier aided trip MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction MAIN-I/II ZONE-2 TRIP MAIN-I/II ZONE-3 TRIP MAIN-I/II weak end infeed optd MAIN-II PSB alarm MAIN-II SOTF TRIP MAIN-II R-PH TRIP MAIN-II Y-PH TRIP MAIN-II B-PH TRIP

xxxix) MAIN-II start xl) MAIN-II aided trip xli) MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction xlii) xliii) xliv) xlv) xlvi) xlvii)

Back-up o/c optd Back-up e/f optd 220V DC-I/II source fail SPEECH CHANNEL FAIL PLCC Protection Channel-I FAIL PLCC Protection Channel-II FAIL

2. Transformer bays

i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii) xiii) xiv) xv)

Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch CB trouble CB operation/closing lockout Pole discrepancy optd Trip coil faulty LBB optd Bus bar protn trip relay optd REF OPTD DIF OPTD OVERFLUX ALARM (MV) OVERFLUX TRIP (MV) OVERFLUX ALARM (HV) OVERFLUX TRIP (HV) HV BUS CVT ½ FUSE FAIL MV BUS CVT ½ FUSE FAIL

xvi) OTI ALARM/TRIP xvii) xviii) xix)

PRD OPTD OVERLOAD ALARM BUCHOLZ TRIP

xx) BUCHOLZ ALARM xxi) OLTC BUCHOLZ ALARM

Page 3 of 5

xxii) xxiii) xxiv) xxv) xxvi)

OLTC BUCHOLZ TRIP OIL LOW ALARM back-up o/c (HV) optd back-up e/f (HV)optd 220v DC-I/II source fail

xxvii) TAP MISMATCH xxviii) GR-A PROTN OPTD xxix) GR-B PROTN OPTD xxx) xxxi)

back-up o/c (MV) optd back-up e/f (MV)optd

3.

Transformer bays i) Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch ii) CB trouble iii) CB operation/closing lockout iv) Pole discrepancy optd v) Trip coil faulty vi) LBB optd vii) Bus bar protn trip relay optd viii) REF OPTD ix) DIF OPTD x) HV BUS CVT ½ FUSE FAIL xi) OTI ALARM/TRIP xii) PRD OPTD xiii) BUCHOLZ TRIP xiv) BUCHOLZ ALARM xv) OIL LOW ALARM xvi) Back-up impedance relay xvii) 220v DC-I/II source fail xviii) GR-A PROTN OPTD xix) GR-B PROTN OPTD

4 Busbar Protection

i) Bus bar main-I trip ii) Bus bar main-II trip iii) Bus bar zone-I CT open iv) Bus bar zone-II CT open v) Bus transfer CT sup. Optd vi) Bus transfer bus bar protn optd vii) Bus protection relay fail

5. Auxiliary system

i) Incomer-I On/Off ii) Incomer-II On/Off iii) 415V Bus-I/II U/V iv) 415v bus coupler breaker on/off v) DG set bkr on/off vi) Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: DG set vii) LT transformer-I Bunchholz Alarm & trip viii) LT transformer-II Bunchholz Alarm & trip ix) LT transformer-I WTI Alarm & trip x) LT transformer-II WTI Alarm & trip xi) LT transformer-I OTI Alarm & trip xii) LT transformer-II OTI Alarm & trip

Page 4 of 5

xiii) PLCC exchange fail xiv) Time sync. Signal absent xv) Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: Battery and Battery charger xvi) 220v dc-I earth fault xvii) 220v dc-II earth fault

The exact number and description of digital inputs shall be as per detailed engineering requirement Apart from the above mentioned digital inputs, minimum of 200 inputs shall be kept for use in future.

Page 5 of 5

TYPICAL ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING OF

SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

Router Redundant Managed Ethernet Station Bus

Switch for Dia

1 Fibre optic Connection

IEDs for Control & protection

Note:

HMI View Node

Switch for Dia.

2 IEDs for

Control & protection

Station HMI

IEC 61850

IEC 61850

DR Work Station

IEC 61850

Switch for Dia.

3

IEDs for Control & protection

Gateway GPS Clock

Switch for Dia.

N

IEDs for Control & protection

1. The redundant managed bus shall be realized by high speed optical bus using

industrial grade components and shall be as per IEC 61850. 2. Inside the sub-station, all connections shall be realized as per IEC 61850

protocol. 3. For gateway, it shall communicate with Remote Supervisory Control Centre

(RSCC) on IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. 4. The router to Remote Control Centre (RCC) shall communicate on IEC 60870-

5-101 protocol. 5. The printer as required shall be connected to station bus directly and can be

managed either from station HMI, HMI view node or disturbance recorder work station.

Page 1 of 1

1

HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LTD.

SECTION -5

CHAPTER-5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

COMBINED 11 KV METERING

CTs & PTs UNITS

2

CONTENTS CLAUSE

NO. TITLE PAGE

NO.

1.0 SCOPE 3

2.0 STANDARDS 4

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS 6

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS 6

5.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS. 8

6.0 TESTS 12

7.0 DOCUMENTATION 13

ANNEXURE

IA COREWISE DETAILS OF 11 kV CTs 15

IB COREWISE DETAILS OF 11 kV PTs 16

IIA GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

FOR CTs

17

IIB GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

FOR PTs

19

3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

COMBINED 11 kV METERING CTs & PTs UNITS 1.0 SCOPE:

1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, inspection & testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of combined 11 kV oil immersed metering CTs & PTs units. The said metering CT & PT unit shall have 3 No. 11 kV metering CTs and 3 No. 11 kV metering PTs suitable for out-door installation and will be placed on a platform under-neath the existing steel structure meant to terminate 11 kV bus/take off 11 kV single core 630 mm2 power cable to the 11 kV switch gear installed in the control room to be arranged by HVPNL.

1.2 The combined CT/PT unit will be suitable to receive either the

appropriately sized tubular copper jumpers (continuous current rating 1000A for 900-450/1-1A or continuous current rating 2000A for 1200-600/1-1A & for 1800-900/1-1A) from the 11 kV bushing of 66/11 kV level power transformers or twin zebra jumper (for 900-450/1-1A & for 1200-600/1-1A) & triple zebra jumper (for 1800-900/1-1A) from the 11 kV bus bar referred to at 1.1. Suitable terminal connector in both cases will be supplied by the bidders as per clause 5.23. The successful bidder will be obliged to inspect the 66 kV Sub-Station in question to finalize the type of connector required at a given S/Stn. which will conform to the provision of IS: 5561 or equivalent IEC. However, the size of the stud receiving the jumper from the bushing of the transformer as well as the one meant to take care of 11 kV power cables shall not be less than 30 mm dia copper or equivalent as per ISS/IEC.

1.3 The other end of the 11 kV metering CT forming part of the

combined 11 kV metering CT/PT unit will be suitable to receive two sets (for 900-450/1-1A & for 1200-600/1-1A) or four sets (for 1800-900/1-1A) of single core 630 mm2 11 kV XLPE cable meant to be taken to the 11 kV Incoming VCB/OCB installed in the control room.

1.4 The combined 11 kV metering CT/PT unit shall have 11 kV metering

CTs and 11 kV metering PTs conforming to principal parameters stated at clause 4.0.

1.5 The secondary of the 11 kV metering CT and 11 kV PT shall be

brought in separate CT&PT secondary boxes, whose terminals will

4

be suitable to receive 4 mm2 size control cable. These CT, PT leads having lugs duly crimped at both ends i.e. at CT/PT secondary, box as well as the metering cubicle will have cable glands and run in a 2.5” dia ‘B’ class GI pipe. The GI pipe will run in outdoor trenches wherever available. Otherwise they will be laid underneath the ground.

1.6 It is not the intent to specify complete herein all details of the design

and construction of equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation upto the bidder’s guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for the effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification and or the commercial order or not.

2.0 STANDARDS:

The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant IS/IEC listed hereunder or their equivalent IES/IS. 2.1 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS: Sr.No Standard No. Title 1. IS:2705 (I to IV) Current Transformers. 2. IS:3156 (I to III) Potential Transformers 3. IS:207 Method of High Voltage Testing. 4. IS:2147 Degree of protection provided by

enclosures for low voltage Switchgear and controlgear.

5. IS:4800 Enameled round winding wires. 6. IS:11065 Drawings. 7. IS:3347 Dimensions of porcelain transformer

bushing. 8. IS:335 Insulating oil for transformers &

switchgear. 9. IS:2099 High voltage porcelain bushing.

10. IS:2072 Method of High voltage testing.

5

11. IS:2633 Method of testing hot dipped

Galvanized articles.

12. IS:5561 Terminal connectors.

13. IEC:185 Current Transformers.

14. IEC:186 Potential Transformers.

15. IEC:186A First supplement to IEC publication

186.

16. IEC:270 (or IS:11322) Partial Discharge Measurement.

17. IEC:44 (3) Instrument Transformers Part-III

combined T/Fs.

18. IEC:44 (4) Instrument Transformer measurement

of PDs.

19. IEC:171 Insulation co-ordination.

20. IEC:60 High voltage testing techniques.

21. IS:8263 Method for RIV test on high voltage

insulators.

22. Indian Electricity Rules 1956.

2.2 The bidder shall also note that list of standards presented in this

specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC. When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ than those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence. The bidder should use IS wherever IEC is not available. In case the IEC is available the bidder may use IS only if the latter document provides for better specification.

2.3 Equipment meeting with the requirement of other authoritative

Standard, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly brought out

6

in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer.

3.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:

3.1 Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuos operation under the following tropical conditions:-

i) Loaction IN THE STATE OF HARYANA

ii) Max. ambient air temp (0C) 50 iii) Min. ambient air temp (0C) -2.5 iv) Maximum Relative humidity (%) 100 v) Minimum Relative humidity (%) 26 vi) Average annual rainfall (mm) 900 vii) Max. wind pressure (kg./sq.m.) 195 viii) Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters) 1000 ix) Isoceraunic level (days/year) 50 x) Seimic level (horizontal acceleration) 0.3g

Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus

growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June to October.

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:

A) The current Transformers covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements listed hereunder:

PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR CT OF THE COMBINED CT/PT METERING UNIT.

Sr.No Item Particulars 1. Type of CT/Installation Three phase, oil immersed type

suitable for outdoor installation. 2. Suitable for system frequency 50 Hz 3. Highest system Voltage (kV rms) 12 Sr.No Item Particulars 4. Current ration (A/A) 900-450/1-1A, 1200-600/1-1A,

1800-900/1-1A (For technical

7

particulars, refer Annexure-IA) 5. Method of earthing the system Solidly earthed 6. Rated Continuous Thermal

current 125% for all taps.

7. Ratio taps On secondary side only. 8. Acceptable limit of temperature

rise above the specified ambient Temperature for continuous operation at rated current.

As per IS: 2705 or equivalent IEC.

9. Acceptance partial discharge level at 1.1 times the rated voltage.

As per IS:11322-1985 or equivalent IEC.

10. 1.2/50 micro second lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp)

75

11. 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand Voltage Primary (kV rms)

28

12. One minute power frequency withstand voltage for secondary winding (kV rms)

3

13. Rated short time withstand current (kArms) for 1 second.

18.4

14. Rated dynamic withstand current (kAp)

46

B) The potential transformers covered in this specification shall meet

the technical requirement listed hereunder.

PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS FOR PT OF THE COMBINED CT/PT METERING UNIT

Sr.No Item Particulars 1. Type of PT/installation. Three phase, oil

immersed type suitable for outdoor installation

2. Suitable for system frequency 50 Hz 3. Highest system Voltage (kV rms) 12 4. Voltage ratio 11/√3kV/110/√3V-110/√3V

(For technical particulars refer Annexure-IB)

Sr.No Item Particulars 5. Method of earthing the system Solidly earthed 6. Rated Voltage factor 1.2 continuous and 1.5

8

for 30 seconds. 7. Maximum temperature rise over ambient

500 C As per IS: 3156 or equivalent IEC.

8. 1.2/50 micro second lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp)

75

9. 1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand Voltage Primary (kV rms)

28

10. One minute power frequency withstand voltage for secondary winding (kV rms)

3

5.0 GENERAL TEHCNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

5.1 The designed dielectric withstand values of insulations shall be clearly brought out in the guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in this specification are meant for fully assembled instrument tranformers. The bidder may submit the Guaranteed Technical Particulars of the 11 kV metering CTs & PTs offered by him as per Annexure-IIA and Annexure-IIB respectively.

5.2 PORCELAIN HOUSING:

5.2.1 The details and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be furnished by the supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength, glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog).

5.2.2 Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the offer.

5.3 The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints

so as to minimise possible locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made of mild steel. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at this location may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in oil leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any horizontal welding used in the tank bottom.

9

5.4 SURFACE FINISH:

The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised or shall be coated with atleast two coats of Zinc rich epoxy painting. All nuts, Bolts and washers shall be made out of stainless steel.

5.5 INSULATING OIL: Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be covered in Supplier’s scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirement of latest edition IS:335 or equivalent IEC.

5.6 PREVENTION OF OIL LEAKAGE & ENTRY OF MOISTURE: 5.6.1 The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument

transformer is properly achieved. In this connection the arrangement provided by the supplier at various locations including the following ones should be described, supported by sectional drawings:-

5.6.2 i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary

terminals. ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tank. iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.

5.6.3 Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for taking out terminals, shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.

5.6.4 For gasketed joints, wherever used, nitrile butyl rubber

gaskets shall be used. The gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the gasket under compression.

5.7 OIL LEVEL INDICATORS: Instrument transformers supplied with nitrogen cushion for compensation of oil volume variation shall be provided with prismatic type oil sight window at suitable location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level. If metal bellow is used for the above purpose, a ground glass window shall be provided to monitor the position of metal bellow.

10

5.8 EARTHING:

Metal tank of instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing terminals for bolted connection to existing 50x8mm MS flat.

5.9 Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift the entire unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawing. Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way as to avoid any damage to the porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. Necessary string guides, if required shall be offered which shall be removable type.

5.10 NAME PLATE:

The instrument transformers shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate with the information specified in relevant standards, duly engrave/punched on it. In addition to these the following specific points shall also be marked on the nameplate. i) PO No. with date. ii) Connection diagram. iii) Rated continuous thermal current (in case of CTs only).

5.11 Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyviny acetate type and shall meet the requirements of IS:4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with oil.

5.12 The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed

maximum temperature rise specified in IS:2705 or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible temp. rise is for a maximum ambient temperature of 500 C.

5.13 The combined 11 kV CT & PT unit shall be so constructed that it can

be easily transported to site within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitations so demand.

5.14 For compensation of variation in the oil volume due to ambient

variation and to take care of internal abnormal pressures, nitrogen cushion alongwith suitable pressure relief device or stainless steel bellow shall be used.

11

5.15 Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each primary and secondary terminal.

5.16 In case of potential transformers:

a) The design shall be suitable for sudden variations in the primary voltage.

b) The potential transformers shall be oil-immersed types and self cooled, suitable for the services indicated & conforming to the modern practices of designs and construction. The core shall be of high grade; non-ageing, electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysteresis and high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over voltages.

c) The primary winding of potential transformers will be connected phase to ground.

5.17 PRIMARY WINDING:

The design density for short circuit current as well as conductivity of the metal used for primary winding shall meet the requirement of IS:2705 or equivalent IEC. The supplier shall in his offer furnish detailed calculations for selection of winding cross-secions.

5.18 SECONDARY WINDING: Suitably insulated wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary windings. Type of insulation used shall be described in the offer. For multi ratio design, suitable tapping shall be provided only on secondary winding.

5.19 The supplier shall furnish alongwith his offer the magnetisation curve/s for both the cores. The cores shall be of high grade; non-ageing electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysteresis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal and over current.

5.20 The current transformers shall be provided with suitable test tap for

measurement of partial discharges in factory. Provision shall be made of a screw on cap for solid and secured earthing of the test tap connection, when not in use. A suitable caution plate shall be provided duly fixed on the cover of the secondary terminal box indicating the purpose of the test tap and necessity of its solid earthing as per prescribed method before energising the equipment.

12

5.21 The combined 11 kV CT/PT unit shall be fabricated out of 14 SWG CRCA (cold rolled cold annealed) sheet duly painted with shade 5 of IS:631.

5.22 The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after

processing & thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing & to prevent air & moisture from entering the tanks. Oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be provided.

5.23 Suitable terminal connectors for connecting twin Zebra ACSR

conductor of 0.4 sq. inch (each) shall be supplied. Suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be provided.

5.23.1 The terminal connectors shall meet the following

requirements: 1) Terminal connector shall be manufactured and tested

as per IS:5561 or equivalent IEC. 2) All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface

blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.

3) No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick. 4) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised conforming

to IS:2633 or equivalent IEC. 5) For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum

2mm thickness shall be provided. 6) Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned

copper/aluminum sheets. 7) All current carrying parts shall be designed and

manufactured to have minimum contact resistance. 8) Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in

accordance with the requirement stipulated in IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.

5.24 Any deviation from the specification shall be clearly brought out

separately. In the absence of any specific mention, it shall be implied that the equipment offered is entirely according to this specifiaction.

6.0 TESTS:

6.1 TYPE TESTS: 6.1.1 TYPE TEST FOR COMBINED 11 kV CT/PT UNIT:

The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report of offered equipment should not be more than 7 years old reckoned from the date of bid opening in respect of the

13

following tests carried out in accordance with IEC:44-3 from Govt./Govt approved test house and shall be submitted alongwith bid:- i) Impulse voltage test. ii) Test of accuracy. iii) Temperature rise test. The remaining type test reports for 11 kV measuring current transformers and 11 kV measuring potential T/F forming the combined unit will be in accordance with the relevant provision of IEC:44-1 and IEC:186 respectively. The successful bidder should submit these type test reports within 2 months of date of LOI. These type test reports will also be from Govt./Govt. approved test house and shall not be more than 7 years old reckoned from date of LOI. In case the bidder does not possess the type test reports of 0.2 accuracy class 11 kV CT/PT combined unit in respect of test at i, ii & iii above, he can submit these type test reports corresponding to 0.5 accuracy class combined 11 kV CT/PT unit at the time of bidding. However, the successful bidder will have to submit complete type test reports of offered 0.2 accuracy class 11 kV combined CT/PT unit within 2 months of date of LOI.

7.0 DOCUMENTAITON: 7.1 All drawings shall conform to international standards organisation

(ISO) ‘A’ series of drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS:11065. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for microfilming. All dimensions and data shall be in SI Units.

7.2 The successful supplier shall submit four sets of final versions of all

the following drgs. except 7.2(b) below (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for purchaser’s approval within 21 days of the date of placement of purchase order or 15 days from the date of receipt of Purchase Order by the Firm, whichever is earlier . The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within two weeks of date of receipt of above drawings. The supplier shall if necessary, modify the drgs. and resubmit four copies of the modified drgs. for purchaser’s approval within two weeks from the date of purchaser’s comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve the drgs. (if found correct) within two weeks from the date of receipt.

14

LIST OF DRAWINGS: a) General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment. b) Graphs showing the performance of equipments in regard to

magnetisation characteristics; ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves (wherever applicable).

c) Sectional views showing: i) General constructional features. ii) Material. iii) The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of

connection of the primary/secondary winding to the primary/secondary terminals etc.

d) Arrangement of terminal and details of connection studs provided.

e) Name plate. f) Schematic drawing.

7.3 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier’s risk.

7.4 After receipt of purchaser’s approval, the supplier shall submit following drawings/documents.

a) Three Sets of approved drgs & three sets of instruction manuals (containing handling, installation, testing and commissioning instructions of the equipment) at the time of depatch of material with each equipment for our field staff.

b) In addition, ten sets of final approved drgs. & ten sets of instruction (operation, maintenance and erection) manuals shall be supplied to the design office within two weeks of approval of the drgs.

7.5 Approval of drawings/work by Purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of the responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgement is not in full accordance therewith.

Note: In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet

with the requirement of technical specification the offer of the firm shall not be considered.

15

ANNEXURE I-A (FOR CTs)

COREWISE DETAILS OF 11 kV CT

I. (900-450/1-1A) NUMBER OF CORES-2

Core No.

Application Current Ratio (A)

Output burden (VA)

Accuracy class as per IEC

I.S.F

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. MAIN

METERING 900-450/1 10 VA 0.2 <10 (For 900 A Tap)

<5 (For 450 A Tap) 2. CHECK

METERING 900-450/1 10 VA 0.2 <10 (For 900 A Tap)

<5 (For 450 A Tap) II. (1200-600/1-1A)

NUMBER OF CORES-2 Core No.

Application Current Ratio (A)

Output burden (VA)

Accuracy class as per IEC

I.S.F

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. MAIN

METERING 1200-600/1 10 VA 0.2 <10 (For1200A Tap)

<5 (For 600 A Tap) 2. CHECK

METERING 1200-600/1 10 VA 0.2 <10 (For1200A Tap)

<5 (For 600 A Tap) III. (1800-900/1-1A)

NUMBER OF CORES-2 Core No.

Application Current Ratio (A)

Output burden (VA)

Accuracy class as per IEC

I.S.F

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. MAIN

METERING 1800-900/1 10 VA 0.2 <10 (For1800A Tap)

<5 (For 900 A Tap) 2. CHECK

METERING 1800-900/1 10 VA 0.2 <10 (For1800A Tap)

<5 (For 900 A Tap)

16

ANNEXURE-IB (FOR PT’s)

COREWISE DETIALS OF 11 kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS

(11√3 Kv/110√3V-110/√3V)

NUMBER OF CORES-2

Sr.No Particulars Requirements 1. Rated Primary voltage 11/√3 kV 2. Type 3 No. Single-phase oil immersed potential

transformer. 3. No. of secondaries 2 4. Rated voltage factor 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds.

Secondary I Secondary II 5. Rated Voltage (Volts) 110/√3 V 110/√3 V

6. Application Main metering Check metering 7. Accuracy 0.2 0.2 8. Output burden (VA) 10 10 9. Percentage voltage error &

phase displacement (Minutes) for respective special accuracy classes

As per ISS/IEC.

Note: Each winding shall fulfill its respective specified accuracy requirement within its

specified output range whilst at the same time other winding has an output of any value from zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause of IS 3156 (Part- 2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.

17

ANNEXURE-IIA

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR CTs

(To be filled in by the Supplier separately for each type and voltage rating).

1. Manufacturer's Name &

Country of Manufacturer.

2. Type/Installation.

3. Conforming to standard.

4. Rated voltage.

5. Rated frequency.

6. Rated Primary Current.

7. Rated Short time withstand Current

(KA rms) for 1 sec. Duration.

8. Rated dynamic withstand current

(KA Peak)

9. Rated continuous thermal current (pu.)

10. One minute power frequency withstand

Voltage (kV rms.)

a) Dry

b) Wet.

11. 1.2/50 micro sec. Impulse withstand

voltage (kV Peak.)

12. One minute power frequency withstand

Voltage of secondary winding (kV rms.)

13. Minimum creepage distance (mm.)

14. Maximum creepage factor

15 Detail of cores.

*Core No. I II

18

15.1 Purpose of cores.

15.2 Rated Secondary Current.

15.3 Class of accuracy.

15.4 Instrument security factor.

15.5 Secondary limiting voltage.

15.6 Maximum Secondary resistance

corrected to 75 deg. C .

15.7 Rated burden.

16 Winding

a) No. of primary Tums.

b) Primary amp. tums

(Dynamic Conditions)

c) Current Density.

d) Area of Cross-section & material

(i) Primary Tums.

(ii) Secondary Tums.

17. IS to which the oil conforms.

18. Make of Porcelain Bushing.

19. Weight of Oil (Kgs.)

20. Qty. of Oil (Ltrs.)

21. Total Weight (Kgs.)

22. Maximum shipping weight (kg.)

23. Overall dimensions.

24. Maximum permissible temp. rise

of winding when referred to maximum

ambient temp. of 50 deg. C in terms of

Clause-7.2 (table 2 of IS:2705 Part-I-1992)

or equivalent IEC.

19

ANNEXURE-IIB

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR PTs

(To be filled in by the Supplier separately for each type and voltage rating).

1. Manufacturer's Type &

designation.

2. Type.

3. Rated frequency.

4. Rated primary voltage.

5. Number of secondary

winding.

6. Rated secondary voltage.

i) Winding-I

ii) Winiding-II

7. One minute power frequency(dry) withstand

test Voltage (kV)

8. One minute power frequency(wet) withstand

test Voltage (kV)

9. 1.2/50 micro sec. Impulse withstand

voltage on secondary (volts.)

10. One minute power frequency withstand

Voltage on secondary (Volts).

11. a) Creepage distance

b) Creepage factor

12. Standard to which the equipment Conforms

20

13. Class of accuracy

i) winding-I

ii) Winding-II

14. Limits of errors.

a) Winding-I

i) Percentage voltage ratio

error.

ii) Phase displacement (Minutes)

b) Winding-II

i) Percentage voltage ratio

error.

ii) Phase displacement (Minutes)

15. Rated Burden

i) Winding-I

ii) Winding-II

16. Rated voltage factor and time.

17. Seismic Design co-efficient.

18. Temperature rise at 1.2 times rated

voltage when applied continuously with

rated burden. (deg. C)

19. Temperature rise at 1.5 times rated

voltage when applied for 30 sec. with

rated burden. (deg. C)

20. Total weight of the PT.

21. Overall dimensions.

22. Weight of the Oil.

23. Total shipping weight.

1

SECTION-5

CHAPTER-5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

INTERUTILITY METERING SYSTEM AND

COMMON METER READING INSTRUMENT(CMRI)

2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTER UTILITY METERING SYSTEM

1.0 The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, inspection, delivery of inter utility metering system and /or common meter reading instrument (CMRI).

2.0 The energy metering system specified herein shall be used for tariff metering for

bulk, Inter -utility power flows in HVPNL/DISCOM. The metering system shall be installed on each circuit as a self contained device for measurement of active energy & reactive energy in each successive 15-minute block and certain other functions as described in the following paragraphs. HVPNL has already commissioned inter-utility metering system at approximately 400 metering points (33 kV & 11 kV Levels). The new systems should be functionally compatible with the existing systems so that power flow is measured & has a facility of remote metering. The prospective bidders can inspect any existing inter-utility metering system working at different Sub-Stations of HVPNL and Energy Centre at Shakti Bhawan, Panchkula to obtain any relevant information in this regard at his own expenses.

3.0 The meters shall be suitable for being connected through Test terminal blocks to

the voltage transformer having a rated secondary line to line voltage of 110 V, and to current transformers having a rated secondary current of 1 A. Any further transformer/transducers required for their functioning shall be in built in the meters. Necessary isolation and / or suppression shall also be built in for protecting the meters from surges and voltage spikes that occur in the VT/CT circuits of the switchyards.

4.0 The microprocessor based 3 phase 4 wire metering system shall conform to

class 0.2S as per IS 14697 or IEC- 62053-22 (2003) & technical specification and meter shall be draw out type modular unit with facility of automatic CT shorting. The meters shall bear BIS certification mark, as per Govt. of India Gazette notification. It will be the responsibility of the bidder to get these meters marked with BIS certification. The BIS certification shall be supplied within one month of opening of part-I tender.

5.0 Metering cubicles shall be supplied to accommodate 4 main meters and 4

check meters in 2 rows associated TTBs. The Metering system shall have following features: -

a) Meter shall be draw out type modular unit with facility of automatic CT

shorting. b) For transfer of data, system should have multiple communication ports for

local reading and remote communication facility. c) Modem interface connectable and compatible to communication system as

per clause 23 of the specification for transfer of data to remote stations.

6.0 The active energy measurement (Wh) shall be carried out on 3 phase 4 wire principle with an accuracy as per class 0.2S of IS 14697/ IEC- 62053- 22 (2003) In the meters the energy shall be computed directly in CT/VT secondary quantities and indicated in Watt-hours. The meters shall compute the net active energy (Wh) sent out from the Sub-Station during each successive 15 minute block, and store in its memory along with +/- sign. It shall also display on demand the net WH sent out during the previous 15 minute block, with a minus sign if it is a net Wh receipt..

3

7.0 Further, the meter shall continuously integrate and display on demand the net cumulative active energy sent out from the Sub-Station upto that time. The cumulative Wh reading at each midnight shall be stored in the meter's memory. The register shall move backwards when active power flows backwards into the Sub-Station.

8.0 The meter shall count the number of cycles in VT output during each successive

15-minute block and divide the same by 900 to arrive at the average frequency. This shall be stored in the meter's memory as a 2-digit code, which shall be arrived at by subtracting 49 from the average frequency, multiplying by 50 and neglecting all decimals. For e.g. 49.89 Hz shall be recorded as 44. In case the average frequency is less than 49.0 Hz, it shall be recorded as 00. In case it is 51.0 Hz or higher, it shall be recorded as 99. The average frequency of the previous 15-minutes block shall also be displayed on demand in Hertz.

9.0 The meters shall continuously compute the average of the RMS value

(fundamental only) of the three lines to neutral VT secondary voltage as a percentage of 63.51 V and display the same on demand.

10.0 The meter shall also compute the reactive power (VAR) on 3 phase 4 wire

principle. Limits of error shall be corresponding to class 1.0 as per IS 14697 for reactive energy or half (50%) of those permitted corresponding to class 2.0 for reactive energy as per IEC 62053-23 (2003), and integrate the reactive energy (VARh) algebraically in 2 separate registers, one for the period for which the average RMS voltage is 103% or higher and the other for the period for which the average RMS voltage is below 97%. The current reactive power (VAR) with a minus sign if negative, and cumulative reactive energy (VARh) reading of the 2 registers shall be displayed on demand. The readings of the 2 registers at each midnight shall also be stored in the meter's memory. In the meter, the reactive power and reactive energy transmittals shall be computed in VAR/VARh directly calculated in VT and CT secondary quantities. When lagging reactive power is being sent out from the Sub-Station. VAR display shall have no sign and VARh registers shall move forward. When reactive power flow is in the reverse direction. VAR display shall have a negative sign and VARh registers shall move backwards.

11.0 The meter shall fully comply with all the stipulations of IS 14697/ IEC- 60687-2000

(or latest revision) for class 0.2S for static watt-hour meters except those specifically modified by this specification. The reference ambient temperature shall be 50 deg. C.

12.0 Error shall be as per IS-14697/ IEC- 62053- 22 (2003) for all power factor angles

from 0 deg. to 360 deg.

13.0 Each meter shall have a test output device (visual) for checking the accuracy of active energy Wh and reactive energy (VARh) measurement using a suitable test equipment. The test output shall be software configurable for active energy import/export and reactive energy import/export.

14.0 No rounding off to the next higher last decimal shall be done for voltage and

frequency displays.

15.0 The three line to neutral voltages shall be continuously monitored by individual phase wise LED's & in case any of these falls below 60%, the normally flashing

4

lamp provided on the meters front becomes steady. The time blocks in which such a voltage failure occurs/persist shall also be recorded in the meter's memory. The lamp shall automatically resume flashing when corresponding VT secondary voltage is healthy again. LCD indication are also acceptable. The two VARh registers specified in clause 10 shall remain stayput while VT supply is unhealthy.

16.0 The meters shall operate with the power drawn from the VT secondary circuits, without the need for any auxiliary power supply.

An automatic backup for the continued operation of the meter's calendar clock shall be provided through a long life battery, which shall be capable of supplying the required power for atleast two years. The meters shall be supplied duly fitted with the battery which shall not require to be changed for atleast 10 years, as long as total VT supply interruption does not exceed two years.

17.0 Each meter shall have a built-in calendar and clock, having an accuracy of 30 seconds per month or better. The calendar and clock shall be correctly set at the manufacturer's works. The date (day-month-year) and time (hour-minute-second) shall be displayed on the meter front on demand. Clock adjustment shall be possible at site using the Meter Reading Instrument (MRI) or remotely using time synchronization signal through modem and PSTN. For the purpose of getting the standard time, the computer (s) from where the meter will be read shall be equipped with GPS signal receiver. This computer and the GPS receiver, however, are not in the scope of this specification. When an advance or retard command is given, six subsequent time blocks shall be contracted or elongated by 10 seconds each. The meter shall not accept another clock correction command for seven days. The meter time shall automatically be corrected every time the remote computer interrogates it. All clock corrections shall be registered in the meter's memory and shall be suitably shown on the print out of the collected data.

18.0 Each meter shall have a unique identification code, which shall be marked permanently on the front as well as in its memory. All meters supplied to HVPN, as per this specification shall have their identification code starting with HVPN, which shall not be used for any other supply. HVPN shall be followed by a dash and a four digit running serial number. The series of four digit running serial no. indicating the unique identification code of each meter shall be provided by HVPN to the successful bidder.

19.0 The measured value(s) shall be displayed through LED/back-lit LCD display either by one common display (one common for all 4 main meters and one common for all 4 check meters) or the display can be on each meter independently with proper identification for indication of the following (one at a time) on demand.

19.1 Meter Serial No. 19.2 Date (dd-mm-yy) 'd' 19.3 Time (hr-min-sec) 't' 19.4 Cumulative Wh reading 'c' 19.5 Average frequency of the previous block 'F' 19.6 Net Wh transmittal during the previous block 'E' 19.7 Average percentage voltage 'U'

5

19.8 Reactive power (VAR) 'r' 19.9 Voltage high VARh register reading 'H' 19.10 Voltage-Low VARh register reading 'L' 19.11 Cumulative Wh transmittal at each midnight for the

last 3 days.

19.12 Cumulative VARh transmittal for voltage high condition, at each midnight for the last 3 days.

19.13 Cumulative VARh transmitter for voltage low condition, at each midnight for the last 3 days.

20.0 A keypad or scrolling facility shall be provided on the front of the main control module or individually on each meter for switching on the display of the metering module/parameters selected and for changing from one indication to next.

21.0 Each meter shall have a non-volatile memory in which the following shall be automatically stored.

21.1 Average frequency for each successive 15-minute block upto second decimal/as a two-digit code.

21.2 Net Wh transmittal during each successive 15-minute block upto second decimal/with plus minus sign.

21.3 Cumulative Wh transmittal at each midnight in 6 digits including one decimal. 21.4 Cumulative VARh transmittal for voltage high condition, at each midnight in 6 digit

including one decimal. 21.5 Cumulative VARh transmittal for voltage low condition, at each midnight in 6 digit

including one decimal. 21.6 Date & time blocks of failure of VT supply on any phase, as a star (*) mark. 21.7 Battery backed memory shall not be accepted.

22.0 The meter shall store all the above listed data in their memories for a period of 35 days. The data older than 35 days shall get erased automatically.

It should be possible to download the instantaneous values of following parameters also:-

a) Frequency b) Voltage of each phase c) Active current of each phase d) Reactive current of each phase e) Total current of each phase f) Power factor of each phase g) Average power factor h) Date i) Time j) Serial number of the Meter.

23.0 For the existing metering systems PACT communication application has been used. To ensure inter operability of system at the meter reading instrument end, the common meter reading instrument (CMRI) confirming to DOS platform shall be used to enable different manufacturers to download into same hand held terminal & the meters of various makes to be read through the same hand held terminal. Each CMRI shall be supplied complete with :-

i) a lead with optical head for coupling it to the meter, ii) a lead for plugging it to a personal computer;

6

iii) an internal battery for powering the devices; iv) a case for safely carrying it about v) a battery charger

Data tapping operation from CMRI shall not erase the data from the meter’s memory, or effect the meter operation in any way.

For data analysis & billing, the different meter manufacturers shall provide the meter reading software to interpret the data collected through CMRI or through remote meter reading system for conversion into a common ASCII format. Each meter shall have an optical communication port compatible to RS 232 on its front for tapping all data stored in its memory. The communication protocol should be as per IEC 1107/PACT/ANSI. The protocol software, source code and memory map of the same should be made available to HVPNL. Meter Reading Instruments (MRI) of SANDS, ANALOGIC make have already been provided separately for this purpose, one for each Sub-Station, to serve as interface between the meters specified above and the local PC. Suitable software for CMRI shall be provided by the bidder for smooth downloading of the data to/ from the CMRI. The supplier of CMRI shall provide above software which would enable a local PC to :-

i) accept the data from the CMRI and/or from a interface device connected to the

optical port/RS-485 port and store it in it’s memory in binary read only format. ii) Polling feature along with a task scheduler to run the data downloading software

at a pre-designated date and time repeatedly or by manually selecting a meter. A detailed activity log shall also be available for each downloading operation.

iii) Display the collected data on PC’s screen in text format, with forward/backward rolling.

iv) Print out in text format the data collected from one or more meters, starting from a certain date and time, as per operator’s instructions.

v) Transmit the collected data, in binary format, through an appropriate communication link to the central computer, starting from a certain date and time, as per operator’s instructions.

vi) Store the collected data, in binary format, on a floppy disc/CD/Pen drive/DVD.

The above software shall further ensure that absolutely no tampering (except total erasures) of the collected metering data is possible during its handling by the PC.

The overall intention is to tap the data stored in the meter memory at any time using the in-built modem and a remote central computer through PSTN (Public Switching Telephone Network) and the MRI as a back up in case of break down of the communication system. It should also be possible to obtain a print out (hard copy) of all data collected from the meters, using the PC. Remote meter reading software and base computer software (for analysis of data) shall be supplied by the bidder.

24.0 The whole system shall be such as to provide a print out (both from the local PC and the remote central computer) of the following form:

23 55 +16.28 56 +15.95 55 +15.32 54 +15.66 55 +14.93 55 +14.26 54 +14.85 56 +15.17 HVPNL **** 12345.6 01234.5 00123.4 99-04-28 57 +14.72 56 +13.83 55 +13.57 53 +12.91 01 52 +13.34 51 +12.76 52 +14.11 52 +15.28

7

25.0 All the meters shall be identical in all respects except for their unique identification codes. They shall also be totally sealed and with no possibility of any adjustment at site except for clock correction.

26.0 The meter shall safely withstand the usual fluctuations arising during faults in particular, VT secondary voltage 115% of rated applied continuously and 190% of rated for 3 seconds and CT secondary current 150% of rated applied continuously and 30 times of rated applied for 0.5 seconds, shall not cause any damage to or the mal-operation of the meters.

27.0 The meters shall continue to function as specified above in case of failure of one or two phases of VT supply. In case of a complete VT supply failure, the computation of average frequency (as per 8.0) shall be done only for the period during which the VT supply was available in the 15-minute block. Any time block contraction or elongation for clock correction shall also be duly accounted for.

28.0 The harmonics shall be filtered out while measuring the Wh, VAR and VARh and only fundamental frequency quantities shall be measured or computed.

29.0 Software Package: The existing metering system records all the parameters required for the Availability Based Tariff. The requisite meter reading software for down loading of meter data through hand held instrument/CMRI or though remote using PSTN lines is already loaded and in operation through PC’s at energy centre and Sub-Stations. We are using Win2000 Prof. on PCs for downloading of meter data. Window 2000 server is being used with oracle 9I database to generate energy bills based on Bulk supply tariff or Availability Based Tariff.

The Data of the existing meters is available in the specified ASCII Format; details of which are enclosed at Annexure-I (Page1 to 3). A similar output in the same ASCII format (space delimited, fixed length values) shall be made available from the new metering system by the successful bidder for future use of data for generation of BST & ABT Bills/Reports or any other purpose.

The meter reading software to be supplied should ensure the following:- 29.1 Display the collected data on PC screen on demand and take a print report as

per annexure-I. The received/ downloaded meter data should be the original output from the meter.

29.2 Receive the data from any remotely located meter through appropriate communications links as above.

30.0 The above software shall further ensure that absolutely no tampering of the

collected metering data is possible during its handling by the PC. The software shall be suitable for the commonly available PCs and shall be supplied to owner in a compatible form to enable its easy loading into the PC’s available at the various Sub-Stations/Energy Accounting Centre.

31.0 Every metering system shall be indelibly marked with connection diagram showing the phase sequence for which it is intended and shall be attached on the metering system. In case of any special precautions need to be taken at the time of testing the meter, the same shall be indicated alongwith the circuit diagram.

32.0 Provision shall be made to enable a single modem to communicate all the meters in the cubicle, there by providing remote access for upto 8 meters in single dialing.

8

33.0 Sealing arrangement: Sealing arrangement for the cubicle, metering system and TTBs shall be provided as under:

33.1 Cubicle: Front door enclosing TTBs shall have two independent seals and similarly

the rear door enclosing the wiring. A single seal shall be fitted on the glass door providing access to the metering system

33.2 TTBs: Each TTB shall have the provision for two seals. 33.3 Metering System: Each meter shall be sealable including each optical

communication port.

34.0 Cubicle: The cubicle shall be CRCA fabricated of folded and bolted construction

suitable for accommodating 4 nos. main meters in one row and 4 nos. check meters in another row along with associated TTBs. The vacant slots where meters are to be installed at a later date, should be covered with suitable blanking plates.

Cubicle shall be provided with panel illumination lamp controlled with door switch and space heater controlled by thermostat and switch.

The cubicle shall be properly treated and painted with light gray shade no. 631 as per IS.5. The wiring shall be carried out with multi-core super flexible PVC insulated colour coded wires of 2.5 sq. mm. Cross Section.

The load bearing members and frame shall be made of 2mm CRCA and doors and covers shall be fabricated from 1.6 mm CRCA.

35.0 Inspection & Testing:

35.1 Type Tests:

The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report of similar equipment should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening in respect of the following tests, as per relevant ISS-14697 and carried out in accordance with the procedure laid down in relevant ISS/IEC/Internationally recognized equivalent standard from any accredited test house/ Lab. For Indian manufacturers, the tests got conducted from Govt. test labs shall also be acceptable. These type test reports shall be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for the approval as per schedule given in commercial document.

a) Test for Insulation Properties i) Impulse Voltage Test. ii) ac High Voltage Test iii) Insulation Test

b) Test of Accuracy Requirements i) Test on limits of error ii) Test of meter constant iii) Test of starting condition iv) Test of no-load condition v) Test of repeatability of error

vi) Interpretation of test results vii) Test of ambient temperature influence viii) Test of influence quantities

c) Test of Electrical Requirement

9

i) Test of influence of supply voltage ii) Test of influence short time overcurrent iii) Test of influence of self-heating iv) Test of influence of heating v) Test for power consumption

d) Test for Electroinagnetic Compatibility i) Radio interference measurement ii) Fast transient burst test iii) Test of immunity to electrostatic discharges iv) Test of immunity to electromagnetic HF field

e) Test for Climatic Influences i) Dry Heat Test ii) Cold Test iii) Damp Heat Cyclic Test

f) Test for Mechanical Requirements i) Vibration Test ii) Shock Test iii) Spring Hammer Test iv) Protection against penetration of dust and water v) Test of resistance to heat and fire

35.1 Routine Tests:

As per quality assurance program (QAP).

35.2 Acceptance Tests:

All equipment, after final assembly and before despatch from manufacturer's works shall be duly tested as per IS 14697 for compliance in both directions of power flow in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by HVPNL. The following acceptance tests shall be conducted:-

a) Test for Insulation Properties i) ac High Voltage Test ii) Insulation test

b) Test of Accuracy Requirements i) Test on limits of error ii) Test of meter constant iii) Test of starting condition iv) Test of no-load condition v) Test of repeatability of error c) Test of Electrical Requirement i) Test for power consumption d) Functional checks for display and memory. e) Accuracy of voltage and frequency measurement. 36.0 Quality Assurance The quality control procedure to be adopted during installation of the specified

equipment shall be mutually discussed and finalised in due course, generally based on the established and proven practices.

37.0 Any meter, which fails to fully comply with the specification requirements, shall be

liable to be rejected by the purchaser.

10

38.0 The metering system to be connected with PSTN lines should have necessary clearance from P&T department and a certificate to this effect should be attached with the offer.

39.0 Following technical information shall be furnished by the bidders in their

offers.: 39.1 The prospective bidder shall be required to submit complete type test reports from

Govt. approved laboratory alongwith bid. The type test reports shall not be more than seven years old reckoned from the date of opening of part-1 tender.

39.2 Guaranteed Technical Particulars shall be supplied.

11

Annexure-I

Standard Format for Meter Readings, Energy data First Row/*-- Header Information : Starting date & time and End date & time is defined First row Starting time 4 character (11th character to 14th character). Starting date 8 character (23rd Character to 30th Character), Ending time 4 character (35th Character to 38th Character), Ending date 8 character (47th Character to 54th Character) RTC Synchronization Status Indicator 1 Character (56th Character): 1 indicates RTC synchronized, 0 indicates RTC not synchronized. Second Row: Meter Sr. No 10 Characters (1st to 10th Character), Mid Night Net Wh 7 Character (15th Character to 21st Character), Reactive High Energy 7 Characters (26th Character to 32nd Character), Reactive Low Energy 7 Characters (37th Character to 43rd Character), Data Date 8 Characters (48th Character to 55th Character) Third Row is Blank Fourth row: 16 IP data in each row Starting Hour 02 Characters (1st , II nd Character), Avg. Freq 2 Characters (5th, 6th character), Status Indication 3 character (7th Character to 9th character), Net Energy 6 Character (10th to 15th Character) 2 Character left blank and all the data will be repeated 16 times Fifth Row : Same as 4th Row Sixth Row : Same as 4th Row Seventh Row : Same as 4th Row Eighth Row : Same as 4th Row Ninth row: Same as 4th row and at the end net energy of 24 hours at 215th Character (4 Character) Lines will be repeated from 2nd line onwards as above.

12

/*-- Header Information One Block At the begining of each day in Following Format: Meter SerialNo MidNight Net Wh Reactive High Energy Reactive Low Energy Date 16 IP data in each row and total 6 rows for complete 24 hours data Format for IP wise information: StartingHour AvgFreq StatusIndication NetEnergy AvgFreq StatusIndication NetEnergy ... StatusIndication gives following Information: * to indicate Supply Down.Supply failure might be momentary or might have lasted for several IPs rr to indicate time retard "aa" to indicate time advance Sum of net energies(for 96 IP) at the end of last row of the day having complete 24 hours data --*/

13

WEEK FROM 0000 HRS OF 28-06-05 TO 1224 HRS OF 01-08-05 0 AP-M038-75 95736.5 02793.0 05701.7 28-06-05 00 18 +22.48 03 +22.19 11 +22.38 08 +22.44 11 +22.57 10 +23.03 14 +23.11 14 +23.23 22 +23.28 28 +23.29 35 +23.45 41 +23.48 44 +23.66 44 +23.68 45 +23.54 52 +23.54 04 46 +23.63 48 +23.99 42 +24.35 26 +24.75 44 +25.84 48 +26.40 46 +26.52 56 +23.32 69 +22.85 61 +21.83 55 +21.24 60 +24.44 65 +23.36 61 +20.22 60 +19.19 62 +18.72 08 64 +18.50 62 +18.51 63 +17.60 67 +15.19 63 +14.62 59 +15.63 59 +16.02 52 +16.65 39 +16.46 43 +15.18 64 +15.14 65 +15.29 52 +14.87 49 +13.21 50 +13.79 51 +15.19 12 48 +17.31 38 +18.39 43 +18.12 27 +18.23 54 +14.67 51 +16.20 56 * +03.30 51 * +00.03 47 +00.06 49 +00.03 25 +05.45 20 +10.40 29 * +04.08 30 * +04.11 18 +10.35 28 +10.45 16 65 +10.68 55 +07.22 59 +04.76 62 +04.43 65 +04.19 00 * +10.48 59 +20.77 60 +23.64 70 +21.06 65 +15.04 68 +13.45 56 +14.38 47 +15.50 40 +17.67 51 +22.55 25 +25.24 20 12 +27.56 19 +29.27 10 +29.96 13 +29.97 22 +29.61 09 +28.68 22 +27.72 18 +27.22 09 +26.55 12 +25.47 30 +25.02 23 +22.52 13 +24.89 13 +24.46 26 +24.59 04 +23.77 1801.35 AP-M038-75 97537.9 02804.6 06093.8 29-06-05 00 09 +23.64 11 +23.53 12 +23.35 07 +23.11 18 +23.20 29 +23.54 34 +23.76 38 +23.87 35 +23.97 31 +23.85 43 +23.90 51 +23.95 52 +24.10 55 +24.10 49 +23.95 59 +24.24 04 66 +24.77 57 +25.14 51 +25.75 45 +26.42 60 +27.94 63 +28.62 62 +28.75 56 +27.99 77 +23.31 78 +19.45 74 +19.25 67 +18.95 65 +13.97 72 +12.92 72 +13.11 74 +13.07 08 76 +13.07 70 +12.96 64 +12.97 66 +12.96 55 +12.81 49 +16.12 48 +16.78 48 +16.90 52 +17.72 51 +20.22 43 +17.60 51 +19.78 52 +21.48 57 +23.23 47 +26.32 35 +27.02 12 49 +27.45 42 +27.04 43 +27.03 45 +27.30 56 +27.72 54 +26.70 52 +26.24 51 +26.67 51 +26.93 41 +26.91 45 +25.73 44 +26.27 50 +26.58 40 +26.25 47 +26.17 57 +26.55 16 68 +26.87 52 +25.64 54 +23.94 47 +26.32 62 +17.90 59 +06.48 58 +13.01 65 +14.96 75 +17.25 70 +16.96 66 +17.82 64 +17.42 63 +19.26 51 +20.20 49 +23.48 54 +25.23 20 25 +28.96 08 +30.16 10 +30.31 05 +30.44 10 +28.50 28 +28.42 25 +28.15 16 +27.31 13 +26.43 22 +26.01 29 +25.47 21 +24.75 35 +25.16 30 +25.57 43 +25.50 48 +25.30 2194.13 AP-M038-75 99732.0 02849.2 06724.7 30-06-05 00 52 +25.10 58 +24.99 56 +24.70 60 +24.79 48 +24.66 62 +24.83 62 +24.75 60 +24.81 60 +24.72 62 +24.62 61 +24.48 67 +24.50 65 +24.46 56 +24.18 58 +24.26 51 +24.19 04 57 +24.28 66 +24.81 60 +25.25 45 +25.77 49 +26.19 53 +26.65 49 +26.50 45 +25.73 69 +22.24 61 +19.69 48 +18.96 47 +18.55 58 +14.72 58 +12.39 61 +12.53 55 +12.66 08 49 +12.34 42 +12.47 49 +12.53 56 +12.61 53 +12.52 47 +12.65 43 +12.54 51 +11.71 39 +11.96 52 +12.11 41 +12.16 33 +12.09 32 +16.05 27 +17.90 19 +18.12 13 +18.39 12 01 +18.48 00 +16.06 00 +15.48 03 +15.57 15 +15.67 29 +18.41 00 +25.66 14 +24.74 61 +24.23 43 +24.59 01 +24.20 20 +24.24 40 +24.17 48 +23.44 47 +23.43 26 +22.54 16 28 +22.65 28 +22.79 36 +22.97 23 +22.46 18 * +21.03 56 +20.23 24 +20.50 30 +20.20 59 +18.13 61 +19.79 63 +22.28 47 +22.83 52 +19.63 32 +21.87 11 +24.40 00 +25.80 20 00 +30.53 01 +12.91 12 +00.04 00 +10.45 03 +30.33 00 +31.96 10 +30.78 51 +19.79 33 +24.10 13 +27.75 19 +26.72 13 +24.58 38 +26.18 19 +25.82 30 +25.66 41 +25.66 2010.84 AP-M038-75 01742.8 02932.1 06980.9 01-07-05 00 22 +25.35 16 +25.54 31 +25.56 25 +25.25 35 +25.44 27 +25.58 29 +25.44 35 +25.39 47 +25.45 55 +25.59 55 +25.69 53 +21.36 56 +20.34 48 +20.40 49 +20.32 45 +20.37 04 47 +20.63 37 +20.84 35 +21.15 27 +24.36 45 +28.17 47 +28.38 50 +28.29 47 +26.74 56 +21.27 44 +18.48 36 +19.28 42 +19.34 55 +16.68 51 +13.75 50 +13.67 51 +13.61 08 62 +13.56 61 +13.63 51 +13.60 56 +13.60 31 +13.62 41 +13.85 46 +13.93 48 +13.72 42 +13.86 16 +13.71 18 +13.70 15 +13.48 00 +15.30 09 +23.83 02 +26.60 05 +26.94 12 22 +28.59 17 +28.81 34 +30.73 15 +30.76 28 +30.88 16 +30.26 00 +29.53 09 +30.21 06 +30.50 01 +22.38 06 +22.74 08 +23.04 16 +23.66 13 +23.41 07 +23.06 03 * +22.03 16 23 * +14.38 37 +16.67 39 +16.94 38 +07.42 63 +14.18 49 +16.78 36 +17.89 44 +17.89 60 +19.38 56 +23.89 34 +21.55 26 +21.29 07 +15.15 00 +11.78 00 +00.02 00 +02.29 20 00 +22.83 00 +25.15 05 +24.43 00 +29.69 00 +32.39 16 +29.05 06 +14.03 00 +03.92 00 +21.73 04 +27.26 05 +27.31 00 +26.67 00 +27.61 00 +22.95 14 +26.95 24 +27.10 2031.80 AP-M038-75 03774.7 03035.5 07267.9 02-07-05

- - 1

SECTION-6 CHAPTER-1

PART-I

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 66 KV (CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE INSULATED POWER CABLE:

1.1 SCOPE 1.1.1 The scope under this section covers design, manufacuture, testing, packing, supply,

delivery and laying of 66 KV, XLPE, insulated power cable for use with effectively earthed

distribution systems.

1.2 STANDARDS: Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall conform, in all respects, to

IEC-502/1983/IEC-840/1988 and IS:7098 (Part-III)/1993 with latest amendment or latest

edition for cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cable for working voltage of

66 KV.

1.3 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The climatic conditions under which the cable shall operate

satisfactorily are as follows:-

a) Location : IN THE STATE OF HARYANA

b) Maximum ambient temperature of air in shade 0C : 50 c) Minimum ambient temperature of air in shade 0C : -2.5 d) Maximum daily average ambient temperature 0C : 40 e) Maximum yearly average ambient temperature 0C : 30 f) Maximum relative humidity % : 100 g) Minimum relative humidity % : 26 h) Average number of thunder storm days per annum : 35 i) Average annual rain fall mm : 900 j) Max. wind pressure kg/m2 : 195 k) Altitudes not exceeding above MSL Meter : 1000 l) Max. soil temp. at cable depth 0C : 30 m) Isoceranic level days/year : 50 n) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration) : 0.3g

- - 2

1.4 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS: 1.4.1 66 KV (E) grade XLPE single core power cable of single length, with H.D. aluminium

conductor, shielded with extruded semi-conducting layer, insulated with dry gas cured cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation, insulation screened with extruded semi-conducting layer, insulated core copper-wire, screened lapped with a combination of semi-conducting water swell able and poly aluminium laminated followed by black extruded PE (Poly-thylene) inner sheath. Single H.D. aluminium wire armoured and graphite coating PVC outer sheathed overall cable, confirming to IEC-502 (1983) for construction and also confirming to IS:7098 (Part-III)/1993 or any latest amendments thereof.

1.4.2 Outer sheathing should be designed to afford high degree of mechanical protection and

should also be heat, oil chemicals and weather resistant. Common acid. Alkalis and saline solution should not have adverse effect on the PVC sheathing material used.

1.4.3 The cable should be suitable for laying in covered trenches and/or under ground for

outdoor. 1.4.4 CABLE PARAMETERS 66 KV

i) Voltage Grade (Uo/U) 38/66 ii) No. of cores Single iii) Size (mm2) 400mm2,630mm2,800mm2,1000mm2,1200 mm2 iv) Nominal system voltage KV 66 v) Highest system voltage KV 72.5 vi) System Frequency Hz 50 vii) Variation in Frequency + 3% viii) Fault level individually for

i) Conductor 28.3KA for1sec ii) Cu.Screen/Armour 28.3KA for 1sec

ix) Maximum allowable temperature a) Design continuous operation at rated 0C 90

full load current, the max, temp. of conductor shall not exceed. 0C 250

b) The conductor temperature after a short circuit for 1.0 sec shall not exceed.

x) Basic insulation level 325 KVP (1.2/50 Micro Second Wave) xi) 1-min. power frequency withstand voltage (rms) 140 KV xii) System earthing Effectively earthed 1.5 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.5.1 CONDUCTOR: The cable conductor shall be made from stranded H.D.aluminium to form

compact circular shaped conductor having resistance within limits specified in IS:8130/1984 and any amendment thereof. The conductor shall confirm to IEC:228 and the shape shall be compacted circular shaped.

- - 3

1.5.2 CONDUCOTR SHIELD: The conductor having a semi-conducting screen shall ensure

perfectly smooth profile and avoid stress concentration. The conductor screen shall be extruded in the same operation as the insulation; the semi-conducting polymer shall be croos-linked.

1.5.3 INSULATION: The XLPE insulation should be suitable for specified 66 system voltage.

The manufacturing process shall ensure that insulations shall be free from voids. The insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal stressed under steady state and transient operating conditions. The extrusion method should give very smooth interface between semi-conducting screen and insulation. The insulation of the cable shall be of high standard quality, generally confirming to IEC-502 and I.S. 7098 Part-II/1988 (latest edition).

1.5.4 INSULATION SHIELD: To confine electrical field to the insulation, non-magnetic semi-

conducting shield shall be put over the insulation. The insulation shield shall be extruded in the same operation as the conductor shield and the insulation by suitable extrusion process. The XLPE insulation shield should be bonded type. Metallic screening shall be provided. The metallic screen shall be of copper wire having fault current capacity same as the conductor (28.3 KV for 1-sec).

1.5.5 INNER SHEATH: The inner sheath shall comprises of a combination of semi-conducting

water swell able and ploy aluminium laminated tape. The sheath shall be suitable to withstand the site conditions and the desired temperature. It should be of adequate thickness, consistent quality and free from all defects. The sheath shall be extruded and of black P.E. (Poly-ethylene).

1.5.6 ARMOUR: Single H.D. Aluminium wire armouring shall be provided. The dimension of

H.D.Aluminium wire armouring shall be as per latest IS:3975/19988. The armour shall be having fault current same as capacity conductor (28.3 KV for 1 sec.)

1.5.7 OUTER SHEATH: Suitable semi conducting layer coated on extruded PVC outer sheath

confirming to IEC: 502/1983, shall be applied over armouring with suitable additives to prevent attach by rodents and termites.

1.5.8 CONSTRUCTION: 1.5.8.1 All materials used in the manufacture of cable shall be new unused and of finest quality.

All materials should comply with the applicable provision of the tests of the specification. IS, IEC, Indian Electricity Rules, Indian Electricity Act and any other applicable statutory provisions rules and regulations.

1.5.9 CURRENT RATING: The cable will have current ratings and derating factors as per

relevant standard IEC. 1.5.9.1 The one-second short circuit rating values each for conductor, screen & armour shall be

furnished and shall be subject to the purchaser’s approval. 1.5.9.2 The current ratings shall be based on maximum conductor temperature of 90 deg. C with

ambient site condition specified for continuous operation at the rated current.

- - 4

1.5.9.3 SIZE:

The different sizes of cable shall be 66 KV Single Core a) 400mm2 b) 630mm2

c) 800mm2

d) 1000mm2

e) 1200mm2

1.5.10 OPERATION: 1.5.10.1Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation under a power supply system frequency

variation of plus minus 3% voltage variation of plus, minus 10% and combined frequency voltage variation of 10% (absolute sum).

1.5.10.2 Cable shall be suitable for laying in ducts or buried under ground. 1.5.10.3 Cable shall have heat and moisture resistance properties. These shall be of type

and design with proven record on transmission network service. 1.5.11 LENGHTS: The cable shall be supplied in standard drum lengths as below: Size of cable Standard Drum Length a) 66 1c x 400mm2, 630mm2,800mm2, 750 meters + 5% tolerance and

1000mm2, 1200 mm2 + 2% overall tolerance in total quantity of cable.

1.5.11 INDENTIFICATION MARKING: Identification of cables shall be provided externally at three meters’ intervals to identify as under:-

i) ‘Name of Manufacture’ ii) ‘Year of manufacture’ iii) ‘Voltage grade’ to be printed/embossed at the interval of one meter-length. The

identification, by printing or embossing shall be done only on the outer sheath. Name of purchaser shall also be embossed.

1.6.0 TESTS

1.6.1 Type Tests The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of the following tests, carried out in accordance with ISS-7098/IEC-871, from Govt./Govt. approved test house, shall be submitted along with bid: i) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath. ii) Bending test. iii) Di-electrical power factor test. iv) Heating cycle test followed by di-electrical power factor as a function of voltage and

partial discharge test. v) Impulse withstand test. The remaining type test report as per clause 3 of ISS-7098/IEC-871 shall be submitted by the successful bidder within three months from the date of placement of order. These type test reports shall be from Govt./Govt. approved test house and shall not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of placement of order. The failure to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.

- - 5

1.6.2 ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS All routine and acceptance tests shall be carried as per relevant ISS in the presence of Nigam’s representative.

1.7 INSPECTION

The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorised representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The inspecting officer shall also satisfy himself about the correctness of length of cables as provided in Instruction No. 208 of E.B. Manual of Instruction 1963 Edition amended vide O/O No. G/BD-33(57) 75 dt. 18.04.75 now HVPNL. In case the supplier is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt. recognised test agency at his own expense.

1.8 TEST CERTIFICATES The supplier shall supply test certificates from a Govt. agency in respect of quality as per IS:7098(part-II) 1985 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the purchaser.

1.9 PACKING The cable shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drum as per IS:10418:1982 so constructed, as to enable the cable to be transported on each drum. The cable wound on such drum shall be one continuous length. The ends of cables shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing material.

1.10 MARKING The marking on the drum shall have the following information: - a) Reference to Indian Standard & cable code. b) Name of the manufacturer & trade name. c) Nominal cross section area of conductor for the cables. d) Number of core. e) Sequential No. at each meter. f) Type of the cable & voltage for which it is suitable. g) Length of cable on the drum. h) Approximate gross weight. i) Net weight of the cable. j) Drum identification number. k) P.O. No. and date. l) Consignee’s name with designation. m) Year of manufacture.

1.11 DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUAL

The tenderer shall supply the following drawings with the tender: - i) Detailed drawing of the cable showing conductor, screening insulation, Armouring,

outer sheath etc. ii) Detailed drawing showing jointing of cable and sealing of end boxes. Copies of instruction manuals for testing, installation jointing operation and maintenance of cables, shall also be submitted with the offer for reference of the purchaser.

1.12 TECHNICAL & GUARANTEED PARTICULARS: The tenderer shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars as called for in appendix-I (Schedule-A) of this specification. Particulars, which are subject to guarantee, shall be clearly marked. Offer not containing this information will not be considered.

- - 6

PART-II TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 66 KV

XLPE UNDERGROUND POWER CABLE

SECTION-1 SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING OF CABLE

1.1 LAYING OF POWER CABLE: 1.1.1 The 66 KV (E) XLPE cable shall be installed underground and normally buried directly in

the ground complying with all applicable standards and IS:1255 & their amendments. 1.1.2 The sealing of power cable ends should be made during the storage; execution &

completion of jointing works shall be in the scope of successful tenderer. In no circumstances, the cable ends shall be kept open.

1.1.3 Three single core cables shall be laid in trefoil formation. 1.1.4 The power cable shall be laid generally at a depth of 1500mm and can vary, if obstacles

like power cable of other rating/telephone cable/water pipe line etc, come in the way of installation. At least minimum Depth of 1000 mm shall be maintained from nearest road level.

1.1.5 The cables shall be completely surrounded by a layer of having a low thermal resistivity

(selected sand) sand about 250mm over & below of the cable surface throughout width of the cable trench at no extra cost. (River sand shall be allowed for surrounding layer).

1.1.6 The extra protection of pre-cost flat RCC slab with proportion 1:2:4 having size 600(L)

X300(B) X 50(Thk) mm shall be provided about 250mm over the power cables for complete route of the cable.

The RCC slab shall be with proportion not less than 1:2:4 (M-150) and also shall have steel reinforced of 6/8 mm dia. Steel bar (4 nos. of 300mm side and 5 Nos. on 600 mm side ) at adequate required distance. The slab shall be given curing time of minimum 15 days.

1.1.7 Normally, the back filling shall consist of the materials earlier excavated, however, bigger

stones or piece of rock should be removed OR if required new soil has to be provided and used for back filling with no extra cost.

1.1.8 The cable drum must be handled correctly and with care during transport and laying of the

power cables, in order to avoid damage to the cables. 1.1.9 The minimum bending radius of the cable shall be 30xD where D is diameter of the cable.

1.2 CROSSINGS: 1.2.1 a) where road crossing comes in way of laying power cable, the power cable shall be laid

through NP-4 RCC Hume Pipes.

b) The RCC Hume pipe inner dia-meter shall not be less than 400mm.

- - 7

c) The RCC pipes to be laid shall have minimum depth in such a way that the back filling on top surface of the pipe shall be at least 600mm in depth. The pipe joints shall be smooth so that cables are not damaged during pulling & operation. d) During the crossing of utilities like water line, drainage lines, telephone lines, gas lines etc. sufficient care shall be taken & protection shall be made available so that other utilities do not damage the cable mechanically and/or electrically or do not effect the performance of the cable. e) NALA CROSSINGS/CULVERT CROSSINGS: The Nala crossings are to be made with separate fly-over bridges of adequate sizes to carry all the cables in required formation. The bridges are to be made at the sufficient distances from the edge of Nala considering the further expansions of roads. The strength shall be such that it should not wash away with the flow of water during heavy rain.

1.3 IDENTIFICATOIN, MARKING AND WARNING: 1.3.1 The identification marker shall be of adequate size fabricated from 3mm thick,

25mmx25mm aluminium strip. The marker shall be embossed with letter as stated below:

“Name of S/Stn” and “Phase R or Y or B" as the case may be .

The marker shall be tightened with nylon thread along with each cable at interval of 3 meters in such a way that it does not damage/penetrate the outer sheath of cable because of the dead weight of back filled materials OR soil.

1.3.2 A pre-warning PVC yellow tape with size 152 mm (width) x 100 microns thick (HDDPE)/LLDPF shall also be laid as per following clause of the specification. The warning tape shall also contain the “WARNING” printed in black letters as under (In English as well as Hindi).

“CAUTION: 66000 VOLTS HVPNL CABLE”

1.3.3 A pre-warning tap as per above clause shall be laid below ground level in the earth about 400/500 mm deep along the route of cable and in jointing bays.

1.3.4 The cable route marker is to be made from R.C.C. blocks duly embossed on all the side as

under:- “HVPNL 66 KV CABLE LINE” The minimum size shall be 600x400x50mm. It shall be at least embedded in ground upto 400mm depth. The exposed portions shall be painted with non-washable paints. The interval should be minimum 30meters between two markers. It should be put at bends, curves, road crossing etc. of cable route.

1.4 TEST AFTER INSTALLATION: 1.4.1 Pre-commissioning tests on site, shall include the following:-

a) Insulation Resistance of each cable drum length after laying and before jointing. b) Tests for detection of damage to outer sheath, if any.

- - 8

c) Serving insulation resistance after laying each cable length shall withstand a

voltage of 10 KV DC for one minute between each reinforcement and external conducting surface; In addition, the serving insulation resistance shall be measured and checked with the values obtained during routine factory tests.

d) On completion of the cable laying and jointing work, the complete installation shall

be checked with a D.C. voltage of 3 Uo applied for 15 minutes between each conductor and sheath.

e) Conductor resistance of each cable of each complete circuit. f) Test for 5 min. with system voltage applied between the conductor and the screen. g) Test for 24 hours with normal operating voltage of the system.

h) Continuity & phase confirmation.

Note: The pre-commissioning test at (f) or (g) at site to be undertaken as an alternative to

the test (d). 1.5 GENERAL:

1) The cable laying shall have to be done, as per actual site condition at the time of execution, and as per the instruction of the engineer-in-charge.

2) The end of cut pieces of cables left out during executions shall be sealed to prevent

ingress of any moisture in the cable before handing over to consignee.

- 0 -

SECTION-6 CHAPTER-2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 220V (100AH) AND

48V (120AH) BATTERY BANKS 1.0 SCOPE:

The scope of this specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, supply,

testing at works, packing, forwarding, dispatch of VRLA batteries along with

necessary accessories, fittings etc. to the destination.

These equipments are to be complete in every respect, details to the functions

designated to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser. It is required that the

supplier accepting the contract agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliances and

material whether specifically mentioned or not but which may be found

necessary to complete, to perform and testing any of the herein specified

equipment (s) for compliance with the requirements implied without extra

charges. The erection/maintenance tools and specific tools if any will also form

part of supply.

2.0 General Technical Requirement

All the materials/components used in Battery Chargers and Valve Regulated

Lead Acid Battery (VRLA) shall be free from flaws and defects and shall

conform to relevant standards and good engineering practices:-

2.0.1 For 132 KV sub-stations, DC System shall consist of two (2) float-cum-boost

chargers and one (1) battery set for each of 220V system. For 48V system DC

scheme shall consist of one (1) battery. The standard scheme drawing is

enclosed with this specification.

2.0.2 Bidder shall select number of cells, float and Boost voltage to achieve following

requirement :

System Voltage

Maximum Voltage during Float Operation

Minimum voltage available when no charger working

and battery fully discharged up to 1.85 V per cell.

Minimum Nos of Cell

220 Volt 242 Volt 198 Volt 107 48 Volt 52.8 Volt 43.2 Volt 23

2.1 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The equipment to be supplied against the specification shall be suitable for

satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:

Max. ambient air temperature 500 C

- 1 -

Max. daily average ambient temperature 450 C

Max. yearly weighted ambient temperature 350 C

Min. air temperature (-) 50 C

Max. humidity 100%

Min. relative humidity 26 %

Average number of thunder storm days per annum 40

Average annual rain fall 15 cm to 100 cm.

Number of months during which tropical monsoon 4 months (June to

conditions prevail altitude above MSL Sept). Varies from 61

meters to 815.00 mtrs.

Average number of rainly days per annum. 120 days

Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) 0.3g.

Degree of pollution Heavy

Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 KW/sq.m.

Max. Wind load 195 kg/sq.m.

3.0 Battery

3.1 Type

The DC Batteries shall be Normal Discharge type Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) and shall conform to IS 15549: 2004/IEC 60896-21 & 22, 2004 standard. These shall be factory filled, charged & suitable for a long life under continuous float operations and occasional discharges. The 220 V DC systems should be unearthed and 48V DC system is Positive Earth system. Battery sets shall be capable of operating at a peak ambient temperature of 50

Deg.C. The offered battery shall be compact and shall require no maintenance.

All safety equipment required for installation shall be provided by the

manufacturer.

3.2 Constructional Requirement

Plates: Positive plates shall be made of flat pasted type using high corrosion resistant alloy for durability, maintenance free, long life both in cyclic as well as in float applications. The Grids are of Semi Radial Squarish grid to reduce internal Resistance and travel current in shorter time.

Negative plates shall be heavy duty, durable flat plate using lead alloy pasted Semi Radial Squarish Grid. Negative plates shall be designed to match the life of positive plates and combination of positive and negative plates shall ensure long life, durability and trouble free operation of battery.

Computer controlled/PLC operated in house equipment should be deployed for

preparation of lead oxide and paste to ensure consistency in paste quality & properties. Conventional / manual type of paste preparation will not be allowed.

3.3 Containers & Lids

The container & lids shall be made of polypropylene Copolymer material and

- 2 -

shall have chemical and electro-chemical compatibility along with acid resistant and shall conform to UL-94/ ASTM-D-2863 standard. The material shall meet all the requirements of VRLA batteries and be consistent with the life of battery. The porosity of the container shall be such as not to allow any gases to escape except from the regulation valve. The tensile strength of the material of the container shall be such as to handle the internal cell pressure of the cells in the worst working condition. The container shall be capable of withstanding the rigours of transport, storage and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in a steel tray. For identification each cell / module shall be marked in a permanent manner to

Indicate the Following information.

I. Cell Serial number. II. Positive and Negative is embossed on the cover III. Month and Year of manufacturing.

3.4 Cell Covers

The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container material and permanently fixed with container by Hermetic Heat Sealing technique. It shall be capable to withstand internal pressure without bulging or cracking. Fixing of pressure regulation Valve & terminals posts in the cover shall be such that the seepage of electrolyte, gas escapes and entry of electrostatic spark are prevented.

3.5. Separators

The separators used in manufacturing of battery cells shall be spun glass micro porous Matrix having high acid absorption capability & resistant to battery grade Sulphuric acid along with good insulating properties. Sufficient separator overlap and PVC shield protection to bottom edges of the plates is to be provided to prevent short circuit formation between the edges of adjacent plates.

3.6. Pressure Regulation Valve

Each cell shall be provided with a pressure regulation valve. The valve shall be self re-sealable. The vent plug shall be made with suitable grade of fire retardant plastic material. Each valve opening shall be covered with flame barrier capable in preventing the ingress of flame into the cell interior when the valve opens and hydrogen / oxygen gas mixture is released. The valve unit shall be such that it cannot be opened without a proper tool.

3.7. Terminal Posts

Both the Positive and Negative terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper termination and shall ensure its consistency with the life of battery. The terminals shall have adequate solid copper core cross-section to avoid overheating at maximum current load. The surface of the terminal post extending above the cell cover including bolt hole shall be coated with an acid resistant and corrosion retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is in contact with the electrolyte shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a proven material that does not have any harmful effect on cell performance. Both Positive and negative terminal posts of VRLA Battery shall be colored Red and Black to make it unambiguously identifiable.

3.8. Connectors, Nuts & Bolts, Heat Shrinkable Sleeves

The connectors shall be non corroding lead coated copper of suitable size to enable connections of cells. Copper connections shall be suitably lead coated to

- 3 -

withstand corrosion due to Sulphuric acid/fumes. Nuts and bolts for connecting the cells shall be made of stainless steel with good acid resistant characteristics. All inter cell connectors shall be protected with heat shrinkable silicon sleeves for reducing the environmental impact including a corrosive environment.

3.9. Flame Arrestors

Each cell shall be equipped with a Flame Arrestor to defuse the Hydrogen gas escaped during charge and discharge. Material of the flame arrestor shall not affect the performance of the cell.

3.10. Battery Bank Stand

All batteries shall be mounted in a suitable metallic stand/frame. The frame shall be powdered coated with acid resistant paint (2 coats) and should have protection against fungus growth and other harmful effect due to tropical environment. The suitable insulation shall be provided between stand/frame and floor to avoid the grounding of the frame/stand. The joining of the frames should not leave crevices and ensure proper and tight fit.

3.11. Capacity Requirements

When the battery is discharged at 10 hour rate, it shall deliver 80% of C (rated capacity, corrected at 27º Celsius) before any of the cells in the battery bank reaches 1.85V/cell. The battery shall be capable of being recharged from the fully exhausted condition (1.75V/cell) within 10 hrs up to 90% state of charge. All the cells in a battery shall be designed for continuous float operation at the specified float voltage throughout the life. The capacity (corrected at 27ºCelcius) shall also not be less than C and not more than 120% of C before any cell in the battery bank reaches 1.75V/cell. The battery voltage shall not be less than the following values, when a fully charged battery is put to discharge at C/10 rate:

(a) After Six minutes of discharge: 1.98V/cell (b) After Six hours of discharge: 1.92V/cell (c) After 8 hours of discharge: 1.85V/cell (d) After 10 hours of discharge: 1.75V/cell Loss in capacity during storage at an average ambient temperature of 35º Celsius for a period of 6 months shall not be more than 60% and the cell/battery shall achieve 85% of its rated capacity within 3 charge/discharge cycles and full rated capacity within 5 cycles, after the storage period of 6 months. Voltage of each cell in the battery set shall be within 0.05V of the average voltage throughout the storage period. Ampere hour efficiency shall be better than 90% and watt hour efficiency shall be better than 80%.

3.12. Expected Battery Life

The battery shall be capable of giving 1200 or more charge/discharge cycles at 80% Depth of discharge (DOD) at an average temperature of 27º C. DOD (Depth of Discharge) is defined as the ratio of the quantity of electricity (in Ampere-Hour) removed from a cell or battery on discharge to its rated capacity. The battery sets shall have a minimum expected life of 20 years at float operation.

- 4 -

3.13. Accessories along with Battery System

Each battery shall be supplied with following accessories and devices: a) Torque Wrench. b) Cell Test Voltmeter (-3-0-+ 3) Volts with least count of 0.01 Volt

3.14. Type Test of Battery

The contractor/Supplier shall supply type tested battery per IS 15549: 2004/IEC 60896-21 & 22 over the range of at least one capacity per design and should have met requirement of Service Life test as per above stated IEC standards within last seven years. The Contractor/Supplier shall submit necessary evidences enclosed along with tender documents.

Sr.No Description

1 Gas Emission 2 High Current Tolerance 3 Short Circuit Current and DC internal resistance 4 Protection against internal ignition from external spark source 5 Protection against ground short propensity 6 Content & durability of required marking 7 Material Identification 8 Valve Operation 9 Flammability Rating of material 10 Intercell connector performance 11 Discharge Capacity 12 Charge Retention during storage 13 Float Service with daily discharge for reliable mains power 14 Recharge behavior 15 Service life at an operating temperature of 400 C for brief

duration exposure time 16 Impact of stress temperature of 60oC for brief duration

exposure time with 3 hours discharge test 17 Abusive Over discharge 18 Thermal runway sensitivity 19 Low temperature sensitivity 20 Dimensional sensitivity at elevated internal pressure &

temperature 21 Stability against mechanical abuse of units during installation

Test shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60896-21 & 22,2004 3.14.1 Routine Test of Battery 1. Physical examination test 2. Visual Inspection 3. Dimensions, Mass & Layout 4. Marking & Packing 3.14.2 Acceptance Test of Battery 1. Polarity Marking 2. Verification of Dimensions 3. Test of AH Capacity.

- 5 -

3.15. List of Factory & Site Tests for Battery

Sr.No Test Factory Tests Site Tests

1 Physical Verification Yes 2 C/10 Capacity test on the cell Yes

3.16. Installation and Commissioning

Manufacturer of battery shall supervise the installation as recommended in O&M manual/or relevant standards. All necessary instruments, materials, tools and tackles required for installation, testing at site and commissioning are to arranged by battery manufacturer/Contractors.

4.0 MARKING AND PACKING:

4.1 MARKING:

The following information shall be indeligibly and durably marked on the outside of the cell.

a) Nominal Voltage b) Manufacturer’s name, type and trade name. c) AH capacity at 10 hour rate.

Voltage for float operation at 20 deg. C with tolerance of (+/-) 1%. d) Month & year of manufacturer e) Country of origin. f) S.No. of cell/cell No.

4.1.1 The cells and batteries may also be marked with the ISI certification mark, if

any.

4.2 PACKING: The cells shall be suitably packed so as to avoid any loss or damage during transit.

5.0 INSTRUCTION MANUAL: The manufacturer shall supply one copy of instructions manual for initial charging (if required)/treatment, and routine maintenance during service, with each and every battery set. The manufacturer shall supply 5 copies of instructions manual to the purchaser.

The following information shall be provided on, the instruction cards. a) Designation of cell or battery b) Ampere hour capacity. c) Nominal voltage d) Manufacturer’s instructions for charging e) Voltage for float operation at 20 deg.C with tolerance (+/-) 1%. f) Maintenance instructions g) Environmental & safety provisions required.

6.0 TESTS:

All the acceptance tests as per relevant standards mentioned shall be carried out for batteries in presence of our inspecting officer free of cost. Type test certificates (not older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender) are to be submitted for approval of purchaser.

- 6 -

7.0 DRAWINGS:

The tenderer will submit the detailed dimensional drawings for battery sets including stands.

8.0 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:

The tenderer will submit the complete type test certificates as per relevant standards mentioned (not older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender) for battery sets with their tenders, without which the offers are likely to be ignored.

9.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICUALRS:

Guaranteed Technical Particualrs for battery sets as per Annexure-A attached shall be furnished along with the tender.

10.0 ACCESSORIES:

Each battery set shall be supplied complete with all necessary accessories viz. stand, inter connections, cell no. Plates with sticker, multi meter complete with leads, spanners.

11.0 BILL OF MATERIAL:

The firm shall also have to furnish the bill of material used in battery set.

- - 1

SECTION-6 CHAPTER-3

1. Battery Charger The DC system for 220V DC is unearthed. The Battery Chargers as well as their

automatic regulators shall be of static type and shall be compatible with VRLA batteries. All battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation at the respective rated load in float charging mode, i.e. Float charging the associated Lead-Acid Batteries at 2.13 to 2.27 Volts per cell while supplying the DC load. The chargers shall also be capable of Boost charging the associated DC battery at 2.28 to 2.32 volts per cell at the desired rate. Charger shall regulate the float/boost voltage in case of prescribed temperature rise of battery as per manufacturer’s recommendation to avoid thermal runaway. Necessary temperature sensors shall be provided in mid location of battery banks and shall be wired up to the respective charger for feedback control. The manufacturer shall demonstrate this feature during testing of each charger.

1.1 The battery chargers shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual control of output voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided for selecting the mode of output voltage/current control, whether automatic or manual. When on automatic control mode during float charging the chargers output voltage shall remain within + 1% of the set value, for AC input voltage variation of + 1% frequency variation of + 5% a combined voltage and frequency variation of + 1% and a DC load variation from zero to full load.

1.2 All battery chargers shall have a constant voltage characteristics throughout the range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the battery fully charged but without harmful overcharge.

1.3 All chargers shall have load limiters having drooping characteristics, which shall cause, when the voltage control is in automatic mode, a gradual lowering of the output voltage whet eh DC load current exceeds the Load limiter setting of the Charger. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such that any sustained overload or short circuit in DC system shall not charge the Charger nor shall it cause blowing of any of the Charger fuses. The Charger shall not trip on overload or external short circuit.

1.4 Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic modes) shall be provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the entire float charging output range specified. Step less adjustments of the Load-limiter setting shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the rated output current for Charging mode.

1.5 During Boot Charging, the Battery Charger shall operate on constant current mode (when automatic regulator is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the Boost charging current continuously over a range of 50 to 100% of the rated output current for Boost charging mode. The Charger output voltage shall automatically go on rising, when it is operating on Boost mode, as the Battery Chargers up. For limiting the output voltage of the Charger, a potentiometer shall be provided on the front of the panel, whereby it shall be possible to set the upper limit of this voltage any where in the output range specified for Boost Charging mode

- - 2

1.6 The Charger manufacturer may offer an arrangement in which the voltage setting

device for Float charging mode is also used as output voltage limit setting device for Boost charging mode and the Load-limiter of Float charging mode is used as current setting device in boost charging mode.

1.7 Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple content (

Peak to Peak) in the output voltage to 1% irrespective of the DC load level, when they are not connected to a battery.

1.8 MCCB

All Battery Chargers shall have 2 Nos. MCCBs on the input side to receive cables from two sources. Mechanical interlock should be provided such that only one shall be closed at a time. It shall be of P2 duty and suitable for continuous duty MCCB’s should have auxiliary contacts for annunciation.

1.9 Rectifier Transformer

The rectifier transformer shall be continuously rated, dry air cooled (A.N) an of class F insulation type. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall have 10% overload capacity.

1.10 Rectifier Assembly

The rectifier assembly shall be fully/half controlled bridge type and shall be designed to meet the duty as required by the respective charger. The rectifier shall be provided with heat sink having their own heat dissipation arrangements with natural air cooling. Necessary surge protection devices and rectifier type test acting HRC fuses shall be provided in each arm of the rectifier connections.

1.11 Instruments

One AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter along with selector switches shall be provided for all chargers. One DC voltmeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be provided for all chargers. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and moisture resistant. The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero adjustment. The instruments shall be of 15 accuracy class. In addition to the above a centre zero voltmeter with selector switch shall also be provided for 220 V Chargers for testing purpose.

1.12 Air Break Switches

One DC output switch shall be provided in all chargers. They shall be air break type suitable for 500 Volts AC/ 250 DC. The contacts of the switches shall open and close with a snap action. The operating handle of the switch shall be fully insulated from circuit. ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ position on the switch shall be clearly indicated. Rating of switches shall be suitable for their continuous load. Alternatively, MCCB’s of suitable ratings shall also acceptable in place of Air Break Switch.

- - 3

1.13 Fuses All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are

in turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse.

1.14 Blocking Diode

Blocking diode shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each charger to prevent current flow from the DC battery into the charger.

1.15 Annunciation System

Audio-visual indications through bright LEDs shall be provided in all Chargers for the following abnormalities:-

a) AC Power failure. b) Rectifier/chargers fuse blown. c) Over voltage across the battery when boost charging. d) Abnormal voltage (High/Low) e) Any other annunciation if required

Potential free NO contacts of above abnormal conditions shall also be provided for common remote indication “CHARGER TROUBLE” in Owner’s Control Board. Indication for charger in float mode and boost mode through indication lamps shall be provided for chargers. A Potential free contact for float/boost mode shall be provided for external interlocks.

1.16 Name Plates and Marking

The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each Charger, on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the Charger. Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various equipments and ease of operation and maintenance.

1.17 Charger Construction

The Chargers shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed cubicle type. The Contractor shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts and hardware. The Chargers shall be fabricated from 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel and shall have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all cables and lugs for power cables shall be supplied by the Contractor. The lugs for power cables shall be made of electrolytic copper with tin coat. Power cable sizes shall be advised to the Contractor at a later date for provision of suitable lugs and drilling of gland plates. The Charger shall be tropicalised and vermin proof. Ventilation louvers, if provided shall be backed with screens. All doors and covers shall be fitted with synthetic rubber gaskets. The chargers shall have hinged double leaf doors provided on front and on

- - 4

backside for adequate access to the Charger’s internals. All the charger cubicle doors shall be properly earthed. The degree of protection of Charger enclosure shall be at least IP-42 as per IS: 13947 Part -1.

1.17.1 All indicating instruments, control switches and indicating lamps shall be mounted on the front side of the Charger.

1.17.2 Each Charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and terminal

blocks and ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated, 1.5 sq.mm. stranded copper wired. Control terminals shall be suitable for connecting two wires, with 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductors. All terminals shall be numbered for ease of connections and identification. Each wire shall bare a ferrule or tag on each end for identification. At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided for control circuits.

1.17.3 The insulation of all circuits, except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand test voltage of 2 KV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (10) mm shall be maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal lugs. Whenever this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded.

1.18 Painting

All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated in tanks, in accordance with IS:6005 Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating shall be ‘Class-C’ as specified in IS:6005. Welding shall not be done after phosphating. The phosphating surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint of shade -692 (smoke grey) of IS-5 shall be applied, unless required otherwise by the Owner. The inside of the chargers shall be glossy white. Each coat of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be properly staved. The paint thickness shall not be less than fifty (50) microns.

1.19 TESTS 1.19.1 Battery Chargers shall conform to all type tests as per relevant Indian Standard

Performance test on the Chargers as per Specification shall also be carried out on each charger as per specification. Rectifier transformer shall conform to all type tests in IS:4540 and short circuit test as per IS:2026. Following type tests shall be carried out for compliance of specification requirements:-

i) Voltage regulation test. ii) Load limiter characteristics test iii) Efficiency tests iv) High voltage tests v) Temperature rise test vi) Short circuit test at no load and full load at rated voltage for sustained

short-circuit. vii) Degree of protection test viii) Measurement of ripple by oscilloscope. ix) Temperature compensation feature demonstration

- - 5

1.19.2 The contractor may be required to demonstrate to the OWNER that the chargers conform to the specification particularly regarding continuous rating, ripple free output, voltage regulation and load limiting characteristic, before despatch as well as after installation at site. At site the following tests shall be carried out:-

i) Insulation resistance test ii) Checking of proper annunciation system operation

1.19.3 If a Charger fails to meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall replace the same with appropriate Charger without affecting the commissioning schedule of the Sub-Station, and without any extra cost to the OWNER.

1.19.4 The Contractor shall present for inspection, the type and routine test certificates

for the following components whenever required by the OWNER.

(i) Switches (ii) Relays/MCCBs (iii) Instruments (iv) DC fuses (v) SCR (vi) Diodes (vii) Condensers (viii) Potentiometers (ix) Semiconductor (x) Annunciator (xi) Control wiring (xii) Push buttons and contactors Makes of above equipment shall be subject to Owner’s approval.

- 1 -

SECTION-6 CHAPTER 4

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF

D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD. 1. SCOPE:

This specification provides for design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of D.C. Distribution Board, complete with all fittings accessories and associated auxiliary equipment mandatory which are required for efficient and trouble free operation as per specified here under. It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standard of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete in all component necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment interlocks protection scheme etc. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this Specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

1.02 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

As per Section-I Vol-II.

1.03 STANDARD: All material and equipment shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the latest edition of the relevant Indian Standard IS:1651.

1.04 MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP: All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well finished and of approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes, flaws and of the true form and dimensions.

All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.

1.05 DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS: The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independent 4-core cable connection from an A.C. 50 cycles 3 phase 415 ± 10% volts switchboard fed from a Station Transformer. D.C. Distribution shall be through fuse protected rotary switches mounted on a separate distribution board.

1.06 TYPE OF EQUIPMENT: All equipment shall be located indoors. D.C. Distribution panel are to be mounted on the floor in the control room adjacent to the Battery room.

Necessary doors and screens shall be provided wherever required. All equipment shall

be vermin proof. The overall design of the entire equipment should be adequate for the duty in view to ensure trouble free and dependable service.

The various cables for D.C. Distribution circuits, which are to be arranged by the contractor shall have P.V.C. insulation. The conductors may be of copper or aluminum.

- 2 -

All panel wiring to be provided by the supplier, shall consist of suitable colored/marked P.V.C. insulated cables.

1.07 BUS BARS AND SUPPORTS: The bus bars shall be of aluminium having adequate cross-sections. The bus bars shall be so designed and mounted that their expansion and contraction does not subject, either the Bus Bars or their supports, to any stresses. All bus bars and connections shall be duly marked and colored for identification.

1.08 INSTRUMENTS: All instruments shall have 96 sq mm dials and flush mounted on the panels. Moving coil spring controlled instruments shall be used except those for A.C. which may be of the moving iron type. The error of indication shall not exceed 1% throughout the effective range of the meter.

1.09 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGNS:

The contractor shall assume full responsibility for co-ordinate and adequate design and shall conform to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified. In case the equipment covered by this specification is to be co-ordinate with other equipment, the contractor shall furnish complete information and data as may be desired by the purchaser.

1.10 GROUNDING: All metal parts should be grounded according to Indian Electricity Rules. Main ground Bus shall be provided by the purchaser. Special grounding lugs of adequate size shall be provided by the supplier on the charging equipment.

1.11 INTER CHANGEABILITY: Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be interchangeable in every respect.

1.12 DOCUMENTATION The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.

The following drawing shall be supplied with the tender: - i) Outline drawings of all apparatus showing sufficient details to enable the

purchaser to determine whether the design proposed can be installed satisfactorily or not.

NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

1.13 FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:

All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding down bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixture as may be required and these shall be supplied by the contractor. These fittings will be fixed by the purchaser in the foundations unless otherwise specified. All foundation bolts, fixtures etc. shall be supplied as soon as possible after the contract drawings have been approved.

1.14 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES:

All gauges, meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language, using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in India. In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall be suitably marked.

- 3 -

1.15 TROPICAL TREATMENT & PAINT:

All corrodible parts and surfaces shall be of such material and shall be provided with such paint or other protective finish that no part of the installed equipment shall be injuriously affected by the atmospheric moisture, heat and fumes. The panels shall be finally painted with light grey paint having shade No.631 of IS:5 with stove enameled finish.

1.16 PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION: The Bidder shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection of the various portions of the work included in the tender. The purchaser or his duly authorised agent shall have access to the contractor's or sub contractor's work at any time during working hours for the purpose of inspecting the manufacture and testing of materials, equipment and completed plant and the contractor shall provide the necessary facilities for inspection.

1.17 TESTS:

1.17.1 Type Tests The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven

years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart. i) Verification of constructional requirements ii) Verification of marking iii) Verification of dimensions

1.17.2 Routine Tests

As per quality assurance program (QAP). 1.17.3 Acceptance Tests

The following acceptance tests for DCDB shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL. i) Dimension test ii) Visual check test iii) quantative check iv) Functional checks v) wiring HV Test vi) Insulation resistance test

1.17.4 SAMPLING SCHEME AND CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE:

The sampling scheme and criteria for acceptance for cells up to and including 600 AH capacity shall be in accordance with clause 5 1.4 of IS-8320-1976. The sampling scheme for cells of higher capacities shall be subject to agreement between the user and the manufacturer.

1.18 SPARE PARTS :-

- 4 -

The Bidder shall quote separately in his tender for spare parts as he world recommend for the main maintenance operation of the equipment for the period of 5 years. Of detailed list of such spares parts which item wise prices shall be given under schedule of requirement and prices. The purchaser may order spares subsequently as may be finally decided upon, at the rates given in the tender. All spares parts shall be interchangeable and shall be of same make material and both workmanship as the corresponding parts furnished with the main equipment.

1.19 DETAILS OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND SPECIFICATION: Details of the technical particulars and specification required have been given in Appendix (b). Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be

given in addition to the above listed in Data requirement sheet. 1.20 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT:

Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in the specification, but which are usually necessary in the equipment shall be deemed to be included in the contract and shall be supplied by the contractor without extra cost.

- 5 -

APPENDIX 'A'

SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT

D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD: The D.C. Distribution Board shall be housed in a sheet steel cubicle with adequate ventilation and it should be vermin proof as far as possible and should be provided with louvers for ventilation backed by fine wire mesh, which applies to both charging equipment and D.C. Distribution Board. The DCDB shall match with the battery charging equipment and should be complete with bus bars of suitable capacity, wiring, rating plates, glands and fixing bolts. The minimum size of cubical should be 600X700X1600 mm. The following components shall be provided on the D.C. distribution board:

FOR 200 AH BATTERIES 1. Double pole ON/OFF rotary switch

of 200 Amps. for 200 AH rating and with 2 Nos. HRC fuses of 100 Amps 1 set

2. Moving coil ammeter of 96mm sq. and

range 0-200 amps. for 200 AH battery for measuring the load on the bus. 1 No

3. Change over contactor :

a) 20 Amps. for 200 AH battery and change over contractor AC/DC for switching indication over to DC. On failure of AC supply and 1 No also for emergency pilot light in the event of AC failure.

b) 10 Amps HRC fuses for pilot light 2 Nos.

4. Double pole D.C. Rotary switches with HRC fuses for each of following feeders:

a) 132 kV closing supply 50 Amp. Capacity 1 No

b) 33 kV -do- 1 No

- 6 -

c& d) spare 100 Amp. capacity 2 Nos. e & f) spare 50 Amp. capacity 2 Nos.

5. Double pole D.C. rotary switch of 10 Amps. rating with 10 Amp. HRC fuses for each of

the following feeders:

a) 33 kV -do- 10 Amp Capacity 1 No b) 132 kV -do- 1 No c) Carrier telephone 10 Amp. capacity 1 No d) 132 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp capacity 1 No e) Spare 10 Amp capacity 3 Nos.

All the instruments shall be of flush mounted type. The rotary switches shall also be flush mounted except for the protection portion in the panels. All switches shall be mounted on the front panel and all the HRC fuses together with their fuse fittings on the front panel but within a chamber that can be opened by half doors, to occasion accessibility to the fuses. The various components shall be of the best quality and from reputed manufacturers. The layout of components, wiring workmanship reliability etc. shall be of the best quality. Adequate room should be provided within the charger/DC distribution board cubicles for easy accessibility of components and also to facilitate ventilation.

- 1 -

SECTION-6 CHAPTER 5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 415

VOLTS L.T. SWITCH BOARDS.

1. SCOPE : This specification covers design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 415 Volts AC LT Switch Board complete with all fittings, accessories and associated auxiliary equipment mandatory spares as per Volume II which are required for efficient and trouble free operation as specified hereunder. It is not the intent to specify herein all the details of design and construction of equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee in a manner acceptable to the Purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment, interlocks protection schemes etc. irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this specification and commercially added or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

1.02 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:- i. Max. Temperature 500C ii. Min. Temperature -2.50C iii. Relativehumidity

a) Max. 100% b) Min. 26%

iii. Average number of rainy days per annum Nearly 120 days iv. Average rain fall per year. 900 mm v. Average number of dust storm days per annum 35 vi. Isoceraunic level 45 vii. Max. Wind pressures 195 kg/sqmt. viii. Altitude above mean sea level Less than 1000 mt.

1.03 STANDARDS:

The metal clad (preferably sheet metal) air break switch to be supplied against this Specification shall meet with the requirements laid down in IS-4064-1978 (part I & II) (latest edition). The HRC fuses shall comply with the Is-2208-1962 (latest amended). All other equipments shall also comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the respective Indian Standards.

1.04 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:

All the materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well finished and of approved design and make of the true form and dimensions.

All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.

- 2 -

1.05 INTER CHANGEABILITY:

Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be interchangeable in every respect.

1.06 DOCUMENTATION The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval. NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the

approval of drawings by HVPNL. 1.07 FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:

All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding down bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixtures as may be required and these shall be supplied by the contractor. These fittings will be fixed by the purchaser on the foundations unless otherwise specified.

1.08 INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES: All gauge meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language, using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in India. In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall be suitably marked.

1.09 PAINTING

The whole of the plant except bright parts, valves and such portions as are finished shall be painted with two painting coats of approved rust resisting paint in plain colours for packing and the parts not so painted shall be protected from deterioration during transit. All the ferrous parts shall be painted with battle ship grey paint by means of spray painting. The painting should be as per relevant ISS. All the non ferrous parts including the bus bars, thimbles, jumpers shall be tinned plated and sleeves of proper thickness and size shall be provided on all the jumpers. After erection at site every painted part shall be well cleaned filed and chopped and shall then receive two coats of best oil paint of approved colour, to be supplied by the contractor without any extra cost.

1.10 TESTS:

1.10.1 TYPE TEST The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven

years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.

1.10.2 Routine Test As per quality assurance program (QAP). 1.10.3 Acceptance Test

The following acceptance tests shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

- 3 -

i) Dimensional test ii) Continuity test iii) Insulation resistance test iv) High voltage test v) Inter locking test

1.11 INSTRUCTION BOOKS: Applicable parts, lists, catalogues and operating instructions in English Language

specially prepared to cover all the equipment furnished under this specification which may be needed or prove useful in operation, maintenance, repair, dismantling or assembling and for the repair and identification of parts for ordering replacements shall be assembled under a common cover and submitted in duplicate for each unit to the purchaser free of cost.

1.12 REPRODUCIBLE DRAWINGS: The contractor shall supply two sets of full size reproducible drawings (approved by the

purchaser) along with detailed drawings of various major components/accessories etc. (showing sectional views, wherever necessary) on oil cloth to prove useful in the erection, operation maintenance and repair of the equipment. He shall also supply twenty sets of azo prints of the above mentioned drawings for use in field and design offices.

1.13 PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM: The equipment shall be suitable for 415 Volts 50 cycles, 3 Phase 4 wire system with

neutral solidly earthed. 1.14 RISE IN TEMPERATURE: The equipment shall be operated at maximum ambient temperature of 500C and as such

the temperature rise of its parts should be proportionately below the figure provided in respective standards.

1.15 EACH SWITCH SHALL COMPRISE OF: Metal clad floor mounting combination fuse switch board consisting of a suitable bus bar

of 320 Amps rating for 15 Ckts. Triple pole and neutral bus bar chamber, mounted on a high floor stand arranged and equipped for the circuits given in the schedule of requirement and mounted above and below the bus bar chamber to form a suitable arrangement. The bus bar chamber shall have provision for adding two more switch units as given in the schedule at a later date. The switches shall be quick make and break type.

The switch boards shall be installed indoors. The enclosing chambers shall be dust-tight and vermin proof.

All equipments shall be suitable for reception of Alumiium cable rising from the ground. The details of equipment required for each switch board has been given in the schedule

of requirement. 1.16 BUS BARS: The bus shall be made of high conductivity copper or Aluminium and shall have

adequate cross section so as to be capable of carrying 300 Amps in phase and 150 Amps. in neutral.

- 4 -

The bus bar shall be so designed and mounted in the separate chamber such that their expansion or contraction does not subject either the bus bars or their insulation supports to any stresses.

The bus bar shall be properly spaced so as to provide easy access during maintenance and inspection etc. There should be no joints in the bus bars.

The current density for copper and aluminium bus bars must not exceed 1 A/cm2 and 87 A/cm2 respectively.

1.17 CONNECTIONS:

All the connections for the tee’s from the bus bars shall be bolted type and suitable spring washers shall be provided to ensure proper jointing and material of the bolts shall be of suitable metal. All the connections shall be provided with thimbles of suitable rating.

1.18 METERING EQUIPMENT

Metering equipment for the station transformer/Incomer shall be located between the L.T. side of the transformer and L.T. Bus Bars. The metering equipment shall include 300/5 Amps C.T.s having burden 15 VA with accuracy class 1 and 3 phase 4wire unbalanced load integrating electronic KWH meter. A 100 mm dial flush mounted MISC (moving iron spring controlled) Voltmeter and a 100 mm dial flush mounted MISC ammeter both with phase selector switch shall also be provided on each switchboard to indicate the bus bar voltage and total load on the station transformer/Incomer feeder. All the meters shall be enclosed in separate chamber to have a flush pattern type appearance. The meters shall be dust tight.

1.19 EARTHING

Two separate earths shall be run and each and every metallic parts of the stand/switches/bus bar chambers shall be earthed at two different places independently. The size of the earthing conductor for the switches and individual parts shall not be less than No. 8 SWG copper conductor and size of the main for earthing shall not be less than No. 3 SWG copper conductor.

1.20 BUS BAR CHAMBER

The bus bar chamber shall be made out of angle iron of suitable size as specified below along with other details: - a) Thickness of sheet steel enclosures, doors, covers

i) Cold rolled 2mm minimum ii) Hot rolled +2.5mm minimum

b) Degree of protection IP-54 as per BS- 2817/IEC-144 c) Colour finish shade

i) Interior Glossy white ii) Exterior Light grey Semi glossy shade

d) Earthing bus material size Copper 25x6 mm e) Purchaser’s earthing conductor Galvanised steel

Material Size 30x6 mm

f) Clearance in air of live parts

- 5 -

i) Phase to Phase 80 mm ii) Phase to earth 80 mm

1.21 LABELS:

Each switch shall be provided with suitable labels paginated on hard plastic sheet and duly held in boss framed of the size 75x50 mm for the incoming and outgoing feeders. The hard plastic sheet shall be of white colour and will be painted in black for the outgoing feeders whereas it shall be painted bright red for the incoming feeders.

1.22 INTERLOCKING Interlocks must be provided to ensure that the switch cover cannot be opened when the

switch is in the closed position. It should however be possible for competent examiner to over ride this interlock and operate the switch with enclosure open.

1.23 FIRE HAZARDS The switch and its associated apparatus shall be arranged to minimize fire hazards. 1.24 CLEARANCES The clearances between phases and between phases and earth shall be as per IS-

3072-1975 with latest amendments. 1.25 CONTACTS All live contacts of the switch shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental contact

when the equipment is either in the isolated or normal closed position and shall be silver plated of suitable thickness. The fixed contacts of the fuse switch unit shall be fully shrouded with arc resistant material. Material needs to be specified in the tender.

1.26 CABLE AND BOXES:

a) The incoming switch and outgoing switches shall be provided with cable and boxes of suitable size capacity and rating suitable for PVC cables. Suitable cleating arrangement shall also be provided for the cables entering the switch fuse units in the top tier. The cabling arrangement shall be such that cables outgoing from Isolator unit can be connected or disconnected easily and safely.

1.27 RUPTURING CAPACITY

The rupturing capacity of the bus bar switchgear/cartridges shall not be lower than 2 MVA at 415 volts.

1.28 The individual fuse switch unit shall be provided in such a way that they can be removed

from the front of the switch board for servicing and maintenance. 1.29 MARKING All the switches shall be clearly marked with the following particulars: -

a) Reference to the standard. b) Rated voltage. c) Rated normal current. d) Rated marking capacity. e) Breaking capacity. f) Type of fuse/links to be used. g) Name plate.

- 6 -

1. Supplier name. 2. Purchaser 3. P.O. No. 4. Rating. 5. Serial no. 6. Year of manufacturing.

1.30 OTHER PARTICULARS The Bidder should clearly furnish the following information in their offer: -

a) Material and plating of the contacts. b) Current density assumed. c) Temperature rise under continuous full load over the ambient temp. of 500C. d) Temperature rise under short circuit condition. e) Guaranteed Technical particulars as required in appendix-A.

1.31 List of references if similar L.T. Switch Board already in service/supplied with

complete details shall be furnished.

- 7 -

ANNEXURE ‘A’

SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS A. 220kV Sub-Stations 415 V 3 Phase 4 wire L.T. Switch Board comprising of 17 circuits TP & N switch fuse units consisting of one incomer from Station transformer of 500 A and another incomer from alternate emergency AC supply in case of failure of station transformer supply of 320 A with suitable CTs and selector switch for incomer feeders and 15 Nos. switch fuse units with HRC fuses for outgoing feeders having the following ratings for 220 KV S/Stns. Sr. No.

L.T.Feeders Switch rating (Amps)

Fuse rating (Amps)

No.

1. Incoming from Station transformer 500 400 1

2. Alternate Source 320 300 1

3. Oil filtration set feeder 200 160 1

4. Colony lighting feeder 200 160 1

5. Yard lighting feeder 160 100 1

6. Fan control of T/F, OLTC motor and oil motor of 220/132 or 220/66 KV T/F

100 63 1

7. Fan control of 132/33, 132/11, 66/33, 66/11 KV T/F & OLTC motor

63 50 1

8. 220 KV Breaker operation (compressor and space heaters etc.) OCB feeder

32 25 1

9. 132/33, 132/11, 66/33, 66/11 KV Breaker and space heater etc. OCB feeder

32 25 1

10. Outdoor street lighting feeder 63 50 1

11. Water pump and sewerage pump. 63 50 1

12. Carrier room 32 25 1

13. Battery charger 32 25 1

14. Control panel indicator 32 25 1

15. Spare feeder 160 100 1

16. Provision for additional switch fuse unit

- 8 -

17. To be mounted at a later stage.

TOTAL 17 Nos.

NOTES: 1. Each circuit as indicated above shall have switch rating, HRC fuse rating and LT feeder

labeling as mentioned against each. It shall include bus bar connections, terminals, cable glands and cable lugs etc.

2. Each Incomer shall be provided with the following equipments:

i) One No. 100mm dial flush mounting moving iron spring controlled (MISC) ammeter of scale of 0-500A with phase selector switch.

ii) One No. 100 mm dial flush mounting MISC voltmeter of range 0-500V with phase

selector switch.

iii) 3 Nos. 500/5A CTs having burden 15 VA and accuracy class 1 and Instrument Security factor.

iv) One No. 3 phase , 4 wire unbalanced load integrating watt hour meter

(operatable on 500/5A CTs).

v) TTB for LT CT meter. 3. Make of each component must be listed in bid. 4. The bus bar shall be designed for 500 A for phase and 250 A for neutral.

- 1 -

SECTION-6 CHAPTER 6

FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

1.0 SCOPE

Portable fire extinguishers of Carbon Dioxide type and Dry chemical Powder type shall be provided in adequate numbers for protection the Control Room Building and all other Buildings in the sub-stations. The protection shall cover all the rooms/areas of the buildings. The quantity and location of the extinguishers shall be as per the requirements of Fire protection Manual (Part-I) issued by Tariff Advisory Committee of India (TAC) and IS:2190.

1.1 Trolley Mounted fire extinguishers of 22.5 kg Carbon Dioxide type and 22.5 kg Dry

Chemical Powder type shall be used for protection of all 220kV, 132/66kV Transformers and reactors in the S/Stn. Two DCP type and two CO2 type extinguishers shall be provided for each transformer/reactor.

2.0 PORTABLE TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: 2.1 This Specification lays down the requirement regarding fire extinguishers of following

types: a) Carbon Dioxide type b) Dry Chemical powder type

2.2 All the portable extinguishers shall be capable of discharging freely and completely in upright position.

2.3 Each extinguisher shall have the instructions for operating the extinguishers on its body itself.

2.4 All extinguishers shall be supplied with initial charge and accessories as required. 2.5 Portable type extinguishers shall be provided with suitable clamps for mounting on

walls or columns. 2.6 All extinguishers shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour

confirming to relevant Indian Standards. 2.7 Capacities of each type shall be as indicated in the schedule of quantities. 2.8 Carbon Dioxide (CO2 type) extinguishers shall conform to IS:2878. 2.9 Dry chemical powder type extinguisher shall conform to IS:2171. 2.10 TESTS AND INSPECTION 2.10.1 All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification

requirements and relevant standards and codes. 2.10.2 A performance demonstration test at site of five (5) percent or one (1) number

whichever is higher, of the extinguishers shall be carried out by the Contractor. All consumable and replaceable items required for this test would be supplied by the Contractor without any extra cost to the Purchaser.

2.10.3 Performance listing of extinguishers shall be in line of applicable Indian Standards. In case, where no Indian Standard is applicable for a particular type of extinguishers, the method of testing shall be mutually discussed and agreed to before placement of order for the extinguishers.

- 2 -

2.11 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

The contractor shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.

2.12 PAINTING

Each fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour conforming to relevant Indian Standards.

3.0 TROLLEY MOUNTED DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE MOBILE FIRE EXTINGUISHER The Specification lays down the requirement regarding wheeled fire extinguisher of dry chemical powder type. Design, Manufacture, Material of construction and performance of mobile type fire extinguisher shall comply with the requirements of latest Indian Standards & shall have BIS approval (ISI marked).

3.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT The capacity of the mobile dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher shall be 22.5 kg which means the total capacity of the container, when powder completely filled to the specified level shall be 22.5 kg. The fire extinguishers shall be used for Class ‘B’, ‘C’, and ‘E’ fires. The extinguishers shall operate in the vertical position, mounted on solid rubber tyre trolley wheels. The effective throw during operation of the extinguishers shall not be less than 10 meter. A carbon dioxide cartridge fitted with valved discharge head, shall provide sufficient carbon dioxide to expel the dry chemical powder.

3.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION The construction of wheeled fire extinguishers shall conform to IS standard and not be limited to the requirements mentioned here. The shape of the body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical. It shall have adequate supporting arrangement. The balance of the fully equipped assembly shall be so arranged that it can be easily towed speedily behind a jeep or a car and also wheeled by a single operator. Two solid rubber tyred trolley wheels shall be fitted to the body of the mobile fire extinguisher. The rubber tyres shall have an effective life, and less than three (3) years. The extinguisher shall be fitted with a discharge hose and nozzle connection. The hose shall be of rubber or composite construction, having a length of 4.5-meter minimum. The bursting pressure of the hose shall be minimum 42 kgf/cm (g).

- 3 -

The design of discharge nozzle shall be such that when the extinguisher is operated in still air the powder will be thrown in the form of a jet having a range of 10m (minimum) for a period of 50-60 seconds. The nozzle shall be fitted with a hand control device. Provision shall be therefore making a pressure test on the body. To minimize corrosion, the various components shall be provided with suitable anti-corrosive as per the requirement of applicable codes. Each mobile extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings and accessories.

3.3 TESTS AND INSPECTION Testing at manufacturer’s works. The manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the equipment furnished will conform to this Specification requirements, relevant Indian Standards and applicable codes. Everybody shall be capable of withstanding an internal hydraulic pressure of 25 kgf/cm (g) without leakage or visible distortion, prior to painting, for a minimum period of 5 minutes. In destruction tests, if called for, ultimate failure shall occur at a test pressure not less than 32 kgf/cm (g) and if it occurs below 35 kgf/cm (g) there shall not be damage in any joint, seam casting of fittings. A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1) number, whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the CONTRACTOR. All consumable and replaceable items required for the test shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR without any extra cost to Purchaser. After conduction tests as in 1.1 and 1.4 the body shall be properly washed and drained off. After 24 hours, the interior shall be examined and it must be free from any stain, rust etc.

3.4 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.

3.5 PAINTING Each mobile fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of red colour conforming to relevant Indian Standard. The mobile foam type fire extinguisher shall be of make approved by Tariff Advisory Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL. Appliances conforming to the relevant BS/NFPA Standards are also acceptable provided the construction generally conform to the IS Standards so that spares refills/cartridges of Indian make conforming to IS Specification can be used after the operation of the extinguisher. Spare charge cartridges equivalent to requirements of 2 Nos. extinguishers shall also be supplied.

- 4 -

4.0 TROLLEY MOUNTED CARBON-DIOXIDE TYPE MOBILE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

1.1 This Specification lays down the requirements regarding wheeled fire extinguisher of

carbon-dioxide. 1.2 Design, manufacture, material of construction and performance of extinguisher as

specified herein after shall comply with the requirements of latest applicable Indian Standards IS-2878 or equivalents and shall have BIS approval (ISI marked).

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT 1.3.1 The capacity of the extinguisher shall be 22.5 kg of carbon-dioxide when filled in the

container to a filling ratio of about 0.66, 7. 1.3.2 The extinguisher shall be designed for use where larger high intensity fire hazards

are involved requiring versatility of action. These shall be used for Class ‘B’ fire, i.e. fire in flammable liquid. Class ‘C’ fire i.e. fire in gaseous substances under pressure and Class ‘E’ fire, i.e. fires in live electrical equipment.

1.3.3 The extinguisher shall be operated in upright position, by releasing a suitable valve. 1.3.4 The range of effective operation of the extinguishers shall be about 4 meters. 1.4 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION

The construction of wheeled fire extinguisher, carbon-dioxide type, shall in general conform to IS:2828 subject to the requirements mentioned hereunder:

1.4.1 The carbon-dioxide gas shall conform to IS:307. 1.4.2 The shape of the body of the extinguisher shall be cylindrical. The body shall be of

steel cylinder. It shall have adequate supporting arrangement so that it can rest on the wheeled body in upright position and the operator be free to direct the stream.

1.4.3 The balance of the full equipped trolley unit shall be so arranged, that despite its considerable weight, it can be easily wheeled by one man. It should be capable of being towed speedily behind a jeep or car.

1.4.4 The cylinder shall be mounted on a trolley fitted with two cushion tyred wheels and fitted with suitable handle. The overall wheel diameter shall be about 280 mm. The frame of the trolley shall be made of welded steel section.

1.4.5 The design shall permit easy maintenance and operation with one man service. 1.4.6 The extinguisher shall be fitted with a high pressure flexible hose of about 9 m length

and internal dia to hoses shall not be more than 12 mm. 1.4.7 A discharge horn made of fibre or any material non-conducting to electricity shall be

fitted with a handle made of thermal insulating material capable of protecting operators hand from freezing effects.

1.4.8 Suitable provision for firmly securing the horn to the body, when it is not in use, shall be provided. The fixing device shall not interfere with the operation or mobility of the extinguisher.

1.4.9 The discharge valve or operating head shall be capable of being operated satisfactorily. It shall be made of material as specified in IS:2878.

1.4.10 There shall be no leakage of CO2 from valve or fitting during the use of extinguisher. Valve shall be provided with suitable safety device to prevent over pressure in cylinder.

1.4.11 A seal or device shall be fitted to indicate that the extinguisher has not been used. 1.4.12 Each extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings and other

accessories as required.

- 5 -

1.5 TEST AND INSPECTION

1.5.1 The extinguisher at ambient temperature shall expel at least 95% of its content as

continuous discharge with in a maximum of 90 seconds and minimum of 30 seconds. 1.5.2 The extinguisher without its attachment shall be shelved for 21 days after filling and

shall be check weighed at the end of the period. There shall be no loss of mass. 1.5.3 Carbon-dioxide cylinder shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 236 kgf/cm

(g) to prove leak tightness for a period of one hour. 1.5.4 Hose assembly with its coupling shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 315

kgf/cm (g) without failure. 4.5.5 All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification

requirements and relevant standards and codes shall be conducted by the manufacturer. Adequate time ahead of these shop tests the Purchaser shall be informed so that if he so desires, his representative may witness the tests.

1.5.5 A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1) number, whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the CONTRACTOR. All consumable and rechargeable items required for the test shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR without any extra cost to Purchaser.

1.6 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.

1.7 PAINTING & MARKING Each extinguisher shall be painted in red and permanently marked in accordance with the requirements laid down in IS-2878. besides permanently making on the front of the extinguisher indicating its purpose, content and usage shall also be provided.

1.7.1 The mobile Carbon-dioxide type fire extinguisher shall be of make approved by Chief Inspector of Explosives, Nagpur, India and Tariff Advisory Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL.

2. VENTILATION SYSTEM

Mechanical ventilation systems using exhaust fans shall be provided for all the rooms which are not considered for air conditioning. Capacity of the fan shall be selected so as to have the minimum air changes in the various rooms as below: Battery room, Pantry, toilets : 15 air

Changes/hr. All other rooms : 12 air Changes/hr.

For Battery room, the fan shall be bifurcated type spare proof construction.

- 1 -

SECTION – 6 CHAPTER – 7

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR UNARMOURED

COPPER CONTROL CABLES

1.0 SCOPE 1.1 This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, stage testing,

inspection testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of unarmoured control cable.

1.2 It is not the intent to specify complete herein all details of the design and construction

of material. However, the material shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the bidders guarantee acceptable to the HVPNL. The material offered shall be complete in all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought in this Specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

2.0 STANDARDS

2.1 Copper control cable to be supplied shall be PVC insulated. PVC sheathed

unarmoured for indoor and outdoor applications in air, in ground, in water and in concrete trenches. The control cable shall conform in all respects to the requirements of IS-1554 (Part-I) 1988 and its subsequent amendments, if any at the time of placement of order. All CT/PT circuits control cables are to be of size 4 mm2 copper cable. The incoming AC and DC supply cable to MKs/C&R Panels/CBs will be of size 4 mm2 and 6mm2 copper and all other control cable will be of size 2.5 mm2 copper cable.

2.2 Control cables meeting with the requirement of other authoritative standard, which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall be considered. When the equipment offered by the bidder adopted and the standards specified in this Specification shall be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic translation in English shall be furnished along with the offer.

2.3 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS(TECHNICAL)

2.3.1 MATERIAL All the material used in the manufacture of the cables shall be of the best available quality with regard to strength, durability and shall also be manufactured according to best engineering practices.

2.3.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

The insulated core shall be provided with inner sheath, unarmoured but provided with an outer sheath as specified in IS-1554 (part-I) 1998 amended up to date. The control cable offered shall be suitable for use in system up to 1100 volts. The conductors shall be composed of plain annealed high conductivity copper which before stranding shall be approximately circular in section, smooth, uniform in quality

- 2 -

and free from scale, in-equalities, spills, splits and other defects. The conductors shall conform to appropriate dimensions and resistance as per IS-1554 (part-I) 1998.

3.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 3.1 INSULATION

The basic material employed as insulating compound shall consist of compounded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or suitable copolymers of which major constituent shall be vinyl chloride or mixture of polyvinyl chloride and suitable copolymers which have been suitably compounded and processed so as to comply with the requirements of IS-1554 (part-I) 1988. The PVC compound going into the formation of insulation shall also comply with the provisions of IS-5831-1970 “PVC insulation and sheath of electric cable”. The insulation shall withstand the rigours of climate and site conditions and shall not crack or retract in normal use. The colour code of the cores of control cable shall be as per clause 10.1 of ISS-1554 (part-I) 1988. However, the outer PVC sheath shall be black or grey. The colour coding as employed in the formation of the cable for individual cores and sheath shall be indicated in the bid. The PVC/Co-polymer compounds going into the formation of the outer sheathing shall afford a high degree of mechanical protection besides being oil and weather resistant.

3.2 MARKING Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with inedible ink or with suitable weather

resistant paint and shall bear the following particulars: - i) Manufacturer name and trade mark, if any. ii) HVPNL Order No. and Date. ii) Year of manufacture. iii) Nominal sectional area of conductor of the cable. iv) No. of cores. v) Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable. vi) Length of cable on the drum. vii) Weight of tare. viii) Direction of rolling the drum. ix) Gross weight of the drum.

4.0 TEST

4.1 TYPE TESTS

The copper control cables offered should be type tested. Type test report of similar cables should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening in respect of the following tests, as per relevant ISS-1554/Part-I-1988 and carried out in accordance with the procedure laid down in relevant ISS/IEC/Internationally recognized equivalent standard from any accredited test house/ Lab. For Indian manufacturers, the tests got conducted from Govt. test labs shall also be acceptable. These type test reports shall be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for the approval as per schedule given in commercial document. i) Test on conductors a) Annealing Test b) Conductor Resistance Test ii) Physical test for insulation and outer sheath. a) Tensile strength and elongation at break. b) Ageing in air oven.

- 3 -

c) Shrinkage test. d) Hot deformation test. e) Loss of mass in air oven. f) Heat shock test. g) Thermal stability. iii) Test for Thickness of Insulation and Sheath. iv) Insulation resistance test. v) High voltage test (Water immersion test). vi) High voltage test at room temperature. vii) Flammability test.

4.2 ROUTINE TESTS : As per quality assurance program (QAP). 4.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS-1554 (Part-I) shall be carried out by the Bidder in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL. i) Annealing Test (for copper) ii) Conductor Resistance test. iii) Test for Thickness of Insulation and Sheath. iv) Tensile strength and elongation at break of insulation and sheath. v) Insulation resistance test. vi) High Voltage test at room temperature.

- 1 -

SECTION-6 CHAPTER-8

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 KV SHUNT CAPACITORS

1. SCOPE

The specification covers the design. Manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works before despatch, supply and delivery F.O.R. Destination of the following equipment: - i) Capacitor banks complete with capacitor units provided with external fuses and

internal discharge resistors, mounting racks arrangement, bus bar and connecting material, Post insulators and other accessories etc.

ii) Residual voltage transformer. iii) 11 KV, 400 Amps. Line cum earth switch. iv) Pedestal /structure of above equipment. v) Terminal connectors for above equipment.

2. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM

The capacitor banks & RVT are required for use on 11 KV, 3 Phase, 3 wire , AC 50 Hz ± 2.5 Hz solidly earthed system. Normally where 11 KV winding of power transformers are star connected, the neutral shall be solidly grounded. The maximum short circuit level at the S/Stn is 18.4 KA, auxiliary supply available will be single phase 230 + 10%, 415 Volt + 10%, 3 phase AC & 220 Volt ± 10% DC.

3. STANDARDS

The capacitor units/banks shall conform to IS:13925/Part-I/1998 (with latest edition) RVT to ISS-3156 & L&E Switch to ISS-9921 or their respective IEC’s. All other equipment shall also comply generally with requirement of the latest editions of the relevant Indian Standards. Deviations from these standard Specifications, if any, should be clearly brought out in the tender and furnished.

4. SERVICE CONDITIONS: As per section-1 Vol-II.

5. TROPICAL TREATMENT AND PAINT

All corrodible parts & surfaces shall be of such material and shall be provided with such paints or to other protective finish that no part of the installed equipment shall be injuriously affected by the atmospheric moisture and heat.

6. INSTRUCTION PLATE AND MARKING All name plates, instruction plates, warning signs and any other marking what-so-ever in the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be English/Hindi using idioms, words and meanings in current use in India. In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site, every part of the plant and equipment, shall be suitably marked, these marking shall correspond to similar marks on the assembly drawings.

- 2 -

7. EARTHING

All metallic parts not meant to be connected to live circuits shall be earthed. All earthing connections shall be of the bolt and clamp type secured with lock nuts.

8. RATING OF EQUIPMENT The rating of equipment and other particulars such as nominal system voltage, one minute power frequency withstand voltage, standard impulse withstand voltage and rating of banks/unit in KVAR, is as under: i) Nominal system voltage 11kV ii) a) Rated voltage of Capacitor Bank.

b) Rated output of Capacitor Bank at rated voltage.

12.65kV 9000 KVAR

iii) Connection of Capacitor Bank Single Star iv) Rating of capacitor unit with external fuses. 7.3 kV

200 KVAR v) No. of units per bank with external fuses 45 Nos. vi) Capacitor KVAR available at Nominal system voltage

(without series reactor) 6804 KVAR

vii) Insulation level. a) Impulse withstand voltage b) Power frequency withstand voltage.

75 kV (Peak) 28 kV (rms)

8.1 Series reactor for 31.5 MVA, 66/11 KV Transformers (Capacitor Bank 2x6.804 MVAR) 8.2 SERIES REACTORS

Sr. No.

Item Specification

a. Rated voltage (KV) 11 b. Type Air Core c. Rating of series reactors 0.2% of capacitor bank rating to

be connected on neutral end d. Insulation levels Impulse withstand

voltage KV(p) /power frequency with stand voltage KV(rms)

75 28

e. Short-time withstand capacity and duration

16 times of 130% rated current of capacitor bank for 3 seconds.

f. Linear characteristic Upto 1.5 pu. g. Continuous rating 130% of rated current of

capacitor bank. 9. (i) Type of capacitors

The capacitors shall be of unit type suitable for outdoor installations having high dielectric strength special attention shall be paid in design of the capacitors to avoid any stresses due to expansion or contraction caused by the large variation of ambient temperature at site which may range from –2.50C to 500C. Scope of supply of capacitor banks shall include capacitor units/Residual voltage Transformer, 11kv Isolator with earth switch and all necessary supporting framework pedestals, bus bar connections, fuses connecting clamps. Terminal connector & accessories etc, required to complete/commission the bank. Each capacitor unit shall be self contained out-door type, with a rating as specified in clause 8 above. The capacitors shall be rated tom operate at 500C upper limit of temperature category as per table 1 under clause 4.1 of IS-13925/Part-I/1998 or any other standard applicable. The capacitor shall be designed to withstand a continuous 10% over voltage and each unit shall satisfactorily operate at

- 3 -

130% of rated KVAR including factor of over-voltage, harmonic current and manufacturing tolerance. The bidders will furnish calculations to satisfy the above aspect. ii) Type of Dielectric/paper used The bidder shall only quote for non-PCB type impregnent a sper international norm.

10. PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT OF BANK Each bank shall be connected in single star, neutral connected through a Residual voltage transformer. The no. of parallel units in each series group should be large enough so that failure of any one unit will not create an over-voltage of more than 10% on the remaining units in parallel with it. Detailed calculations regarding the voltage impressed upon the remaining parallel unit when one or more units get out of order in series group shall be attached with the bid. The bidder shall provide fully dimensioned general layout showing arrangement of capacitor units, spacing, stacks and steps, with his bid. The dimension of each unit shall also be shown. The bidder shall state total number of capacitor unit per bank. Number of series groups per phase, & number of units in a parallel group shall be included in the said general layout.

11. MOUNTING RACK ASSY. AND MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR CAPACITOR BANK The mounting racks and pedestals shall be of galvanised steel members with all galvanising carried out after completion of cutting, drilling and punching. Mounting racks shall be complete with rack insulators, Hardware etc. for assembly into complete banks. The height of mounting structure for Capacitor Banks shall be such that the min. clearance from live part to ground will be about 2.5 Meters.

12. BUS BAR MATERIAL Suitable bus bar arrangement shall be proposed by the bidder and requisite quantity of bus bar material shall be provided for the bank. The normal current rating and the short time current rating of the bus may be specified. All the interconnecting material necessary for interconnecting the units series parallel combination shall be supplied. A warning instruction as “DISCHARGE CAPACITORS BEFORE HANDLING “ shall be prominently marked in red.

13. FUSES:

Each capacitor unit shall be individually protected by explosion type fuse of suitable rating and interrupting capacity so that a faulty capacitor unit shall be disconnected by fuse. The fuse shall be satisfactory for operation under the ambient condition. The fuse shall have sufficient strength to withstand the mechanical stresses associated with their location. The following requirement for external type fuse shall be considered while selecting the right size of fuse: a) Ability to withstand the max. discharge current from a healthy capacitor. b) The fuse shall be capable of handling fault so as to avoid mechanical damage to

adjacent unit.

- 4 -

c) Discrimination between fuse protecting the faulty capacitor unit and those protecting healthy capacitor units.

d) The operated fuse shall have visual indication so that it can be detected during periodic inspection.

14. BUSHING:

Bushings shall be of porcelain and shall be jointed to the case by solder sealing or other method which ensure an adequate permanent seal. Leads shall be brought out through one piece porcelain bushing solder sealed to the case cover. Before final sealing the entire assembly shall be vacuum impregnated with dielectric suitable for operation application from –2.50 C to 500 C ambient temperature.

15. CONTAINER : The container shall be made from sheet steel of thickness not less than 2mm (14 SWG). The out-side of the capacitor containers and other structures should have smooth and tidy look and should be coated with weather proof, corrosion-resistant paint of grey shade. The sheet container shall be suitably insulated from capacitor elements. Sufficient wall insulation shall be provided.

16. LOSSES: The capacitor shall be of low loss type. The losses in watts for each capacitor unit including losses in fuses and discharge resistors forming integral part of the capacitors along with losses for series reactor shall be guaranteed. If the test figures of capacitor losses exceed 0.18W/KVAR, the capacitors will be liable for rejection.

17. DISCHARGE DEVICE: Each capacitor unit shall be complete with suitable built in discharge resistors of adequate thermal rating suitable for discharging the residual voltage to 50 Volts or less, within 5 minutes (preferably less than 5 minutes) after disconnection from the supply. The recommendations of the bidder shall however, be fully detailed out in the bid.

18. TERMINAL CONNECTORS The terminal connectors suitable for horizontal and vertical mounting and cable glands shall be included in the scope of supply, wherever required.

19. RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

The residual voltage transformer for the neutral voltage displacement relay shall be out-door type naturally cooled, with a ratio of (11000/√3)/(110/√3) 190 Volt with VA burden of 100 and accuracy class 3 as per IS:3156. it shall have primary connected in star and secondary in open delta to energise neutral voltage displacement relay and to discharge capacitor bank to voltage not exceeding 50 Volt in less than 5 minutes. All the type tests report(not more than seven years old) are required to be submitted along with the bid in case already conducted. Otherwise all the type tests will have to be carried out free of cost in the presence of HVPNL’s representative at the time of inspection.

20. 11kV 630 AMPS. LINE-CUM EARTH SWITCH The Isolator with earth switch shall be manually operated. Isolator should be provided with ON and OFF indicators, arrangement for mechanical interlock and padlocking. Isolator should be provided with auxiliary switches for their remote position indication on the control panel. The Isolator will be strictly as per IS-9921. The supporting structures are also required to be supplied for Isolator, the rate may be quoted separately. All the type tests report (not more than seven years old) are required to be submitted along with bid in case already conducted. Otherwise all the type tests will have to be carried out free of cost in the presence of HVPNL’s representative at the time of inspection.

- 5 -

20.a FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

Any fitting or accessories which might have not been mentioned in the Specification but which are usual or necessary for optimal performance of the equipment are to be provided by the Contractor without extra cost. All equipment must be complete in all respect, whether mentioned in the Specification or not.

21. GUARANTEED DATA AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS Guaranteed and other Technical particulars of capacitor bank, Capacitor Unit fuses, 11kV L&E switch & residual voltage transformer should be given in the form of Guaranteed Technical Particulars (Vol-III). Any other particular considered by the contractor may also be given in addition to those listed in the Appendices.

22. TESTS AND INSPECTION No material shall be dsepatched without inspection and testing. The inspection may be carried out by the employer at any stage of manufacture. The bidder shall grant free access to the employer’s representative at all (reasonable times during the manufacture of equipments) covered by the Specification. Inspection and acceptance of any equipment under this Specification by the employer, shall not relieve the contractor of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the Specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if the equipment is found to be defective. The contractor shall keep the employer informed in advance, about the manufacturing programme. The contractor shall furnish to the employer works’ certificates at the time of giving an inspection call for inspection.

22.1 TYPE TESTS The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven

years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart. i) Thermal Stability test. ii) Partial discharge test. iii) Self-healing test. iv) Impulse voltage test between terminals and container. v) Capacitor discharge test. vi) Endurance test. The remaining type test report as per ISS-13925/IEC-871 shall be submitted by the successful bidder within three months from the date of placement of order. These type test reports shall be from Govt./Govt. approved test house OR from reputed Lab Abroad and shall not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of placement of order. The failure to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.

22.2 ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS All routine and acceptance tests as specified in relevant ISS/IEC of respective equipment shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of employer’s representative without any additional payment.

- 6 -

22.3 ENDURANCE TESTING OF CAPACITOR UNIT The endurance test as per the procedure given in IEC-871-2 shall be got conducted at CPRI Bangalore test laboratory to ensure that the capacitor will withstand the service conditions with a high degree of reliability. Test charges if any be quoted in the bid. In case this test has already been got conducted on similar rating of units from Govt./Govt. approved testing house OR from reputed Lab Abroad, copies of test report shall be submitted by bidder along with their bid. The employer reserves the right to carry out this test at Govt. test agency on one or more units, if felt necessary.

23. DRAWINGS The bidder shall furnish one set of following drgs. along with their bid to check the stability of their equipment: - 1. Out line general arrangement drg. of capacitor bank with detailed dimension of

Capacitor Bank/Unit and structure with complete bill of material. 1. Electrical Layout drg. of Capacitor Bank showing spacing of each equipment. 2. Outline arrangement drawing of Capacitor Unit with detail dimensions. 3. Outline general arrangement drawing of 11kV RVT and of 11kV L&E Switch. 4. Terminal connector drawings for Capacitor Bank, RVT & L&E Switch. The successful bidder shall, within four weeks of placement of order, submit five sets of final versions of all the above said drawings for employer’s approval. The employer shall communicate his comments/approval on drawings to the contractor within a period of 4 weeks. The contractor shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and re-submit five copies of the modified drawings for employer’s approval, within one week from the date of employer’s comments. After receipt of employer’s approval the contractor shall, within two weeks submit 20 prints along with reproducible of the approved drawings and descriptive literatures on capacitor & all allied equipments covered by the Specification for employer’s use. 23.1 The manufacturing of the equipments shall be strictly in accordance with the

approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without written approval of the employer.

23.2 Approval of drawings by employer shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirement of the latest version of applicable standard of engineering, design and workmanship and latest revision of relevant standards at the time of supply an employer shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgment is not in accordance there-with.

24. DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION

Should the bidder wish to depart from the provisions of the Specification either on account of manufacturing practice or any other reasons, he should draw attention to the proposed points of departure in hisbid and submit such full information, drawing and Specification so that the merits of his proposal may be fully understood. The Specification shall be held binding unless the departure have been fully recorded as required above.

25. PERFORMANCE The bidder shall submit details of similar static shunt capacitor banks and associated equipment supplied by them which are in operation for the last three years along with certificate from their customers in support of the satisfactory manufacture and operation of the static shunt capacitor bank and associated equipment.

- 1 -

SECTION-6 CHAPTER – 9

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT TWO CORE, 3½ CORE AND FOUR CORE PVC INSULATED UNARMOURED CABLE OFF SIZES FOR WORKING VOLTAGE UPTO &

INCLUDING 1100 V, FOR SERVICE CONNECTIONS. 1. SCOPE:- This specification provides for design, manufacture, inspection at

manufacturer’s works, testing before dispatch, supply and delivery of unarmoured 2 core, 3½ core and 4 core PVC sheathed Aluminium conductor cables for voltage upto 1.1 kV.

2. STANDARD:- LT distribution unarmoured cables shall be suitable for service voltage of

1100 volts (640 volts to earth) and made from high conductivity Aluminium conductor insulated with PVC compound and having inner and outer sheathing of PVC compound. The cables shall be strictly in conformity with ISS-1554/Part-I/1988 with latest amendments/ edition if any and shall be ISI/ IEC marked. The inner and outer sheathing shall be carried out as per relevant ISS. However, material manufactured as per any other International Standard which offers equivalent or materials better in quality and workmanship as compared to mentioned standards shall also be acceptable. Aluminium conductor complying with IS:8130-1984 shall be used.

3. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:- The cable shall work satisfactorily under the following

climatic conditions:-

i) Maximum ambient temperature 50oC ii) Minimum ambient temperature -2.5oC iii) Maximum relative humidity 100% iv) Minimum relative humidity 26% v) Altitude Below 1000 meters above mean

sea level. vi) Average no. of Rainy days per annum. 120 vii) Average annual Rain fall. 900 mm viii) Maximum wind pressure 195 Kg/ meter2

4 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:- The cable shall be suitable for use on 50 Hz three phase

AC solidly earthed Neutral power system working voltage of 3 x 240/ 415 Volt. 4.1 Sheathing:-

a) 4 Core Cables:- The Contractor has the option to provide inner and outer sheathing of PVC compound by single or separate pressure extrusion process as per relevant ISS.

b) 3 ½ Core Cables. c) 2 core cable.

- 2 -

i) Inner and outer sheathing shall be provided by separate operation process only. ii) Where inner and outer sheathing are to be provided with PVC compound (by

separate operation) the sheathing are to be provided by pressure extrusion process.

iii) Where inner sheathing is to be provided with thermo plastic material or proofed tape which shall not be harder than PVC used for insulating and outer sheathing shall be provided with pressure extrusion process.

Note:- Cable with sheathing by sleeves extrusion shall not be accepted.

5. SIZES:- The normal sizes of the cables shall be as per schedule of requirements as per

requirement. 6. TESTS:- 6.1 TYPE TESTS:-

The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart. i) Tensile Test ii) Wrapping Test iv) Annealing Test v) Resistance Test

6.2 ROUTINE TEST As per quality assurance program (QAP) 6.3 ACCEPTANCE TEST:- The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS-

8130:1984 shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

a) Tensile test. b) Wrapping test. c) Resistance test. d) Annealing test.

7. MANUFACTURER IDENTIFICATION:- HVPNL alongwith brand name, manufacturer

name, voltage rating, size and year of manufacture in English shall be embossed on the outer sheath of the cable at regular intervals of approximately 1 to 1.5 metre.

8. INSPECTION AND TEST:- An authorised representative of the HVPNL shall inspect,

examine and test the equipment/ material in respect of quality, size and ratings as per ISS/ IEC mentioned above at the manufacturer’s works during or after the manufacture of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of minimum two weeks in advance to be reckoned from the date of receipt of the same by the HVPNL. No material will be allowed to be dispatched without prior inspection and approval. The inspecting officer of the HVPNL may also inspect the material during the course of manufacture. In case, inspection of any consignment is waived off by the HVPNL, the Contractor will be

- 3 -

required to furnish the requisite test certificates (for acceptance as well as routine tests) for approval. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to make adequate arrangements for testing of material at their works without any additional charge to the HVPNL. All testing instruments and appliances will be made available and material destroyed/ consumed during testing will be to the account of the Contractor.

8.1 SAMPLING OF CABLES:-

a) Scale of sampling:- Samples shall be taken and tested from each lot for ascertaining the conformity of the lot to the required specifications.

b) The number of samples to be selected as per table given below at random (the

randomness of selection, random number tables shall be used as per IS:4905-1968. No. of drums to be taken permissible number of as sample (a).

S.No. of drums/ No. of coils/ reels in lot.

No. of drums to be taken as sample.

Permissible number of refectives.

(n) (n) (n) Upto 50 3 0 51 to 100 5 0 101 to 300 13 0 301 to 500 20 1 501 to above 31 2

The inspector shall have the option to take the sample (s) from any point in the length of any drums selected at random for carrying out various tests and total length of that particular drum(s) of such two pieces because of this sampling in such a particular case will be considered as one length.

9. PACKING:- The cable shall be packed and supplied in non-returnable wooden drums

provided with cast iron bushings to resist any damage during transit. Material offered for inspection should be duly packed provided with blank lead seals for the purpose of sealing by the Inspecting Officer. The Contractor will put their own seals also on the two ends of the cables.

10. DRUM LENGTH:- The cable shall be supplied in standard lengths as under:-

Cable upto 185 sq.mm. = 500 Metres + 5% Cable above 185 sq.mm. = 250 Metres + 5%

Non standards lengths not less than 100 metres each shall be acceptable upto 5% of the ordered quantity. A tolerance of + 5% is permissible allotted to each consignee with overall + 2% tolerance on the ordered quantity for completion of order.

11. MARKING:- The marking on the drums shall have the following informations:-

a) Trade mark, if any. b) Name of the manufacturer. c) Nominal cross sectional area of conductor of the cable. d) Year of manufacture. e) Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable. f) Length of cable on the drum/ reel. g) Approximate gross weight.

- 4 -

h) Number of cores and colour of cores. i) Net weight of the cable. j) Drum/ reel identification no. k) Purchase Order No. and Date. l) Consignee’s name with designation. m) ISI mark/ IEC mark. n) Direction of rotation of drum/ reel (by means of an arrow). o) Reference IS:1554/Part-I/1988.

- 1 -

SECTION-6 CHAPTER-10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR OUTDOOR NON SEALED TYPE THREE PHASE 11 KV/433V DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS OF 200 KVA CAPACITIES 1.0 SCOPE:

This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, shop testing, supply & delivery of oil immersed, naturally cooled, three-phase, 50 Hz, double-would, outdoor type Distribution transformers of 200KVA, capacity for use on systems with nominal voltages of 11 KV. Any other parts not specifically mentioned in this specification, but otherwise required for proper functioning of the equipment should be included by the tenderer in his offer. Transformers will be plinth mounted

2.0 STANDARDS:

The transformers shall conform in all respect to IS: 1180-1981 & IS: 2026-1977 except where specified otherwise. Equipment meeting any other authoritative Standards which ensures an equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above will also be acceptable. In such cases the copy of standards (English Version) adopted should be enclosed with the tender.

3.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: As per Vol-II Section-1.

4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS OF THE TRANSFORMER

The transformer shall be suitable for outdoor service as step down transformer. The electrical parameters of the transformer shall be as follows:- 1) Rated HV voltage 11 KV

2) Rated LV voltage 433 volts 3) Connection (HV) Delta 4) Connection (LV) Star neutral brought out 5) Vector Group Dyn11 6) Material of winding For 200 KVA Aluminium,

double wound type

7) Type of cooling ONAN 8) Max. current density in HV & LV Winding a) For aluminium wound 200 KVA T/F 1.5A/mm2 9) Method of system earthing Neutral solidly earthed system 5.0 NO-LOAD VOLTAGE RATIO

The no-load voltage ratio shall be 11000/433V. 6.0 TEMPERATURE RISE

- 2 -

The transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its normal rating without exceeding the temperature rise limit. The temperature rise shall not exceed the limits of 500C (measured by resistance) for transformer windings and 400C (measured by thermometer) in top oil above the ambient temperature when tested in accordance with IS. The transformer with higher temperature rise shall not be acceptable. Hot spot temperature shall not exceed 950C when calculated on an annual weighted average temperature of 350C as per IS:2026.

6.1 The limits of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by the manufacturer by carrying the Heat run test at the lowest negative tap by feeding losses corresponding to the rated current of the tap.

7.0 LOSSES

The no load and load losses for 11/0.433 KV shall not exceed the values given in the following table. KVA Rating No load losses in Watts (Max.) Full load losses in Watts

(Max) At 75Deg.C. 200

400

3135

These losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any positive tolerance However, the manufacturer can offer losses less than above.

The contractor shall quote No-Load loss in KW at the rated voltage and frequency. The load loss in KW at rated voltage, frequency & out put, for the temperature 75 degree centigrade shall also be quoted. The contractor shall guarantee these loss figures.

7.1 Noise level : 80 dB

Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than the values required by the owner.

8.0 IMPEDANCE:

The recommended percentage impedance at 750C is 4.5% for 200KVA T/F with a tolerance as per IS:2026.

9.0 WINDING 9.1 The primary (HV) windings shall be connected in Delta and the secondary (LV) winding in Star

(Vector system DYn11) so as to produce a positive displacement of 30 degree from the primary to secondary vectors of the same phase. The neutral of secondary windings shall be brought out to a separate insulated neutral terminal. The neutral is to be solidly earthed in a separate earth pit and the transformer body is to be connected to station grounding system.

HV windings shall consist of single coil design. The copper wires for coil formation shall be of sufficient cross-sectional area to impart desired mechanical strength. All delta leads from HT coils as well as HT line leads should be taken out through DPC. The current density in these leads should not exceed 0.8A/sq.mm.

9.2 The winding shall be so designed as to produce minimum out of balance forces in the transformers. Transformers of 200 KVA shall be aluminium wound and sizes above 200 KVA shall be copper wound. The current density for aluminium wound transformer shall be limited to 1.5A/mm sq. and for copper wound transformer shall be limited to 2.6A/mm.sq.

9.3 The winding design shall ensure that all the coil assemblies are of identical voltage ratio and

shall be interchangeable and repairing of the winding could be made easily without special equipment.

- 3 -

9.4 The conductor used in the coil shall be best suitable to the equipment and all the permanent current carrying joints in the winding and leads shall be properly sleeved and crimped/brazed instead of jointing with solder or welding. All LV coils ends shall be provided with brazed/crimped lugs and HV coil ends by brazing/crimping.

9.5 Double paper covering shall be used for winding insulation both for HV & LV windings.

Electrical grade epoxy coated insulated paper shall be used for inter-layer insulation of the HV & LV coils, corrugated cylinder made of pre-compressed board shall be provided between HV & LV winding. Angle shaped and rings made from pre-compressed board shall be used between end coil and the core.

OR

For 200 KVA transformers DPC insulation shall be used, Electrical Grade Insulation Kraft paper in layers of total thickness not less than 4 mm shall be used for interlayer insulation, DPC and Kraft paper used shall be of uniform density and free from any foreign particles and shall conform to IS:698/56 and latest amendments thereof. The end turn of each layer shall be properly and fully covered to avoid interlayer flashover. Corrugated Cylinder made from pre-compressed insulation board should preferably be used between LV and HV windings. The insulation of coils shall be vacuum impregnated in oil to develop full electrical strength in the windings. All material used in the insulation and assembly of the winding shall be insoluble non catalytic and chemically inactive in the hot transformer oil and shall not soften or otherwise be adversely effected under operating conditions.

The core and coil assembly shall be fully dried out in ‘Air Drying Oven’ till the coils are shrunken to the designed level and are completely dried. Only then they will be impregnated in the transformer oil.

9.6 Minimum gap of 25 mm shall be maintained between the end coils and core.

9.7 The overloading capacity of transformer shall be as per IS-6600.

9.8 The value of unbalance current shall not be more than 2% of the full load current. 10.0 CORE CONSTRUCTION 10.1 The core shall be constructed from high grade, non-aging Cold Rolled Grain Oriented (CRGO)

silicon steel laminations conforming to grade M4 or better. The maximum flux density in any part of the cores and yoke at normal voltage and frequency shall be such that the flux density with + 12.5% voltage variation from rated voltage or frequency variation of -5% shall not exceed 1.6 Tesla. The bidder shall provide saturation curve of the core material proposed to be used.

10.2 The design of magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge development of short circuit within itself or in the earthed clamping structure.

10.3 Each lamination shall be insulated such that it will not deteriorate due to mechanical pressure

and the action of hot transformer oil.

10.4 a) Core material shall be directly procured either from the manufacturer or through their accredited marketing organization of repute and not through any agent.

10.4 b) All parts of the core shall be of robust design, capable of withstanding any shock to

which they may be subjected during handling, lifting, transportation, installation and service including short circuit condition. Clamping of core and winding assembly with tank should be done by angle iron pieces, bolted to tank wall.

- 4 -

10.4 c) Adequate arrangement shall be provided to enable the core and winding be lifted by lifting lugs.

Use of seconds CRGO steel for core construction is strictly prohibited.

Bidder can –offer transformer made of other superior (Low, Loss) for material and they should furnish design details in their bid. Successful bidders should submit require type test certificates after issue of P.O. but before material offered for inspection.

“The core material should be imported directly from the reputed manufacturer. Core material shall be processed by slitting only. Core cutting/slitting be done in front of inspecting officers deputed by HVPN.”

11.0 TANK CONSTRUCTION 11.1 The tank shall be of robust construction in accordance with the best engineering

practice. The main tank of the transformer shall be fabricated from tested quality of mild steel of adequate thickness i.e. minimum 4.00 mm. (for side walls) and 6.00mm (for top & bottom plates). The tank shall be valid (V shape welding fillet) inside of tank two outside welding of tank to bear more pressure to avoid bursting.

11.2 To provide rigidity and to meet the pressure inside the tank, due to short circuit current,

the tank shall be suitably stiffened. The stiffeners wherever applicable are provided on all the four side walls of the tank, designed not to retain water.

11.3 The tank cover shall be slightly sloping towards HV bushing and shall provide facilities

for draining of water. 11.4 The transformer tank shall be complete with al accessories, lifting lugs and shall be

designed as to allow the complete transformer tank, filled with oil to be lifted by crane or other means without risk of any damage and transported by Rail/Road without straining any joint and without causing leakage of oil.

11.5 Bolted inspection covers shall be provide on tank and top cover to inspect core,

winding and have access to the bottom of bushing. 11.6 The tank shall be capable of with standing the pressure of +/- 1 kg/cm2 without

deformation. The permanent deflection of plate after pressure has been released shall not exceed

the values given below: LENGTH OF PLATE DEFLECTION 750 mm 5 mm 751-1250 mm 6 mm

12.0 FINISH

The exterior of the transformer tank and other ferrous fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned, scraped and given a priming coat and two finishing coats of durable oil and weather resisting paints or enamel. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiralty grey conforming to No. 632 of IS:5-1961 “Colours for Ready Mixed Paints (second revision)”.

- 5 -

13.0 CLEARANCES

The external electrical clearance between phase to phase and phase to earth shall be in accordance with Clause 7.1 of IS: 2099 shall not be less than the values given below:- Voltage Medium Clearance Phase to

Phase (mm) Clearance Phase to earth (mm)

11 KV

Air 255 205

433V Air 75 55

The aforesaid clearances are minimum and no negative tolerance on these clearances shall be allowed.

14.0 BUSHINGS 14.1 Terminal arrangement: The transformer shall be fitted with three high voltages and

four low voltage outdoor types porcelain bushing of appropriate voltage and current rating. Each terminal including the neutral shall be distinctly marked and coloured for phase voltage on both HV and LV sides. The system of marking shall be in accordance with the latest amendment of relevant IS.

14.2 The electrical characteristics of high voltage bushing shall conform to latest version of IS: 2099 and IS: 3347. The low voltage bushing shall conform to latest version of IS: 7421. All porcelain bushing shall be homogeneous, free from flaws effecting its mechanical strength or dielectric quality. They should be well vitrified, uniformly glazed, tough and impervious to moisture. The creepage distance of all the bushing shall be 25mm per KV of highest system voltage suitable for heavily polluted atmosphere and the protected creepage distance not less than 50% of total.

14.3 Bushing terminals: To avoid bimetallic action at the point of connection to the copper

windings and to the external aluminium cables/conductors, both- HV & LV bushing stems shall be made of aluminium alloy/copper confirming to the requirement of IS:3347.

14.4 The terminal connectors shall receive ACSR on HT side. The terminals shall be directly screwed on to the stem to secure effective sealing the bushing. The transformers shall be provided with bimetallic connectors bushings both on HV & LV Side.

15.0 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 15.1 The transformer shall be fitted with the following fittings & accessories. (a) Two earthing terminals (b) Oil level indicator (c) Lifting lugs and platform lugs (d) Rating, diagram and terminal marking plate(s)

(e) Silica gel breather of approved design containing min. 0.25kg dehydrated silica get

(f) Drain-cum-Sampling valve (steel) welded to the tank.

(g) Thermometer pocket with dial type thermometer on tank cover.

(h) Air Release Plug

(i) Pressure relief device in the form of explosion release vent.

- 6 -

(j) Filling hole having P1-1/4 thread (with cover) on the conservator.

(k) Filter valve-2 nos. on top and bottom ends of tank at opposite sides.

(l) Conservator with filling hole and drain plug.

(m) Porcelain bushings with arcing horns and terminal connectors on HV side.

(n) Porcelain bushings on LV side and HV side conforming to IS-3347, part-1 and III of the

latest version thereof with brass studs fitted with single gap arcing horns.

(o) Off load tap changer (for above 200 KVA transformers with tapping range of +3% to -6% in steps of 3% each with a locking device.

(p) Bimetallic terminal connector for HV/LV Bushings connecting to ACSR.

(q) PSR Radiators duly tested for leakage and pressure.

(r) Plain rollers ( 4 nos. bi-directional) suitable for use on 1000 mm gauge track with

clamping device or base mounting arrangement as required.

Note: (i) The fittings listed above are indicative and any other fittings which are generally required for satisfactory operation of the transformer are deemed to be included in the quoted price of the transformer.

16.0 CONSERVATOR

16.1 A conservator shall be provided with each transformer. The oil level gauge and the plain silica gel breathing device shall be fixed to the conservator which shall also be provided with a drain plug and a filling hole with a cover .In addition, the cover of the main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable trapped air to be released unless the conservator is so located as to eliminate the possibility of air being trapped in the main tank.

16.2 The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank shall be

within 20 to 50 mm and it should project into the conservator in such a way that its end is approximately 20 mm above the bottom of the conservator, so as to create a sump for collection of impurities. The minimum oil level (corresponding to -50C) should be above the sump level. Breather pipe should be connected at top of the conservator tank with two bends at right angles.

17.0 SEALING GASKETS

All sealing washers and gaskets shall be made of oil and heat resistant Nitrile/Neoprene rubber/synthetic rubber bonded cork type RC-70C Gaskets. The oil level in the transformer shall be made up to the required level while the transformer filled with oil is maintained at a temperature of 450C. All steel screws, nuts and fasteners exposed to atmosphere shall be either galvanized or cadmium plated.

18.0 TRANSFORMER OIL

The transformer shall be supplied complete with first filling of oil. The insulating oil shall comply with the requirements of IS:335/1983 with latest version thereof. Oil shall be filled under vacuum with a vacuum type filtering machine.

19.0 BASE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT

The under base of all transformers shall be provided to make them suitable for fixing mounting on plinth.

- 7 -

20.0 RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES(S)

Each transformer shall be provided with non-detachable rating diagram and terminal marking plate(s) of weather proof material, fitted in a visible position and showing the complete information as given under clause 16 of IS:1980 (Part-I)-1981or any authoritative standards for transformers including the following details:- i) Employer order no. & Date ii) Date of inspection iii) Property of HVPN.

21.0 RADIATORS

These shall be made of ERW tubes with minimum side thickness of 18 SWG. These tubes should be used in vertic formation without any bending and properly welded on both ends to common headers. These radiators should be individually test for leakage and pressure tests etc. before welding with the main tank.

22.0 TESTS AND INSPECTION

All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with clause 16 of IS (Part-I) 1977 22.1 ROUTINE TESTS:

All transformers shall be subjected to the following routine tests at the manufacturer’s works in accordance with IS 2026 and 1180 (Part-I): -

a) Measurement of winding resistance. b) Ratio, Polarity and phase relationship. c) Measurement of Impedance voltage/short circuit impedance. d) Load losses. e) No load losses and no load current. f) Insulation resistance. g) Induced over voltage withstand. h) Separate source voltage withstand. i) Oil leakage test. j) Magnetic balance test and magnetizing current and low voltage.

22.2 TYPE TESTS

The following type tests shall be made on the transformers in addition to the routine tests from (a) to (f) as indicated in 22.1 above: -

i) Temperature rise test shall be carried out on one unit from each lot as

offered for inspection.

ii) Air pressure tests: The tank shall be fixed with a dummy cover with all fittings including bushings in position and shall be subjected to the following pressure created inside the tank:

a) 0.8 kg/cm2 above the atmospheric pressure for 10 minutes.

b) A vacuum corresponding to (-) 0.7 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes. Permanent deflection of flat

plate after pressure has been released, shall not exceed the value given below: - LENGTH OF PLATE DEFLECTION Upto 750 mm 5 mm 751-1250 mm 6 mm

i) Impulse voltage withstand test on all the three limbs of HT side as per clause 13 of ISS

2026/1991/Part-II conducted at some recognized/Govt. Test house not more than 7

- 8 -

years old from the date of bid opening shall required to be submitted. The dispatches shall only be allowed after successful conductance of this test.

ii) SHORT CIRCUIT TEST: This test shall be made in accordance with the details specified in IS 2026/1977 conducted at some recognized/Govt. Test house OR from reputed Lab Abroad not more than 7 years old from the date of bid opening shall required to be submitted. The dispatches shall only be allowed after successful conductance of this test. If short circuit tests on unit of similar design of transformer with capacity as per schedule had been conducted earlier than certificate shall be produced along with tender and the test need not be conducted.

iii) Unbalance Current Test: The value of unbalanced current indicated by the ammeter shall not be more than 2% of the full load current.

No supplies will be allowed to be despatched without inspection by the employer/its

representative and without carrying out the impulse and short circuit tests satisfactorily.

22.3 FLUX DENSITY TEST: The contractor shall arrange to conduct the flux density test on one of the cores of the transformers in each lot so as to ensure that the flux density does not exceed the maximum specified limit of 1.6 Tesla at normal voltage & frequency.

22.4 OIL TEST At least two samples of oil shall be drawn out of any two sizeable lots from total ordered quantity to ensure that the oil used complies with the requirements of the Specification as per ISS-335. However, inspecting officer can draw oil samples from any number of lots if considered necessary so as to ensure that transformer oil conforming to ISS is being used. The despatches for such lots shall be allowed only after receipt of satisfactory oil test results.

22.5 OIL LEAKAGE TEST: The air pressure tests provided as a routine test shall be carried out on 10% of the transformers in each lot. The firm shall ensure to get this test carried out strictly as per relevant ISS.

22.6 PHYSICAL CHECK ON VARIOUS DIMENSIONS (INTERNAL & EXTERNAL

WEIGHT CLEARANCE ETC.) One No. transformer from each lot shall be opened for checking of core weight, size and weight of HT & LT conductor, quantity of oil and various clearances etc.

22.7 INSPECTION The inspection shall be carried out by an outside inspection agency to be nominated by the Nigam’s representative. All tests & inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise specifically agrees upon between the manufacturer and the employer at the time of placing the order. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the employer all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy himself that the material is being furnished in accordance with this Specification.

22.8 The employer has the right to have the tests carried out at its own cost by an independent agency whenever there is any dispute regarding the quality of supply. If the transformer fails in the tests, the cost shall be borne by the contractor and if it passes, the cost shall be borne by the Nigam.

23.0 INSULATION RESISTANCE OF WINDINGS:

The minimum insulation resistance values in Mega ohms between winding and earth when the transformer is filled with oil should be as below: -

- 9 -

INSULATED RESISTANCE VALUES IN MEGA OHMS BETWEEN WINDING AND EARTH 200C 300C 400C 500C 600C 11000 Volt(HV) 800 400 200 100 50 433 Voltage(LV) 400 200 100 50 25 The insulation resistance values will be measured with a 2500V, preferably motorized meggar and of some good standard manufacturer such as M/s Evershed & Vignole make.

24.0 TEST VOLTAGE Transformers shall be capable of withstanding the power frequency and impulse test voltages prescribed as below: -

NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE

HIGHEST SYSTEM VOLTAGE

IMPULSE TEST VOLTAGE

POWER FREQUENCY TEST VOLTAGE

11KV (rms) 12KV (rms) 75KV (peak) 28KV (rms)

25.0 TOLERANCE OF ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE Tolerance shall be according to clause 11 of IS:2026 (part-I/General:1977).

26.0 DRAWING AND LITERATURE

The successful bidder shall submit the equipment drawing(s) in quadruplicate, to the CE/P&D, HVPNL, Panchkula for his approval. Such drawing(s) will be commented/approved by HVPNL within four weeks of their receipt. The successful bidder will re-submit such drawing(s) duly reflecting the employer’s comments within 2 weeks of their receipt, which will be approved by the employer within 2 weeks. The successful bidder shall supply 6 copies each of approved drg. and descriptive literature containing handling, erection & maintenance instructions to the CE/P&D, HVPNL, Panchkula for distribution amongst field organisation. Reproducible(s) of the approved drawing(s) will also be supply by the successful bidder. Also, a copy of each of the drawing(s) & descriptive literature will accompany the equipment for use by the stores/field offices drawing it for application on Nigam’s power system.

27.0 PACKING

Transformers shall be delivered suitably packed. Although the method of packing is left to the discretion of the manufacturer, it should be robust enough for rough handling, that is occasioned during transportation by rail/road.

28.0 GUARANTEED DATA

Guaranteed Technical particulars and other Technical data in respect of equipment/material offered shall be furnished duly signed along with the tender in the Performa attached as Vol-III. Any other particulars considered necessary may also be given in addition to those listed in the schedule.

- 1 -

Section-6

Chapter 11 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 kV CROSS LINKED ETHYLENE

INSULATED PVC SHEATHED SINGLE CORE AND THREE CORE POWER CABLES

1. SCOPE

This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at manufacturer’s work, supply & delivery F.O.R. destination of 630mm2 Single Core XLPE insulated PVC sheathed Cable and three core XLPE cable suitable for solidly grounded system size as per clause(5) mentioned below.

2. PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM

The cable should be suitable for use on 50 Cycles, 3 Phases solidly earth neutral system & working voltage of 11kV.

3. STANDARDS The cable covered under this Specification shall conform in all respects with the latest editions of IS-7098 (Part-2) 1985 & IS-8130-1984 & IEC:502 of the latest version thereof.

4. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 11kV, Single Core under ground XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cable suitable for working potential of 11kV on earthed system manufactured in accordance with IS-7098 (Part-2) 1985 with latest amendments. The Aluminium conductor shall comply with requirements specified in IS:8130-1984. The insulation shall be chemically cross-linked polyethylene confirming to the physical, electrical and ageing property as required in latest edition of IS-7098 (Part-2) 1985. Cable shall be provided with both conductor screening and insulation screening. The conductor screening shall be non-metallic and shall be consisting of either semi-conducting tape or a layer of semi-conducting compound or combination of two. The insulation screening shall consist of non-metallic semi conducting tape of extruded semi conducting compound layer in combination with non-magnetic metallic shield. Armouring shall be arranged over the core and it shall be of non-magnetic material. The material for the Armouring shall be as per relevant ISS. Over the Armouring the cable shall be provided with extruded PVC outer sheath. The composition of PVC compound shall be type ST-2 of iS-5831-1984. The colour of outer sheath shall be black or grey.

5. SIZE The different size of the cable shall be: - a) Single Core 630mm2 . b) Three Core 400mm2. c) Three Core 50mm2.

6. TESTS

6.1 Type Tests The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then

seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be

- 2 -

submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.

- 3 -

i) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath. ii) Bending test. iii) Di-electrical power factor test. iv) Heating cycle test followed by di-electrical power factor as a function of

voltage and partial discharge test. v) Impulse withstand test. The remaining type test report as per clause 3 of ISS-7098/IEC-871 shall be submitted by the successful bidder within three months from the date of placement of order. These type test reports shall be from Govt./Govt. approved test house OR from reputed Lab Abroad and shall not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of placement of order. The failure to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.

6.2 ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS All routine and acceptance tests shall be carried as per relevant ISS in the presence of Nigam’s representative.

7. INSPECTION

The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorised representative of the Nigam in respect of quality. The inspecting officer shall also satisfy himself about the correctness of length of cables as provided in Instruction No. 208 of E.B. Manual of Instruction 1963 Edition amended vide O/O No. G/BD-33(57) 75 dt. 18.04.75 now HVPNL. In case the contractor is not in a position to get these tests carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any Govt. recognized test agency OR from reputed Lab Abroad at his own expense.

8. TEST CERTIFICATES The contractor shall supply test certificates from a Govt. agency OR from reputed Lab Abroad in respect of quality as per IS:7098(part-II) 1985 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the employer.

9. PACKING The cable shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drum as per IS:10418:1982 so constructed, as to enable the cable to be transported on each drum. The cable wound on such drum shall be one continuous length. The ends of cables shall be sealed by means of non-hygroscopic sealing material.

10. MARKING The marking on the drum shall have the following information: - a) Reference to Indian Standard & cable code. b) Name of the manufacturer & trade name. c) Nominal cross section area of conductor for the cables. d) Number of core. e) Sequential No. at each meter. f) Type of the cable & voltage for which it is suitable. g) Length of cable on the drum. h) Approximate gross weight. i) Net weight of the cable. j) Drum identification number. k) P.O. No. and date.

- 4 -

l) Consignee’s name with designation. m) Year of manufacture.

Note: Cable should be marked with ISI Certification mark. 11. DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUAL

The tenderer shall supply the following drawings with the tender: - i) Detailed drawing of the cable showing conductor, screening insulation,

Armouring, outer sheath etc. ii) Detailed drawing showing jointing of cable and sealing of end boxes. Copies of instruction manuals for testing, installation jointing operation and maintenance of cables, shall also be submitted with the offer for reference of the employer.

- 1 -

SECTION-7

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SWITCHYARD ERECTION 1.0 GENERAL

This section covers the Technical requirements of various ancillary items and general switchyard erection practices. All ancillary items under the contractor’s scope of supply shall conform to the type tests and routine tests as per the relevant standards. 1.1 STRING INSULATORS & HARDWARE

1.1.1 GENERAL The insulators for suspension and tension strings shall conform to IS:731 and long

rod insulator shall conform to IEC-433(1980). Insulator Hardware shall conform to IS:2486.

1.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 1.2.1 Suspension and tension insulator shall be wet process porcelain with ball

and socket connections. Insulator shall be interchangeable and shall be suitable for forming either suspension or strings. Each insulator shall have rated strength marking on porcelain printed and applied before firing.

1.2.2 Porcelain used in insulator manufacture shall be homogeneous, free from Laminations, cavities and other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.

1.2.3 Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects.

1.2.4 When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between conductor and insulator which would cause corrosion or injury to conductor or insulator by the formation of substances due to chemical action. No radio interferences shall be caused when operating at normal rated voltage.

1.2.5 The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance with the latest edition of IS:2629. the zinc used for galvanising shall be of grade Zn-99.5 as per IS-209. the zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters.

1.2.6 Bidder shall make available data on all the essential features of design

including the method of assembly of discs and metal parts, number of discs per insulators, the manner in which mechanical stresses are transmitted through discs to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses, results of corona and thermal shock tests, recommended working strength and any special design or arrangement employed to increase life under service conditions

1.2.7 Insulator Hardware shall conform to the requirements stipulated for clamps and connectors. All Hardware shall be designed for tensile load with a factor of safety 2.

1.2.8 Insulator Hardware shall be of forged steel. Malleable cast iron shall not be accepted except for insulator disc cap. The surface of Hardware must be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasion or projections. No part shall be subjected to excessive localized pressure. The metal parts

shall not produce any noise-generating corona under operating conditions.

- 2 -

1.2.9 The tension insulator string shall be designed for the required tensile load Earth wire tension clamp shall be designed for the required tensile load with a factor of safety two (2).

1.2.10 The tension insulator string assembly shall be supplied along with suitable turnbuckle at the rate of one turnbuckle per string.

1.2.11 All Hardware shall be bolted type.

1.3 TESTS

In accordance with the requirements stipulated in section1 and section2, the suspension and tension strings, insulator discs and Hardware shall be conform to type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following acceptance tests and routine tests.

1.3.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR DISC INSULATOR a) Visual Examination (IS 2486-1971) Part 1. b) Verification of Dimensions : Cl no. 10.5 IS:731-1971 c) Temperature cycle test: Cl no. 10.6 IS:731-1971 d) Puncture Test: Cl no. 10.10 IS:731-1971 e) Galvanising Test: CI no. 10.12 IS:731-1971 f) Mechanical performance test : IEC:575-1977 Cl.4 g) Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling IEC:372(2)-1976. h) Porosity test Cl no. 10.11 IS:7311-971.

1.3.2 ACCEPTANCE TEST ON HARDWARE FITTING

a) Visual Examination: CI. 5. 10 IS:2486 (Part-1). b) Verification of Dimensions :CI. 5.8 IS:2486 (part-I)-1971. c) Galvanizing/Electroplating tests : CI. 5.9 IS:2486 (Part-I)-1971. d) Slip strength test :CI 5.4 of IS:2486 (Part-I).

e) Shore hardness test for the Elasto-meters (if applicable as per the value

guaranteed by the Bidder).

f) Mechanical strength test for each component.

g) The load shall be so supplied that the component is stressed in the same way as it would be in actual service and the procedure as given in 13.1 (g) above should be followed.

h) Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling : IEC:372(2) – 1976.

1.3.3 ROUTINE TEST ON DISC INSULATOR/ LONG ROAD INSULATOR

a) Visual inspection :Cl. No. 10.13 IS:731-1971.

b) Mechanical Routine Test : Cl. No. 10.14 IS:731-1971.

c) Electrical Routine Test: Cl. No. 10.15 IS:731-1971.

- 3 -

1.3.4 ROUTINE TEST OF HARWARE FITTINGS

a) Visual examination :Cl. 5.10 of IS-2486(I). b) Mechanical strength test: Cl. 5.10 of IS-2486 (I). Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS:209 - 1966. The purity of zinc shall not be less than 99.5%. c) Chemical Analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic – particle

inspection for malleable casting: The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable castings will be as per the internationally recongnised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and HVPNL in Quality Assurance Program.

d) CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, HARDNESS TESTS AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE FOR

FORGINGS The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch.

e) CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, HARDNESS TESTS AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE

INSPECTION FOR FABRICATED HARDWARE: The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for fabricated hardware will be as per the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch.

1.4 PARAMETERS 1.4.1 DISC INSULATORS

a) Type of insulators : Fog type b) Size of insulator units (mm) : 280 x 145 for 12000 kg.

255 x 145 for 9000/4500 kg. c) Electro mechanical strength : 12000/ 9000/ 4500 kg for Twin/

single conductor. d) Creepage distance of individual

insulator units (minimum and as required to meet total creepage distance).e) Markings.

: Markings on porcelain shall be printed and applied before firing.

1.4.2 INSULATOR STRING

66 kV 11 kV f) Power frequency

withstand voltage of the complete string with arcing horns (dry & wet)

140 kV (rms)

28 kV (rms)

- 4 -

g) Lightning impulse withstand voltage of the complete string with corona control rings (+ and – peaks)

325 kV 75 kV

i) Power frequency puncture withstand voltage for a string insulator unit.

1.3 times actual wet flashover voltage of the unit.

j) RIV level of the complete string with CC rings at 1.1 U/-3 (max)

1000 micro volts

k) Total creepage distance of the complete insulator string (mm)

---------------- 25 mm/kV ------------------

l) Total no. of discs per strings.

6 S/T 2 S/T 5 S/S 2 S/S

1.4.3 C-WEDGE AMPACT CONNECTOR

The Fired ‘C’ wedge connector will consist of a sprint ‘C’ and a wedge made from a special Aluminium alloy of high ductility and electrical conductivity. These Fired wedge connectors will use a power-activated cartridge for installation with the proper conductor combinations. When connected, these taps will provide a tenable electrical and mechanical connection for solid, stranded or compressed conductor combinations including AAC, AAAC & ACSR. Fired wedge connectors will consist of groups coded by different colors according to their cartridge power. The dimensions for the wedge shall be manufactured to close tolerance to ensure repeatability and reliability of the connection. All sharp edges and burrs shall be removed. The wedges shall be burnished to achieve optimum surface roughness for electrical contact. The Fired Aluminimum wedge connector shall meet the current cycle test requirements as per ANSI C119.4-1998 Class AA. The Fired Aluminium Wedge connector shall meet the mechanical requirements as per ANSI C119.4-1998 Class-3, minimum tension. When tested as specified, taps shall not break or separate from cable (wire) until attaining minimum tensile load specified or 5% of the rated cable strength of the weaker conductor.

2) ACSR MOOSE/ ZEBRA CONDUCTOR 2.1 DETAILS OF CONDUCTOR 2.1.1 The conductor shall conform to IS:398(Part V)-1982 except where otherwise specified

herein. 2.1.2 The details of the conductor are tabulated below:

Moose Zebra a) Stranding and wire diameter 54/3.53mm

AL+7/3.53mm steel

54/3.18mm

AL+7/3.18mm steel

b) Number of strands

core

1st Layer

2nd Layer

3rd Layer

4th Layer

1

6

12

18

24

1

6

12

18

24

- 5 -

c) Sectional area of Aluminium 528.5 mm2 428.9 mm2

d) Total sectional area 597 mm2 484.50 mm2

e) Overall diameter 31.77mm 28.62 mm

f) Approximate weight 1998 kg/km 1621 kg/km

g) Calculated DC resistance at

20 degree C

0.05595 ohm/km 0.06868 ohm/km

h) Minimum UTS 159.60 KN 130.32 KN

2.1.3 The details of aluminium strand are as follow: i) Minimum breaking load of strand

before stranding

1.57 kN 1.29 kN

ii) Minimum breaking load of strand

after stranding

1.49 kN 1.23 kN

iii) Maximum D.C resistance of

strand at 200C

2.954 ohms/KM 3.651 ohms/KM

2.1.4 The details of steel strand are as follows: i) Minimum breaking load of strand

before stranding

12.86 kN 10.43 kN

ii) Minimum breaking load of strand

after stranding

12.22 kN 9.95 kN

iii) Minimum no. of twist to be with

stood in torsion test when tested

on a gauge length of 100 times

diameter of wire

18-before stranding

16-after stranding

18-before stranding

16-after stranding

2.2) WORKMANSHIP 2.2.1 The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform and free from all imperfections

including spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions, scuff marks, kinks (protrusion of wires), dents, press marks cut marks, wire cross over riding, looseness(wire being dislocated by finger/hand pressure and/or unusual bangle noise on tapping) material inclusion, white rust, powder formation or black spots(on account of reaction with trapped rain water etc., dirt, grit etc.

2.2.2 All the Aluminium and steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from imperfections, such as spill, diemarks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing.

2.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 250 gm/sq.m after stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous and of uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand minimum two and half dips after stranding in standard preece test. The steel wire rods shall be of such quality and purity that when drawn to the size of the strands specified and coated with zinc, the finished strands and the individual wires shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC 888-1987.

2.2.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and post formed in order to prevent spreading of strands in the event of cutting of composite core wire. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to galvanisation during pre-forming and post-forming operation.

2.3) JOINTS IN WIRES 2.3.1 ALUMINIUM WIRES

- 6 -

No joints shall, be permitted in the individual wires in the outermost layer of the finished conductor. However, joints in the 12 wire and 18 wire inner layers of the conductor shall be allowed but these joints shall be made by cold pressure butt welding and shall be such that no such joints are within 15 meters of each other in the complete stranded conductor.

2.3.2 STEEL WIRES

There shall be no joints of any kind in the finished wire entering into the manufacture of the strand. There shall also be no strand splices in any length of the completed stranded steel core of the conductor.

2.4) TOLERANCES The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of the following limits only shall be permitted in the diameter of individual Aluminium and steel strands and lay-ratio of the individual Aluminium and steel strands and lay-ratio of the conductor:

a) Diameter of Aluminium and steel strands:

Nominal Maximum Minimum Aluminium Moose

Zebra

3.53 mm

3.18 mm

3.57mm

3.21 mm

3.49mm

3.15 mm

Steel Moose

Zebra

3.53mm

3.18 mm

3.60mm

3.24 mm

3.46mm

3.12 mm

b) Lay ratio of Conductor:

MOOSE ZEBRA Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Steel 6 wire

layer

28 13 28 13

Aluminium 12 wire

layer

17 10 17 10

18 wire

layer

16 10 16 10

24 wire

layer

14 10 14 10

- 7 -

2.5) MATERIALS 2.5.1 ALUMINIUM

The Aluminium strands shall be hard drawn from electrolytic Aluminium rods having purity not less than 99.5% and a copper content not exceeding 0.04%.

2.5.2 STEEL The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel wire rod and shall conform to the following chemical composition:

Element %Composition

Carbon 0.50 to 0.85

Manganese 0.50 to 1.10

Phosphorous Not more than 0.035

Sulphur Not more than 0.045

Silicon 0.10 to 0.35

2.5.3 ZINC

The Zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1992.

2.6 STANDARD LENGTH 2.6.1 The Conductor shall be supplied in standard length of 1500/1800 meters as required. No

joint shall be allowed within a single span of stringing. 2.7 TESTS:

In accordance with the requirements stipulated in Section 1 and Section 2, the conductor shall conform to type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following acceptance tests and routine tests:

2.7.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS a) Visual check for joints,

scratches etc. and lengths of conductor.

) ) )

IS:398 (Part – V) 1982

b) Dimensional check on

steel and Aluminium strands.

) ) )

c) Check for lay ratios of

various layers. ) )

d) Galvanising test on steel

strands. ) )

e) Torsion and Elongation

test on steel strands

f) Breaking load test on

steel and Aluminium strands.

) ) )

IS:398 (Part – V) 1982 Clause 12.5.2, 12.7 & 12.8

g) Wrap test on steel and

Aluminium strands ) )

- 8 -

h) DC resistance test on

Aluminium strands. ) )

i) UTS test on welded joint

of Aluminium strands. ) ) )

NOTE: All the above tests except test mentioned at (I) shall be carried out on Aluminium and steel strands after stranding only.

2.7.2 ROUTINE TESTS

a) Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification. b) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands. c) All acceptance test as mentioned above to be carried out on each coil.

2.7.3 TESTS DURING MANUFACTURING

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising.

) )

b) Chemical analysis of

Aluminium used for making Aluminium strands.

) ) )

c) Chemical analysis of steel

used for making steel strands.

) ) )

3.0 GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE 3.1 DETAILS OF EARTHWIRE 3.1.1 The galvanised steel earth wire shall generally conform to the Specification of ACSR core

wire as mentioned in IS:398 (Part-II)-1976 except where otherwise specified herein. 3.1.2 The details of the earthing are tabulated below:

a) Stranding and wire diameter : 7/3.66 mm steel b) Number of strands Steel core : 1 Outer steel layer : 6 c) Total sectional area : 73.65 mm2

d) Overall diameter : 10.98 mm e) Approximate weight : 583 kg/km f) Calculated d.c. resistance at 200C : 2.5 Ohms/km g) Minimum ultimate tensile strength : 68.4 KN h) Direction of lay of outer layer : Right hand

- 9 -

3.2 WORKMANSHIP 3.2.1 All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free of all imperfections, such as spills and

splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also after stranding. 3.2.2 The finished material shall have minimum brittleness, as it will be subjected to

appreciable vibration while in use. 3.2.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc coating of

275 gms/sq. m.) after stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand three and a half dips after stranding in standard preece test. The steel wire rod shall be of such quality and purity that, when drawn to the size of the strands specified and coated with zinc, the finished strands shall be of uniform quality and have the same properties and characteristics in ASTM designation B498-74.

3.2.4 The steel strands shall be performed and post formed in order to prevent spreading of strands while cutting of composite earth wire. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to galvanization during pre forming and post forming operation.

3.2.5 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white rust), the finished material shall be provided with a protective coating of boiled linseed oil.

3.3 JOINTS IN WIRES

There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into the manufacture of the earth wire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splices in any length of the completed stranded earth wire.

3.4 TOLERANCES The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of the following limits only shall be permitted in the Diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of the earth wire: Standard Maximum Minimum

Diameter 3.66 mm 3.75 mm 3.57 mm

Lay length 181 mm 198 mm 165 mm

3.5 MATERIALS 3.5.1 STEEL

The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel rod and shall conform to the following requirements as to the chemical composition: -

Element %Composition

Carbon Not more than 0.55 Manganese 0.4 to 0.9 Phosphorus Not more than 0.04 Sulphur Not more than 0.04 Silicon 0.15 to 0.35

- 10 -

3.5.2 ZINC

The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1979.

3.6 STANDARD LENGTH 3.6.1 The earth wire shall be supplied in standard drum length of manufacturer as per actual

requirement.

3.7 TESTS

In accordance with the requirements stipulated in Section1 and Section2, earth wire shall conform to type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following acceptance tests and routine tests:

3.7.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS

a) Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length of Earth wire.

) ) )

b) Dimensional check ) c) Galvanising test ) d) Lay length check ) e) Torsion test ) f) Elongation test ) g) Wrap test ) h) DC resistance test ) IS:398 (Part – III) 1976 i) Breaking load test ) j) Chemical analysis of

steel )

3.7.2 ROUTINE TESTS

a) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands. b) Check for correctness of stranding.

3.7.3 TESTS DURING MANUFACTURING

a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising.

) )

b) Chemical analysis of steel )

- 11 -

4. MARSHALLING KIOSK 4.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS

The Marshalling Kiosk shall be suitably fixed so as to provide no opening to inside and shall be sufficiently projected to prevent splash of rainwater to the inside of the Marshalling Kiosk. The Marshalling Kiosk will be 1400 mm (height) 1200 mm (width) and 550 mm (depth) complete with double door in front provided with pad-locking facility in the door handle. The Marshalling Kiosk shall be bolted on the 550 mm high angle-iron frame work made of 35x35x6 mm MS angle braced length-wise by 35x6 mm MS Flat. The Marshalling Kiosk shall be equipped with 3 No. earth test links made of tinned copper for CT circuits.

4.2 TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTORS Terminal block shall conform to requirements given in Section 2(GTR).

The terminal connector will conform to the following details:

i) Current & Voltage Ratings 30 Amps, 660VAC/900 VDC ii) Capacity up to three ring-tongue crimped copper wires of 4

square mm, cross sectional area. iii) a) disconnecting type terminal blocks for CTs and PTs Terminal connectors for

CT/PTs shall have provision of disconnecting and shortening links for measurement of CT currents without opening the CTs and isolation of PT circuits.

4.3 DISTRIBUTION OF TERMINALS AND THEIR IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS

The no. of terminals required shall be as follows:

66kV-200

The total number of terminals in the Marshalling Kiosk will be distributed in ten rows. Terminal block connector row’s shall be adequately spaced and in no case less than 100 mm apart center of the terminal block so as to permit convenient access to terminations. Labels in the form of plastic/steel plates carrying numerals for terminal identification shall be so mounted as to cause no interference with regard to access to terminal nuts. The numerals marked from top to bottom in ascending order starting from left-hand side as viewed from the front of the Marshalling Kiosk and a progressively increasing from left hand side to right hand side. The numbering of Terminals and their arrangement in a 200 and 300 terminals Marshalling Kiosks shall be as per sketch enclosed (Drg. No. C/ENG/HSEB/MB).

5. EARTHING CONDUCTORS

5.1 GENERAL

All conductors buried in earth and concrete shall be of mild steel. All conductors above ground level and earthing leads shall be of galvanised steel.

5.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 5.2.1 GALVANISED STEEL

- 12 -

a) Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanised according to IS:2629. b) The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m. and minimum

thickness shall be 85 microns. c) The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick coating

of zinc, firmly adhering to the surfaces of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects like discolored patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surfaces, flaking or peeling off etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.

5.3 TESTS

Galvanised steel shall be subjected to four one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per IS:2633.

6. SPACERS

6.1 GENERAL Spacers shall conform to IS-10162.

6.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

6.2.1 No magnetic material shall be used in fabrication of spacers except for GI Bolts

and nuts. 6.2.2 Spacer design shall be made to take care of fixing and removing during

installation and maintenance. 6.2.3 The design of the spacers shall be such that the conductor does not come in

contact with any sharp edge.

6.3 TESTS

6.3.1 In accordance with requirements stipulated in Section1 and Section2, each type of spacer shall conform to type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following, acceptance tests and routine tests in addition to those specified in IS/IEC: -

6.3.2 ACCEPTANCE TEST

The acceptance tests shall be as per IS:10162 (latest revision). 6.3.3 ROUTINE TEST

a) Visual Examination b) Dimensional verification. 7. EARTHING

The earthing shall be in accordance with requirements given hereunder. The earthmat design shall be done by the contractor as per IEEE 80. The earthmat shall be connected to the existing earthmat in case of substations where earthmat is already laid.

7.1 GENERAL

7.1.1 Exact location of earthing connections shall be designed to suit the site

conditions. 7.1.2 Neutral points of system of different voltages, metallic enclosures and frame

works associated with all current carrying equipments and extraneous metal works associated with electric system shall be connected to a single earthing system unless stipulated otherwise.

- 13 -

a) Code of practice for Earthing IS:3043. b) Code of practice for the protection of building and allied structures against

lightning IS:2309. c) Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with latest amendments. d) National Electricity Safety Code IEEE-80. 7.2 DETAILS OF EARTHING SYSTEM

ITEM SIZE MATERIAL a) Main Earthing Conductor 40 mm dia

MS Rod Mild Steel

b) Conductor above ground & earthing

leads (for equipment) 75x12 mm GS Flat

Galvanised Steel

c) Conductor above ground & earthing

leads (for columns & aux. Structures)

75x12 mm GS Flat

Galvanised Steel

d) Earthing of indoor LT panels, control

panels marshalling boxes, MOM boxes, junction boxes & lightning panels etc.

50x6 mm GS Flat

Galvanised Steel

e) Rod electrode 40 mm dia,

3000 mm Mild Steel

f) Earthing for motors flat 25x3 mm

steel Galvanised

g) Earthing conductor along

outdoor cable trenches primer 50x6 mm GS Flat

Mild Steel painted with Red Oxide

7.3 EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT

7.3.1 Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried at least 600 mm below finished grade level unless stated otherwise.

7.3.2 Wherever earthing conductors cross cable trenches, underground service ducts, pipes, tunnels, railway tracks etc. It shall be laid minimum 300 mm below them and shall be re-routed in case it fouls with equipment/structure foundations.

7.3.3 Tap-connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed, shall be terminated on the earthing terminals of equipment/structure.

7.3.4 Earthing conductors or leads along their run on cable trench, ladder columns, beams, walls etc. shall be supported by suitable welding/cleating at intervals of 750 mm. Wherever it passage through walls, floors etc., galvanised iron sleeves shall be provided for the passage of the conductor and both ends of the sleeves shall be sealed to prevent the passage of water through the sleeves.

7.3.5 Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum distance of 1500 mm from the outer boundary of the building. In case high temperature is encountered at some location, the earthing conductor shall be laid minimum 1500 mm away from such location.

7.3.6 Earthing conductor crossing the road shall be laid 300 mm below road or at a greater depth to suit the site conditions.

7.3.7 Earthing conductor embedded in the concrete shall have approximately 50 mm concrete cover.

7.4 Earthing for GIS

- 14 -

To limit the undesirable effects caused by circulating currents, the following requirements should be met:

All metallic enclosures should normally operate at ground,

When grounded at the designated points, the bus enclosure design should ensure that no significant voltage differences exist between individual enclosure sections and that neither the supporting structures nor any part of the grounding systems is adversely influenced by the flow of induced currents.

To avoid the circulation of enclosure currents beyond regular return

path within the GIS assembly, power cable sheath grounds should be tied to the ground system via connections that are separated from the GIS enclosures. To facilitated this isolation, the design of cable terminations (potheads) should be such that an isolating air gap or proper insulation elements are provided.

Enclosure return currents also cannot be permitted to flow through

any externally mounted current transformers. Further, GIS manufacturer shall provide and be responsible for:

Providing the subassembly-to-subassembly bonding to assure safe voltage gradients between all intentionally grounded parts of the GIS assembly and between those parts and the main ground bus of the GIS.

Furnishing readily accessible connectors of sufficient mechanical

strength to withstand electromagnetic forces and normal abuse, and that are capable of carrying the anticipated maximum fault current in that portion of the circuit without overheating.

Providing ground pads or connectors, or both, allowing, at least, for

two paths to ground from the main bus, or from each metallic enclosure and auxiliary piece of GIS equipment designated for a connection to the station ground if the main ground bus of the GIS assembly does not actually exist. Proposing essential method for connections between different type of metals, typically between a copper cable or a similar ground conductor and aluminium enclosure.

The following points should also be considered for GIS Grounding:

Precautions should be undertaken to prevent excessive currents from being induced into adjacent frames, structures, or reinforcing steel and to avoid establishment of current loops via other station equipment, such as transformers or separate switchgear. If there is the possibility of undesirable current loops via ground connections, or if any sustained current path might partially close or pass through grounded structures, the station grounding scheme and the physical layout should be carefully reviewed.

Equal care is needed in the proximity of discontinuities in enclosure

grounding paths at the transformer connections to GIS and at the interface points to conventional switchgear to prevent circulating currents in the circuit breaker and transformer tank steel.

- 15 -

Where applicable, all isolating elements should be able to withstand to full potential difference that may occur between the locally grounded system and that external to GIS. The isolation of metal parts shall be made by means of ceramic or plastic inserts. Adequate creepage distance shall be ensured.

7.5 EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE EARTHING 7.5.1 Earthing pads shall be provided by the Contractor of the apparatus/equipment at accessible position. The connection between earthing pads and the earthing grid

shall be made by short and direct earthing leads free from kinks and splices. In case earthing pads are not provided on the item to be earthed, same shall be provided in consultation with engineer.

7.5.2 Whether specifically shown in drgs. or not, steel/structure columns, metallic stairs

etc. shall be connected to the nearby earthing grid conductor by two earthing leads. Electrical continuity shall be ensured by bonding different sections of hand-rails and metallic stairs.

7.5.3 Metallic pipes, conduits and cable tray sections for cable installation shall be bonded to ensure electrical continuity and connected to earthing conductors at regular. Apart from intermediate connections, beginning points shall also be connected to earthing system.

7.5.4 Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor. 7.5.5 A separate earthing conductor shall be provided for earthing lighting fixtures,

receptables, switches, junction boxes, lighting conduits etc. 7.5.6 Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs along metallic structures such as

gas, water, steam conduits etc. and steel reinforcement in concrete it shall be bonded to the same.

7.5.7 Light poles, junction boxes on the poles, cable and cable boxes/glands, lockout switches etc. shall be connected to the earthing conductor running along with the

supply cable which in turn shall be connected to earthing grid conductor at a minimum two points whether specifically shown or not.

7.5.8 Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be earthed at a spacing of 30 mm and also by both the ends.

7.5.9 Earthing conductor shall be buried 500 mm inside the switchyard fence. Every alternate post of the fence and gates shall be connected to earthing loop by one lead.

7.5.10 Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided for the moving parts. 7.5.11 All lighting panels, junction boxes, receptables fixtures, conduits etc. shall be grounded in compliance with the provision of I.E. rules. 7.5.12 A continuous ground conductor of 16 SWG GI wire shall be run all along each

conduit run and bonded at every 600 mm by not less than two turns of the same size of wires. The conductor shall be connected to each panel ground bus. All junction boxes, receptables, lighting fixtures etc. shall be connected to this 16 SWG ground conductor.

7.5.13 50 mm x 6 mm MS flat shall run on the top tier and along the cable trenches and the same shall be welded to each of the racks. Further this flat shall be earthed at both the ends at an interval of 30 mtrs. The MS flat shall be finally painted with two coats of Red Oxide primer and coats of post office and red enamel paint.

7.6 JOINTING

7.6.1 Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be bolted type. Contact surfaces shall be free from scale, paint, enamel, grease, rust or dirt. Two bolts shall be provided for making each connection. Equipment bolted connections, after being checked and tested, shall be painted with anti-corrosive paint/compound.

- 16 -

7.6.2 Connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and between main earthing conductors shall be welded/brazed type. For rust protections, the welds should be treated with red lead and afterwards thickly coated with bitumen compound to prevent corrosion.

7.6.3 Steel to copper connections shall be brazed type and shall be treated to prevent moisture ingression.

7.6.4 Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent length of the conductor.

7.6.5 All ground connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints shall be allowed to cool down gradually to atmospheric before putting any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be allowed.

7.6.6 Bending of large rod/thick conductor shall be done preferably by gas heating. 7.6.7 All arc welding with large dia. Conductors shall be done with low hydrogen content

electrodes.

7.7 POWER CABLE EARTHING Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at both equipment and switchgear end. Sheath and armour of single core power cable shall be earthed at switchgear end only.

7.8 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FOR EARTHING SYSTEMS

7.8.1 Each earthing lead from surge arrestor and the neutral of the power transformer

shall be directly connected to two pipe electrodes in independent treated earth pit up to water level which in turn, shall be buried in cement concrete pit with a cast iron cover hinged to a cast iron frame to have an access to the joints. All accessories associated with the power transformer shall be connected to the earthing grid at a minimum two points.

7.8.2 Earthing terminal of each capacitor voltage transformer and down conductors of tower with peak etc. shall be directly connected to rod electrode which in turn, shall be connected to station earthing grid.

7.8.3 Auxiliary earthing mat comprising of closely spaced (300mm x 300mm) conductors shall be provided at depth of 300 mm from ground level below the operating handles of the MOM Boxes of Isolators. MOM Boxes shall be directly connected to the auxiliary earthing mat.

7.8.4 Earthing of each Post Insulator base of Isolator and support Insulators of circuit Breakers is required to be connected with earthing strip.

7.8.5 The earthing strips are required to be connected at the top of support structure on both sides and not at bottom.

7.8.6 Insulating strings in the gantry beam are required to be connected at the base with common strip.

7.9 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

7.9.1 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the

conductors of the safety earthing above ground level. 7.9.2 Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000 mm interval. 7.9.3 Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via

test joint located approximately 1500 mm above ground level. The bidders shall include the cost of test links in the erection price component of respective equipment/structure and no extra payment shall be made for the same.

7.9.4 Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits. 7.9.5 All metallic structures within a vicinity of 2000 mm in air and 5000 mm below

ground shall be bounded to the conductors of lightning protection system.

- 17 -

8.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

8.1.1 Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the switchyard by shield wires. The layout drawings enclosed indicate arrangement. The final arrangement shall be decided after approval of the DSLP calculations. Rezvik method of lightning protection shall be followed. Any additional expenditure resulting from change of layout if required shall be to the firm’s account.

8.1.2 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground

metallic service ducts and cables.

8.2 PROTECTION OF SUBSTATION BUILDING AGAINST LIGHTNING The protection system shall be supplied according to British Standards, BSI 6651:1985; The protection system shall cover indoor and outdoor protection of structure against lightning. The lightning protection system shall be composed of the following principal components:

Air terminations, Down conductors, Joints & bolts, Test joints, Earth terminations, Earth electrodes,

The protection system shall be avoided from corrosions. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer the type and electrical characteristics of protection system with technical documents for approval before installations. All lightning protection system shall be visually inspected by a competent person of the Contractor during installation, After installation of protection system, the following measurements and checks shall be performed by the Contractor under the witness of Employer's representatives according to BS.6651:1985

Visually check in order to verify that they are in accordance with the reference standards. The resistance to earth of the earth termination network and of each earth electrode. The results of a visual check of all conductors and joints or their measured electrical continuity.

9. BAY EQUIPMENT #

The disposition of various bay equipment is shown in single line diagrams and standard section drawing/layout drawing enclosed with Section 1.

10. LIGHTNING PROTECTION

10.1 Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the switchyard by shield wires. The layout drawings enclosed indicate arrangement. The final arrangement

- 18 -

shall be decided after approval of the DSLP calculations. Rezvik method of lightning protection shall be followed. Any additional expenditure resulting from change of layout if required shall be to the firm’s account.

10.2The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic service ducts and cables.

11. TERMINAL POINTS

The terminal points for the scope of work of switchyard are given below: -

11.1 LINE FEEDERS The transmission line shall terminate on line side gantry structure. The supply and erection of tension insulator string for line termination and tension clamps for earthwire are included in the scope of the bidder.

11.2 Lightning protection down conductor at this end, tap offs and jumper connections from this dead end to all equipment in the switchyard are in Contractor’s scope.

12 EQUIPMENT ERECTION NOTES 12.1.1 All support insulators, circuit Breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment shall

preferably be handled with cranes having suitable booms and handling capacity. 12.1.2 The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to excessive

swing, scratching by sling ropes etc. 12.1.3 Handling equipment, sling ropes etc. should be tested periodically before erection for

strength. 12.1.4 Bending of compressed air piping should be done by a bending machine and through

cold bending only. Bending shall be such inner diameter of pipe is not reduced. 12.1.5 Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the ends.

Hence only a proper pipe cutting tool shall be used. Hacksaw shall not be used. 12.1.6 Muslin or leather cloth shall be used for cleaning the inside and outside of hollow

insulators. 12.1.7 All the equipment, instruments and auxiliaries required for testing and commissioning of

equipment shall be arranged at site by the contractor. 12.2 STORAGE

The contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed for proper storage of equipments, where sensitive equipments shall be stored indoors. All equipments during storage shall be protected against damage due to acts of nature or accidents. The storage instructions of the equipment manufacturer/HVPNL shall be strictly adhered to.

13 CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS 13.1 Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cable and

conduit schedule. 13.2 The tag shall be of Aluminium with the number punched on it and securely attached to

the cable conduit by not less than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire conforming to IS:280. Cable tags shall be of rectangular shape for power cables and circular shape for control cables.

13.3 Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable marker made of galvanised iron plate.

13.4 Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an additional inscription “Cable Joints”.

- 19 -

13.5 The marker shall project 150mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval of 30 meters and at every change in direction. They shall be located on both sides of road and drain crossings.

13.6 Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the equipment enclosure), on both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each duct/conduit entry and at every twenty meters (20 m) in cable tray/trench runs. Cable tags shall be provided inside the switchgear, motor control centers, control and relay panels etc., wherever required for cable identification, where a number of cables enter together through a gland plate.

13.7 CABLE SUPPORTS AND CABLE TRAY MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS 13.7.1 The contractor shall provide embedded steel insert on concrete floors/walls to secure

supports for by welding to these inserts or available building steel structures, for the purpose of casting in the control room.

13.7.2 The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members. 13.7.3 Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to be

supported without the use of cable trays, such as in trenches, while at all other places these will be an interval of 1000 mm (as per drg. attached).

13.8 CABLE TERMINATION AND CONNECTIONS 13.8.1 The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance with cable

and termination kit manufacturer’s instructions, drawing and/or as directed by the HVPNL. 13.8.2 The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling, cutting,

taping, heat shrinking, (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal, shorting and grounding as required to complete the job.

13.8.3 Supply of all consumable material shall be included in the scope of the contractor. 13.8.4 The equipment will be generally provided with un-drilled gland plates for cables/conduit

entry. The contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland plates painting and touching up. Holes shall not be made by gas cutting.

13.8.5 Control cable cores entering control panels /switchgear /MCC / miscellaneous panels shall be neatly bunched, clamped and tied with nylon strap or PVC perforated strap to keep them in position.

13.8.6 The contractor shall tag/ferrule control cable cores at all terminations, as instructed by the HVPNL. In panels where a large number of cables are to be terminated and cable identification may be difficult, each core ferrule may include the complete cable no. as well

13.8.7 Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up. 13.8.8 All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused

openings shall be effectively closed.

- 20 -

13.8.9 Double compression type tinned/nickel plated brass cable glands shall be provided by the contractor for all power and control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations.

13.8.10 The cable glands shall be tested as per BS:6121. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass casting, machine finished and tinned to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components used in cable glands shall be neoprene and of tested quality. The cable glands shall be of approved make.

13.8.11 The cable gland shall also be tested for dust proof and weather proof termination. The test procedure has to be discussed and agreed to between the HVPNL and cable glands manufacturer.

13.8.12 If the cable and box or the terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found unsuitable and requires modification, the same shall be carried out by the contractor, as directed by the HVPNL.

13.8.13 Crimping tool shall be of approved design and make. 13.8.14 Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solderless crimping type conforming to IS:8309 and

8394. The cable lugs shall be of approved make. 13.8.15 Solderless crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory compound.

The cable lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided. 14. DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES 14.1 The contractor shall construct the cable trenches required for directly buried cables. The

scope of work shall include excavation, preparation of sand bedding, soil cover, supply and installation of brick or concrete protective covers back filling and ramming supply and installation of route markers and joint markers. The Bidder shall ascertain soil conditions prevailing at site, before quoting the unit rates.

14.2 The power and control cable between LT station, Control room, shall be laid in the buried cable trenches. Further, for lighting purposes also, buried cable trench can be used in the outdoor area.

14.3 Cable route and joint markers and RCC warning covers shall be provided wherever required. The voltage grade of cables shall be engraved on the marker.

15. INSTALLATION OF CABLES 15.1 Cabling shall be on cable racks, in built-up trenches, vertical shafts, excavated trenches

for direct burial, pulled through pipes, and conduits laid in concrete ducts, run bare and clamped on wall/ceiling/steel structures etc. as shown in the drawings in detailed engineering stage. Where specific cable layouts are not shown on drawings, contractor shall route these as directed by the HVPNL.

15.2 The contractor shall fabricate and install mounting arrangements for the support and installation of all the cables on angles at 1000 mm spacing in the trenches, as shown in the drawing enclosed with Specification. These mounting structures/cable racks shall be fabricated from structural steel members (channels, angles and flats) of the required size. The fabrication, welding and erection of these structures shall conform to the relevant clauses of Section STR, in addition to the Specifications given herein.

15.3 Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of metal primer (comprising of red oxide zinc chromate in a synthetic medium) followed by two finishing coats of Aluminium paint. The red oxide and zinc chromate shall conform to IS:2074. All welding works inclusive of the consumables required for Specifications given herein.

15.4 All inter pole cables (power & control) for all equipment shall be laid in cable trenches/Gl conduit pipes of NB 50/100 mm diameter, class medium as per IS 4736 which shall be buried in the ground at a depth of 250 mm. The interpole cabling piping of Breakers shall be laid in cable trenches. The scope shall include all labour,

- 21 -

material, equipment for transporting, laying, burying etc. including required bends and seals.

15.5 Cable shall be generally located adjoining the electrical equipment through the pipe insert embedded in the floor. In the case of equipments located away from cable trench either pipe inserts shall be embedded in the floor connecting the cable trench and the equipment or in case the distance is small, notch/opening on the floor shall be provided. In all these cases necessary bending radius as recommended by the cable Contractor shall be maintained. Cabling in the control room shall be done on ladder type cable trays.

15.6 Cables from the equipment to trench shall run in GI conduits. Necessary conduits of adequate sizes and length shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. Flexible conduit should be used between fixed conduit/cable trays (perforated type) and equipment terminal boxes, where vibration is anticipated. The flexible conduit shall be as per the relevant IS.

15.7 Power and control cables shall be laid in separate tiers. The order of laying of various cables shall be as follows, for cables other than directly buried:

Power Cable on top tiers. Control instrumentation and others service cables in bottom tiers.

15.8 Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three times the diameter of cable between trefoil centerlines. All power cables shall be laid with a minimum center-to-center distance equal to twice the diameter of the cable.

15.9 Trefoil clamps for single core cable shall be pressure die cast Aluminium (LM-6), Nylon or fibre glass and shall include necessary fixing GI nuts, bolts, washers etc. These are required at every 2 meter of cable runs. The cost of supply and erecting these clamps shall be made on the unit rate basis.

15.10 Power and control cable shall be securely fixed to the trays/supports with self locking type

nylon ties with deinterlocking facility at every 5 meter interval for horizontal run Vertical and inclined cable runs shall be secured with 25 mm wide and 2 mm thick Aluminium strip clamps at 2 m.

15.11 Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The permissible limits are as follows:

Table of cable and Minimum bending radius voltage grade Power cable 12 D. Control cable 10 D. D is overall diameter of cable.

15.12 The cables are to be laid in single layers on racks and are to be routed through culvert

whenever there is road crossing. 15.13 In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one (for LT

cables)/two (for HT cables) straight through joints to be made in case the cable develop fault at later date.

15.14 Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using straight through joints. Cable splices will not be permitted except where called for by the drawings, unavoidable or where permitted by the HVPNL. If straight through joints are unavoidable, the contractor shall use the straight through joints kit of reputed make.

15.15 Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient lengths so that changing of termination blocks can be done without requiring any splicing.

15.16 Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station, wherever required by the HVPNL.

15.17 Rollers shall be used at intervals of about two meters while pulling cables. 15.18 All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid

damage due to twist, kinks, sharp bends etc. 15.19 Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage. 15.20 Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in accordance

with IS:1255 and other Indian Standard Codes of practices.

- 22 -

15.21 Wherever cable pass through wall openings or other partitions, wall sleeves with bushes having a smooth curved internal surface so as not to damage the cable, shall be supplied, installed and properly sealed by the contractor at no extra charges.

15.22 Contractor shall remove the RCC/Steel trench covers taking up the work and shall replace all the trench covers after the erection-work in that particular area is completed or when further work is not likely to be taken up for sometime.

15.23 Contractor shall furnish three of the report on work carried out in a particular week, indicating cable numbers, date on which laid, actual length and route, testing carried out, terminations carried out, along with the marked up copy of the cable schedule and interconnection drawing wherever any modifications are made.

15.24 Contractor shall paint the tray identification number on each run of trays at an interval of 10 m.

15.25 In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/installation, the contractor shall repair it at his own cost to the satisfaction of the HVPNL. In case any other part of a cable is damaged, the same shall be replaced by a healthy cable at no extra cost to the HVPNL, i.e. the contractor shall be paid for installation and removal of the damaged cable.

15.26 All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable connections. The contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable lugs whether supplied by him or not with insulating tape, sleeve or paint. 15.26.a Separate racks/trays will be utilised for different voltage levels from

switchyard to control room. 15.26.b All the cable trenches will be constructed as per standard HVPNL design

as far as electrical portion is concerned. 15.26.c The GI pipe duly lugged at both ends and by providing bends/elbows or

trenches will be provided/constructed from equipment to trenches. 15.26.d Provision for accommodation of cables of future bays (All bays position

marked on the drawing whether shown dotted or not to be included for future provision in main the trench size) are to be made in the main trenches.

15.27 TESTS ON CABLE TRAYS 15.27.1 Test for galvanising (Acceptance test) to be done as per relevant standard. 15.27.2 DEFLECTION TEST (TYPE TEST)

A 2.5 meter straight section of all widths cable trays be simply supported at two ends a uniform distributed load of 76 kg meter shall be applied along the length of the tray. A maximum deflection at the mid span shall not exceed 7 mm.

15.28 CONDUITS, PIPES AND DUCT INSTALLATION 15.28.1 Contractor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes, flexible

conduits, hume pipes etc. including all necessary sundry materials such as tees, elbows, check nuts, bushing reducers, enlargers, coupling Cap, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes etc. as specified and to be shown in detailed engineering drawing. The size of the conduit/pipe shall be selected on the basis of 40% fill criterion.

15.28.2 Contractor shall have his own facility for bending, cutting and threading the conduits at site. Cold bending should be used. All cuts & threaded ends shall be made smooth without leaving any edges. Anticorrosive paint shall be applied at all field threaded portions.

15.28.3 All conduit/pipes shall be extended on both sides of wall/floor openings. The fabrication and installation of supports and the clamping shall be included in the scope of work by Contractor.

15.28.4 When two lengths of conduits are joined together through a coupling, running

threads equal to twice the length of coupling shall be provided on each conduit to facilitate easy dismantling of two conduits.

18.28.5 Conduit installation shall be permanently connected to earth by means of a special approved type of earthing clamps. GI pull of adequate size shall be laid in all conduits before installation.

- 23 -

15.28.6 Each conduit run shall be painted with its designation as indicated on the drawing such that it can be identified at each end.

15.28.7 Embedded conduits shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50 mm. 15.28.8 Conduit run sleeves shall be provided with the bushings at each end. 15.28.9 Metallic conduit runs at termination shall have two locknuts and a bushing for

connection. Flexible conduits shall also be suitably clamped at each end with the help of bushings. Bushings shall have rounded edges so as not to damage the cables.

15.28.10 When embedded conduits turn upwards from a slab or fill, the termination dimensions shown on the drawings, if any, shall be taken to represent the position of the straight extension of the conduit external to and immediately following the bend. At least one half of the arc length of the bend shall be embedded.

15.28.11 All conduits/pipes shall have their ends closed by caps until cable are pulled. After cables are pulled, the ends of conduits/pipes shall be sealed in an approved manner to prevent damage to threaded portions and entrance of moisture and foreign material.

15.28.12 For underground runs, contractor shall excavate and back fill as necessary. 15.28.13 Contractor shall supply, unload, store and install conduits required for the

lighting installation as specified. All accessories/fittings required for making the installation complete, including but not limited to pull out boxes ordinary and inspection tees and elbow, check nuts, male and female bushings (brass or galvanised steel), caps, square headed male plugs, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes, conduit terminal boxes, gaskets and box covers, saddle terminal boxes, and all steel supporting work shall be supplied by the contractor.

15.28.14 All unarmoured cable shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to lighting fixtures, receptacles etc.

15.28.15 Size of conduit for lighting shall be selected as per the table given in the attached drawings.

15.28.16 Exposed conduits shall be run in straight lines parallel to building columns, beams and walls. Unnecessary bends and crossings shall be avoided to present a neat appearance.

15.28.17 Conduit supports shall be provided at an interval of 750mm for horizontal runs and 100 mm for vertical runs.

15.28.18 Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or brackets by saddles or U-bolts. The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be securely fixed to the building steel by welding and to concrete or brickwork by grouting or by nylon rawl plugs. Wooden plug inserted in the masonry or concrete for conduit support is not acceptable.

15.28.19 Embedded conduits shall be securely fixed in position to preclude any movement. In fixing embedded conduit, if welding or brazing is used, extreme care should be taken to avoid any injury to the inner surface of the conduit.

15.28.20 Spacing of embedded conduits shall be such as to permit flow of concrete between them and in no case shall be less than 38 mm.

15.28.21 Where conduits are along with cable trays, they shall be clamped to supporting steel at an interval of 600 mm.

15.28.22 For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphalt-base compound. Concrete pier or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary to support the conduit rigidly and to hold it in place.

15.28.23 Conduit shall be installed in such a way as to ensure against trouble from trapped condensation.

15.28.24 Conduit shall be kept, wherever possible, at least 300 mm away from hot pipes, heating devices etc. when it is evident that such proximity may reduce the service life if cables.

15.28.25 Slip joints shall be provided when conduits cross structural expansion joints or where long run of exposed conduits are installed, so that temperature change will cause no distortion due to expansion or contraction of conduit run.

- 24 -

15.28.26 For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate wiring.

15.28.27 Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a lock nut inside and outside the box.

15.28.28 Conduits joints and connections shall be made thoroughly water-tight and rust proof by application of a thread compound which insulates the joints. White lead is suitable for application on embedded conduit and lead for exposed conduit.

15.28.29 Field bends shall have a minimum radius of four (4) times the conduit diameter. All bends shall be free of kinds, indentations of flattened surfaces. Heat shall not be applied in making any conduit bend. Separate bends may be used for this purpose.

15.28.30 The entire metallic conduit system, whether embedded or exposed, shall be electrically continuous and thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used, suitable bounding shall be provided around the joint to ensure a continuous ground circuit.

15.28.31 After installation, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned by compressed air before pulling in the wire.

15.28.32 Lighting fixtures shall not be suspended directly from the junction box in the main conduit run.

16 ILLUMINATION SYSTEM 16.1.1 The scope of work comprises of design, engineering, testing, supply,

installation, testing and commissioning of various lighting fixtures complete with lamps, supports and accessories, lighting panels, lighting complete with distribution boxes, galvanised rigid steel conduits, lighting wires, G.I. Earthwire receptacles, switchboards, switches, junction boxes, pull out boxes complete with accessories, lighting transformer. The details of area to be illuminated are given below: - Control Room Building. Switch Yard area. Roads and streets.

16.1.2 The minimum lux levels to be maintained in the different areas shall be as per

following: - S.No. Area Lux. Level i) Switchyard 50 lux on power transformer and 20 lux on other equipment. ii) Street/Road 20 lux. Bidder shall submit detailed for reaching the above LUX levels.

16.1.3 Any material, wire, conduits, accessories etc. not specifically mentioned or specified but required for installation of lighting fixtures are included in the scope of contractor. All lighting fixtures & accessories shall be designed for continuous operation under atmospheric conditions existing at site, without reduction in the life or without any deterioration. The lighting fixtures shall be of Philips or Bajaj or Crompton Greaves of make only.

16.2 TEMPERATURE RISE All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed to have a low temperature rise according to the relevant Indian Standards, the design average ambient temperature shall be taken as 500C.

16.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES 16.3.1 All fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare. 16.3.2 All lighting fixtures shall be complete with lamps a specified and shall be

suitably wired up.

- 25 -

16.3.3 All lighting fixtures shall be complete with accessories. Outdoor type fixtures shall be provided with outdoor type weather proof box.

16.3.4 Each lighting fixtures shall be provided with an earthing terminal and all metal parts of the housing shall be constructed so as to ensure earthing continuity throughout the fixture up to the earthing terminal.

16.3.5 The mounting facility and conduit knock-outs for the fixtures shall be suitable for 20 mm conduit entry.

16.3.6 The wire shall be of 1100 V grade and PVC insulated with multi stranded copper conductor.

16.4 TESTS

Manufacture’s type and routine test certificates shall be submitted for the fixtures and accessories.

16.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The lighting system shall comprise of the following: - 16.5.1 AC NORMAL LIGHTING

All the lights connected to the AC lighting system in different area will be connected to the AC distribution boards to be supplied.

16.5.2 DC EMERGENCY LIGHTING

DC emergency in Control room, relay and protection room, office, LT switchgear room, D.C.D.B. room shall be provided to avoid complete darkness in case of complete AC failure. The number of DC emergency lights to be provided shall be calculated on the basis that atleast illumination level of atleast 30 LUX is achieved when DC emergency lights get switched ON.

16.5.3 RECEPTACLES Adequate number of 5A, 15 A, (single phase) and 32 A (3phase) receptacles shall be provided at suitable locations to be mutually during the detailed engineering.

16.6 ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF LT PANELS & BATTERY CHARGER

16.6.1 The Contractor shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use all electrical equipment included in this Specification.

16.6.2 Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman so that it is level plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Tolerance shall be as established in Contractor’s drawings or as stipulated by HVPNL. No

equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the alignment has been checked and found acceptable by the HVPNL.

16.6.3 Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labour tools equipment rigging materials, bolts, wedges, anchors, concrete insert etc. in proper time required to completely install, test and commission the equipment.

16.6.4 Manufacture’s and HVPNL’s instructions and recommendations of all equipment.

16.6.5 Contractor shall move all equipment into the respective room through the regular door or openings specifically provided for this purpose. No part of the structure shall be utilised to lift or erect any equipment without prior permission of HVPNL.

16.6.6 All switchboards shall be installed in accordance with Indian standards IS:3072 and at HVPNL’s instructions. Switchboard panels shall be installed on finished surfaces, concrete or steel stills. Contractor shall be required to install and align any channel sills which from part of foundations. In joining shipping sections of switchboards together adjacent housing of panel section or flanged throat sections shall be bolted together after alignment has been completed. Power bus, enclosures ground and control splices of conventional nature shall

- 26 -

be cleaned and bolted together being drawn up with torque spanner of proper size or by other approved means.

16.6.7 All switchboards shall be made completely vermin proof. 16.6.8 Contractor shall take utmost care in holding instruments, relaying and other

delicate mechanism wherever the instruments and relays are supplied separately they shall be mentioned only after the associated panels have been erected and aligned. The blocking materials HVPNL for safe transit of instrument and relays shall be removed after ensuring that panel been completely installed and to further movement of the same should be necessary. Any damage shall be immediately reported to HVPNL.

16.6.9 Equipment furnished with finished coats of paint shall be touched by up Contractor if their surface is specified or marred while handling.

16.6.10 Foundation work for all switchboard panels will be carried out by Civil Contractor. However, minor modifications shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra cost.

16.6.11 After installation of panels, power and control wiring and connections, Contractor shall perform operational tests on all switchboards, to verify proper operation of switchboards/panels and correctness of all equipment in each and every respect.

16.6.12 COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS The Contractor shall carry out the following commissioning check wherever applicable in addition to the other checks and tests recommended by the manufacturers: -

16.6.12.1 GENERAL i. Check nameplate details according to the Specification. ii. Check for physical damage. iii. Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, joints connecting terminals. iv. Check earth connection, v. Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings. vi. Check all moving parts for proper lubrication.

16.6.12.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS i. Check alignment of Breaker truck for free movement. ii. Check correct operation of shutters. iii. Check control wiring for correctness of connections, continuity and IR

values. iv. Manual operation of Breaker completely assembled. v. Power closing/opening operation, manually and electrically. vi. Breaker closing and tripping time. vii. Trip free and anti-pumping operation. viii. IR values, minimum pick up voltage and resistance of coils. ix. Contact resistance. x. Simultaneous closing of all the three phases. xi. Check electrical and mechanical interlocks provided. xii. Check on spring charging motor, correct operation of limit switches, and

timeof charging. xiii. All functional checks.

16.2.12.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

i) Megger between winding and winding terminals top body. ii) Polarity test. iii) Ratio identification checking of all ratios on all by primary injection of

current. iv) Spare CT cores, if any, to be shorted and earthed.

16.2.12.4 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER i) Insulation resistance test.

- 27 -

ii) Ratio test on all cores. iii) Polarity test. iv) Line connections as per connection diagram.

16.2.12.5 CUBICLE WIRING

i) Check all switch development. ii) Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should be made sure that the wiring is as per relevant drawing. All interconnection between panels/ equipment shall similarly checked. iii) All the wire shall be meggered to earth. iv) Functional check of all control circuit e.g. closing, tripping control, interlock, supervision and alarm circuit.

16.2.12.6 RELAYS i) Check connections and wiring. ii) a) Megger all terminal to body.

b) Megger AC to DC terminals. iii) Check operations characteristics by secondary injection. iv) Check minimum pick up voltage of DC coils. v) Check operation of electrical/mechanical targets. vi) Relays settings. vii) Check CT and VT connections with particular reference to their polarities for directional relays, wherever required.

16.2.12.7 METERS i) Check calibration by comparing it with a sub-standard. ii) Megger all insulated portions. iii) Check CT and VT connections with a particular reference to their polarities

for power type meters.

16.7 ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF BATTERY BANK

16.7.1 The control shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use already electrical equipment included in this Specification. 16.7.2 Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman like manner so that it is level,

plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented tolerance shall be established in Contractor’s drawings or as stipulated by HVPNL. No equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the alignment has been checked and found acceptable by the HVPNL.

16.7.3 Contractor shall furnish all labour tools equipment rigging materials, bolts, wedges, anchors, concrete inserts etc. in proper time required to completely install, test and commission the equipment.

16.7.4 Manufacturer’s and HVPNL’s instructions and recommendations shall be correctly

followed in handling, testing and commissioning of Battery Bank.

- 1 -

SECTION – 8

STRUCTURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 The scope of specification covers fabrication, proto-assembly supply and

erection of galvanised steel structure for towers, latticed griders and equipment support structure. Towers, girder & equipment support structures shall be as per HVPN drawing conforming to IS 2062 (latest).

o The scope shall include all types of bolts, nuts, step bolts, inserts in

concrete, gusset plates, equipment mounting bolts, structure Earthing bolts, foundation bolts, spring washers, fixing plates, angles and bolts for structure mounted or ground mounted marshalling boxes (AC/ DC Marshalling box & equipment control cabinet) and any other items as required to complete the job.

The connection of all structures to their foundations shall be by base plates and embedded anchor/ foundation bolts. All steel structures and anchor/ foundation bolts shall be fully galvanized. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least 0.610 kg/m2. One additional nut shall be provided below the base plate which may be used for the purpose of leveling.

2.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 2.1 Minimum distance from the hole centre to edge shall be 1.5x bolt diameter.

Minimum distance between center to center of holes shall be 2.5x bolt diameter. 2.2 The minimum bolt diameter shall be 16 mm. 2.3 In order to facilitate inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be provided

with climbing devices. Each tower shall be provided with step bolts not less than 16 mm diameter & 175 mm long spaced not more than 450 mm apart, staggered on faces on one leg extending from about 0.5 meters above ground level to the top of the tower. The step bolt shall conform to IS:10238. Ladders on towers with lighting appliances shall be provided with safety guards.

2.4 If luminaries are proposed to be fixed on gantries/ towers, then the proper

loading for the same shall be considered while designing. Also holes for fixing the brackets for luminaries should be provided wherever required.

2.5 Foundation bolts/ studs shall be designed for the loads for which the structures

are designed. 3.0 FABRICATION OF STEEL

- 2 -

3.1 The Contractor shall bear all the expenditure at all stages on account of loading/

unloading, transportation and other miscellaneous expenses and losses and damages for all materials upto the fabrication yard/ shop and there after to the erection site including all other expenses till the erection of work has been completed and accepted. The unit rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of all such incidental expenses and nothing extra shall be payable on any account in this regard.

3.2 The fabrication and erection works shall be carried out generally in accordance

with IS:802. A reference however may be made to IS:800 in case of non-stipulation of some particular provision in IS:802. All materials shall be completely shop fabricated with proper connection material and erection marks for ready assembly in field.

4.0 ASSEMBLY

i) The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted nor otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared that the specified camber, if any, is provided. In order to minimise distortion in member the component parts shall be positioned by using the clamps, clips, dogs, jigs and other suitable means and fasteners (bolts and welds) shall be placed in a balanced patten. If the individual components are to be bolted, paralled and tapered drifts shall bed used to align the part so that the bolts can be accurately positioned.

ii) Sample towers, beams and equipment support structure shall be trial

assembled keeping in view the actual site conditions, before erection in the fabrication shop and shall be inspected and approved by HVPNL before mass fabrication. Necessary match marks shall be made on these components in the shop before disassembly and despatching.

5.0 BOLTING

i) Every bolt shall be provided with a spring washer under the nut so that no part of the threaded portion of the bolt is within the thickness of the parts bolted together.

ii) All steel items, bolts, nuts and washers shall be galvanised.

iii) 2.0% extra nuts and bolts shall be supplied for erection.

- 3 -

6.0 WELDING

The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawing which clearly indicate various details of joints to be welded, type of weld, length and size of weld, whether shop or site weld. Symbols for welding on erection and shop drawings shall be according to IS:813. Efforts shall be made to reduce site welding so as to avoid improper welding due to constructional difficulties.

7.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS 7.1 Foundation bolts for the towers and equipment supporting structures and

elsewhere shall be embedded in first stage concrete while the foundation is cast. The Contractor shall ensure the proper alignment of these bolts to match the holes in the base plate.

7.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct alignment and leveling of all

steel work on site to ensure that the towers/ structures are plumb. 7.3 All foundation bolts for lattice structures are to be supplied by the Contractor. 7.4 All foundation bolts shall be fully galvanised so as to achieve 0.61 kg per Sq.m of

Zinc Coating as per specification. 8.0 STABILITY OF STRUCTURE

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of the structure art all stages of its erection at site and shall take all necessary measures by the additions of temporary bracing and guying to ensure adequate resistance to wind and also to loads due to erection equipment and their operations.

9.0 GROUTING

The method of grouting the column bases shall be subject to approval of HVPNL and shall be such as to ensure a complete uniformity of contact over the whole area of the steel base. The Contractor will be fully responsible for the grouting operations.

10.0 GALVANISING 10.1 All structure steel works and single pipe supports shall be galvanised after

fabrication. 10.2 Zinc required for galvanising shall have to be arranged by the manufacturer.

Purity of zinc to be used shall be 99.5% as per IS:209 (latest).

- 4 -

10.3 The Contractor shall be required to make arrangement for frequent inspection by the HVPNL as well as continuous inspection by a resident representative of the HVPNL, if so desired for fabrication work.

11.0 INSPECTION BEFORE DISPATCH

Each part of the fabricated steel work shall be inspected and certified by the HVPNL of his authorised representative as satisfactory before it is dispatched to the erection site. Such certificate shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility regarding adequacy and completeness of fabrication.

12.0 TEST CERTIFICATE

Copies of all test certificate relating to material procured by the Contractor works shall be forwarded to the HVPNL.

13.0 ERECTION

The Contractor should arrange his own erection plant and equipment, welding set, tools and tackles, scaffolding, trestles equipment etc. and any other accessories and ancillaries required for the work.

14.0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

The Contractor shall strictly follow at all stages of fabrication, transportation and erection of steel structures, raw materials and other tools and tackles, the stipulations contained in Indian Standard Code for erection for structural steel work – IS:7205.

- 1 -

G-8

SECTION-9

CIVIL WORKS 1.0 GENERAL

The intent of specification covers the following: Design, Engineering, Construction of all specified Civil Works of the proposed substation covered under the scheme. All Civil Works shall also satisfy the general technical requirements specified in other sections of this specification and as detailed below. All the specified designs shall be carried out to the required service conditions/loads as specified elsewhere in the specifications or implied as per National/International Standards and as specified by manufacturers.

All Civil Works shall be carried out as per applicable Indian Laws, latest Standards and Codes. All material shall be of best quality conforming to relevant Indian Standards and Codes. The successful bidder shall furnish all design, (unless otherwise specified), drawings, labour, tools, equipment, material, temporary works, construction plant and machinery, supply fuel, transportation and all other incidental items not shown or specified but are required for complete performance of the works in accordance with approved drawings, specifications and direction of HVPNL.

The 66kV Switch House Building drawings both Architectural & structural have been supplied by HVPNL. The successful Bidder, however , has to ensure that Architectural Drawings of GIS block evolved by him are as per architectural drawing of 66kV Switch house Building and get the same approved from HVPNL. After approval of the Architectural Drawings, the successful Bidder will evolve foundation/structural design & drawings of the GIS block including common wall of 66kV Switch House Building & GIS block (if 66kV Switch House Building wall is to be used as a common wall) and will get the design /drawings so evolved / developed counter- checked from some reputed professional institute like IIT, NIT, PEC Chandigarh etc. and submit the same for approval of HVPNL. The design/drawing so approved shall become the property of the Nigam and the Nigam shall be free to use these designs/drawings at any of its upcoming/future station. For all structures, buildings, foundations etc. necessary layout and details shall be developed by the bidder keeping in view the functional requirement of the sub-station facilities and providing enough space and access for operation, use and maintenance based on the input provided by the HVPNL. Certain minimum requirements are indicated in this specification for guidance purposes only. However, the bidders shall quote considering all the requirements essential for functional purposes.

- 2 -

All the civil works covered under the said scheme shall be constructed under the supervision of experienced degree holder civil engineers.

- 3 -

2.0 SOIL DATA

For the guidance of the bidders, the general soil data around proposed sub-station is specified below.

Type of soil : Normal soil Dry bulk density : 1600 kg/m2 Angle of internal friction : 28° Cohesion : 00 Safe allowable B.C : 10t/m2 (F.O.S=2.5) Depth of water table : Below 6M from N.S.L

2.1 GENERAL SITE DESCRIPTION

The proposed site is generally leveled and may require some cutting/filling. As the formation level of sub-stations are generally kept at higher level than its surroundings, the bidders are, advised to visit the sites before quoting to access earth filling. The approx. quantity of earth filing is provided in the schedule of quantity.

2.2 The soil data mentioned above shall be used for designing the

equipment structure foundations. Minimum depth of foundation in natural ground shall not be less than 0.5 meter excluding lean concrete except for trenches, the depth of which may vary as per site requirements.

2.3 SITE PREPARATION

The site as available shall be handed over to the selected bidder. Clearing of the site from bushes/trees including its roots shall be carried out by the Contractor. The HVPNL, if required, shall arrange necessary permission for cutting of trees from the concerned authorities. The Contractor shall hand over the wood of trees to the HVPNL.

The Contractor shall prepare the `CONTOURS` of land at suitable intervals. The spot levels shall be taken at a distance not more the 5.0M intervals. The contours shall extend to sufficient distance (approx. 50M) around the land and main road in front of land and any other important existing feature to give a fair idea about topography of the area. On submission of contour plan by the successful bidder and based on the surroundings, drainage condition etc., the HVPNL shall fix the Formation Level which is generally fixed somewhat higher than the surroundings. The contractor, as per specifications shall carry out the necessary earth cutting/filling (spreading) as per site requirements, leveling, compaction and dressing to reach the desired formation level. The contractor at his own cost shall make the layout and levels of all structures/buildings as per the general grid of the plot and the Benchmark given by the HVPN.

The permanent Benchmark and all the change points shall be established at the proposed site and the same shall be got authenticated before taking any further levels. The contractor shall

- 4 -

provide all help including instruments, materials and personnel to the HVPN or his representative for checking the detailed layout and shall solely be responsible for the correctness of the layouts and levels.

3.0 SCOPE

This clause covers the design, engineering, supply of labour, material and execution of civil items including dismantling of the existing foundations/structures wherever required, clearing the site, earth cutting/filling wherever required, site preparation, supply and compaction of fill material to achieve formation level, foundations, excavation and compaction of backfill for foundation, roads, trenches including trenches below floors in buildings etc., retaining wall, (complete job).

3.1 WATER SAMPLE

Representative samples of ground water shall be taken when ground water is first encountered before addition of water to aid drilling of boreholes. The collected samples shall be of sufficient quantity and shall be stored in air-tight containers so that chemical analysis of water for use in concrete and curing could be carried out.

3.2 GENERAL 3.2.1 Material including excavated material unsuitable for founding of

foundations shall be removed and replaced by suitable fill material and the same is required to be got approved from the HVPNL.

3.2.2 Fill/Backfill material around foundations or other works shall be free

from harmful salts viz. sulphates, chlorides and or any organic/inorganic materials. The Fill/Backfill material should be compacted as described under clause 3.4.

3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 3.3.1 Excavation and backfill for foundations shall be in accordance with the

relevant IS code and as per approved design/drawings. 3.3.2 Whenever water table/seepage water is met during excavation, it shall

be dewatered and foundation pit shall be maintained dry i.e. free of water during the excavation, concreting and back filling. No extra payment on this count shall be admissible.

3.3.3 When embankments are to be constructed on slopes of 15% or

greater, benches or steps with horizontal and vertical faces shall be cut in the original slope prior to placements of embankment material. The vertical faces shall measure not more than 1.0 m in height.

3.3.4 Embankments adjacent to abutments, culverts, retaining walls and

similar structures shall be constructed by compacting the material not exceeding 15cm in thickness of loose material before compaction in successive uniform horizontal layers. Each layer shall be compacted as required by means of mechanical tempers approved by the HVPNL.

- 5 -

Rocks larger than 10 cm shall not be placed in embankment adjacent to structures.

3.3.5 Earth embankments of roadways and site areas adjacent to buildings

shall be placed in successive uniform horizontal layers not exceeding 20 cm in thickness in loose stage measurements and compacted to the full width specified. The upper surface of the embankment shall be shaped so as to provide complete drainage of surface water at all times.

3.3.6 In case the switchyard area needs leveling & dressing only, to maintain

the final formation level as fixed by HVPNL, same shall be done with utmost care and with proper compaction. If the top crest of earth (30 cm depth) is containing harmful salts and organic/inorganic materials or excessive earth, it shall be scraped and disposed off at a place as directed by HVPN.

3.3.7 To achieve formation level, the elevated earth, wherever required, shall

be cut and spread in layers and compacted, as prescribed in IS codes and clause 3.4, in the low lying areas. Nothing shall be paid on this account. Only the earth brought from outside after using sub-station’s surplus earth, if any, for achieving formation levels of sub-station including beneath roads within and outside the sub-station area, shall only be paid.

3.4 COMPACTION 3.4.1 The method and equipment used to compact the fill material shall be

suitable to achieve the density that will give the allowable soil bearing pressure required for the foundations, roads etc. in each layer of fill material. Each layer of earth embankment when compacted shall be as close to optimum moisture content as practicable. Embankment material that does not contain sufficient moisture to obtain proper compaction shall be wetted. If the material contains excess moisture, then it shall be allowed to dry before rolling. The rolling shall begin at the edges overlapping half the width of the roller each time and progress to the center of the road or towards the building as applicable. Rolling will also be required on rock fills. No compaction shall be carried out in rainy season/during rains.

3.4.2 At all times, the unfinished construction shall have adequate drainage.

Upon completion of the road's surface course, adjacent shoulders shall be given a final shaping, true alignment and grade.

3.4.3 The density to which fill materials shall be compacted shall be as per

relevant IS and as per direction of HVPNL. All compacted sand filling shall be confined as far as practicable. Backfilled earth shall be compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard Proctor's density at Optimum Moisture Content (OMC). The sub-grade for the roads and embankment filling shall be compacted to minimum 95% of the Standard Proctor's density at OMC.

- 6 -

3.5 EARTH CUTTING

To maintain the formation level (FL), wherever required the Contractor will cut the earth and use (spread) the same within the sub-station area requiring filling as per directions of HVPN.

4.0 SITE SURFACING 4.1 SCOPE OF WORK

The contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete performance of the work in accordance with the drawings, Specification and direction of the HVPN. Stone spreading along with cement concrete layer shall be done in areas presently in the scope of the scheme. Stone spreading only shall, however, be provided in the areas (bays) kept for future expansion.

4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT 4.2.1 The material required for site surfacing/gravel filling should be free from

all types of organic materials and shall be of standard approved quality as directed by the HVPN.

4.2.2 The material to be used for stone filing/site surfacing shall be

crushed/broken stone of 40mm nominal size (ungraded single size) conforming to table 2 of IS: 383 – 1970. Hardness, flakiness shall be as required for wearing courses are given below:-

a) Sieve Analysis Limits (Gradation) (IS: 383 – Table – 2) Sieve Size % passing by weight 63mm 100 40mm 85-100

20mm 0-10 (upto 90% retained on sieve)

One Test shall be conducted for every 500 cum per source. b) Hardness

Abrasion Value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) – not more than 40% Impact value (IS: 2386 Part-IV) – not more than 30%

One test per 500 cum with a minimum of one test per source.

4.2.3 The Contractor, after all the structures and equipment have been erected and accepted, shall furnish and install the site surfacing to the lines and grades as shown in the drawing and in accordance with the requirements and direction of the HVPN. The site shall be maintained to the lines and grades indicated in the drawing by using 3 ton roller with suitable water sprinklers to form a smooth and compact surface condition which shall match with finished ground level of the switchyard area.

- 7 -

4.2.4 100mm thick base layer of cement concrete in 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4 fine aggregates conforming to zone-II as per IS:583: 8 coarse aggregate nominal size 20MM) shall be provided in the areas excluding roads, drains, cable trenches as per detailed engineering drawing. For easy drainage of water, the slope of 1:1000 is to be provided from the ridge to the nearest drain. The ridge shall be suitably located at the centre of the area between the nearest drains. The above slope shall be provided at the top of base layer of cement concrete in 1:4:8. A layer of cement slurry of mix 1:4 (1 cement: 4 fine aggregates) shall be laid uniformly over cement concrete layer. The cement consumption for cement slurry shall not be less than 150kg per 100 sq.m. 20mm single size coarse aggregate should be used for base concrete.

4.2.5 The sub grade shall be in moist condition at the time the cement

concrete is placed. If necessary, it should be saturated with water for not less than 6 hours but not exceeding 20 hours before placing of cement concrete. If it becomes dry prior to the actual placing of cement concrete, it shall be sprinkled with water and it shall be ensured that no pools of water or soft patches are formed on the surface.

4.2.6 Areas where the HVPNL is satisfied that proper filling of the base

course material by normal rolling equipment is not possible due to closely laid foundations and structures, the filling of the base course material shall be compacted by hand. Due care shall be exercised to avoid any damage to the foundations, structures, equipments (Cable trench or Cable) during rolling compaction or otherwise.

4.2.7 A final layer of 100mm thick uncrushed /crushed/broken stone of 40mm

nominal size (ungraded size) shall be spread uniformly over cement concrete layer after curing is complete.

4.2.8 Generally site surfacing will be restricted upto 2.0m beyond the last

structure/equipment foundation. However, depending upon the site requirement, the same shall be carried out as per instructions of HVPN. To hold the stone (bajri) wherever required, a toe wall of 115mm thick, 300mm deep (1:4) shall be provided. Top of wall shall be 25mm above top of bajri. All visible portion of toe wall shall be plastered and cement painted.

5.0 SITE DRAINAGE

SCOPE

Adequate site drainage system shall be provided by the Contractor within the switchyard fencing under the present scope including house building & connection at one or more points to the outfall point located outside the substation boundary wall is in the scope of contractor. Invert level of drainage system at outfall point shall be decided in such a way that the water can easily be discharged outside the substation boundary wall. Outfall point shall be got approved from HVPN before commencement of construction. The contractor shall obtain rainfall data and design the storm water drainage system including culverts, ditches, drains etc. to accommodate the most intense rainfall that is likely to occur over the catchments area in one hour period on an

- 8 -

average of once per ten years. While designing the drainage system following points shall taken care of:

5.1 The surface of the switchyard shall be sloped to prevent pounding of water.

5.2 Longitudinal slope shall generally be not less than 1 in 1000. However,

keeping in view the discharge, the same can be increased to 1:2000. 5.3 RCC pipe drains shall be provided in area of switch yard where

movement of crane will be necessary in operating phase of the substation.

5.4 For pipe drains, RCC concrete pipe of class NP3 shall be used.

However, for road crossings rail crossings etc., RCC pipes of class NP4 shall be provided. For design of RCC pipes for drains and culverts, IS; 456 and IS: 783 shall be followed.

5.5 Pipe drains shall be connected through manholes at an interval of max.

30m. 5.6 Sum pit of suitable size to hold water for 5 minutes discharge has to be

constructed within the substation boundary at suitable site as per HVPNL’s drawing & directions of HVPN.

5.7 The drainage scheme and associated drawings shall be designed for

HVPNL approval before commencement of work. 5.8 Two non clog pumps (of reputed make) and of suitable capacity

(depending upon maximum discharge and capable of lifting particle size 65mm) shall be provided by the contractor without any extra cost at sum pit.

6.0 RAINWATER HARVESTING. 6.1 In addition to drainage of rainwater in accordance with clause 5.0 of

section civil of Technical specification, the contractor shall make arrangement for rainwater harvesting also as per drawing supplied by the HVPNL with the bid document.

6.2 Rainwater harvesting shall be done by providing two numbers recharge

structures with bore wells. The recharge structures shall be suitably located within the sub-station. Branch drains from the main drain carrying rainwater from entire switchyard, constructed in accordance with clause 5.0, shall be connected to the recharge structures.

6.3 The internal diameter of recharge shafts shall be 3.0 meter as per

HVPNL drawing with 230mm thick lining of brick work upto a depth of 2.0 meter from ground level and 345mm thick brickwork below 2.0 meter depth. The brickwork shall be constructed with cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand). The overall depth of shaft shall be 5.0 meter below invert level of drain. The shaft shall be covered with RCC slab for a live load of 300kg per sq m. Two openings of size 0.7x0.7 meter shall be provided in the RCC cover slab as shown in the

- 9 -

drawing. An iron cover made of 5mm thick chequerred plate with hinges shall be provided on the openings. Galvanized M.S. rungs of 20mm diameter at spacing of 300mm shall be provided in the wall of shaft below the opening in the RCC slab to facilitate cleaning of shaft.

6.4 A 300 mm diameter bore well shall be drilled in the centre of the shaft.

The depth of bore well shall be 5.0 meter more than the depth of sub soil water or as per directions of the HVPN.

6.5 A 150 mm dia. class 3 PVC pipe conforming to IS 4985-1981 with

latest revision shall be lowered in the bore well keeping bail plug towards bottom of bore well. The pipe shall have 1.58 mm holes for 4.0 meter length starting from 1.0 meter from bottom of bore well. Holes of 3.0 mm dia shall be provided for a length of 2.0 meter starting from the bottom level of coarse sand and down wards. The overall length of pipe shall be equal to total depth of bore well plus depth of shaft.

6.6 Gravel of size 3mm to 6mm shall be filled around 150 dia PVC pipe in

the bore well. The shaft shall be filled with 500mm thick layers each from the bottom of shaft with boulders of seize 50mm to 150mm, gravel of size 5mm to 10mm coarse sand having particle size 1.5mm to 2.0 mm and boulders of size not less than 200mm respectively.

7.0 ROAD, CULVERTS AND PCC PAVEMENT/PARKING:

Latest specifications as adopted by HVPNL for construction of roads and pavement shall be followed. Finished top (crest) of roads shall be as per tender drawings & levels shall match with the levels fixed by the HVPNL. SCOPE:

7.1 This clause covers the supply of labour and material for executing the

work for the road & design, engineering, supply of labour and material for providing culverts within the sub station fencing including approach road from main Public/Village road to the sub-station main entry gate(s) as contained in the General Electric layout (GELO)/Civil layout (CLO) or as per requirement of the Sub-Station covered under the said scheme.

7.2 The rates quoted shall be for constructions of roads as per attached

drawings, complete in all respect (except earth filling). Wherever earth cutting is involved no extra payment shall be made for it. However, layout of roads shall be as per General Electric layout (GELO)/Civil layout plan of the Sub-Station.

7.3 Adequate turning space for vehicles shall be provided and bend radii

shall be set accordingly. 7.4 All substation roads shall be constructed to permit transportation of all

heavy equipment. The main road leading to control room/switch yard/colony shall have a minimum 6m width with shoulder on either side (Refer drawing HCD/SK-181). The roads within the sub-station

- 10 -

shall be as per General Electric layout (GELO)/Civil layout (CLO) and as per above referred drawing. The shoulders/footpath/side-walk should be provided with pre-cast kerbs on either side of the road. The top edge of the kerbs shall be battered. The kerb stones with top 20cm wide shall be laid with their length running parallel to the road edge, true in line and gradient at a distance of 30cm from the road edge to allow for the channel and shall project about 12.5cm above the latter. The channel stones with top 30cm wide shall be laid in position in camber with finished road surface and with sufficient slope towards the road gully chamber. The joints of kerb and channel stones shall be staggered and shall not be more than 10mm. Wherever specified all joints shall be filled with mortar 1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand) and pointed with mortar 1:2 (1 cement:2 fine sand) which shall be cured for 7 days. The kerb should be painted as per directions of HVPN.

The necessary drainage openings of specified sizes shall be made through the kerb as per drawings or as directed by the HVPN for connecting to storm water drains. Top of the shoulders/footpath/side-walk shall be provided with 20mm thick precast chequred tiles made in ordinary grey cement without chips laid on bed of 100mm coarse sand, PCC 1:8:16 (100mm thick) and 20mm thick bed of cement coarse sand mortar 1:3 with neat cement slurry between joints as per PWD specifications.

7.5 Adequate provision shall be made for road drainage. 7.6 The rate of camber on a cement concrete surfacing shall be 1 in 72

unless otherwise provided. 7.7 The base sub-grade is to be consolidated with power road roller of 8

Tons to 12 Tons (Roller shall pass a minimum of 5 runs on sub-grade). The roller shall run over the sub-grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and behaves as elastic mass. All undulations in the surface that develop due to rolling shall be made good with quarry spoils and sub grade is re-rolled.

7.8 The coarse aggregate used shall be crushed or broken stone or any

naturally occurring aggregates such as kankar, laterites of suitable quality shall conform to the physical requirements as given below:

Los Angeles Abrasion value (Max) 50% (IS: 2386 (Part-IV)) Aggregate Impact Value (Max) 40% (IS: 2386 (Part-IV) or IS: 5640) Flakiness Index (Max) 10% (IS: 2386 (Part-I)

The crushed or broken stone shall be hard, durable and free from excess flat, longated, soft and disintegrated particles, the 100mm thick & 75mm thick. Soling aggregates shall conform to following grading respectively.

- 11 -

GRADE SIZE

SIEVE DESIGNATION PERCENT BY WT. PASSING

95 to 45 125mm 100 90mm 90-100 63mm 25-60 45mm 0-15 22.4 mm 0-5

GRADE SIZE

SIEVE DESIGNATION PERCENT BY WT. PASSING

63 to 45 90mm 100 63mm 90-100 53mm 25-75 45mm 0-15 22.4mm 0-5

13.2 13.2 mm 100 11.2 mm 95-100 5.6mm 15-35

180 micron 0.10

7.9 The base shall be constructed, to have as nearly as practicable a

uniform bearing power throughout its entire width and to conform to the line, grade and cross-section, shown in the drawing enclosed with the document. Where existing road is to be widened every precaution shall be taken to ensure that there would be no differential settlement between the old surface and the newly added strip.

7.10 The base course shall be extended on either side to at least 15 cm (for

switch yard roads) beyond the edge of the concrete pavement. The base course shall be prepared at least 2 days in advance of concreting.

7.11 The side forms shall be made of metal of approved section having a

thickness not less than 5 mm and shall have a depth equal to the specified thickness of the slab. They shall be provided with an efficient locking device to ensure continuity of line and level through joints and with steel pins to hold them in position. Building up of forms shall not be permitted. Flexible or curved forms of proper radius shall be used for curves of 30 meters radius or less. Forms shall not deflect more than 6mm. when tested as a simple beam with a span of 3 meters and a load equal to that which is expected upon them during construction. Forms shall be at least 7.5 cm wide at the base and shall be free from wrap, bends or kinks. The top of the form shall not vary from a 3 meters straight edge by more than 3 mm at any point and the side of the form by more than 6 mm.

7.12 The base under the form shall be compacted and cut to grade so that

the forms, when set, shall be uniformly supported for their entire length and at the specified elevation. Surface found to be below established grade at the form line shall be filled to grade in lifts of 12mm or less and thoroughly re-levelled or tamped

7.13 Forms shall be set over length presenting 2 days work in advance of

the point where concrete is being proposed to be placed and shall be cleaned and oiled prior to the placing of concrete. Forms shall remain

- 12 -

in place for at least 12 hours after placing the concrete. If the air temperature is below 100C at any time during 12 hours period from the time the concrete is placed, forms shall not be removed until 30 hours after placing of the concrete. While using the device, care shall be taken not to damage the edge of the concrete or of the form. Forms shall be cleaned for reuse immediately after striking. They shall be handled with care and in no circumstances shall be dropped or struck with heavy hammers to remove adhering concrete.

7.14 After the base has been approved by the HVPN, it shall be sprinkled

with water and kept moist to prevent the absorption of water from the concrete. If so required by the HVPN, it shall be saturated with water previous night for not less than 6 hours previous to placing of the concrete. The method of sprinkling of water shall not be such as to form mud or pools of water. No concrete shall be placed around man-holes for other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and camber.

7.15 The concrete to be placed shall conform to M-20 grade design mix. For

small works, nominal mix of 1:1½:3 may be used for which specific approval shall be obtained by the successful bidder. The concrete shall be distributed to such depth that when consolidated and finished, the slab thickness obtained is equal at all points and no surface is below the specified level at any point. The un-compacted concrete will be placed keeping the surface slightly higher than the top of the forms; the amount of surcharge depending upon the consistency of the concrete.

7.16 The concrete shall be deposited on the prepared base for the required

width, in such a manner as to require as little re-handling as possible. Concrete shall be placed at the working face as provided in the code. Necessary hand-spreading shall be done with shovels and not with rakes.

7.17 For large works, concrete shall be compacted by vibrators. However,

for small works hand-tamping shall be allowed at the discretion of the HVPN.

7.18 The slab is laid continuously in strips/alternate between longitudinal

joints. Ends of slabs should be painted with bitumen before the intermediate bays are filled in.

7.19 After belting and as soon as surplus water, if any, has risen to the

surface, the pavement shall be given a broom finish, with an approved steel or fibre broom not less than 50cm wide. The broom shall be pulled gently over the surface of the pavement from edge to edge. Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall be perpendicular to the centre line of the pavement and so executed that the corrugations thus produced will be uniform in character and width, and not more than 1.5mm deep. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete reaches such as stage that the surface is likely to be torn or unduly roughened by the operation. The broomed surface shall be free from porous or rough spots, irregularities depression etc.

- 13 -

7.20 Immediately after the final set has taken place, the surface of the finished concrete shall be kept covered with moist gunny bags for the first 24 hours. The gunny bags shall then be removed and the grooves in the transverse expansion and contraction joints shall be sealed temporarily. The surface shall then be cured for at least 14 days by pounding to a depth of about 7.5 cm or by covering with not less than 7.5cm layer of wet earth. The earth cover shall be kept wet continuously during the whole curing period. At the expiry of the curing period, the surface shall be cleaned of all earth etc.

7.21 Forms shall not be removed from freshly placed concrete until it has

set for at least 24 hours. They shall be so carefully removed and in such a manner that no damage will be done to the edge of the pavement. After the forms have been removed, the ends of all joints shall be cleaned, after which the sides of the slab shall be covered with earth to the level of the top of the slab.

7.22 The finished concrete road shall not be opened to traffic till after the

expiry of 4 weeks and till all the joints have been sealed, as specified above.

7.23 The expansion joints shall not be more than 20mm. For filling the joints,

either pre-moulded or poured types of filers as described below may be used. (a) Sand 60%; asphalt 30%; saw-dust 7%; cement 3%. (b) 80kg of hot bitumen; 1 kg cement; 0.25 cum of coarse sand.

7.24 Joints should not be sealed while the concrete is still green or when it is damp. The sealing compound shall be heated until it is fluid enough to pour easily into the joint. Rubberised compositions shall not be heated above 1800. Preparation of base, lying of concrete/joints etc. shall conform to the Indian Standard Specifications.

7.25 Cement concrete paving/parking shall be provided on front, rear &

sides, if any of Switch House Building as per drawing No. HCD/SK-172. The concrete blocks shall be of size 4’×6’. The blocks shall be casted in situ alternatively but after 48hrs. No gap is to be left between the panels. Top surface be left rough but should be in level. Suitable slope of earth for drainage of rainwater be provided.

7.26 RCC pipe culverts shall be provided at appropriate location(s) in the

roads as per site requirement. The culverts shall be of one or two pipes (750mm i/d) as per situation. The exact location, number and diameter of RCC pipe shall be decided by the HVPN. The design of culvert shall be as per IRC standards for class ‘A’ loading. The design data, contours and details required for design of culvert shall be submitted by the successful bidder along with the design/drawing to HVPNL for approval.

7.27 The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines, grades

and typical X-section shown in the approved drawing.

- 14 -

8.0 TRANSFORMER FOUNDATION

The transformer foundation plinth for placing the transformer shall be constructed as per HVPNL drawing alongwith associated radiator foundations etc. as per below mentioned specifications: The transformer foundation plinth for placing the transformer shall be of RCC having minimum Grade M-20 laid on base concrete (1:4:8) of minimum thickness 100 mm. Foundation shall be designed for the equipment load requirements of transformer including impact load equivalent to 15% of total transformer load including oil etc. or total Jacking Load whichever is more. The top of plinth i.e. top of rail level shall match with height of tractor-trailer used for transporting the transformer (minimum 750-mm from top of road). The plinth shall extend upto edge of road for perfect movement from trailer to plinth and vice-versa. Suitable arrangement for shifting the transformer from trailer like jacking etc. wherever required shall be made in plinth and in front of plinth on the road.

The space between the tract rails of the transformer plinth if any, shall be suitably filled with compacted sand and 50-mm thick PCC of grade 1:2:4 laid on 75-mm thick base concrete (1:5:10) placed over compacted earth filling. The top of PCC shall be minimum 300-mm above the formation level of switchyard. Adequate drainage outlets shall be provided and necessary slopes given to drain off rain water/oil. The deep beam/wall having rails at top shall be of minimum thickness as 300 mm and suitably restrained at ends by beam/ wall of same thickness.

The rails shall be fresh, first quality 52-kg/meter medium manganese steel as per Indian railway specification T-12-64 and its subsequent revisions. Suitable arrangement shall be made to maintain the rail gauge. Suitable foundations shall be provided for all auxiliary equipment of the transformer like radiators, fan supports etc. as required. The work of Transformer foundation shall be taken in hand only after approval of transfer equipment drawing and the transformer plinth foundation shall match the equipment drawing. In case additional foundations (other than as provided in the HVPNL drawing) are required to be constructed, the same shall be constructed by the successful bidder without any extra cost to HVPNL. Such additional foundations shall be got approved from HVPNL before construction.

8.2 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATION The cable trench to transformer shall terminate outside transformer pit.

The cables leading to various components of transformer shall pass through GI pipes supported suitably in transformer pit.

- 15 -

9.0 CABLE & PIPE TRENCHES SCOPE 9.1 The cable trenches shall be provided in switchyard and inside the

switch house building and GIS block to carry the control cables etc. wherever required. The layout and size of Cable trenches in switchyard area shall be as approved by the HVPNL and detailed in floor plan/ GELO as applicable for indoor and outdoor cables. The construction of trenches for various sizes shall be as per detailed drawing attached with the tender. The size of cable trenches in GIS block building, if required shall be developed by the successful bidder and approved by HVPNL based on the requirements of panels to be provided. Since there will be level difference in formation levels of S/Yard & plinth level of S/House and GIS block buildings, the trenches have to be in proper slope/stair.

9.2 Trenches shall be of reinforced cement concrete of M-20 grade. MS

angle 50x50x6mm welded with MS flat 50x6mm – 75mm long @1 meter c/c to hold the angle shall be provided on top of the trench walls for protection of the edges.

9.3 RCC cable trenches and precast removable RCC covers enclosed by

suitable MS angles for edge protection in respect of switch yard trenches (with lifting arrangement) shall be designed to withstand self weight of top slab + concentrated load of 150kg at center of span on each panel.

9.4 7mm thick chequred plates with lifting arrangement the bottom of which

shall be welded with MS Angle 65x65x6 mm for holding the plates shall be provided over the indoor cable trenches.

9.5 Medium weight channels (ISMC) of 75x40mm shall be provided @

600mm across the indoor cable trenches to support the chequred plates. The length of chequred plates shall be 600mm except at the ends/bends.

9.6 The cables shall be placed on hard wood supported on steel racks of

MS Angles 50x50x6 (grouted in the RCC walls) spaced 1.0-m c/c. The ends of the horizontal MS angles should be fixed with suitable angle (by welding at 900) to hold the cables. All the racks (MS angles) shall be painted with anti corrosive paint.

9.7 The top of trenches shall be kept at least 25mm above the gravel level.

The top of cable trench shall be such that the surface rain water do not enter the trench.

9.8 All metal parts inside the trench shall be connected to the earthing

system. 9.9 Trench wall shall not foul with the foundations. Cable trenches shall be

blocked at the ends (if required for future extensions) with brick masonry 1:6 in cement sand mortar and this brick masonry work shall be plastered from both sides with cement sand mortar 1:4.

- 16 -

9.10 The trench bed shall have a slope of 1/500 along the run & 1/250

perpendicular to the run. In case straight length exceeds 30m, suitable expansion joint shall be provided at appropriate space. The expansion joint shall run through vertical wall and base of trench. All expansion joints shall be provided with approved quality PVC water stops of approx. 230x5 mm size.

9.11 Suitable box culvert (Single span or multi spans) shall be provided for

any road crossing. The box culvert shall extend 1.5 m on each side of road and shall have 230-mm wide, 500mm high brick parapet wall at ends. If required, the bed of trench on both sides of culvert shall have to be lowered in slope, in 1.5 m length to meet the bed of culvert.

9.12 Necessary sumps shall be provided at suitable places as per direction

of HVPNL and each sump shall be provided with pumps of 1 HP capacity with all accessories shall be supplied for pumping out water collected in the cable trenches. Cable trenches shall not be used as storm water drains. Man hole shall be provided at interval of not more than 30 meters. This clause shall be applicable as per site requirement.

10.0 FOUNDATION FOR RCC CONSTRUCTION (GENERAL) 10.1 Work covered under this clause comprises the design, engineering,

supply and construction of foundations and other RCC constructions for switchyard structures, equipment supports, trenches, drains, jacking pad, crane hoisting, pulling block, control cables, bus supports, transformers marshalling kiosks, auxiliary equipment system buildings or for any other equipment or service and any other foundation required to complete the work. This clause is as well applicable to other RCC constructions.

10.2 In case of overlapping of foundations in switchyard area, deeper

foundation shall be constructed first. The foundations resting on filled up soil, the fill material under foundation/trenches shall be such that the maximum pressure from the footing transferred through fill material will not exceed the allowable soil bearing pressure of original undistributed soil.

10.3 In case earth filling is involved due to high fixation of formation level, all

foundation shall rest below virgin ground level and the minimum depth excluding lean concrete of all foundations below virgin ground level shall not be less than 500mm.

10.4 All the properties of concrete regarding its strength under compression,

tension, shear, punching and bond strength etc. as well as workmanship will conform to IS: 456.

10.5 The concrete used as lean concrete or base concrete under the

structure/equipment/trench etc. foundations shall be minimum 100 mm thick (1:4:8) irrespective of any thickness or grade of concrete mentioned on drawings. The aggregate size shall be 20mm nominal for 100mm thickness and 40mm nominal for thickness more than 100mm. Base concrete shall be well compacted. The top surface of base

- 17 -

concrete shall be leveled before placing the reinforcement. During excavation if excavation exceeds than the required depth or if any loose pocket of earth is met below the base then the loose earth shall be removed or excavation depth be increased till normal hard soil is met as per satisfaction of HVPN. This extra depth shall be filled with lean concrete. No extra shall be payable an account of this extra excavation and lean concrete.

10.6 If the site is sloppy, the foundation height will be adjusted to maintain

the exact level of the top of structures to compensate such slopes. 10.7 The Switch Yard foundations shall be 100mm above the finished

ground level or as per the manufacturers design. The plinth level of the control room-cum-Administrative building shall be minimum 500mm above the finished ground level. Keeping in view the surroundings, plinth level of building shall be decided by the HVPNL.

10.8 The design and detailing of foundations shall be done based on the

approved soil data and sub-soil conditions as well as for all possible critical loads and the combinations thereof. The spread or pile foundation may be required based on soil/sub-soil conditions and superimposed loads.

10.9 The cement concrete used for foundation shall be of grade M-20

(irrespective of any grade mentioned on the drawings). The mix-design (conforming to IS-Standards) shall be done prior to start of work, as per specifications, got approved from HVPNL and shall be used for the construction, provided there is no change in the source and the quality of materials. The source of material shall be intimated to the HVPNL and shall be ensured that Mix design is with the materials from intimated source only and it is not changed during construction. In case source of material changes or quality of material differs from the earlier approved parameters the Mix design shall be done again.

10.10 The Coarse aggregate used shall be of 20 mm graded or two types of

single size aggregate mixed in some fixed ratio to have graded 20mm aggregate. The Coarse aggregate shall conform to IS 383.

10.11 Grading of Fine aggregate shall conform to Zone-II of Table - 4 of IS:

383 and shall be free from deleterious materials. 10.12 The environmental exposure condition considered for mix design shall

be MILD. 10.13 For Mix-design, the degree of quality control shall be considered as

FAIR. 10.14 The Water cement ratio shall be minimum 0.50 and maximum 0.55. 10.15 The minimum slump shall be 25mm and maximum 75mm.

- 18 -

10.16 For Volumetric use of ingredients for concrete mix, the contractor shall intimate the size of measuring boxes along with the Mix-design.

10.17 Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) of Grade 43 conforming to IS: 8112

manufactured by major cement manufacturer shall be used. 10.18 The water used for preparing concrete and for curing purpose shall be

fresh, clean and free from oil, acids and alkalis, organic materials or suspended or other deleterious substances. Saltish or brackish water shall not be used. Water used for construction & curing etc. shall be conforming to requirements of IS: 456 Clause 5.4. Contractor shall arrange at his own cost sufficient quantity and good quality water for construction and curing and other purposes.

10.19 No admixtures shall be used except water proofing cement additives

conforming to IS 2645 with the approval of the HVPNL. 10.20 Reinforcement steel (including TMT) Bars manufactured by main

producers or their authorized rerollers in India or abroad shall be used and certificates in this regard shall be submitted by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of the HVPNL. The steel used shall conform to IS: 1786 for deformed and cold twisted bars. Required grade of steel shall be Fe-415. All reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mill scale, dust, loose rust and coats of paint, oil or other coating, which may destroy or reduce bond with concrete. Reinforcement bars should be fresh. Bidder shall supply, fabricate and place reinforcement to shapes and dimensions as indicated on the drawings or as required to carry out the intent of drawings and specifications. Adequate nos. of chairs, spacers of required size shall be provided to ensure the proper placement of reinforcement. The reinforcement bars crossing one another should be tied together at every intersection with two strands of annealed steel wires 0.9 to 1.6 mm thick twisted and tied to make the skeleton of the steel work rigid so that the reinforcement does not get displaced during concrete placement.

All the reinforcement steel should be placed/ stacked at site store on raised (at least 0.5 meter from near surroundings) pucca/brick platform or reinforcement steel should be placed on MS/GI sheets. The reinforcement steel after stacking should be covered with Tarpaulin to avoid corrosion. Immediately before concreting (portion of reinforcement to be embedded in concrete) shall be painted with cement slurry after removing any rust/corrosion/any other foreign material. Overlaps in more than 30% of bars will not be allowed at a section. Fabricated Reinforcement bars shall be placed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed by HVPN.

10.21 The bars crossing one another shall be tied together at every

intersection with two strands of annealed steel wires 0.9 to 1.6mm dia. twisted and tied to make the skeleton of steel work rigid so that reinforcement does not get displaced during placement of concrete.

10.22 Two types of steel shall not be used.

- 19 -

10.23 All the foundation bolts used for equipment foundations & for main gantry tower foundations shall be galvanized.

10.24 The foundation bolts shall be embedded in concrete during concreting

and no grout holes shall be left for this purpose. 10.25 Excavation shall extend minimum 150 mm around foundation (from

RCC portion and not from lean concrete). 10.26 Proper shuttering & shoring shall be provided to support the excavated

earth face to avoid falling of earth. No extra charges shall be admissible for the removal of fallen earth in the pit, once excavated.

11.0 MIXING, PLACING AND COMPACTION OF CONCRETE 11.1 The concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. The mixer shall

comply with IS: 1791 & 12119. The mixer shall be fitted with water measuring devices.

11.2 Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of material

and the mix is uniform in colour and consistency. If there is segregation after unloading from mixer, the concrete should be re-mixed, but in no case the mixing shall be done close to the foundation, or place of work but in case it is not possible the concrete may be mixed at the nearest convenient place. From mixer, concrete shall be put on pucca platform or steel troughs, which shall be leak proof to avoid any loss of water/slurry. The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable, which shall prevent the segregation before any setting commences.

11.3 Proper shuttering shall be used for the construction of all type of

PCC/RCC works. Shuttering shall be rigidly tightened so that there are no distortions in the shape. Shuttering shall be made sufficiently strong to with stand all the loads and vibrations. Vibrators shall be used to ensure thorough compaction.

11.4 After the shuttering has been removed, if the concrete surface is found

to be slightly damaged, same shall be repaired with rich cement sand mortar to the satisfaction of the HVPNL's representative before the foundation pits are back-filled.

12.0 CURING

The concrete after setting for 24 hours shall be cured by keeping the concrete wet continuously for a period of 10 days (minimum) after laying. The foundation be back filled with selected good earth free from harmful salts, organic material, sprinkled with necessary amount of water and well consolidated in layers not exceeding 200 mm of consolidated thickness after a minimum period of 72 hours and thereafter both backfilled earth and exposed top shall be kept wet for the remainder of the prescribed curing time. The uncovered concrete portion above the backfilled earth or vertical columns etc. shall be kept wet by providing empty cement jute bags dipped in water fully wrapped around the concrete for curing and ensuring that the bags are kept wet

- 20 -

by the frequent pouring of water on them. In case Portland Pozzolona cement has been used, curing period shall be increased by HVPN.

13.0 DISMANTLING

The contractor wherever required, shall carry out dismantling & disposal of PCC/RCC upto a lead of 15 Km or as directed by the HVPN, to make space for the proposed structures in the new proposed bays of the Sub- Stations.

14.0 DESIGN 14.1 All the foundations except walls of switch house building, sum-pit etc.

shall be of Reinforced Cement Concrete. The design and construction of RCC structures shall be carried out as per IS: 456 and minimum grade of concrete shall be M-20 and the M-25 for water retaining structures. Higher grade of concrete than specified above may be used by the contractor at the discretion of HVPNL without any additional cost to the HVPNL.

14.2 Limit state method of design shall be adopted unless specified

otherwise in the specification/IS Codes. 14.3 For design and construction of steel-concrete composite beams IS:

11384 shall be followed. 14.4 For detailing of reinforcement, IS: 2502 and SP: 34 shall be followed.

Two layers of reinforcement (on inner and outer shall be provided for wall & slab sections) having thickness of 150 mm and above. Clear cover to reinforcement towards the earth face shall be minimum 50 mm and for other components, same shall be as per IS: 456.

14.5 The procedure used for design of the foundations shall be the most

critical loading combination of steel structure and or equipment and/or superstructure and other conditions, which produces the maximum stresses in the foundation or the foundation component and as per the relevant IS Codes of foundation design. The contractor, for approval of drawings shall submit detailed design calculations along with drawings.

14.6 Designer shall consider sub-soil water pressure that may be

encountered, following relevant standard strictly. 14.7 Necessary protection to the foundation work, if required shall be

provided to take care of any special requirements for aggressive alkaline soil, black cotton soil or any other type of soil which is detrimental/harmful to the concrete foundations without extra cost to the HVPNL.

14.8 RCC column shall be provided with rigid connection at the base. 14.9 All sub-structures shall be checked for sliding and overturning stability

during both construction and operating conditions for various combinations of loads. Factor of safety for these cases shall be taken as mentioned in relevant IS Codes or as stipulated elsewhere in the

- 21 -

specifications. For checking against overturning weight of soil vertically above footing shall be taken and inverted frustum of pyramid of earth on the foundation should not be considered. In case of trench passing above the footing base then for over turning only dead weight of trench shall be considered.

14.10 Earth pressure for all underground structures shall be calculated using

coefficient of earth pressure at rest, co-efficient of active or passive earth pressure (whichever is applicable). However, for the design of sub-structures of any underground enclosures, earth pressure at rest shall be considered.

14.11 In addition to earth pressure and ground water pressure etc. a

surcharge load of 2T/sq. m shall be considered for the design of all underground structures including channels, sumps, tanks, trenches, substructure of any underground hollow enclosure etc. for the vehicular traffic in the vicinity of the structure or otherwise.

14.12 Following conditions shall be considered for the design of water tank in

pumps house, channels, sumps and trenches and other underground structures.

a) Full water pressure from inside and no earth pressure and ground

water pressure & surcharge pressure from outside, (applicable only to structures which are liable to be filled up with water or any other liquid).

b) Full earth pressure, surcharge pressure from outside and no water pressure from inside.

c) For any water retaining structure or any member submerged in water the minimum grade and concrete shall be M-25.

d) Design shall also be checked against buoyancy due to the ground water during construction and maintenance stages. Minimum factor of safety of 1.5 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the super imposed loadings.

14.13 Base slab of the any underground enclosure like water storage tank

shall also be designed for empty condition during construction and maintenance stages with maximum ground water table (GWT) at 2.0 m. below ground level. Minimum factor of safety of 1.5 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the super-imposed loading. Intermediate dividing piers of such enclosures shall be designed considering water in one pump sump only & the other pumps sump being empty for maintenance.

14.14 The foundations shall be proportioned so that the estimated total and

differential movements of the foundations are greater than the movements that the structure or equipment is designed to accommodate.

14.15 The foundations of transformer/reactor and circuit breaker shall be of

block type foundation. Minimum reinforcement shall be governed by IS: 2974 and IS:456.

14.16 The tower and equipment foundations shall be checked for a factor of

safety of 2.2 for normal condition and 1.65 for short circuit condition

- 22 -

against sliding, overturning and pullout. The same factors shall be used as partial safety factor over loads in limit state design also.

14.17 MACHINE FOUNDATIONS:

a. All machine foundation shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of the relevant parts of the latest revisions of Indian standards IS: 2974, IS: 456 and IS: 2911. The provisions of DIN 4024 (latest) shall also be followed.

b. For the foundations of rotating machines, detailed static and dynamic analysis shall be done. A fatique factor of 2.0 shall be considered for dynamic forces. Minimum reinforcement shall be governed by IS: 2974 as well as IS: 456. RCC design shall be done by working stress method.

c. All block foundations resting on soil or piles shall be designed using he elastic half space theory. The mass of the RCC block shall not be less than three times the mass of the machine Dynamic analysis shall be carried out to calculate natural frequencies in all the modes including coupled modes and to calculate vibration amplitudes. Frequencies and amplitude criteria as laid down by the relevant IS codes and/or machine manufacturers shall be satisfied, minimum reinforcement shall be governed by IS: 2974 and IS: 456.

d. For the foundations supporting minor equipments weighting less than one ton or if the mass of the rotating parts is less than one-hundredth of the mass of the foundation, non dynamic analysis is necessary. However, is such minor equipment is to be supported on building structures, floors etc. suitable vibration isolation shall be provided by means of springs, neoprene pads etc. and such vibration isolation system shall be designed suitably.

15.0 OTHER FOUNDATIONS 15.1 All foundations shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of

the relevant parts of latest revisions of Indian Standards IS: 456 and other relevant Indian Standards.

15.2 Type of foundation system i.e. isolated footing or raft etc. shall be

decided based on the load intensity and soil strata.

16.0 BUILDINGS 16.1 GENERAL SCOPE

The Scope shall include construction of switch house building including providing anti-termite treatment, plinth protection DPC of building, sanitary, water supply, sintex/diplast polyvinyl tanks, electrification including supply and providing of 2T split high wall mounted/window ACs (as per electrical design requirement mentioned elsewhere) and 56” ceiling fans, 4ft. long CFL tubes with fittings modular switches, boxes, electric wire etc. as per architectural drawings, flooring, finishing items including acrylic emulsion and whether proof (exterior acrylic paint), anodized aluminium doors/windows/ventilators frames provided with 5.5mm thick glass, fire doors, indoor cable trenches with covers in

- 23 -

control room/battery room/ACDB/DCDB rooms etc. etc. complete in all respect. Scope also covers any other item required for the completion of building which has not been mentioned in the specification or in the drawings. HVPNL reserves the right to alter the finishing schedule and specifications, therefore, such changes will have no additional financial implication whatsoever to the HVPNL.

16.1.1 STORM WATER DRAINAGE FOR ALL BUILDINGS

The building drains shall be provided for the collection of storm water from the roofs. This water shall be collected in junction boxes and these boxes shall drain to the main drainage system of the station.

Cast iron rain water down comers conforming to IS: 1230 with water tight lead joints shall be provided to drain off the rain water from the roof. These shall be suitably concealed with masonry work of cement concrete or cladding material. The number and size of down comers shall be governed by IS: 1742 and IS: 2527.

All drains inside the buildings shall have minimum 40mm thick grafting covers and in areas where heavy equipment loads would be coming, pre-cast RCC covers shall be provided in place of steel grating.

For all buildings, suitable arrangement for draining out water collected from equipment blow down, leakage, floor washings fire fighting etc. shall be provided for each floor.

16.2 MATERIALS The brief requirement regarding various materials to be used for

construction of building are detailed below or specified in respective drawings. However, materials not specifically mentioned in the specifications/drawings, the same shall also conform to the relevant IS codes and got approved from the HVPNL before being used. The contractor shall remove from site any material not conforming of IS Standards or rejected by the representative of HVPNL/HVPN.

16.3 BRICKS AND TILES

The bricks used shall be first Class bricks of nominal size (22.86x11.11x6.83) cm so that every four courses shall measure 30.48 cm in height. A tolerance upto ± 6.5 mm in length ± 3.0 mm in width and ± 3.0 mm in thickness shall be permitted. The bricks shall be made from good brick earth free from efflorescence/kankar, thoroughly burnt and uniform deep red colour, regular in size and shape with parallel faces and sharp edges, homogenous in colour, free from flaws etc, and shall have all the qualities of a good brick. Bricks and tiles shall have ringing sound when struck with each other.

Bricks shall have a minimum crushing strength of 105 kg/per sq. cm and shall not absorb water more than 20% of its own dry weight after 24 hours immersion in cold water.

- 24 -

For tile terracing and tile facing, size of tile shall be (22.86x11.43x3.18) cm having permissible tolerance of IS Standards for length ± 3 mm, ± 3 mm for width and 1.5 mm for thickness.

16.4 SAND (FOR MASONRY MORTAR & PLASTER)

Sand for masonry work and plaster shall preferably consist of natural sand, However crushed stone sand or crushed gravel sand or a combination of any of them be used. Sand shall be hard, durable, clear and free from harmful impurities like iron pigments, mica salts, coal or other organic impurities. Grading of sand for use in masonry mortar shall be conforming to IS: 2116 and for use in plaster shall conform to IS: 1542 tabulated as below:

For mortar For Plaster IS Sieve Designation Percent passing by mass

10.0 mm - 100 4.75 mm 100 95 to 100 2.36 mm 90 to 100 95 to 100 1.18 mm 70 to 100 90 to 100

600 micron 40 to 100 80 to 100 300 micron 5 to 70 20 to 65 150 micron 0 to 15 0 to 50

The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities shall not exceed limits described in IS: 2386 (Part II). Clay, fine dust and silt in natural sand or crushed gravel sand or crushed stone sand not more then 5% by mass.

16.5 BRICK WORK

All brickwork shall strictly be according the specifications and notes specified in the drawings. All bricks shall be soaked in stacks by spraying clean water at regular intervals to keep them wet to the satisfaction of HVPN. Each brick shall be set (with frog upwards) with bed and vertical joints completely filled with mortar. Thickness of mortar joint shall be 6.25 mm and shall not be more than 9.4 mm. For exposed brickwork, bed joint will be 7.81 mm thick and vertical joint 6.28 mm.

All brickwork shall be true in plumb, straight edge, for exposed brickwork or face work bricks shall be selected for purpose. The face joints shall be duly racked to minimum depth of 13 mm when mortar is green for providing key to plaster or pointing. The mortar used for brick work/ plasterwork shall be machine mixed only.

All fixtures, doors/windows/CI pipes, outlet for water, hold fasts etc. which are required to be built/laid in brickwork shall be embedded simultaneously. Each day work done shall not be more than 1m in height and no portion of the work shall be left more than 1m lower than the other. The height of brick courses shall be kept uniform.

- 25 -

All the half brick thick walls shall be provided with 2 numbers - 6 mm bars at every fourth layer.

In case of difference in the natural ground level and formation level, no

extra payment on account of extra brick work whether in building or boundary wall shall be paid extra. The contractor may, therefore, visit the site before quoting rates for the brick work.

16.6 DAMP PROOF COURSE

On outer walls horizontal DPC shall be provided at level with plinth protection and on inner face vertical DPC 20 mm thick, shall be provided. On all inner walls horizontal DPC shall be provided at floor/plinth level.

Horizontal DPC shall consist of cement concrete (1:1.5:3) 50 mm thick. Edge of DPC shall be straight, even and vertical. It shall be cured for at least 7 days, after which it shall be allowed to dry. Vertical DPC shall consist of two layers of plaster (1:3) with total thickness of 20 mm. Hot bitumen shall be applied over dried up surface in thin layer.

16.7 PAINTING, ACRYLIC EMULSION DISTEMPER/WHETHER PROOF ACRYLIC PAINT

The switch house-cum-administrative building including walls & ceiling shall be provided with Acrylic emulsion paint of reputed make over prepared base. The outer face of building shall have peach colour cement based whether proof exterior (acrylic paint) coating. Columns, beams parapet and plastered area shall have mid cream colour whether proof coating. All the steel work, wire mesh, doors & windows etc., shall have first quality paints of approved make/shades. The boundary wall shall be provided with water proof acrylic paint. All fire fighting MS pipes shall have post office red colour

16.8 MATERIALS

The lime for white washing shall be unslaked lime of good quality, which shall be slaked at spot, mixed with water at least for 24 hours, than stained through coarse cloth, Indigo & some binding material like gum be added in proper quantity before use. For colour washing pigment of approved colour in proper quantity shall be used.

The Priming Paint shall conform to IS: 109 (Alkali resistant priming paint).

The Acrylic emulsion distemper and whether exterior acrylic paint shall be of superior quality manufactured by standard firms like ASIAN, NEROLEC, BERGER, DULUX, SHALIMAR etc. The material should be brought to site in sealed condition and stored properly.

All paints and allied materials shall be of superior quality manufactured by standard firms like ASIAN, NEROLEC, BERGER, DULUX,

- 26 -

SHALIMAR etc. and meet the requirements of following Indian Standards for wooden and metallic surfaces and shall be of approved brands and manufacturer and of approved shade.

a) Primer for woodwork shall be conforming to IS: 3536, for Iron,

steal etc. shall be conforming to IS: 2074. The primer shall be ready mixed primer.

b) Synthetic enamel paint shall be conforming to IS: 117, IS: 133

and IS: 137 of first quality. 16.9 APPLICATION

All the white wash/colour wash shall be done on well-prepared surfaces to the satisfaction of HVPN. Minimum of 3 coats shall be applied. The work shall be carried out as per IS: 6278.

a) DISTEMPERING: Two coats of acrylic emulsion distemper shall be

applied over a priming coat as detailed below: i PREPARATION OF SURFACE: For new work the surface shall be

thoroughly cleaned of dust, old white or colour wash by washing and scrubbing. The surface shall then be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. It shall then be sand papered to give a smooth and even surface. Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster of pairs mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the undulations and then sand papering the same after it is dry.

ii PRIMING COAT: The priming coat shall be with distemper primer or

cement primer. iii A coat of alkali resistant priming paint conforming to IS:109 shall

be applied and allowed to dry for atleast 48 hours before distempering is commenced.

iv ACRYLIC EMULSION/DISTEMPERING COAT: For new work, after

the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand papered to make it smooth for receiving the distemper, taking care not to rub out the priming coat. All loose particles shall be dusted off after rubbing. One coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner (water or other liquid as stipulated by the manufacturer) shall be applied with brushes in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical ones, which together constitutes one coat.

v The subsequent coats shall be applied in the same way. Two or more

coats of distemper as are found necessary shall be applied over the primer coat to obtain an even shade.

A time interval of at least 24 hours shall be allowed between successive coats to permit proper drying of to preceding coat.

b) The wooden surface shall be cleaned of all unevenness, which shall be

removed by rubbing with a sand paper. The surface treated for coatings, shall be dried before primer coat is applied.

- 27 -

c) PAINTING

i. All rust & scale be removed by scrapping or by brushing with steel wire brush.

ii. The primer coat shall be allowed to dry before painting is started.

iii. The putty around glass panes shall also be painted. iv. The additional coats of paint etc. shall be provided if required for

the required finish as per HVPN. 16.10 FLOORING

The flooring of switch house building except battery room and toilet shall be of precast terrazzo tiles. Anti-skid tile 300x300x7.7mm flooring in toilets and pantry and acid-resistance tiles shall be provided above 40mm thick PCC (1:2:4) flooring in battery room. Before flooring work is taken up, works such as laying of services which otherwise would affect the laying of floors, plastering of all inside & outside walls, ceilings, fixing of doors and window frames in place and all heavy work in room may be completed.

The base layer for all floors shall be of 100-mm thick sand and 100 mm thick cement concrete 1:5:10 laid on sand. The sand for base filling shall be clean and dry, free from clay clods and other harmful impurities such as iron pigments alkalis, coal and lignite, materials finer than 75 microns. Sand shall be of particle size ranging from 1.18 mm to 150 micron. The fineness modulus shall vary from 0.8 to 1.0. Generally sand fit for plastering is fit for sand filling under floor.

The pre cast terrazzo tiles of 300x300x25mm minimum thickness (the finished thickness of the top upper layer shall be 10mm) in 50% white & 50% ordinary grey cement with marble chip conforming to IS: 1237-1980 and pre-polished granite stone (slab) flooring as approved by HVPNL shall be laid on 20 mm thick bed of cement coarse sand mortar 1:3. The mortar shall be evenly spread over the base for two rows of tiles and about three to five meters in length. The top of mortar shall be kept rough so that cement slurry can be absorbed. Neat cement slurry of honey like consistency shall be spread over the mortar bed @ 5 kg per sq. meter. The joints shall be kept as thin as possible (not exceeding 1.5 mm) and filled with neat cement slurry, treads of steps and landing, if any. The floor shall be kept wet or flooded with water and protected against damage due to traffic or any other cause, for at least seven days after finishing the tiles. After the tiles are cured and have dried up, these shall be ground evenly with machine fitted with special rapid cutting grit blocks (carborundum stone) of coarse grade (No. 60) till the marble chips are evenly exposed and the floor is smooth. After the first grinding, the surface shall be thoroughly washed to remove all grinding mud and covered with a grout of cement and colouring matter in same mix and proportion as the topping in order to fill any pin holes that appear. The surface shall be allowed to cure for 5 to 7 days and then rubbed with

- 28 -

machine fitted with fine grit blocks (No.120). The surface is cleaned and repaired as before and allowed to cure again for 3 to 5 days. Finally the third grinding shall be done with machine fitted with fine grade grit blocks (No. 320) to get even and smooth surface without pinholes. The finished surface should show the marble chips evenly exposed.

Where use of machine for polishing is not feasible or possible, rubbing and polishing shall be done by hand, in the same manner as specified for machine polishing except that carborundum stone of coarse grade (No. 60) shall be used for the 1st rubbing, stone of medium grade (No. 80) for second rubbing and stone of fine grade (No. 120) for final rubbing and polishing.

After the final polish either by machine or by hand, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface @ 33 gm per square meter sprinkled with water and rubbed hard with a nemdah block (Pad of Woolen rags). The following day, the floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a soft cloth and finished clean. Anti skid floor tiles of reputed makes such as Somany, Kajaria, Nitco etc. having minimum 300x300 mm nominal size and 7.7 mm thick preferably in Beige colour shall be provided in the toilets. The tiles shall conform to relevant EN/IS codes. The tiles shall conform to relevant EN/IS codes. The tiles & the colour scheme shall be got approved from the HVPNL. Entire area around the Switch house building shall be provided with PCC paving upto 1 meter from the outer edge of the building.

16.11 SKIRTING

Matching pre-cast terrazzo tiles 300x150x25mm made in 50% white & 50% grey cement conforming to IS: 1237-1980 shall be used in areas provided with pre-cast terrazzo tile flooring. The minimum finished thickness of tiles shall be 12.5 mm. Tile skirting and dado shall be fixed only after laying the tiles in the floor. The portion of the wall to be covered with skirting and dado shall be left unplastered. The wall surface shall be evenly and uniformly covered with about 10 mm thick backing of cement coarse sand mortar 1:3. However, in the case of skirting, the tiles may be directly fixed without application of back as a separate course. Before the backing mortar has hardened, the back of each tile to be fixed shall be covered with a thin layer of neat cement paste and the tile gently tapped against the wall with a wooden mallet. The fixing shall be done from the bottom of the wall upwards. All the tile faces shall be set in conformity with one another and shall be truly vertical. The sides of the tiles shall be coated with grey or white cement slurry with or without pigment to match the shade of tiles and butt jointed. The joints shall be as thin as possible. Tiles shall be ground and polished as for flooring by hand. In toilets, the skirting/dado shall be of tiles of 6.7mm thick 200x200 mm size of reputed makes such as Somany, Kajaria, Nitco etc. and should

- 29 -

go upto 6'-9" high from floor level. The tiles shall conform to relevant EN/IS codes. The tiles & the colour scheme shall be got approved from the HVPNL. Skirting/daddo colour and style should match with the flooring.

16.12 DOORS /WINDOWS

The contractor shall provide & fix Aluminium chowkhats/doors/windows/ ventilators (single & double leaf) consisting frame work including vertical styles, top rails, lock (middle) rails and bottom rails with metal fastener & screws fitted with nuts & bolts or using rawl plugs & screws as per HVPNL drawings. The Aluminum section to be used shall be of 10 gauge (3mm) anodized (15 micron) of reputed makes such as HINDALCO/JINDAL conforming to IS: 1968-1983. The doors & windows shall be fitted with 5.5mm thick glass of reputed make like TATA FLOAT/SAINT GOBBAIN, high-class rubber gasket & aluminium beading complete so to make the glass airtight. The toilet doors shall, however, be fitted with pre-laminated board (NOVAPAN/KIT/DECCO) panels of appropriate size with aluminium beading to make it airtight. The door/floor springs, locks (six lever of Godrej or equivalent), handles, tower bolts, stoppers with rubber cushion, screws etc. shall be of 1st quality ISI make as approved by HVPN.

16.13 TOILET & PANTRY FIXTURES

All the water closets, wash basins, squatting panes etc. shall be of vitreous China clay in white colour, (first quality) conforms to IS: 2556. The water closet in officer’s toilet shall be European type with single syphonic low-level cistern. In general toilets high-level cistern shall be provided with Indian type water closet. Providing and fixing in position best Indian make 20mm dia., 600mm long towel rails fixed in raw slugs embedded in walls with CP brass screws. All fixtures/fittings shall be chromium plated of best quality and shall be approved by the HVPN. Providing & fixing best Indian make white vitreous chinaware sink of size 600x450x250mm with complete fittings including 40mm CP brass waste and PVC pipe chromium plated brass tap. Granite slab 20-25mm thickness as approved by HVPN is to be provided in the kitchen as shown in drawing.

All water supply pipes shall be GI Pipes (medium quality) conforming IS:1239 along with specials ISI marking.

All drainage pipes shall be HCI pipes along with special and ISI marked, embedded in walls, having concrete 1:2:4 around the horizontal pipes up to first inspection chamber/gully trap shall also be HCI pipes.

From Inspection chamber onwards to soakage pit or to existing sewerage system as the case may be SW Pipes shall be used.

Construction of soakage pit near switch house building or laying of SW pipes up to sewerage system within sub-station is in scope of this bid.

- 30 -

16.14 ROOF

SCOPE: This section covers the furnishing of all labour, materials, and equipments and performing of all operations necessary to complete all works for insitu water proofing of roofs using glass fibre based felt type-2. Grade-I or fibre glass Tissue Reinforced Bitumen conforming to IS: 7193 (latest) and workmanship conforming to IS:3067 (latest) and IS: 9918 (latest).

16.14.1MATERIALS:

a. The glass fibre base felt shall be thin, flexible, uniformly bonded felt composed of reinforced glass fibre coated on both sides with bitumen modified with thermoplastics polymers. The bonding material shall consist of modified grade bitumen (140/35). The fibre glass tissue shall be thin, flexible, uniformly bonded mat composed of chemically resistant borosilicate staple fibre glasses distributed in a random porous structure, bonded together with a thermosetting resin (phenotic type). The minimum weight of the tissue shall not be less than 40gms per square meter and nominal thickness shall be 0.50 + 0.1mm. The properties of fibre glass tissue shall conform to IS: 7193 (latest).

b. BITUMEN PRIMER: A liquid bitumen of low viscosity which penetrates into a prepared surface upon application. Primer shall conform to the requirements laid down in IS: 3384 (latest).

c. BONDING MATERIAL: It shall consist of blown type bitumen conforming to IS:702 (latest) or residual grade bitumen conforming to IS:73 (latest). This shall be prepared by heating bitumen between 175 degree C to 205 degree C. The penetration of bitumen shall not be more than 40 when tested in accordance with IS: 1203 (lates).

d. The materials required for plastering and surface finish like cement, sand, 1st class brick/brick tiles shall be as per respe3ctive IS codes.

16.14.2 PREPARATION SURFACE:

a. The surface to be waterproofed shall be cleaned with wire brush and

then plastered with 12mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1cement :2medium coarse sand).

b. Suitable slope (1:5:100) shall be provided with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 stone aggregate 10mm nominal sized) over roof slab. Heat insulation over the roof shall be provided on the top of cement concrete 1:2:4. The heat insulating surface shall be plastered with 12mm thick cement mortar plaster 1:4. In case heat insulation is not provided, 12mm thick cement mortar plaster shall be provided over cement concrete (1:2:4) laver.

- 31 -

16.14.3 APPLICATION:

Brief details of various treatments shall be as under:

a. Clean and prime the dry plastered surface with bitumen primer at the rate of 0.4kg per sqm. This should properly embed the surface and should be left till the time it is touch dry.

b. Apply the first coat of bitumen at the rate of 1.6 kg per sqm (min.) ato

the extent of width of felt/tissue roll. c. Embed first layer of felt/tissue. The overlap shall be 100mm between

layers in either direction. The process shall be continued till the whole proposed area is covered.

d. Apply second coat of hot bitumen at the rate of 1.6 kg per sqm (min.) e. Apply second layer of felt/tissue. This layer of felt/tissue shall be

embedded perpendicular to earlier layer. f. Apply third coat of hot bitumen at the rate of 1.6 kg per sqm (min.). g. Apply third layer of felt/tissue. This later of felt/tissue shall be

embedded perpendicular to the earlier layer. h. Apply fourth coat of hot bitumen at the rate of 1.6 kg per sqm. (min.). i. Provide 12mm nominal size gravel over fourth coat of hot bitumen. j. 1st class brick tiles 40mm thick conforming to IS code shall be laid in

cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 medium coarse sand) over water proofing treatment and joints grouted with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 fine sand). Proper care shall be taken to see that no joints are left unfilled or inadequately filled. The joints shall be finished flush with the tile surface.

k. The gutter and drain mouths shall be treated for water proofing as per

IS: 1346 (latest).

16.14.3 JUNCTION OF PARAPET WALL AND ROOF;

Fibre glass based felt/tissue treatment shall be applied wherever junctions vertical and horizontal structures occur with minimum overlap of 1d00mm. The water proofing treatment shall be applied as per IS:9918 (latest).

16.14.4 EXPANSION JOINTS:

In case of expansion joints, two layers of fibre glass based felt type-2, grade-1 as per IS:7193 (latest) shall be laid loose overlapping one another with the end of felt to the stuck with bitumen alternatively and finally covered with a layer of reinforced fibre glass tissue impregnated with hot bitumen. The entire treatment shall be laid as per IS: 1346 (latest) with fibre glass based felt type-2, grade-1. The water proofing

- 32 -

in situ treatment of expansion joints with fibre glass based felt/tissue on RCC roof slab shall be carried out as per IS: 9918 (latest).

16.14.5 GUARANEE:

A written guarantee of the water tightness shall be given for a minimum period of 10 years.

16.14.6 GENERAL

The work shall be carried out by specialists in the trade. Workers shall be provided with gum boots and hand gloves. Minimum overlaps of 100mm shall be given at the ends and sides of the strips of the felts/tissue and properly bonded with bitumen. Joints in the successive layers of the fibre glass based felt/tissue shall be staggered. There shall be no air pockets. Corners shall be treated flush without any air pockets or voids.

a. The materials and the sub-contractors executing the work shall be duly approved by the Engineer-in-charge/owner’s consultant.

b. Adequate covering shall be provided during work to avoid splashing or

staining of adjacent works and surfaces. Any surface or work splashed or stained shall be thoroughly cleaned to the full satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

16.14.7 All roofs shall be provided with access (1 Meter wide) through a

staircase/cage ladder.

16.14.8 RCC parapet walls of minimum 900mm height will be provided on roof.

16.15 RAIN WATER PIPES

All rain water pipes shall be 4" dia. HCI pipes along with fixtures. Rain water pipes shall be embedded in wall during construction as shown in drawings. At top of roof proper grating shall be provided.

16.16 ELECTRICAL ITEMS

The general requirement of electrical fittings shall be as per drawing attached with tender. The bidder shall prepare the actual design and detail of circuits to be provided and layout of pipes. The wiring shall be recessed conduit wiring. Heavy duty PVC conduits of 20/25/30mm size and wires 2.5/4/6 sq. mm copper for circuit wiring & 1.5 sq. mm copper for earth including wiring for sub-mains, modular switch boards, junction boxes, switches/sockets 5 Amp, 5/16 Amp and 16 Amp, 240V indoor and outdoor receptacle including 2T split/window AC’s, electronic step regulator mounted on the switch boards, provision for telephone wires including telephone junction boxes/tap blocks, sockets.

- 33 -

Depth of inspection/junction boxes shall be 80 mm in ceiling and 28 mm on wall surface which may vary as per requirement of modular switches/regulator.

All the split/window ACs, ceiling fans, 28W (T-5) CFL tubes etc. shall be of reputed company like LG/Samsung/Hitachi/Videocon, Crompton/Philips/Osram etc. All switches, fittings, sockets, fans shall be of latest modular design and of reputed make like Crompton, Havel’s, Philips etc. All the material shall conform to latest IS specification/and ISI marked. All the electrical fitting including ACs, fans shall be as per electrical drawing to be provided by the HVPNL or developed by the successful bidder. The items not provided herein but are required to be provided as per drawing requirement or site requirement shall be provided by the successful bidder without and extra cost to the HVPNL.

16.17 SWITCH – YARD FENCING AND GATE Fencing & Gates shall be provided for Switchyard area as per General Electrical Layout Plan and any other specified area along the lines shown. The design shall be as per drawings attached with the tender. Chain link fence fabric shall of size 75mm; coated wire shall be of 3.15mm dia having zinc coating after weaving. The chain link fabric shall be fixed to the intermediate parts and at top & bottom of fence by welding/fixing 50x6mm M.S. flat all through its length.

All structural steel manufactured by TISCO, SAIL, IISCO and RASHTRIYA ISPAT (primary manufacturers) shall conform to IS: 20621786 shall only be used and shall be painted with a coat of approved steel primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint. The bidders shall, however, be allowed to use Amba steel, Rathi steel, Kamdhenu steel, Barnala steel, P.R.S steel, Shidbali steel (manufactured by secondary manufacturers) only after obtaining non-availability certificate from the primary manufacturers. Before using secondary steel, the selected bidder would require to conduct all physical & chemical tests (lot wise & dia. wise) to establish its conformity to IS Standards conforming to IS 2062.

The barbed wire shall consist of two splices per reel. The barbed wire shall be formed by twisting two line wires, one containing barbs. The barbed wire shall be of 12 SWG galvanized steel with its weight 155-186 gm/m length of wire. Distance between two barbs shall be 75mm. The barbs shall carry four points and shall be formed by twisting two point wires, each two turn tightly round one line wire making altogether 4 complete turn. The barbs shall be finished in such a way that four points are set and locked at right angles to each other. The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13mm and not more than 18mm. The points shall be sharp and well pointed.

Fasteners – Single strand aluminum or galvanized steel, wire conforming to requirements for fence fabric 4mm diameter.

- 34 -

Tension wires - Single strand, high tensile, galvanized steel wire 4mm diameter.

Fittings and Hardware – Cast aluminum alloy or galvanized steel malleable or ductile steel. Cast iron D-Clamp to be drop forged with bolt, Check nut, Thimble and other material required for stretching the Barbed wire complete in all respect.

Generally the drawing attached with the tender shall be applicable. However, if due to difference of levels between formation level and Switchyard and outside, normal foundations have to be changed in some portion and retaining wall have to be provided below due to site requirements. Successful bidder for approval before execution will submit the suitable design. Nothing extra shall be payable on this account.

17.0 GIS BLOCK 17.1 GENERAL SCOPE

A GIS block is required to house the switchgear and associated equipment, the mechanical and electrical equipment and any other facilities required for building services.

17.2 DIMENSIONS

The GIS block shall be approximately 14m x 10m to suit the installation of the equipment. The building design shall take into consideration the layout of the equipment and to allow enough area for the future extension also. An open space of 2 meter shall be provided on the peri-pheri of the equipment in order to allow easy operator movement and access as well as maintenance.

17.3 BUILDING ENVIRONMENT

The GIS Block shall be slightly pressurized to prevent the ingress of unfiltered air in addition the building shall be properly sealed to minimize the flow of outside air into it and vice versa. Openings for equipment and services shall be weatherproof. Explosion vents shall be provided. If required. The building wall and roofs shall be suitably insulated to reduce heat absorption, Windows shall be shaded or shall be fitted with insulating or heat reflecting glass, consistent with the design requirements for ventilation.

17.4 BUILDING ARRANGEMENT

The GIS Block arrangement shall satisfy and be fit for the GIS and associated equipment. The main floor shall be at a common level through out the building to facilitate movement.

- 35 -

The main floor shall be above grade and shall be designed and constructed to ensure that flooding will not occur. No floor below grade will be accepted. Convenient routing of cables from the GIS building to control, protection and other auxiliary building shall be considered.

17.5 CRANES, HOISTS AND SERVICE TRUCKS

Cranes and hoists shall be provided as required for servicing and maintenance of the equipment components. Hoists shall be installed permanently in rooms where heavy equipments are located to be used for later maintenance.

17.6 FLOORING

II) Entire area around the GIS building shall be provided with RCC paving starting from the building up to 2m clear distance for the full length of the building and minimum 10m wide strip as approach to the GIS building from both side shall be paved with RCC. The above specified RCC paving shall be minimum 100mm thick M20 grade concrete over suitable underbed arrangement as specified for switch house building.

ii) Cable vaults shall have 50mm thick smooth floor finish with cement

concrete i.e.1:1½:3.

iii) Heavy duty ironite concrete floor hardener shall be provided in GIS Block as below:- The topping shall, if possible, be placed on the base slab before the latter has taken its final set. When this is not possible, the base slab shall be thoroughly brushed with stiff brooms, wetted for twelve hours and allowed to dry before the cement concrete floor topping is laid. Surplus water shall be mopped up and a cement grout brushed well into the surface immediately before laying the screeded bed to a level 12mm below the finishing level.

The cement floor minimum 50mm shall consist of a mix of one part cement, one part sand and two parts crushed aggregate 10mm. This shall be mixed, placed, thoroughly tamped with a grill hammer and floated and screeded to receive the 12mm thick hard topping. Hard topping shall be applied while the screeded bed is still wet. This shall consist of one part of a cement ironate mixture or two parts by bulk of well graded approved crushed granite of maximum 6/12 mm size. The cement ironite shall consist of well mixed dry mixture containing one part ironite to four parts cement by weight. Water shall be added after mixing the aggregate, placing, tamping, floating and trowelling being done in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Care shall be taken not to over trowel until the initial set has taken place.

17.7 ROLLING SHUTTERS

- 36 -

Rolling shutters with suitable operating arrangement (manual/mechanical gear operator or electrical according to size shall be provided in buildings to facilitate handling and transportation of equipment. The rolling steel shutter shall be of an approved design and make and Wicket gates shall be provided where required. The specification of the rolling shutter is given as below:- The curtains shall be made of interlocking scrolls made of hot rolled double-tipped galvanized steel lathe sections of 18 SWG tested mild steel strips at 75mm rolling centers, locked with galvanized malleable iron clips. The bottom lathe shall be coupled to a lock plate fabricated from 3mm thick galvanized steel plate and securely riveted with stiffening angles. The guides shall be hot rolled mild steel galvanized channel sections. These shall be embedded securely into concrete or masonry face of anchored to steel stanchions with necessary lugs in an approved manner. Latches shall be provided at both ends of the bottom bolt plate of the curtain and provisions shall be made for locking from both sides. Where required, wicket doors shall be provided with a safety lock, tower bolt and handle. The hood covers shall be double dipped hot galvanized 20 gauge steel adequately reinforced to prevent sag. All steel parts of the door shall be double dipped hot galvanized. The shutters shall be given (1) coat of zinc based primer paint before installation.

18.0 STATUTORY RULES

Vender shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules pertaining to factory acts, safety rules of Tariff Advisory Committee and Chief Electrical Inspector.

19.0 DESIGN

a) The buildings shall be designed:

i) to the requirements of the National Building Code of India, and the

standards quoted therein,

ii) for the specified climatic & loading conditions,

iii) to adequately suit the requirements of the equipment and apparatus contained in the buildings and in all respect to be compatible with the intended use and occupancy.

iv) with a functional and economical space arrangement.

v) for a life expectancy of structure, systems and components not less

than that of the equipment which is contained in the buildings, provided regular maintenance is carried out.

vi) to be aesthetically pleasing. Different buildings shall show a uniformity

and consistency in architectural design with the surrounding structures.

vii) to allow for easy access to equipment and maintenance of the equipment.

- 37 -

viii) with, wherever required, fire retarding materials for walls, ceilings and

doors, which would prevent supporting or spreading of fire.

ix) with material preventing dust accumulation.

x) All structural steel inside the GIS hall shall be provided with the suitable epoxy PO coatings, so as to avoid any maintenance during its life period.

b) Suitable expansion joints shall be provided in the longitudinal direction

wherever necessary with provision of twin columns.

c) Individual members of the buildings frame shall be designed for the worst combination of forces such as bending moment, axial force, shear force, torsion etc.

d) Permissible stresses for different load combinations shall be taken as

per relevant IS Codes.

e) The building lighting shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of relevant standards for both indoor and outdoors.

f) The building auxiliary services like ventilation system, fire protection

and detection systems and all other miscellaneous services shall be designed in accordance with the requirements specified elsewhere in the Specifications.

19.1 Design Loads

Building structures shall be designed for the most critical combinations of dead loads, superimposed loads, equipment loads, crane loads, wind loads, seismic loads, short circuit loads and temperature loads. In addition, loads and forces developed due to differential settlement shall also be considered.

Dead loads shall include the weight of structures complete with finishes, fixtures and partitions and should be taken as per IS: 1991

Super-imposed loads in different areas shall include live loads, minor equipment loads, cable trays, small pipe racks/hangers and erection, operation and maintenance loads. Equipment loads shall constitute, if applicable, all load of equipments to be supported on the building frame.

For crane loads an impact factor of 30% and lateral crane survey of

10% of (lifted weight + trolley weight) shall be considered in the analysis of frame according to provisions of IS: 875. The horizontal surge shall be 5% of the static wheel load.

The wind loads and seismic forces shall be computed as specified in Section 2 of this specification. Response spectrum method shall be used for the seismic analysis using at least first five modes of vibration.

- 38 -

For temperature loading, the total temperature variation shall be considered as 2/3 of the average maximum annual variation in temperature. The average maximum annual variation in temperature for the purpose shall be taken as the difference between the mean of the daily minimum temperature during the coldest month of the year and mean of daily maximum temperature during the hottest month of the year. The structure shall be designed to withstand stressed due to 50% of the total temperature variation.

Wind and Seismic force shall not be considered to act simultaneously.

Floors/slabs shall be designed to carry loads imposed by equipment,

cables, piping, travel of maintenance trucks and equipment and other loads associated with the building. In general, floors shall be designed for live loads as per relevant IS and cable and piping loads of no less than 5kN/sq.m hanging from the underside.

For consideration of loads on structures, IS: 875, “Code of practice for

structural safety of buildings” shall be followed. The following minimum superimposed lie loads shall, however, be considered for the design.

a. Roof 150kg/m2 for accessible roofs 75kg/m2 for non-accessible roofs. b. RCC floors 500 kg/m1 for offices and minimum 1000 kg/m2 for

equipment floors or actual requirement, if higher than 1000 kg/m2

based on equipment component weight and layout plans. c. Stairs & balconies 500kg/ m2 d. Toilet Rooms 200kg/m2 e. Walkways 300kg/ m2

19.2 Submissions

The following information shall be submitted for review and approval of

HVPNL:-

i) Design criteria for structural steel and reinforced concrete design. The criteria shall compose the codes and standards used, applicable climatic data including wind loads, earthquake factors and maximum and minimum temperatures applicable to the building locations, assumptions of dead and live loads, including equipment loads impact factors, safety factors and other relevant information.

ii) Structural design calculation and drawing (including

construction/fabrication) for all reinforced concrete and structural steel structures.

iii) Architectural drawing showing floor plans, cross sections, longitudinal

sections and elevation of each building. The architectural drawings shall be developed in ambience with adjacent buildings as per the requirement.

- 39 -

iv) A detailed schedule of building finishes including color schemes.

v) A door and window schedule showing door types and locations, door lock sets and lath sets and other door hardware.

The architectural drawings/building plans shall be got approved

from the owner before starting the work.

19.3 List of IS Codes and Standards

A brief list of applicable standards and codes to be used in the design are indicated below the latest addition of the codes along with amendments will only be referred to. The list is not exhaustive and any other relevant code/standards may also be used in the design as per the requirement.

IS: 456 (2000) Code of practice for plain and reinforcement

concrete. IS: 783 Code of practice for laying of concrete pipes. IS: 800 Code of practice or general construct ion of steel. IS: 816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for

general construction in mild steel. IS: 1893 Code of practice for criteria for earthquake

resistant design of structures. IS: 2212 Code of practice for design and construction of

shallow foundations on soil. IS: 2911 Code of practice for design and construction of pile

foundations (Relevant Part). IS: 2950 Code of practice for design and construction of raft

foundation. IS: 4326 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design

and construction of buildings. IS: 5525 Recommendations for detailing of reinforcement in

reinforced concrete work. IS: 6403 Code of practice for determination of bearing

capacity of shallow foundations. IS: 10262 Recommended guidelines for concrete mix design. IS: 13920 Ductile detailing of RCC structures subjected to

seismic forces. SP:16 Design aid to the code for reinforced concrete to

IS: 456 – 1978. SP: 23 Handbook of concrete mixes. SP: 34 Handbook on concrete reinforcement and

detailing.

It is suggested that the Bidder may include all above information in his bid itself so that Owner may comment if any change is warranted as per their practice or otherwise.

20.0 BOUNDARY WALL

- 40 -

Boundary wall on the entire land is to be constructed as per HVPNLs drawing enclosed herewith. The front wall shall be 4½’ high fitted in iron grill & the other three sides shall be U/C boundary wall. In case the depth of boundary wall is more than provided in the attached drawing (HCD/TS-1176), the successful bidder shall provide design and drawing for the same for approval of the HVPNL

21.0 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

The contractor shall submit the field quality control plan for effective control on quality of civil works for approval from HVPNL before the start of work. All cost of testing as per approved field Quality control plan or as directed by HVPNL shall be borne by the Contractor.

22.0 After completion of civil works, a completion plan giving all details of

foundations, trenches, culverts, fencing budding etc. as built shall be submitted with original tracing.

23.0 Any material or activity not covered under the specifications or drawings

shall be, as governed by relevant IS specification/National Building Code of India.

24.0 GENERAL

The work shall be carried out by specialists in the trade. Workers shall be provided with gum boots and hand gloves. Minimum overlaps of 100mm shall be given at the ends and sides of the strips of the felts/tissue and properly bonded with bitumen. Joints in the successive layers of the fibre glass based felt/tissue shall be staggered. There shall be no air pockets. Corners shall be treated flush without any air pockets or voids.

a. The materials and the sub-contractors executing the work shall be duly approved by the HVPN.

b. Adequate covering shall be provided during work to avoid splashing or

staining of adjacent works and surfaces. Any surface or work splashed or stained shall be thoroughly cleaned to the full satisfaction of the HVPN.

25.0 SPECIAL NOTE

Fully galvanized angles, flat, nut & bolts etc. shall be used in all the items covered under this scheme. Galvanizing of the steel section shall confirm to IS 2629-1985 and IS 4759-1968. All galvanizing members shall withstand test as per IS 2633-1986. The galvanizing shall be done after all fabrication work is completed, except that the nuts may be tapped or re-run after galvanizing. Threads of the bolts and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be such that they can be turned with finger throughout the length of the threads of bolts and they shall be capable of developing full strength of the bolts.

- 1 -

SECTION-10 CHAPTER-1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLCC EQUIPMENTS

1. GENERAL: The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered should have designed, manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned PLCC panels for the specified voltage and fault level.

2. STANDARD: 2.1 All the PLCC equipment covered under the package shall conform to the requirements

of the latest addition of the relevant IEC/IS Specification or equivalent National Standards, except to the extent mentioned by this specification.

2.2 The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered, manufactured, built tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules, Laws and Regulations of India.

2.3 The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue with all amendments of standard specified above.

2.4 In addition to meeting this specific requirement called for in the Technical Specification, the equipment shall also conform to the general requirement of the relevant standards and shall form an integral part of specification.

2.5 The Bidder shall nor that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually exclusive or complete in themselves but intended to compliment each other.

2.6 The contractor shall note that list of standards presented in this specification is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction with specific IS/IEC.

2.7 When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ than required by applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take precedence.

2.8 Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better performance than that specified in the standard referred shall also be accepted.

2.9 In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out alongwith English language version of standard or relevant extract of the same. The equipment conforming to standards other than IS/IEC shall be subject to Employer’s approval.

2.10 The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in accordance with which the works will be conformed.

3. TRAINING:

Requisite number of Engineer/Personnel shall be trained at the manufacturers works for the purpose of familiarization with design, testing, erection, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the equipment. This training shall be free of cost.

3.1 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT: The PLCC equipments as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the transmission lines.

4. FREQUENCY PLANNING: 4.1 For planning frequency and output power of carrier terminals, bidders may plan for a

minimum receive signal to noise ratio of 25dB for the speech channels without compander and 15dB for protection signalling & 29dB for data transmission. The details of line, tower, conductor shall be furnished to the supplier to carry out the assessment of signal attenuation. IEC/CIGRE specifications/guidelines shall be adhered to.

- 2 -

4.2 Frequency and output power of PLC terminals for protection shall be planned such that the protection signal is received with full reliability even when one of the phase is earthed or is on open circuit on the line side causing an additional minimum loss of 6dB.

4.3 Successful Bidder shall be fully responsible for the co-ordination required with concerned State Electricity Board for finalising the frequency plan.

4.4 The frequency plan will be referred to wireless Advisor/DOT Department for clearance and in case any change in the contractor’s recommended carrier frequency and power output is proposed by these authorities, the contractor shall have to modify his proposal accordingly. Change of power output shall however not involve repeater station.

5. PROPOSED ARRANGEMENT: 5.1 The power line carrier communication equipment required by the Employer is to provide

primarily efficient, secure and reliable information link for carrier aided distance protection and direct tripping of remote and breaker and also for speech communication between sub-station. It shall include separate carrier terminals of multipurpose type for speech and protection purposes. Provision for super-imposing telex and data signals shall be made on speech terminals. All carrier terminals including those for protection shall be suitable for point to point speech communication also. Carrier aided protection is not being provided on 132kV and below transmission lines in HVPNL.

5.2 For security reasons each transmission line shall be protected by Main-I and Main-ii protections or Main & Backup protections. The features of Direct Trip Send and Direct Trip Receive shall also be provided in the protection coupler.

5.3 The requirement of carrier information on each link covered under this specification is for speech communication and protection signaling.

5.4 The equipment for protection signals shall have high degree of reliability and speed. It shall be guaranteed to function reliably in the presence of noise impulse caused by isolator or breaker operation. It shall also be possible to effect direct tripping of breaker at one end when the other end breaker opens out either manually or by relays such as Bus fault relay etc.

5.5 The time intervals between receipt of a trip command on the transmit side, its transmission over the carrier link, reception at the far end and giving command to the trip relays at the distant end shall not exceed 20 m.sec. for permissive inter-tripping and 30m.sec. for direct inter-tripping even for the longest line section. The above timings are Inclusive of operating time for auxiliary relays and interposing relays, if any, included in the PLCC equipment.

5.6 The requirement of protection signaling channel is such that security against incorrect signals being received shall be at least two to three orders higher than reliability against a signal not being received.

5.7 The planning of frequencies for the PLCC terminals shall be done confederating the existing PLCC network as well as full communication channel requirement detailed above so that there is no problem of frequency allocation at a later date when the subsequent section communication requirements come up.

5.8 For reasons of security and reliability, phase to phase coupling for S/C lines and inter-circuit coupling for D/Clines shall be employed.

5.9 The parameters of the equipment quoted shall be such that the mode of wave propagation on transmission line shall not impose any limitation on the efficient and reliable performance of information link from protection or communication point of view.

5.10 The Bidder shall submit curves illustrating ‘incorrect tripping’ and ‘Failure to trip’ probability plotted against corona noise level in the presence of impulse noise due to switching of isolator and circuit breaker etc. Detail of Field tests and laboratory tests for successful operation of his equipment, under such adverse conditions shall be furnished by the bidder. These are to be related to end-to-end signaling and shall take into account the type of communication link.

- 3 -

6. POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL: 6.1 The offered PLCC equipment should be suitable for carrier transmission in high

frequency of Speech, Facsimile, Telegraphy, RTU data, Teleprotection signals in frequency range of 40KHz to 500KHz over high voltage overhead power transmission lines.

The system should have one/two speech channels each of which can be set for full bandwidth speech cum fax conversations or shared speech cum superimposed date channels or suitable for high sped 4 wire RTU data channel of 1200/2400 bits per second. The superimposed data channel can support upto 600 baud (2760-3720 Hz, 960 Hz BW or 2280-3360 Hz, 1080 Hz BW) channel as a backup for RTU/SCADA.

The system should be fully field programmable and flexible easy to use and compact leading to simplified network design, installation and maintenance work.

The system can provide up to 12/6Nos. of 50 baud, 8/4 Nos. of 100 baud or 1 Nos. of 600 baud voice band data for superimposed channels and speech up to 2 KHz/2.4KHz in VF circuits simply by changing plugin filters provided in channels modem. Optionally system can be provided to give speech and data only channels (upto 28/13/9 Nos. of 50/100/200 baud or 1 Nos. of 1200/2400 bps ) or Interface for protection coupler signal.

As already indicated the information link shall be provided for speech, protection, telex and data services. PLC terminals shall be fully co-ordinated to match with the specific requirements. Because of strict requirement of high speed of operation, security, reliability and efficient operation of protection channel along with the carrier terminals, Bidder shall ensure the complete and fool-proof co-ordination of the PLC and protection equipments. It shall therefore be necessity to have these combinations as one unit without any mismatch or necessary of any intermediate co-ordination unit.

6.2 PLC terminal shall use Amplitude Modulation and shall have single side band transmission mode. These shall be equipped for fixed frequency duplex working and shall be fully transistorised, however, this fixed frequency shall be programmable at site. Characteristic input and output parameters of the SSB PLC terminals shall be as per IEC-495, unless otherwise specified.

6.3 The features of carrier terminal are detailed out below: a) Mode of transmission single side band with

suppressed carrier or reduced carrier. Amplitude Modulation

b) Carrier frequency range 40 to 500KHz

c) Nominal carrier frequency band in either direction of transmission

4.0KHz

d) Power output (PEP) of HF terminals 20 watt

e) Frequency difference between a pair of PLC terminals

Frequency difference between VF signal at the transmitting and receiving ends will not exceed 2 Hz with suppressed carrier. With reduced carrier frequency difference shall be zero. This shall include permissible ambient temperature variation and supply frequency and voltage variation of (+) 15 % and (-)10%

- 4 -

F) Automatic gain control For 40dB change in carrier

frequency signal level within the regulation range, change in VF receive levels of both speech and other signals shall be less than 1dB.

g) Supply voltage 48V DC+15%-10% (Positive pole earthed).

h)

Nominal impedance -Carrier freq. Sides -VF sides

150ohm balanced 600ohm

i) Return loss within nominal freq. Band: -Not less than 10dB on Carrier freq. Transmit side. -Not less than 14dB on VF side.

j)

Spurious emission at edge of nominal carrier freq. Band.

-10dBm(Max)

k) Speech level across 600ohms. -Four wire transmit -Four wire receive -2 wire transmit -2 wire receive

0dBr to –17dBr 8 dBr to -3.5 dBr 0dBr -7dBr

l) Permissible limits for variation of overall loss (attenuation) of the speech channel in relation to 800Hz for back to back operation of a pair of terminals without compander.

As per IEC 495/IS 9482

m) Voltage withstand requirement D/C Power terminal. When isolated from earth

Capable of with standing 500V DC for 1 minute between both terminals connected together and earth.

When not isolated form earth. An impulse voltage of 1000v 1.2/50 applied between.

VF signaling and alarm circuit when free from earth. 500V DC applied for 1 minute between both terminals of circuit connected together and earth.

6.4 Following facilities to be provided in the PLC terminals: 1) Loop test facility for local transmitted and receiver. 2) Changeover provision of termination of PLC terminals on dummy load. 3) Position of each module may be marked at the back side of chassis also. 4) Terminal blocks for power supply, telephone cable and two HF cable sockets. 5) Channel testing from terminal to terminal. 6.5 All the PLC terminals shall be of multipurpose type. The bidder shall confirm that the

total transmission time for tele protection shall not exceed 20ms for permissive and 30ms for direct tripping signals.

- 5 -

6.6 In the input circuit of PLC terminal protective devices shall be provided in the form of zener diodes or surge suppressors in order to eliminate an surge transfer through the coupling device or the surge induced in the connecting path of HF cable.

6.7 To improve voice transmission characteristics for the system, companders and expanders shall be provided. The companders shall have at least 2:1 compression ratio with a corresponding expansion ratio of 1:2. The operating range of compander shall be compel with the audio power levels specified for 4 wire operation. The improvement gained by companders shall however, not be taken into account for power allocation and shall be in-hand reserve.

6.8 Sudden changes in input level to the receiver shall not cause false tripping. The bidder shall clearly indication in his offer the methods adopted to ensure above phenomenon. The receiver design shall also provide protection against false tripping from random noise.

6.9 Fail-safe devices shall be provided, so that a malfunction in one unit or sub-assembly cannot cause damage elsewhere in the system. All plug-in equipment shall be fitted with features to prevent improper insertion. The electrical cables shall not be routed across sharp edges or near sources of high temperature. The adjustments, which are susceptible to misadjustment for accidental contact/vibration, shall be equipped with suitable locking devices.

6.10 The PLC set shall be designed to give guaranteed performance from 0 deg. C to 50deg. C ambient temperature. The thermal capability of the equipment shall be so designed that the equipment remains operational successful upto 60deg. C ambient temperature. Any ventilation fans provided for circulation of air inside the cabinets shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

6.11 The terminals shall be provided with built-in indicating Instrument to facilitate checking of important voltages and current values and signal levels in different parts of the PLC terminals. Protection fuses shall be provided in all important circuits and fuses shall be so mounted as allow their easy inspection and replacement. All test points shall be easily accessible. The carrier set shall be provided with suitable supervision and alarm facilities Individual parts of the carrier set should be accessible from front, making it possible to place the carrier cabinets side-by-side. All components and parts of the carrier sets shall be suitably tropicalised.

6.12 PLC terminals shall be housed in floor mounting sheet metal cabinets, suitable for mounting on concrete plinth as well as channel frame by means of nuts and bolts or welding. The cabinets shall be properly cleaned and spray painted with two coats or synthetic enamel paint. Exterior of the cabinets shall be painted with smoke-glossy finish. Interior of the cabinets shall be painted with white enamel paint with glossy finish. All the panels shall be provided with suitable point for earthling with the earth of the Grid/S/Stn.. Detailed drawings for earthing connections shall be submitted.

6.13 All cabinets having PLC terminals shall be provided with lamps of sufficient wattage for interior illumination with switch.

6.14 A name plate shall be provided on the front door of each cabinet indicating channel function, transmitter frequency and direction etc.

6.15 Bidder shall submit type test & routine test certificate from internationally reputed test authorities for the quoted PLC terminals in respect of characteristic input and output parameters of the PLC terminals in accordance with IEC-495 alongwith the Bid.

6.15.1 TYPE TESTS:

The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening in respect of following tests, carried out in accordance with ISS-9482-1980/IEC-495-1993, or latest version thereof from Govt./Govt. approved test house shall be submitted along with bid:

- 6 -

1) Common Requirements for standard equipment & speech plus

equipments: Carrier frequency side

i) Balance to ground. ii) Spurious emissions

Voice frequency side i) Automatic gain control ii) Transmit/Receive frequency difference iii) Selectivity iv) Nominal impedance & return loss v) Balance to ground vi) Voltage withstand requirements vii) Electromagnetic compatibility 2) standard Equipment: i) Attenuation distortion ii) Group delay distortion 3) Speech-plus equipment i) Attenuation distortion ii) Group delay distortion

The remaining type test report shall be submitted by the successful bidder within three months from the date of placement of order.

6.16 In addition to above each transmitter and receiver shall be given a routine factory test to establish that it has been properly assembled and adjusted for normal operation as per table-1 of IS-10706 CI.4.0.

6.17 All the solid state equipment/system panels shall be subjected to the Heat Soak Test as a routine test as per the following procedure: All solid state equipment shall be burn-in tested for minimum of 120 hours continuously under operation condition. During the last 48 hours of testing, the ambient temperature of the test chamber shall be 50deg. C. Each PLC panel shall be complete with all associated sub-systems and the same shall be in operation during the above test. During the last 48 hours of the above test the temperature inside the panel shall be monitored with all the doors closed. The temperature of the panel interior shall not exceed 65deg.C.

6.18.1 The bidder shall give details of the manufacturing, testing, procedures and the facilities and methods to perform above mentioned tests.

7. SPEECH COMMUNICATION:

PLC equipments offered shall provide telephone communication between the stations where the transmission line equipment shall be suitable for providing the following:

a) It shall be possible for subscriber at any of the stations to contact the subscriber at all other stations connected in the system by dialing his call number. To achieve this a 24 lines EPAX with 4 wire interface & remote subscriber units shall be provide/available at different stations.

b) The equipment shall contain all normal facilities like ring back tone, dial tone, engage tone & priority tone and suitable pluses to established and disconnect communication between subscribers.

c) The equipment shall be provided with necessary alarm circuits and fuses etc.

- 7 -

d) The equipment shall be of 4 kHz bandwidth on either direction for providing super imposed data and be suitable for teleprinter facilities at a later date without major modifications and high cost. The Bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the provision made in his proposal for future development and the extent to which such additional facilities can be asked at a later date.

e) Arrangement for over-riding facilities shall be provided by means of priority keys wherever specified. The over-riding facility shall enable cutting in ongoing calls with the priority key and ask the concerned parties to finish their conversation. The wanted number should then get automatically connected without having to redial the number.

f) All the carrier telephone conversations shall be secret and it should not be possible for anybody to over hear the conversation going on between any two parties except those provided with over-riding facilities.

g) All the relays etc, used in the equipment shall be of roubust design to cope with the duty imposed on them. Electronic components used in the equipment shall be of long life type and as far as possible a few types only shall be used.

h) The cabinets housing the equipment for EPAX, four wire E/M interface & remote subscriber units (four wire) shall have mounting arrangement similar to that for PLC terminals and these cabinets shall also be painted with the same paint similar to that of PLC terminals.

i) All the terminals for speech shall be supplied fully wired for addition of VFTs in future. However, the terminal supplied shall be equipped with programmable transit band pass filters.

j) Equipment for speech communication must be fully compatible with Employer’s existing equipment. Any Interfaces required for proper matching and connection with the employer’s existing equipment shall be provided by the supplier.

k) Terminals for protection shall be suitable between two ends of each transmission line or on tandem operation basis with back to back connection at the intermediates stations.

l) Each PLC terminal for speech as well as protection purposes shall be provided with a plug-in type service telephone and buzzer. Further, 4 wire remote telephone instruments (parallel to service telephone) shall also be provided on one PLC terminals for protection for each link. These instruments shall be located in respective switchyard control room to enable the operator to make emergency calls on point-to-point basis. Each such instrument shall be equipped, with a buzzer and ‘press-to-call’ key and shall not require any additional power supply units.

- 1 -

SECTION-10 CHAPTER-2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LINE TRAPS

1. LINE TRAP:

1.1 General:

The manufacturer whose line trap are offered should have designed, manufactured and tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard and supplied the line traps for the specified voltage and fault level. All the equipment covered under the package shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of the relevant IEC/IS specifications or equivalent National Standards, except to the extent modified by this specification and shall also be in accordance with requirements under section I & II.

1.2 Location of equipment:

The line traps as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the transmission lines.

1.3 Line trap requirements:

Line traps shall be inserted into Extra-high voltage transmission line to prevent undue loss of carrier signal for all power system conditions. Its impedance shall be negligible at power frequency (50Hz) so as not to disturb power transmission but shall be relatively high over the frequency band appropriate to carrier transmission.

Line trap shall consist of a main coil designed to carry continuously the rated current without exceeding the limit of temperature rise. It shall be supplemented with a protective device and tuning device.

Line trap shall be broad band tuned for its entire carrier frequency range form 50 to 500KHz. Resistive component of impedance of the line trap within its carrier frequency blocking range shall not be less than 570 ohms.

Line trap shall be provided with a protective device in the form of surge arrestors which shall be designed and arranged such that neither significant alteration in its protective function nor physical damage shall result from either temperature rise or the magnetic field of the main coil at continuous rated current or rated short time current. The protective device shall neither enter into operation nor remain in operation, following transient actuation by the power frequency voltage developed across the line trap by the rated short time current. The protective device shall be shunt connected to the main coil and tuning device.

The lightning arrestor shall be station class current limiting active gap type. Its rated discharge current shall be 10KA.

The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap of each rating shall fully comply with the requirements of IEC-99-4. It shall conform to type tests as applicable and type test certificate for the same shall the submitted by the bidder.

The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap shall be subject to the routine and acceptance tests as per IEC-99-4.

- 2 -

Line trap shall be equipped with the bird barriers.

Line trap shall conform to IEC-353 (latest) fulfilling the all technical requirements as follows:

Technical Parameter 66 kV line

Rated power frequency 50 Hz

Rated system voltage 66V

Highest system voltage 72.5kV

Rated continuous, current at 50 degree C ambient.

400A

Rated short time current for 1 second 10KA Type of tuning Rated blocking band-width

Broad band to be

indicated by bidder

Minimum resistive component of impedance within the rated blocking band-width

570 ohms

Rated inductance of main coil (mH) 1.0

Radio interference voltage Not more than 500 micro volt at 187 kV (rms)

The Bidder shall indicate continuous current rating of the line trap at 65 deg. C ambient.

The line trap shall conform in type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per IEC-353, as per following details:

TYPE TEST: The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven

years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.

i) Short time current test. ii) Power frequency voltage test on tuning device. iii) Impulse voltage test. iv) Temperature rise test v) Measurement of radio influence voltage vi) Measurement of the rated inductance of the main coil vii) Measurement of power frequency inductance of the mail coil viii) Measurement of blocking resistance and blocking impedance ix) Measurement of tapping loss and tapping loss based on the blocking resistance x) Measurement of loss at power frequency.

- 3 -

Routine Test: As per quality assurance program (QAP).

ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS-8793: 1995 shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL. i) Power frequency voltage test on tuning device. ii) Measurement of the rated inductance of the main coil iii) Measurement of blocking resistance and blocking impedance iv) Measurement of tapping loss and tapping loss based on the blocking resistance

1.4 LINE TRAP MOUNTING:

The line trap shall be suitable for outdoor suspension mounting and shall be mechanically strong enough to withstand the stresses due to maximum wind pressure of 260kg/Square meter.

Contractor shall be required to co-ordinate the mounting arrangement with the existing arrangement at different sub-stations. Non-magnetic suspension hook/link of adequate length and tensile strength to provide necessary magnetic clearance between the line trap and suspension hardware shall be supplied by the Contractor.

The line trap shall be supplied compete with disc insulators and hardware fittings. The disc insulators to be supplied with the line trap shall conform to IS: 731/1971 with latest amendments. All hardware fittings associated with these insulators shall conform to IS: 2486 (Part-I)/1971 (1st Revision), IS: 2486 (Part-II)/1971 (1st Revision), IS:2486 (Part-III)/1974 and IS:2486 (Part-IV)/1981 with latest amendments & revision. Copies of test certificates of type tests and routine tests as stipulated in the above quoted ISS shall be furnished with tender.

1.5 LINE TRAP TERMINAL CONNECTORS:

The line traps shall be suitable for connecting to ACSR single/twin bundle Zebra conductor as per layout requirements. Necessary connector shall be supplied by the Contractor.

Terminal connectors shall conform to IS: 5561 and shall also comply with requirements indicated in Section GTR.

Terminal connectors shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical take off the conductor.

Clamps/connectors shall be designed for the same current ratings as line trap and temperature rise shall not exceed 0.5 deg.C over 50 deg C ambient.

1.6 DOCUMENTATION

The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL approval:-

1. Outline general arrangement

2. Name and rating plate

- 4 -

3. line trap mounting arrangement

4. terminal connectors

5. Any other drawing required to complete the equipment like bird barrier etc.

NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for

stamping the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

- 1 -

SECTION-10 CHAPTER-3

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR COUPLING DEVICE

1. COUPLING DEVICE: 1.1 The coupling devices shall be interposed between the capacitor voltage

transformer/coupling capacitor and coaxial line to the PLC transmitter/receiver and in conjunction with the capacitor voltage transformer/coupling capacitor shall ensure:

a) Efficient transmission of carrier frequency signals between the carrier frequency connection

and the power line. b) Safety of personnel and protection of the low voltage parts and installation, against the

effects of power frequency voltage and transient over voltage. The coupling device, in conjunction with the CVT/CC shall form and electric filter of band pass type.

a) It shall match characteristic impedance of HT line to impedance of the carrier frequency

connection. Impedance matching between power line and the carrier frequency connection may be done by a transformer or an auto-transformer.

b) Galvanic isolation between primary and secondary terminals of the coupling device shall be performed by the above mentioned transformer.

c) Power frequency currents derived by the CVT may be drained to the earth by a separate inductance termed drain coil of suitable rating or through primary of the above transformer.

d) Voltage surges coming from the power line at the terminals of the coupling device shall be limited by a non-linear surge arrester of suitable rating in the primary side. Requirement of a gas type voltage arrester in secondary side of the coupling device shall have to be fully justified.

The surges Arrester shall have power frequency spark over voltage co-ordinated with the equipment ahead of it.

e) For direct and efficient earthing of its primary terminals, the coupling device shall be

equipped with an earthing switch. The coupling device shall be designed such that it shall not be possible to remove the cover before the earthing switch is operated to the ‘earthed’ position. Further the Earth Switch shall be available for earthing of CVT-HT terminals, when the coupling filter units are removed from circuit for maintenance/replacement. The design shall take due regard of requirements for safety in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules.

1.2 Two numbers ‘phase to earth’ type coupling filters shall be used to achieve in secure

‘phase to phase’ / ‘Inter-circuit coupling’. Connection between secondaries of the two phases to earth type coupling device shall be through a balancing transformer/hybrid such that reliable communication shall be ensured even when one of the coupled phase to earthed or open circuited on the line side.

Coupling device shall conform to IEC-481/IS-8997 and IS-8998 shall have the following carrier frequency characteristics as applicable to a phase to earth type coupling device.

a) Nominal line side 400 ohms for 220kV line Ph-E & impedance 600 ohms for Ph-Ph

- 2 -

b) Nominal line 150 ohms (balanced) side impedance c) Composite loss Not more than 2 dB d) Return loss Not less than 12 dB e) Band width shall suit the frequency plan between 40 and 500 KHz f) Nominal peak envelope Not less than 650 Watt. Power (for inter-modulation product 80 dB down)

The coupling device shall be suitable for outdoor mounting. Temperature of metallic equipment mounted out door is expected to rise upto 65o C during the maximum ambient temperature of 50o C specified. The equipment offered by the Bidder shall operate satisfactorily under these conditions.

The elements of coupling device shall be fitted on a base plate and enclosed in a metal box.

The HT Terminal of coupling device shall be connected to HF terminal of the CVT by means of 6mm Sq. copper wire with suitable lugs & taped with 11kV insulation by the contractor.

Coupling device shall have at least two terminals for carrier equipment connection. Bidder shall confirm that such a parallel connection to coupling device directly will not result in any additional attenuation.

The coupling device including the drainage coil, surge arrestor and earthing switch shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per IEC-481/IS:8998.

1.3 TESTS:

1.3.1 Type Tests The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years

old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.

1.3.2 Routine Tests As per quality assurance program (QAP).

1.3.3 Acceptance Tests

All acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:8998 shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.

- - 1

SECTION-10 CHAPTER-4

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 48 VOLTS 120 AH SMPS BASED BATTERY CHARGER SUITABLE FOR VRLA MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY BANK

1. SCOPE:

This specification provides for design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site FOR destination of 48 Volts 120 AH SMPS based battery charger suitable for indoor installation, complete with all fittings accessories and associated auxiliary equipment mandatory which are required for efficient and trouble free operation as per specified here under. It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standard of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete in all component necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment interlocks protection scheme etc. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought out in this Specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.

1.02 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :

The equipment to be supplied against the specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions: Max. ambient air temperature 500 C Max. daily average ambient temperature 450 C Max. yearly weighted ambient temperature 350 C

Min. air temperature (-) 50 C Max. humidity 100% Min. relative humidity 26 % Average number of thunder storm days per annum 40 Average annual rain fall 15 cm to 100 cm.

Number of months during which tropical monsoon 4 months (June to conditions prevail altitude above MSL Sept). Varies from 61 meters to

815.00 mtrs. Average number of rainly days per annum. 120 days Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration) 0.3g. Degree of pollution Heavy Intensity of solar radiation 1.0 KW/sq.m. Max. Wind load 195 kg/sq.m.

1.03 STANDARD: All material and equipment shall comply in all respect with requirement of the latest addition of the relevant IS/IEC/TEC/RDSO. A set of standards adopted, translated in English, if it is in language other than English, shall also be enclosed with the tender, to enable due comparison, wherever a standard is specially mentioned in these

- - 2

specification. It is understood that the corresponding standard amongst the sources mentioned above shall also apply.

1.04 MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP: All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well finished and of approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes, flaws and of the true form and dimensions.

All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.

1.05 DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS: The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independents 4-core cable connection from an A.C. 50 cycles 3 phase 415 ± 10% volts switchboard fed from a Station Transformer.

1.06 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:  

The battery chargers of 48V/25Amp. in N+1 configuration with ultimate capacity 50Amp/75 Amp/100Amp shall be of SMPS type with type earth. The system shall consist of a Distribution/Switching/Alarms arrangement (DSA) and Float Rectifier-cum-Chargers (FR/FCs) in a rack. It shall employ modular configuration for flexible provision of DC Power. It shall employ menu driven Micro Processor Controlled Techniques for DSA as well as module for control, monitoring and alarm to achieve better reliability of the system. The SMPS battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation with float voltage 2.23 to 2.25 Volts per cell (at 27 Deg. C) and 2.3 Volt per cell (at 27 Deg C) for charge voltage while supplying the constant DC load

1.06.1 The SMPS battery chargers shall have constant voltage characteristics throughout the range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the maintenance free type VRLA batteries fully charged but without harmful overcharge. The system shall employ a modular configuration to provide flexibility in view the future load requirements of DC power. The modules shall be accommodated in a rack. Distribution/Switching/Alarm (DSA) shall be provided in first rack or in a separate rack as per manufacturer’s design for the ultimate system capacity. All factory wiring for the rack shall be for the ultimate capacity so that only plugging of FR/FC module shall enhance the DC power plant output.

1.06.2 Principal Parameters: - Input Nominal Voltage i) 230 Volt +/-10% AC single phase for module of

25Amp.For ultimate capacity of 50Amp ii) System rack having ultimate capacity of 75 Amp and

125Amp will be provided AC Three phase input power supply and each module shall operate on individual phase of three-phase AC input power supply.

Input Voltage Range 165V to 260 V AC Frequency 48Hz to 52Hz Power factor >0.98 at 50% and above load Efficiency >0.90 at 50% and above load Soft Start time 10 sec Min output current ramp up Output Voltage adj. 48V to 56V DC

- - 3

Current limit adjustable For 25Amps SMPS For 50Amps SMPS For 100Amps SMPS

5 to 25A 5 to 50A 5 to 100A

Regulation: 1) Output voltage over shoot/under shoot when charger is switched on 2) DC output voltage over shoot for a step change in AC voltage 165V to 260V single phase 3) DC output voltage for a step load change of 25% to 100%

+/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100% +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100% +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100%

Ripple <200mV RMS Load Sharing Better than +/-5% active current sharing at full load Cooling Convection

1.07. Main Features of SMPS Charger 1.07.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:

The rack structure shall be made up of rigid frame work of steel profiles and rear door may be of hinged or removable type. The rear door shall be provided with ventilation arrangement. Alternate design of aluminum and other rigid structure meeting the requirements are also permitted.

The rack shall be free of sharp edges or sharp corners. The rack shall be designed for easy maintenance & installation. The rack mounting arrangement shall be such as to provide easy access from rear and top for installation and maintenance.

The individual FR/FC module shall be easily mounted to/removed from the front side of the rack. The FR/FC module shall be designed to slide in to the rack on a suitable mechanical arrangement. The associated AC input, DC output connections, control/systems & interface cable connecting the modules shall be connected /disconnected easily without causing any interruption in the supply and damage to load or other working module.

Proper thermal engineering of hardware design shall be done by the manufacturer so as to ensure the uninterrupted use of the equipment. The rack complete with all panels fitted shall be designed to allow cooling by natural convection.

With the doors in position, all the common visual alarms and meters shall be clearly visible. However the fixtures on the door shall not restrict the movement of door in any way.

The FR/FC modules shall be cooled by natural convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be through locking type arrangement. DC output shall be through hot plug in connector on the FR/FC side and through lugged termination on the bus bar/termination end. Control alarm and mentoring connection shall be through connectors. The FR/FC module shall be removable from the rack only. All AC input, DC output & alarm/control/monitoring cables interconnecting the modules and rack shall be easily disconnected by plugs or connectors.

AC Terminations The input terminal should be single phase or three phases as the case may be cleared marked as R Y B and N and for AC three phase, L and N for AC single phase.

- - 4

AC input termination shall be suitably protected against the accidental touch/contact with the working staff for their protection and shall also have clear and prominent be “Danger” marking. Screening shall be provided between AC and DC components to prevent accidents.

The AC input connection to the rectifier module shall be by means of locking type plug and socket arrangement. All the connection between distribution and FR/FC shall be through proper rated cables only. Fuses and circuit breakers for each FR/FC shall be easily accessible and properly rated. Proper termination for the AC input of the circuit breakers and its output to the FR/FC.

The system racks having ultimate capacity of 100 Amp. will be provided AC three phase input power supply and each module shall operate on individual phase of three phase AC input power supply.

DC Terminations The output of each rectifier in the negative load shall be taken through full rated ISI marked MCBs. All the AC, DC control & alarm cabling shall be supplied with the rack. All DC +ve and - ve leads shall be clearly marked. Wiring

All insulated conductors except those within the confines of a printed circuit board assembly shall be of the rating enough to withstand the maximum current and voltage during fault and overload. All the wires and cables used shall be fire retardant as per IS 1554 with amendment I (June 94).

All wiring shall be neatly secured in position and accurately supported. Where wires pass through any part of metal or cover the holes through which they pass shall be suitably bushed.

Earthing: - Two power earth terminals shall be provided in the frame of the system. Mounting off component & layout:

Components mounting and fixing methods shall be secured. Suitable mechanical structure/ arrangement for holding modules in position shall be provided so that the module is held firmly by sliding through it.

The FR/FC modules shall be cooled convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be through locking type arrangement. DC out put shall be through hot plug in connector on the FR/FC side and through lugged termination on the bus-bar termination end. Control, alarm and monitoring connections shall be through connectors. The FR/FC module shall be removable from the front of the rack only. AllAC input, DC output and alarm/control/monitoring cables interconnecting the modules and racks shall be easily disconnected by plugs or connectors. 1.07.02Distribution, Switching, Control, alarm & Monitoring (DSA)

The Distribution Switching sub - system of DSA shall preferably be in the modular from whereas control, alarm &, monitoring sub-system shall only be modular. The Controller must be Microprocessor based. The distribution switching sub-system 'may be accommodated in a rack with other FR/FCs or in separate rack. These sub systems shall be rack mountable. DSA shall preferably be housed in the upper portion of the rack above the FR/FC modules. The unit shall be equipped to meet the ultimate system capacity.

- - 5

1.07.03. Battery Temperature Compensation.

The charger shall be provided with the appropriate circuitry to interface with the temperature probe assembly. With the probe, the charger shall automatically compensate gassing and constant voltage setting inversely proportional to the probe’s temp/ battery ambient temp., so that over charging at high temperature and under charging at low temperature can be prevented. 1.07.04 Current Limiting (Voltage Drop)

Current Limiting (Voltage" Drop) shall be provided for float/ charge operation. The float/charge limiting shall be continuously adjustable between 50% to 100% of rated out put current for out put voltages range of 44.4 to 56 volt. For test purposes upper limit of 100% +5% and lower limit of 50% - 5% shall be acceptable. The float and charge current limit adjustment shall be provided on the front panel of the rectifier module. The FR/FC modules shall be fully protected against short circuit. It shall be ensured that short circuit does not lead to any fire hazard. 1.07.5 Fuses

All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are in turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse. 1.07.6 Blocking Arrangements

Blocking arrangement shall be provided in the positive pole of the out put circuit of the charger to prevent current flow fr9m the DC battery into the charger.

1.07.7 Monitoring, Alarm and Indicating Lamps.

The visual indications/ display such as LEDs, LCDs or a combination of both shall be provided on each FR/FC module to indicate: (A) Functional indications:

The following functional indications shall be provided on FR/FC and DSA: a) Mains available. b) FR/FC on Auto Float. c) FR/FC on Auto charge.

Note: The functional indication (a) shall be provided on both DSA & FR/FC module. While b and c may be provided either on DSA or both FR/FC & DSA. (B) Alarm indications

(i) On FR/FC (a) FR/FC over voltage, under voltage or output fail. (b) FR/FC over load (voltage drop) Functional indications shall be extended as status and alarm. FR/FC fail to distribution / switching / control & alarm unit.

- - 6

(ii) On DSA

a) Load voltage high (above 56v /low (below 45.6 v) b) FR/FC fail c) Mains out of range d) System Over Load e) Mains ON/Battery Discharge f) Temp. Compensation fail g) Battery Fail or No Battery h) Battery Isolated from the load

All alarm circuits shall be provided with suitable delay to ensure that they do not operate

to transient. All the protection /alarm shall be within tolerance of O.25v in case of DC voltage and 10/0 in case of current. For AC voltage it shall be +/- 5V.

Every alarm, condition shall be accompanied with an audio alarm with audio cut off facility. Potential free contacts two (one for alarm and one redundant) shall be provided for extension of alarms to centralized display. - . 1.07.8 Radio Interference The equipment shall be efficiently screened against interference to radio and also other communication equipment, which may be installed in the same building. All sources of noise shall be filtered if necessary with suppressors generally in accordant with relevant standards. 1.07.9 Name plates and marking The name plates shall be while with Black engraved letters. On top of each charger, on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the charger. Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various equipments and ease of operation and maintenance. An etched, engraved or anodizer name plate shall be fitted on each $MPS battery charger unit having following details inscribed. Manufacture's name. P.O . No. & date. S.No. of SMPS unit Rating of SMPS charger Input voltage of SMPS charger Output voltage of SMPS charger Year of Manufacture 8.0 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGNS:

The contractor shall assume full responsibility for co-ordinate and adequate design and shall conform to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified. In case the equipment covered by this specification is to be co-ordinate with other equipment, the contractor shall furnish complete information and data as may be desired by the purchaser.

- - 7

9.0 TESTS & INSPECTION:

The tenderer must furnish test reports carried out on one of the SMPS battery charge unit which shall pass all the prescribed type tests for conformity of relevant standards. These type test reports must be issued by a Govt. approved / Govt. recognized/ a Govt. accredited laboratory and must not be older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender.

Routine/ acceptance tests shall also be carried out on each SMPS Battery Charger as per specification. Following type tests shall be carried out for compliance of specification requirements: TYPE TESTS:

(I) Visual Inspection (II) Insulation Resistance Test (III) Applied high Voltage test. (IV) Performance test. (V) Test for protection device. (VI) Burn in test. (VII) Climatic test. (VIII) Vibration test.

9.1 ROUTINE & ACCEPTANCE TESTS: On each of the SMPS battery chargers following routine and acceptance tests shall be carried out at manufacturer's works before dispatch.

(I) Visual Inspection (II) Insulation Resistance Test (III) Applied high Voltage test. (IV) Performance test. (V) Test for protection device & other tests shall be carried out as per requirement of GTP in

the presence of inspecting officer. 9.2 INSPECTION:

The inspection of the equipments shall be carried out by the purchaser's representatives in accordance to the relevant standards.

a) The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of

manufacture, where the equipments are being manufactured and; the supplier shall provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Supplier's works, raw materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary tests at any stage.

b) The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing program so, that arrangements could be made for inspection.

c) No equipments shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has been satisfactorily inspected, tested and cleared.

d) Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the Supplier from his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment is later found to be defective.

- - 8

9.3 TESTS AT SITE: - The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all the tests on the equipment after arrival at site and the supplier shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions. 10. DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND MANUALS: In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to submit lo show the arrangement and merits of the offered equipments. The following drawings shall be supplied with the tender. i. General installation layout of SMPS equipments showing position of all associated

equipments. ii. Detailed dimensional drawings and descriptive literatures of all the associated

equipments separately. iii. Circuit wiring diagram and schematic diagram. iv. Literature/ pamphlets / manuals of SMPS and its associated equipments.

The successful tenderer shall within four weeks of placement of order, submit four sets of final version of all the drawings of the SMPS Battery Charger for purchaser’s approval. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on drawings to the supplier within a period of four weeks. The supplier shall if necessary modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of modified drawings for purchaser’s approval within two weeks from the purchaser’s comment, which will be approved within 15 days. After receipt of purchaser’s approval the supplier shall submit four sets of drawings and literature containing erection, operating and maintenance instructions per equipment. A set of reproducibles of the approved drawing too will be supplied for the purchaser use.

11. PACKING & MARKING

i. All SMPS equipments shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates to avoid handling problem.

ii. The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit, strong at site and subsequent handling in the field.

iii. Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.

iv. All packing cases shall be marked legibly with the appropriate caution symbol and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their destination and avoid dispatched on account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings stenciled on it-in indelible ink. Whenever necessary, proper arrangement for lifting, such as lifting hooks etc. shall be provided. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied by supplier without any extra cost.

v. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the following information:

a) Name of the consignee. b) Details of consignment. c) Destination. d) Total weight of consignment. e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate. f) Handling and unpacking instruction.

- - 9

All gauges, meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language, using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in India. In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall be suitably marked.

12. PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION:

The tenderer shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection of the various portions of the work included in the tender. The purchaser or his duly authorised agent shall have access to the contractor's or sub contractor's work at any time during working hours for the purpose of inspecting the manufacture and testing of materials, equipment and completed plant and the contractor shall provide the necessary facilities for inspection.

13. DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:

Should the tendered wish to depart from provision of this specification either on account of a manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw special attention to the proposed points of departure in his tender and submit such full information, drawings & specifications as will enable the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.

- - 10

APPENDIX ‘A’ SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT 

Battery Charger: The Battery Charging equipment shall be housed in a sheet steel cabin finished in stove enameled light grey color conforming to shade of 631 of IS‐5 specification. The charger cabin  shall  have  thickness  of  18  gauge  or  better  with  adequate  ventilation.  The minimum size of cubical should be 585mm Width, 500mm depth and 560mm Height. The rack shall be  free of sharp edges or sharp corners. The rack shall be designed  for easy maintenance &  installation. The  rack mounting  arrangement  shall be  such  as  to provide  easy  access  from  rear  and  top  for  installation  and maintenance. Two power earth  terminals  shall  be  provided  in  the  frame  of  the  system  to  provide  effective earthing to the system. 

The  individual Rectifier module  shall  be  easily mounted  to/removed  from  the front side of the rack. The Rectifier module shall be designed to slide in to the rack on a suitable mechanical  arrangement.  The  associated AC  input, DC  output  connections, control/systems  &  interface  cable  connecting  the  modules  shall  be  connected /disconnected  easily without  causing  any  interruption  in  the  supply  and  damage  to load or other working module. There should be auto/manual change over between float and boost charger.   Charger Section: 

The charger should be suitable for operation from single (230 ± 30% volts, 50Hz) or 3 phase (415 ± 30% volts, 50Hz) AC supply as per the system ultimate capacity and suitable  for  charging 24  cell at 2.16  to 2.40 per  cell while  simultaneously  supplying a continuous load as per requirement at an ambient temp. of 45⁰C. The output of charger should  be  stabilized within  1%  of  the  charging  voltage.  There  should  be  individual MCB for each module and complete system. The charger section shall comprise of the following items:  S No.  Item Description               Qty 1.   Cabinet                1 2.   Hot Swap Rectifiers Modules 25A/48V  N+1      ( N = Load Current +  

Battery Charging Current)   

- - 11

The  rectifier Modules  shall  be  hot  swappable with  Individual Alarm  Indications  for Over Voltage/ Under Voltage or Output Fail. 

 3  Dropping Diode  During  the Boost charging  the  full battery voltage should not be  reflected on  the bus bars, that is, it should be ensured that the constant voltage is available on DC bus bars irrespective of  the  fact whether  the battery  is on  float or on boost charge and at same time all battery  cell  should be equally  charged. There  should be auto/manual  change over between float and boost charger.      4  Voltage monitoring Card            1  5  AC Contactor              1 6  DC Contactor              1 7  Low Voltage Detection Card          1 8  MCB 6A                4 9  MCB 32A                2 10  Lightening Protection Device Class C        1 11  Battery temperature Compensation Probe       2m  12        Microprocessor based Controller                                        1 No 

The controller should be mounted so that it is front accessible  , front monitored and Front Controlled. It shall be installed in such a manner that the LCD panel is visible without opening and Lock / Door of the unit. The controller should have the following facilities: 

 A. Metering : 

a) Load Voltage. b) Load Current. c) Battery Voltage. d) Battery Current. e) Battery Temp. f) Voltage and current of Individual module. 

B.  Alarms and Indications : a) Load voltage high. b) Single Rectifier alarm c) Multiple Rectifier alarm d) Mains out of range e) System Over Load f) Mains ON/Battery Discharge 

- - 12

g) Temp. Compensation fail h) Battery Fail or No Battery i) Battery Isolated from the load  All alarm circuits shall be provided with suitable delay to ensure that they do not 

operate to transient. All the protection /alarm shall be within tolerance of O.25v in case of DC voltage and 10/0 in case of current. For AC voltage it shall be +/‐ 5V. 

 Every alarm, condition shall be accompanied with an audio alarm with audio cut 

off facility.  

C. Functional Indications:  a) Mains available. b) Rectifier on Auto Float.  c) Rectifier on Auto Charge. d) Alarm to indicate general alarm condition 

 13.  Potential free contacts: 

Potential free contacts should be provided for extension of alarms to centralized display. 

a) Mains out of range. b) Single Rectifier alarm c) Multiple Rectifier alarm d) Communication Error. e) System Over Load. f) System voltage high. g) System voltage low. 

 All the components should be of best quality and from reputed manufacturers. The layout of components, wiring workmanship reliability etc. shall be of best quality. Adequate space should be provided within the charger section and Distribution, Switching, Control, alarm & Monitoring section for easy accessibility of MCB, Fuses, Alarms, protection devices etc. The charging equipment should be complete with the various component listed above but necessarily limited to the same. The charger shall also be complete with wiring, glands and fixing bolts.

- 1 -

SECTION-10 CHAPTER-5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF H.F.CABLE (150 OHMS BALANCED) FOR CONNECTING POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION TERMINAL WITH THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT FOR HVPN CARRIER NETWORK

1. GENERAL: High frequency cable shall connect the coupling device installed in the switchyard to the PLC terminal installed indoor. The high frequency cable to be offered by the bidder shall be suitable for being laid directly in trenches or in ducts. The cable shall be tinned copper braided and steel armoured and its outer covering shall be protected against attack by termites. Bidder shall offer his comments on method employed by him for earthing of screen and submit full justification for the same with due regard to safety requirements.

1.1 SCOPE:- 1.1.1 This specification covers details of H.F. Cable (150 Ohms BALANCED)

required for connecting Power Line carrier Communication terminals with the associated equipment for HVPN carrier Network.

1.1.2 The scope of supply shall Include design, manufacture, testing at

manufacturer’s works before despatch and delivery of the H.F. Cable for use on Power Line carrier Communication equipment in HVPN.

1.2 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:- 1.2.1 The EHV grid substations (66kV and above) where the HF Cable is required to

be installed are located in the level plains of Haryana. The climatic conditions are of extreme nature varying from extreme cold to dry and tropical humidity to hot.

1.2.2 The HF Cable is required to serve satisfactorily under the following climatic

conditions prevailing at site:- i) Maximum ambient temperature : 50oC ii) Minimum temperature : -2.5oC iii) Relative humidity : a) Maximum : 100% b) Minimum : 26% iv) Average Nos. of thunder

Storms days per annum : 45. v) Average Nos. of rainy days per annum : 120 days vi) Average rain fall per annum. : 900mm vii) Average number of dust storms days per annum : 35

viii) Attitude above mean sea level : less than1000 ix) Maximum temperature in the : 45oC. shade. x) Maximum wind pressure : 195 Kg/M2

- 2 -

1.2.3 The atmosphere is to be considered as laden with industrial and town gas and

dust in suspension during dry-months. Fog smoke and mild acid are also present. Heavy lighting is also present during the months from June to October. The H.F.Cable is exposed to sunshine, rain, Fog, Hail, Snow etc.

1.3 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:- 1.3.1 All materials used in the construction/manufacture of the H.F.Cable shall be

brand new and of the best quality obtainable of their respective kind and shall confirm to their respective Indian Standards or other equivalent International recognized standards whenever applicable. The successful bidder shall assume full reasonability for coordinated and adequate design.

1.3.2 The workmanship for HF Cable shall be of the highest grade and the entire

construction in accordance with the best modern engineering practice. The HF Cable shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at site.

1.4 STANDARDS: 1.4.1 The HF Cable and all its materials covered by this specification shall unless

otherwise stated complete in all respects with the requirements of the latest edition of IS-5026 and IS-11967 Part-II/Sec-3.

1.5 DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:-

Should the bidder wish to depart from the provisions of this specifications either on account of manufacturing practice for any other reasons he shall draw special attention to the proposed points of departure a separate sheet(s) in his tender as per Annexure-III of this specification and shall submit such full information, drawings and specification so that the merits of his proposal may be fully understood. This specification shall be held binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.

1.6 DOCUMENTATION:- 1.6.1 The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.

1. Drawing showing the inside/inner of the HF Cable and dimensions of its various components and structures including its weight.

2. Any other drawing to explain details and merits shall also be submitted.

NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the approval of drawings by HVPNL.

1.7 TROPICAL TREATMENT:- 1.7.1 The H.F.Cable can be subjected during the service to extremely severe climatic

conditions detailed under Sr. No. 1.2 of this specification. All corrodible parts and surfaces shall be provided with such protective finishes so that no part of the installed H.F.Cable shall be injuriously affected by the atmospheric conditions. The H.F.Cable, if required, may be given special treatments for tropical conditions.

- 3 -

1.7.2 All part of the H.F.Cable that are likely to develop corrosion under normal

working conditions shall be effectively protected against corrosion by standard methods to achieve durable results.

1.8 BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE:- 1.8.1 The bidder (s) shall clearly state in their experience and capability to undertake

design, manufacture, testing and supply of the items similar to that covered in this specification giving complete information about their establishment i.e. design office, working personnel, plant and machinery and testing facilities available at the manufacturer’s works. Details of collaboration, if any, with other renowned experienced manufacturers shall be stated in the tender.

1.8.2 The bidder shall supply list of purchase orders of similar item executed by them

during the past, giving the name of the purchase, year of supply and place of installation of the item.

1.8.3 Information regarding satisfactory services/operation of the equipment supplied

in the past be also furnished with the tender.

1.9 RESPONSIBILITY OF DESIGN:- The successful bidder shall assume full responsibility for adequate design for the duty in view to ensure trouble free long service and tropical conditions and shall use such arrangement and material as to confirm to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified.

Impedance of the cable shall be such as to match the impedance of the PLC terminal on one side and to that of the coupling device on the other side over the entire carrier frequency range of 40-500 kHz. The H.F.Cable (150 ohms balanced) shall meet the following parameters:- 1. Overall diameter of H.F.Cable shall be between 20-25 mm. 2. The mutual capacitance at 1 kHz of the H.F.Cable be 34 pf

(Nominal)/meter. 3. Conductor resistance of cable shall not exceed 12.8 ohm per km at

20oC & dia to be 1.4mm. 4. The H.F.Cable shall have bending radius of 20 times the overall

diameter of the cable. 5. Loop resistance of H.F.Cable will not exceed 30 ohms per km at 20oC. 6. Withstand test Voltage between conductor and outer sheath for one

minute to be 4kV. 7. The attenuation per km of the cable at various frequencies in the range

of 10 to 500 kHz shall remain in the range of 1 to 5.1 dB/km. 8. H.F.Cable will be with semi spaced dielectric, polythene string and tube

and annealed tinned braided copper wire with 90% coverage, polythene inner sheath, GI wire braided armoring and overall PVC sheathed, preferably grey. The protective armoring provided in the HF cable shall consist of 0.3 mm (approx) dia of standard GI wire braiding with 70% coverage.

- 4 -

1.10 TESTS:-

Type Tests: The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then

seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.

i) Corona extinction voltage ii) Characteristic impedance Attenuation (insertion loss) iii) Structural return loss iv) Capacitance v) Capacitance Stability vi) Capacitance unbalance vii) Transmission unbalance viii) Mechanically induced noise Voltage ix) Time delay x) Ageing stability xi) Stress-crack resistance xii) Outer conductor integrity xiii) Screening efficiency xiv) Cold bend xv) Flow xvi) Dimensional stability xvii) Contamination xviii) Bendability xix) Flammability xx) Resistance to fluids xxi) Solderability Weight

ROUTINE TESTS: As per quality assurance program (QAP). ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS:11967 (Part-2/Sec-3), shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL. i) Visual and mechanical inspection ii) Physical dimensions Iii Marking iv) Workmanship v) Characteristic impedance Attenuation (insertion loss)

- 5 -

vi) Structural return loss vii) Corona extinction voltage viii) Capacitance ix) Capacitance unbalance x) Transmission unbalance xi) Mechanically induced noise voltage xii) Time delay xiii) Cold dend xiv) Contamination xv) Resistance of fluids xvi) Solderability Weight

1.11 INSPECTION:-

H.F.Cable shall be inspected by the authorised representative of the HVPNL at manufacturer’s premises and acceptance test shall be carried out in accordance with this specification. Inspection report alongwith the routine test certificates shall be forwarded to the HVPNL for approval before despatch

1.12 PACKING AND DESPATCH :- 1.12.1 After approval of the Inspection/Test Certificates, the H.F.Cable will be

despatched as per the despatch instructions issued by the HVPNL. 1.12.2 The H.F.Cable shall be suitably packed in drum lengths of 500 meters with +

5% tolerance in drum lengths and total ordered quantity for transportation direct to the consignee and the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages and losses due to improper packing.

1.13 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:- 1.13.1 The bidders shall furnish with his offer Guaranteed Technical Particulars of the

HF Cable offered as per Annexure-I of this specification alongwith his comments where his specification do not meet or exceed the requirements laid down in this specification. These guaranteed technical particulars should be supported by the published literature of the bidder.

1.13.2 Any other additional technical particulars may be supplied by the bidder which he may like to give to prove the merits of the HF Cable offered by him. Tenders without Guaranteed Technical Particulars may not be considered.

G-8/Pkg-B ANNEXURE-

66 kV GIS SUB-STATIONS AT SECTOR-5, PANCHKULA

LIST OF DRAWINGS

A) STRUCTURE TYPE/EQUIPMENT

S.N STRUCTURE TYPE/EQUIPMENT DRAWING NO. REMARKS

1. CT-4 HVPN-103 2. CT-5 HVPN-103 3. 66kV Lightening Arrestor (LA) HVPN-0022 4. 66kV CVT/CC HVPN-0024 5. 66kV NCT HVPN-0014 6. 25/31.5MVA, 66/11kV T/F HCD/TS-1140 7. 11kV NCT HVPN-0027 8. Fire wall HCD/TS-1106 9. 11kV CT/PT HTD/SK-179

B) ARCHITECTURE DRAWINGS S.N. DRAWING No. SUBJECT

1 Job No. 1326/1 PLAN, ELEVATION & SECTIONS AND GELO 2 Job No.1326/2 ELEVATION & SECTIONS 3 Job No1326/3 TERRACE PLAN 4 Job No.1326/5 JOINERY DETAILS 5 Job No.1276/5 TOILET DETAILS 6 Job No. 1357/1 DETAILS OF MAIN ENTRANCE GATE (S/STN. &

RES.COLONY) 7 Job No.1358/1 DESIGN FOR B/WALL (FRONT SIDE) OF S/STN. & RES.

COLONY 8 Job No. 1358/2 DESIGN FOR C/FENCING & U/FENCING B/WALL AROUND

SUB-STATION & RES. COLONY 9 Job No. 564/1 SUMP PIT CUM PUMP CHAMBER

--2-- C) SWITCH HOUSE BUILDING – STRUCTURAL AND RELATED DRAWINGS S.N. DRAWING NO. SUBJECT

1 HCD/TB-682 FOUNDATION DETAILS 2 HCD/TB-683 STRUCTURAL DETAILS 3 HCD/TB-653 STORAGE TANK & INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY &

SEWERAGE D) OTHER DRAWINGS 1. HCD/SK-181 CROSS SECTION OF CONCRETE ROADS 2. HCD/SK-172 CROSS SECTION OF PCC PAVEMENT/PARKING 3. HCD/TS-1019 OUT DOOR CABLE TRENCHES & TRENCH CROSSING

ROAD 4. HCD/TS-1020 INDOOR CABLE TRENCHES 5. HCD/TZ-389 SUM-PIT CUM PUMP CHAMBER 6. HCD/TS-1024 SWITCH YARD FENCING 7. HCD/TS-1175 DETAIL OF MAIN ENTRANCE GATE (SUB-STATION &

RESIDENTIAL COLONY) 8. HCD/TS-1176 DETAIL OF BOUNDARY WALL 9. HCD/TS-182 (T) SOAKAGE PIT

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

1 Manufacturers Name

2 Rating (MVA) 31.5

3 Voltage Ratio (KV) 66/11

4 Winding Connection Star/Star

5 Vector Group YYO

6 Number of Phase 3

7 Frequency (Hz) 50+5%

8 Type of cooling ONAN/ONAF

9 Rating available at different cooling % 79.365%/100%

10 Impedance data

a Guaranteed positive sequence impedance between HV-LV at 75 deg.C with 100% rating ati. Principal Tap 10.00%ii. Maximum TapIii. Minimum Tap

b Zero sequence impedance at principal tap

11 Guaranteed losses at 100% rated voltage (excluding cooler loss) at 75 deg.C between HV and LV

a Iron loss (KW) (max) 17.7

b Copper loss (KW) (max) 118.00

12 Guaranteed cooler losses at

a 100% load (max) (KW) 2

13 Cooling equipment details

a Number of coolers and rating as per % of transformer cooling equipment

b Mounting

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

c Fan motor data

i Number per cooler and rating as % of cooler requirement (also indicate no.of spare fans)

ii Type

iii Rating (KW)

iv Locked rotor current (Amps)

v Temp. range over which cooler control is adjustable (deg.c to deg.C)

60 0C to 1500C

d Oil pump motor data

i Number per cooler and rating as % of cooler requirement (also indicate no.of spare pump)

ii Type

iii Rating (KW)

iv Locked rotor current (Amps)

v Temp. range over which cooler control is adjustable (deg.c to deg.C)

e Type of oil pump and motor (whether oil submerged type)

f Radiator details

i Overall dimensions lxbxh (mm)

ii Total weight with oil (Kg)

iii Total weight without oil (Kg)

iv Thickness of Radiator tube (mm)

v Type of mounting

14 Thermal Data

a Temperature rise in top oil over an ambient of 50 deg.C

35 0C

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

b Temp rise in winding by resistance measurement method over an ambient of 50 deg.C

45 0C

c Thermal time constant (Hours)

15 Withstand time for three phases short circuit at terminals (secs)

2 sec.

16 Over excitation withstand time (sec)

i 1.25

ii 1.4

iii 1.5

17 Bushings

a High voltage

i) Manufacturer

ii) Type condenser

iii) Total creepage distance (mm) 1813

iv) Protected creepage distance (mm) 907

v) Mounting tank cover

vi) Rated current (Amps) 800

b Low voltage

i) Manufacturer

ii) Type Oil communicating

iii) Mounting tank cover

iv) Total creepage distance (mm) 900

v Protected creepage distance (mm) 450

vi) Rated current (Amps) 2000

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

C Neutral Bushing HV LV

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

i) Manufacturer

ii) Type oil communicating

iii) Mounting tank cover

iv) Total creepage distance (mm) 900

v) Protected creepage distance (mm) 450

vi) Rated current (Amps) 630 2000

18 Is Vacuum filling required, if so state absolute pressure (mm of Hg)

19 Total quantity of oil (ltrs)

20 Tap changing equipment

a) Voltage class and current 66kV & 300A

b) Number of steps 16

c) Range (+)5% to (-)15%

d) Step voltage 1.25%

e) Type High speed transition type

f) Rated voltage of drive motor (volts)

g) No.of revolutions to complete one step

h) Time to complete one step on manual / auto operation (sec)

i) Power required (kw)

21 Insulation level

a) HV windings

i) Lightning impulse withstand voltage 325

ii) Power frequency withstand voltage (kv rms)

140

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

b) LV Winding

i) Lightning impulse withstand voltage 95

ii) Power frequency withstand voltage (kv rms)

38

c) HV Bushing

i) Lightning impulse withstand voltage 325

ii) Power frequency withstand voltage (kv rms)

140

d) LV Bushing

i) Lightning impulse withstand voltage 95

ii) Power frequency withstand voltage (kv rms)

38

e) Neutral Bushing

i) Lightning impulse withstand voltage 170

ii) Power frequency withstand voltage (kv rms)

70

22 Approximate dimensions

a) Tank (lxbxh) mm

b) Overall dimensions with (mm) coolers lxbxh

c) Shipping dimensions (mm) (lxbxh)

d) Height for untanking (mm)

e) Dimensions of largest (mm) package (lxbxh)

23 Weights of transformer components

a) Core (Kg)

b Windings (Kg)

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

c) Insulation (Kg)

d) Tank and fittings (Kg)

e) Oil (Kg)

f) Untanking weight (heaviest piece) (Kg)

g) Total weight Kg

h) Weight of heaviest package KG

i) Total shipping weight (Kg)

j) Parts detached for transport

24 Permissible overload (% of rating & time in minutes)

As per IS:6600 & IEC:354

25 Clearances

a) Minimum clearance between phases

i) In oil (mm)

ii) In air (mm)

b) Minimum clearance of HV winding to tank in oil (mm)

c) Minimum clearance of HV winding of earth in oil (mm)

d) Clearance between core (mm) and coil

e) Clearance between coil (mm)

f) Clearance between neutral to ground in air (mm)

26 Conservator

a) Total volume (ltrs)

b) Volume between highest and lowest levels (ltrs)

27 Capacitance values

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

a) HV to earth (pf)

b) LV to earth (pf)

28a) Type of oil preservation

b) Material of air cell

c) Continuous temp. withstand capability of the air cell

29 a) No.of pressure relief device provided 2 or 1 No. PRD & 1 No. Explosion Vent

b) Operation pressure of pressure relief device

30 Oil

a) Quality of oil

i) Moisture content (ppm)

ii) Max tan delta value (at 90 deg.C)

iii) Resistivity (ohm – cm)

iv) Breakdown strength (kv)

v) Interfacial tension at 27 deg.C (min)

b) Quantity including 10% extra (Ltrs)

c) Standards applicable

31 Core

a) Type of construction Core Type

b) Net core area (mm.sq)

c) Core material and grade used M4 HiB or Superior

d) Type of joint between core and yoke

e) Thickness of stamping (mm) 0.27mm (max)

f) Percentage silicon content (%)

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

g) Maximum flux density in core at rated frequency at

i) 90% voltage (wb/sq.m)

ii) 100% voltage (wb/sq.m) 1.57

iii) 110% voltage (wb/sq.m)

32 Winding

a) Type of winding Built of section/disc coil. Spiral winding not accepted

b) Current density at rated load

i) HV (A/Sq.cm) 250

ii) LV (A/Sq.cm) 200

iii) Regulating winding (A/Sq.cm) 250

c) Conductor area

i) HV (sq.mm)

ii) LV (sq.mm)

Iii) Regulating winding

d) Maximum current density under short circuit

i) i) HV (sq.mm)

ii) LV (sq.mm)

e) Magnetising inrush current (Amps)

f) No load current (Amps) at rated frequency and at

i) 90% voltage (wb/sq.m)

ii) 100% voltage (wb/sq.m)

iii) 110% voltage (wb/sq.m)

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

g) Magnetising current at rated frequency and at rated voltage

33 Tank

a) Type Bell/Conventional

b) Material Low carbon steel

c) Approx Thickness of

i) Sides (mm)

ii) Bottom (mm)

iii) Cover (mm)

34 Radiator

a) Make

b) Material

c) Thickness

35 Vacuum withstand capability of

a) Main tank (torr)

b) Radiators accessories (torr)

36 Pressure withstanding capability of

a) Main Tank

b) Radiator and accessories

37 Temperature indicators

a) OTI

i) Manufacturer

ii) Range 0-1500C

iii) Accuracy

b) WTI

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 31.5 MVA 66/11 KV POWER T/FPARTICULARS

i) Manufacturer

ii) Range 0-1500C

iii) Accuracy

c) RWTI

i) Manufacturer

ii) Range 0-1500C

iii) Accuracy

iv) Auxiliary supply used 220 V DC

38 Terminal connectors

a) Make

b) Whether type tested

c) Governing standard

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

1 General a) Name of the Manufacturerb) Type of Circuit Breaker 3 pole outdoor SF-6c) Manufacturer’s type designation

d) Standard Applicable IEC:56, IS:13118

e) Rated Voltage (KV rms) 72.5f) Rated Currenti. Under normal condition (A) 1600ii. Under site Conditions (A) 1600

g) Rated frequency (Hz) 50h) Number of poles 3I) Whether 3 pole or single pole

unit 3 pole gang operated

j) Whether All The 3 poles ganged electrically or mechanically.

2 Guaranteed Technical Particulars

a) Rated short circuit breaking current

i. Symmetrical component at highest system voltage (kA)

31.5

ii. DC Component (%) As per IEC:56iii. Asymmetrical breaking current

at highest system voltage (kA) b) Rated Making Capacityi. At higher rated voltage (kAp) 78.75ii. At lower rated voltage (kAp) 78.75c1) Maximum Total break time

under any duty condition for any current upto rated breaking current with limiting conditions of voltage and pressure (ms)

less than 3 cycles or 60msec.

c2) Rated break time as per IECd) Closing time (ms) max.150msec.

e) Minimum opening time under any condition with limiting voltage and pressure (ms)

GTP of 66 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERPARTICULARS

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP of 66 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERPARTICULARS

f) Maximum opening time under any condition with limiting voltage and pressure (ms)

g) Maximum close open time under any condition with limiting voltage and pressure (ms)

h) First pole to clear factor as per IEC/IS

i) Short time current rating (kA) for 1sec

31.5

j) Rated operating duty O-0.3 sec-CO-3 min-CO

k) Maximum over voltage (p.u) on switching capacitor banks of rating upto 20 MVAR

l) Maximum pole discrepancy (ms)

m) Maximum arc duration and corresponding current under lockout pressure

n) Maximum temperature rise for main contacts over design ambient temperature of 50 deg C.

o) Rated voltage & pick up range for trip coil (V)

220V DC & 85%-110%

p) Rated voltage & pick up range for closing coil (V)

220V DC & 85%-110%

q) Rated pressure and limits of pressure of operating mechanism

r) Rated pressure and limits of pressure of extinguishing medium

3 Dielectric Withstand of Complete Breaker

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP of 66 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERPARTICULARS

a) One minute dry & wet power frequency withstand voltage

i. Between live terminal and ground (KV rms)

170

ii. Between terminals with breaker contacts open (KV rms)

170

b) 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand test voltage

i. Between live terminals and ground (KVp)

325

ii. Between terminals with breaker contacts open (KVp)

325

c) Maximum radio interference voltage (micro V) at 1.1 Ur/ root 3

d) Total creepage distancei. To ground (mm) 1813mm (min)ii. Between terminals (mm) 1813mm (min)4 Operating Mechanisma) Type of operating mechanism

for

i Closing

ii Opening

b) Manufacturer’s type designation

c) Normal power consumption (W) at rated voltage of 220-V DC

i. Trip coilii. Closing coil4.1 Pneumatic operating

mechanismNot applicable

a) Rated operating pressure (kg/sq.cm)

b) Range of pressure for (kg/sq.cm)

i. Closingii. Opening

Spring

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP of 66 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERPARTICULARS

c) Air Consumption at rated pressure for

i. Closing (m3)ii. Opening (m3)iii. Close-Open (m3)d) Number and Capacity (m3) of

breaker local air storage receivers

e) No. of close operations for which sufficient air is available in local receiver

f) Capacity of compressor (m3/hr) and working pressure (kg/cm2)

g) Maximum time for which compressor can operate continuously (min)

h) Time to filli) Air receiver after one CO

operation (min)ii) For making up of losses

occurring in 4 hours (min)

i) Pressure at which compressor

i) Starts (kg/cm2)ii) Stops (kg/cm2)j) Safety valvei) Low pressure stage blow off at

(kg/cm2)ii) High pressure stage blow off at

(kg/cm2)k) Safety valve opens at (kg/cm2)

l) No. of stored Co operation in breaker air receiver

m) Alarm switch closes on air receiver at (kg/cm2)

n) Lockout pressure (kg/cm2)i) Closing

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP of 66 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERPARTICULARS

ii) Opening4.2 Spring charged mechanisma) Number of close open

operations possible after failure of AC supply to motor

b) Time required for motor to charge the closing spring (min)

c) Whether indication of spring charged condition provided in central control cabinet

5 Type of Breaker5.1 SF6 Circuit Breakers a) Quantity of SF6 per pole (CuM)

at rated pressureb) Guaranteed maximum leakage

rate per year1%

c) Rated pressure of SF6 in operating chamber (kg/cm2)

d) Limits of pressure at which breaker operates correctly (kg/cm2)

e) Standard to which SF6 gas complies

As per IEC:376

f) Capacity & filling ratio of containers in which SF6 gas would be shipped (CuM) and the corresponding pressure (kg/Sq cm)

g) Whether breakers are dispatched filled with SF-6 or required to be filled at site.

h) Density/Pressure gauge setting

i) Lockoutii) Alarmiii) Minimum time interval between

make/break operation5.2 General

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP of 66 KV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERPARTICULARS

a) Weight of complete 3 phase breaker for foundation design (kg)

b) Weight of heaviest part of Breaker (Kg) part of breaker (kg)

c) Impact loading for foundation design

d) Seismic level for which breaker is designed

0.3g (horizontal)

e) Minimum safety clearance from earther objects

f) Minimum clearance in airi. between live parts (mm) 1400ii. live parts to earth (mm) 800iii. Live parts to ground level (mm) 30006 Constructional Detailsa) Whether arcing contacts

provided Yes

b) Type and material of main contacts and arcing contacts

c) Contact pressure on main contacts (kg/Sq cm)

d) Contact separation in arcing position (mm)

e) Contact separation in open position (mm)

f) Rate of contact travel i. Opening (m/sec) ii. Closing (m/sec) g) Whether the making & breaking

contacts are hermetically sealed Yes

h) Number of auxiliary contacts per pole provided for Owner's use

10 NO+10NC

I) Rated voltage of auxiliary contacts (V)

220V DC

j) Current rating of auxiliary contacts

i. Continuous (A) 10ii. DC breaking with 20 ms time

constant (A)2

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

1 Make 2 Type3 Applicable Standard IS:7098 (Part-III)

ConstructionTesting

4 Voltage Grade KV 38/665 Suitable for system witha) Service Voltage KV 66 b) Neutral Earthing6 Maximum Condutor Temperaturea) a) Continuous 0C 90b) b) Short time (Short Circuit) 0C 2507 Conductora) Material & conforming standard HD Aluminium IS:

8130b) Gradec) Size, Nominal Area mm2 1000d) No. & Nom. Diameter of wire in each

conductor, Before stranding No/mm

8 Shielding on conductor Semi-Conducting Screen

a) Material b) Gradec) Type/Applicable Standardd) Thickness (mm) mm2e) Tolerance of thickness9 Insulationa) Materialb) Type/Applicable Standard High standard

quality, IS: 7098 (Part-II)

c) Thickness, Nominal mmd) Negative tolerance of thickness mme) Approx. dia. Of core over insulation mm10 Shielding on Insulationa) Materialb) Type/Applicable Standard Non-magnetic semi-

conducting shield

c) Thickness, extruded layer mmd) Approx. dia. Of cable over shielding mm10A Copper Tape Screena) Material & Typeb) Nominal thickness of copper tape mm10B Water barrier over copper screena) Material & typeb) Approx. thicknes of tape mm

ParticularsGUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

Particulars

10C Redial Water barrier a) Material & type Extruded & black

polyethyleneb) Approx. thicknes of tape mm11 Inner Sheatha) Materialb) Type/Applicable Standardc) Thickness mmd) Extruded? Yes/No. Yese) Approx. outside dial. over sheath mm12 Armouringa) Material Single HD

Aluminium b) Type/Applicable Standard HD Aluminium IS:

3975c) Fictitious calculated dial overinner sheath

(under armour)mm

d) Size(Approx. No x Nom. Wire Dia), Nominal Area

Noxmm

e) D.C.Resistance of armour at 200C ohm/kmf) Short circuit current carrying capacity KA13 Overall sheatha) Material Suitable semi-

conducting layer coated on extruded PVC outer Sheath, IEC:502

b) Type/Applicable Standardc) Calculated dial under sheath (over

armour) (As per annexure A to IEC 60502-2)

mm

d) Thickness, Nominal mme) Colourf) Tolerance of thickness13A Conducting layer over outer sheath14 Approx. overall diameter mm15 Standard drum length with tolerance meters 750 mtr, +/- 5%

tolerance & +/- 2% overall tolerance in total quantity of cable

16 Net weight of cable, approx. kg/km17 Approx. weight of empty drum kg18 Continuous current rating for standard IS

condition laid directa) In ground, ground temp 300C Ampsb) In duct, ground temp 300C Ampsc) In air, ambient temp 300C Amps

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

Particulars

19 FOR XLPE CABLEThe cable guaranteed to safel y withstand continuous current for temperature of 900C and also withstand temperature of 1300C for a duration of 500hours per year

20 Short circuit current for 3 seconda) Conductor kAb) Aluminium wire armour kA21 Electrical parameters at maximum

operating temperaturea) i) DC Resistance at 200C, conductor ohm/km

ii) AC Resistance at 900C, conductor ohm/kmb) Reactance at 50C/s, approx ohm/kmc) Impedance, Approx ohm/kmd) Capacitance per phase, Max. Micro F

/mme) Vol. Resistivity at rated operating

temperature 900Cohm/km

f) Loss tangentg) Partial discharge valueh) Charging current at normal operating

voltagemA/km

22 Recommended minimum bending radius

23 The cables shall be tested as specified undera) Conductor resistance testb) Partial discharge testc) High voltage test (specify test voltage for 5 minutes)

Required Offered 60kV 60kV

1

a)

b)

c) Station Class Heavy Duty

d) IEC 99-4 IS : 3070

2

a) Gapless type, Station Class

b) 60kV rms.

c) 49kV rms.

d) 10KA

e) i) 5 kJ/KV

ii) 3

f)

g) 140

h)

i.

ii. 170

iii.

i)

GTP OF 60 KV SURGE ARRESTERSS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

GENERAL

Manufacturer’s Name

Country of origin

Manufacturer’s type designation

Applicable standards

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Arrester class and type

Rated arrester voltage (kV)

Maximum continuous operating voltage (COV)at design ambient temperature

Nominal discharge current (8/20 micro sec.wave)(kA)

Minimum dischargecapability (kJ/kV) referredto rated voltage at minimumof discharge characteristics

Line Discharge class, as per IEC

Maximum equivalent front of wave protection level(discharge voltage with 0.5x1.5 micro sec, 10 kA impulse current)

Maximum switching surge residual voltage, at1 kA (kVp)

Maximum residual voltage for 8/20 micro sec current wave

at 50 % nominal discharge current (kVp)

at 100 % nominal discharge current (kVp)

at 200 % nominal discharge current (kVp)

One minute power frequency (dry) withstand voltageof arrester (kV rms)(Min.)

j)

k)325325

i. 100

l)

i.

ii.

m) >60kV

n) A

o)

p)

q) 40

r)

i)

ii)

iii)

iv)

3a)

b)

c)

d) 1813

4

a.b.56

Impulse withstand test voltage of arrester housingwith 1.2/50 micro sec wave, (KVp) impulse currentwithstanda) Transformers and Reactors (kVp) b) Other equipment and lines (kVp)

High current short duration (4/10 micro sec. wave)(kAp)

Maximum internal ionisation at 50 Hz voltage equalto

1.05 COV

1.0 COV

Reference voltage and corresponding reference current

Pressure relief class

Energy absorption capability in kJ per operationof the arrester, during a switching surge discharge

Internal pressure required to operate pressure relief device as a percentage of burst pressure of porcelain

Minimum prospective symmetrical fault current(kA rms)

Rated voltage of ZnO disc (kV)

No. of ZnO discs in a unit

No. of units/arrester

Height/Thickness of ZnO discs (mm)

Diameter of ZnO disc (mm)

EXTERNAL INSULATIONApplicable standard

Impulse voltage withstand test voltage of housingwith 1.2/50 micro sec wave (kVp)

One minute power frequency withstand voltage of arrester housing dry & wet (kV rms)

Total creepage distance of of arrester housing (mm)

Diameter(mm)Net weight(Kg.)Cantilever strength (Kg. M)

Overall dimensions

Height(mm)

CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS PARTICULARS Sr.

No. Description

Required Offered I. PANELS. 1. Dimension of the C&R panels. i) Depth ii) Overall height 610 mm iii) Width 2312 mm 2. Width of corridor (applicable in case

of `Duplex' type panels). 762 mm

3. Dimension of supporting channel. 102 mm 4. Thickness of the sheet steel proposed

for fabrication of panels. Min. 10 SWG for base frame, door frame, front & rear portions of cubicle and not less than14 SWG for doors, sides, top & bottom portion

II. SWITCH BOARD WIRING. 1. Insulation of wiring. 650V PVC 2. Material of wiring conductor. Copper 3. Size of wiring conductor for: i) C.T. Circuits. 2.5 mm2 ii) C.V.T./P.T. Circuits. 2.5 mm2 iii) D.C. supply circuits. 1.5 mm2 iv) A.C. Supply Circuit. 1.5 mm2 v) Other circuits. 1.5 mm2 4. Size of earthing bar for safety

earthing. 25mm X 6mm Copper

5. Type of terminals used in wiring the panel.

stud

III. INDICATING AND INTEGRATING INSTRUMENTS(AMMETER, VOLTMETER, MW METER, MVAR METER AND KWH METER TO BE FILLED IN SEPARATELY FOR EACH ITEM). 1. Make 2. Type 3. Size. 144 Sq. mm 4. VA burden a) Current coil.

CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

b) Potential coil. 5. Power consumption. a) Current coil. b) Potential coil. 6. I.S. Standard grade of accuracy. Class 1 7. Range of dial. 8.

9. Limits of error in effective range. 9. Calibration for :

a) CT Ratio. b) P.T. Ratio. 10. Finish. Black 11. Short time overload capacity. 12. Descriptive leaflet reference Nos.

submitted. 13. Type & make of selector switch for: a) Ammeter. b) Voltmeter. IV. CONTROL SWITCHES FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER & ISOLATORS. 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Type of handle provided. Pistol Grip 4. Number of position . 3 5. Whether no. of Normally closed & Normally open contacts sufficient for seheme requirements? (Yes / No). 6. Whether spring return to neutral or

stay-put type. Spring Return to Neutral

7. Type of lock provided. Non lockable 8. Making capacity/breaking capacity at 220 Volt DC for both inductive &

non-inductive current. 9. Descriptive leaflet number submitted. V. SEMAPHORE INDICATORS (FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER, ISOLATOR & EARTH SWITCH). 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Diameter of the disk. 4. Operating voltage. 220V DC 5. Burden. 6. Whether latch-in type or supply

failure type. Supply failure type

7. Descriptive leaflet number submitted. CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

VI. INDICATING LAMPS. 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Operating voltage. 220V DC/230V AC 4. Size of lens. 5. Wattage of the lamp. 6. Descriptive leaflet number submitted. VII. OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT RELAY. 1. Make. 2. Type of relay. 3. Current coil rating. 1A/5A 4. Potential coil rating (applicable

only in case of directional relays). 110V/63.5V

5. Tap range. 50-200% o/c 20-80% e/f 6. Range of high set elements (wherever 500-2000% o/c applicable). 200-800% e/f 7. VA burden. a) Highest tap. b) Lowest tap. 8. Time V/S current characteristics. IDMT 9. Trip contact rating. 10. Descriptive leaflet No. submitted. VIII AUXILIARY RELAYS. 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Capacity of contacts: i) Continuously. ii) for 3 seconds. 4. Operating coil VA burden. 5. Voltage operated or current operated. 6. No. of Normally closed & Normally

open Yes

contacts sufficient for seheme requirements (Yes / No). 7. Contacts hand or self reset type. 8. Descriptive leaflet number submitted. IX. FACIA ANNUNCIATOR . 1. Make . 2. Type. 3. Size.

CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS 4. No. of windows of the standard facia. 5. No. of additional windows that can be added to the standard facia, as at Sr.No. 3 above. 6. Provision of `Accept', `Reset', and Provided Separately `Lamp test', push buttons in the

facia.

7. Mode of inscription on the facia

window. 8. Operating voltage. 220V DC 9. Description of leaflet submitted. X. TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAY. 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Minimum differential current at which 15% Max. relay operations. 4. Range & steps of bias setting. 20-50% 5. Operating time at twice the relay

setting. 30m sec. max. at 5 times rated current

6. VA burden of the relay. 7. Descriptive leaflet No. submitted. 8. No. of Normally closed & normally

open contacts sufficient for scheme requirement

Yes

XI. TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY. 1. Make. 2. Type 3. Rating 220V DC 4. Minimum voltage for satisfactory operation (% of rated voltage). 5. Monitoring of breaker trip coil in

both Yes

close & open position provided. 6. Safety resistors provided to limit Yes the current if the relay coil is short-circuited. 7. No. of Normally closed & Normally

open Yes

contacts sufficient for seheme requirements (Yes / No). XII. RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT RELAY . 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Tap range. 10-40% 4. Timer setting range. 5. V A Burden. 6. Time/Current characteristics

CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS 7. Short time rating of relay. 8. Descriptive leaflet No. submitted. XIII T/F OVER FLUXING RELAY. 1. Make 2. Type. 3. Rated Voltage (V,AC) 110 V 4. Rated DC Voltage. 220 V 5. Operating principle. V/F 6. No. of Normally closed & Normally

open contacts sufficient for seheme Yes

requirements (Yes / No). 7. Contacts self/hand reset. 8. Burden. 9. Setting range. i) V/F 100-130% ii) Time for alarm. 0.1-6 Sec. iii) Time for tripping. 10. Whether inverse time operating Yes characteristics provided. 11. Whether different time multiplier

settings provided. 12. Max. operating time of the relay at i) 1.4 times the rated value of V/F. ii) 1.25 times the rated value of

V/F.

13. Reset time. XIV. LOCAL BREAKER BACK UP RELAYS . 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Setting range (% of rating) a) Phase faults. 20-80% b) Ground faults. 20-80% 4. Operating time (m sec.) 15m Sec. Max. 5. Reset time (m sec). 15m Sec. Max. 6. Burden. 7. Timer range. 0.05-0.5 sec. 8. Whether no. of Normally closed & Yes Normally open contacts sufficient for scheme requirements? (Yes / No). XV. OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY. 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Rated Voltage. 4. Setting Ranges. 50-120%, 50-200%

For T/F, For Line

5. Operating time. 6. Setting range continuously variable. Yes

CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS XVI. SELECTOR SWITCHES (AUTO- RECLOSING IN/OUT, CARRIER PROTECTION IN/OUT SWITCH, TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH). 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Type of handle. 4. No. of positions. As per scheme

requirement

5. No. of Normally closed & Normally open contacts sufficient for seheme

Yes

requirements (Yes / No). 6. Making & breaking capacity of contacts. 7. Descriptive leaflet number submitted. XVII. DISTANCE RELAYS. 1. Make. 2. Type of relay. 3. Type of distance measuring elements. 4. Details of starting units and their

Switching sequence, if applicable. 5. Range of settings (in secondary

ohms).

for Zone-I, Zone-2 & Zone-3. 6. Operating times: i) First zone timing. Max. 40m sec. upto

breaker at 50% of zone-I reach for SIR 0.01-4

ii) Second zone time setting adjustable between---secs to ---

secs. 0-3 Sec.

iii) Third zone time setting adjustable between -------- secs 0-5 Sec. to ------- secs. 7, Contacts rating: i) First Zone. ii) Second Zone. iii) Third Zone. 8. VA burden : i) Current circuit of the scheme. ii) Potential circuit of the scheme. 9 Is the VA burden at Sr.No.8 above is continuous ? (yes/No) 10. Operating time versus ZS/ZL curves of the distance scheme. 11. Descriptive leaflet no. submitted.

CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

XVIII. CHECK SYNCHRONIZING RELAY: 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Rating ( V, ac ) 63.5 V 4. Aux. Voltage ( V, dc ) 220 V 5. Permissible voltage difference (%) 10% max. 6. Permissible phase angle difference

(degree) 350 max.

7. Response time of relay (without timer)( m Sec )

<200m sec.

XIX. AUTO RECLOSING : 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Multi shot or single shot. Single shot 4. Rating (V, dc) 220 V 5. Suitable for 1 & 3 phase. Yes 6. Dead time setting range (Sec.) 0.1-2 sec. 7. Reclaim time setting range (sec.) 5-300 sec. 8. Four position selector switch

provided. Yes

9. Alarm contacts provided for `Auto-reclosed',

`Reclosure unsuccessful'. XX. SYNCHRONISING SWITCH : 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Contact rating. 4. No. of position. 3 5. No. of contacts. As per scheme

requirement

6. Removable handle type ? Yes/No Yes XXI. BUS-BAR PROTECTION 1. Make. 2. Type. 3. Applicable standard. 4. Rated Voltage/Frequency. 110VAC, 50Hz, 220V

DC

5. Operating time (maximum). 15m sec. at 5 times setting

6. Resetting time (maximum). 7. Does the offer meet the Yes/No requirements of technical specification?

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 72.5KV Sr.

No. Description

Required Offered 1. Manufacturer's Name

2. Type/Installation. 3. Conforming to standard. IS:2705 4. Rated voltage. 66kV 5. Rated frequency. 50 Hz 6. Detail of cores. As per annexures attached

with Tech. Specification

*Core No. I II III IV V 6.1 Purpose of cores. 6.2 Rated Secondary Current. 6.3 Class of accuracy. 6.4 Accuracy limit factor. 6.5 Formula governing minimum

knee point voltage at CT Secondary resistance corrected to 75 C.

6.6 Instrument security factor. 6.7 Secondary limiting voltage. 6.8 Maximum Secondary resistance

corrected to 75 C. 6.9 Rated burden.

6.10 Exciting current for Distance protection core at Vk, for Bus Bar protection core & REF Core at Vk/2. and for differential protection Core at Vk/4 * No. of cores as per applicability for

a particular type of current

7. Rated primary current. As per annexures attached with Tech. Specification

8. Rated short time withstand 31.5 current (kA rms) for 1 second duration.

9. Rated dynamic withstand 78.75 current (kA peak).

10. Rated continuous thermal current (pu). 1.25 11. One minute power

frequency withstand voltage (kV rms) a) Dry 140 38 for NCT b) Wet 140 38 for NCT

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 12. 1.2/50 micro-second 325

impulse withstand voltage (kV peak) 95 for NCT 13. One minute power 3

frequency withstand voltage of secondary winding (kV rms)

14. Minimum creepage distance (mm) 440 for 72.5kV NCT

15. Maximum creepage factor. 4 for 72.5kV NCT 16. Winding

a) No. of primary turns b) Primary amp. turns (Dynamic condition) c) Current density d) Area of Cross-section & material i) Primary turns ii) Secondary turns

17. I.S. to which the oil conforms. IS 335 18. Weight of oil (kg). 19. Quantity of oil (Ltrs) 20. Total weight (kg). 21. Maximum shipping weight (kg) 22. Overall dimension. 23. Mounting details. 24. Maximum permissible

temperature rise of winding when referred to maximum ambient temperature of 50 C in terms of clause 7.2 (Table 2 of IS:2705 Part-1-1992 ) or Equivalent IEC

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 12KV Sr.

No. Description

Required Offered 1. Manufacturer's Name

2. Type/Installation. 3. Conforming to standard. IS:2705 4. Rated voltage. 11kV 5. Rated frequency. 50 Hz 6. Detail of cores. As per annexures attached

with Tech. Specification

*Core No. I II III IV V 6.1 Purpose of cores. 6.2 Rated Secondary Current. 6.3 Class of accuracy. 6.4 Accuracy limit factor. 6.5 Formula governing minimum

knee point voltage at CT Secondary resistance corrected to 75 C.

6.6 Instrument security factor. 6.7 Secondary limiting voltage. 6.8 Maximum Secondary resistance

corrected to 75 C. 6.9 Rated burden.

6.10 Exciting current for Distance protection core at Vk, for Bus Bar protection core & REF Core at Vk/2. and for differential protection Core at Vk/4 * No. of cores as per applicability for

a particular type of current

7. Rated primary current. As per annexures attached with Tech. Specification

8. Rated short time withstand current (kA rms) for 18.4 for 12kV NCT 1 second duration.

9. Rated dynamic withstand current (kA peak). 46 for 12kV NCT

10. Rated continuous thermal current (pu). 1.25 11. One minute power

frequency withstand voltage (kV rms) a) Dry 28 for 12kV NCT b) Wet 28 for 12kV NCT

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 12. 1.2/50 micro-second 325

impulse withstand voltage (kV peak) 75 for 12kV NCT 13. One minute power 3

frequency withstand voltage of secondary winding (kV rms)

14. Minimum creepage distance (mm) 250 for 12kV NCT

15. Maximum creepage factor. 4 for 12kV NCT 16. Winding

a) No. of primary turns b) Primary amp. turns (Dynamic condition) c) Current density d) Area of Cross-section & material i) Primary turns ii) Secondary turns

17. I.S. to which the oil conforms. IS 335 18. Weight of oil (kg). 19. Quantity of oil (Ltrs) 20. Total weight (kg). 21. Maximum shipping weight (kg) 22. Overall dimension. 23. Mounting details. 24. Maximum permissible

temperature rise of winding when referred to maximum ambient temperature of 50 C in terms of clause 7.2 (Table 2 of IS:2705 Part-1-1992 ) or Equivalent IEC

CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER 72.5KV Sr. No. Description

Required Offered 1. Name of manufacturer 2. Type and model 3. Rated voltage (kV) 66

4. Capacitance : a) Primary capacitance C1 (pf) b) Secondary capacitance C2 (pf) c) Equivalent capacitance C (pf) 8800+10%-5% 5. Number of secondary windings 1 6. Rated secondary windings : a) Winding-I (volts) 110/√3 b) Winding -II (volts) - c) Winding-III (Volts) - 7. Rated secondary burden: a) Winding - I (VA) 50 b) Winding - II (VA) - c) Winding - III (VA) - 8. Accuracy class of each secondary : a) Winding -I (VA) 1/3P b) Winding - II (VA) - c) Winding - III (VA) - 9. Rated voltage factor with rated burden. 1.2 continuous & 1.5 for

30 seconds

10. One minute power frequency withstand: 140 Test (Dry) voltage (kV rms) 11. One minute power frequency withstand test 140 (wet) voltage (kV rms) 12. 1.2/50 micro second impulse wave withstand 325

test voltage (kV p)

13. One minute power frequency withstand voltage 3 on secondaries (kV rms)

CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER 14 Total creepage distance (mm) 1815 min. 14. Creepage factor (mm) 4 max. 15. Is CVT suitable for carrier Yes frequency in the range of 40 to 500 KHz?

(Yes/No)

16. Natural frequency of coupling capacitors >500k Hz 17. Rated Primary burden of potential devices (VA) 18. Temperature rise at 1.2 times rated voltage with

rated burden (°C)

19. Guaranteed value of temp. coefficient. (percent per °Ce 20. Guaranteed value of radio interference voltage in micro-volts at different voltages. 21. Guaranteed sealing test. The pressure at which sealing test is to be carried out. 22. Guaranteed value of the H.F capacitances and 8800+50%-20% equivalent series resistance at different. 23. Value of stray capacitance and stray conductance in the carrier frequency range of 40 to 500 KHz. 24. Weight of oil and the standard to which it conforms IS 335 i) In capacitor unit (Kg/IS) ii) In measuring unit. (Kg/IS) 25. Total weight (Kg) 26. Over -all dimensions (mm) 27. Mounting flange dimensional details 28. Whether CVT are suitable for Yes Carrier communication, carrier protection, carrier telemetering and carrier teleprinting services, metering, relaying protection, synchronising and interlocking purposes. 29. Do the CVTs contain built in

(Yes/No) compensating reactors and damping Yes

device in P.T. portion?

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER

72.5KV Sr. No.

Description Required Offered

1. Manufacturer's type and designation. 2. Type 3. Rated Frequency 50 Hz 4. Rated primary voltage 66 kV 5. Number of secondary windings 2 6. Rated secondary windings : a) Winding-I 110/√3V b) Winding -II 110√3V c) Winding -III - 7. Class of Accuracy. a) Winding - I 1/3P b) Winding - II 3P c) Winding -III - 8. Limits of errors. a) Winding -I i) Percentage voltage ratio error ii) Phase displacement. (Minutes) b) Winding - II i) Percentage voltage ratio error ii) Phase displacement (minutes) c) Winding - III i) Percentage voltage ratio error iii) Phase displacement (minutes) 9. Rated burden. a) Winding - I 250 VA b) Winding -II 25 VA c) Winding-III - 10. Rated voltage factor and time 1.2 Continuous & 1.5 for 30

Sec.

POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER

11.

Temperature rise at 1.2 times rated voltage when applied continuously with rated burden (°C)

12. Insulation class of a) Primary windings b) Secondary windings 13. One minute power frequency: 140 (Dry) withstand Test voltage (kV) 14. One minute power frequency (wet) 140 withstand test voltage (kV) 15. 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand 325 test voltage (kV peak) 16. One minute power frequency withstand 3 voltage on secondaries (KV rms) 17. a) Creepage distance. - a) Creepage factor - 18. Standard to which the equipment conforms 19. Standard to which the oil conforms IS335 20. Total weight of the P.T. 21. Overall dimensions 22. Mounting details 23. Weight of the oil 24. Total shipping weight.

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

1 Manufacturer's Name & Address

2 Service Outdoor

3 Rated Voltage :

(a) HV Winding 11 kV

(b) LV Winding 0.433 kV

4 Rated frequency 50Hz

5 Number of phase 3

6 Connections :

(a) HV Winding Delta

(b) LV Winding Star neutral broughtout

7 Connection symbol Dyn-11

8 Type of cooling ONAN

9 Rating available at different cooling (if any) in %

200 kVA

10 Tap changing equipment

(a) Manufacturer

(b) Type Off circuit tap changer

(c) No. of steps (+)3% to (-)3%11 Guaranteed positive sequence

impedance at 75°C with 100% rating at

(a) Principal tap 4.5%

(b) Maximum tap

GTP OF 200 KVA 11/0.4 KV LT T/F

PARTICULARS

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 200 KVA 11/0.4 KV LT T/F

PARTICULARS

(c) Minimum tap

12 Temperature rise over an ambient of 50°C

(a) Top oil (if applicable) °C 400C

(b) Windings (by resistance measurement method) °C

500C

13 Guaranteed losses at rated voltage on principal tap at rated freequency

(a) No load loss or iron loss 0.4 KW

(b) Copper loss at full load at 75°C 3.135 KW

14 Withstand time for three phase short circuit at terminals (secs.)

15 No load current at rated Voltage and rated frequency

2% of full load current (max)

16 Insulation level

(a) Separate source power frequency voltage withstand

(i) HV Winding 28kV

(ii) LV Winding 3kV

(b) Induced over voltage withstanding

(i) HV Winding

(ii) LV Winding

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 200 KVA 11/0.4 KV LT T/F

PARTICULARS

(c) Full wave lightning impulse withstanding

(i) HV Winding 75 kV

(ii) LV Winding -

17 Regulation at full load at 75°C

(a) At unity power factor

(b) At 0.8 power factor

18 Terminal arrangement

(a) High voltage

(b) Low voltage

(c) LV Neutral

19 Bushings

(a) High Voltage

(i) Manufacturer

(ii) Type Porcelain

(iii) Minimum Creepage distance 300mm

(b) Low Voltage

(i) Manufacturer

(ii) Type Porcelain

(iii) Minimum Creepage distance 25mm

(c) LV Neutral

(i) Manufacturer

(ii) Type Porcelain

(iii) Minimum creepage distance 25mm

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 200 KVA 11/0.4 KV LT T/F

PARTICULARS

20 Total quantity of oil (litres) required for first filling (wherever applicable)

21 Is vacuum filling required if so, stated absolute pressure

22 Efficiency at 75°C at unit power factor.

(a) At full load

(b) At 3/4 full load

(c) At 1/2 full load

23 Approximate dimensions

(a) Tank enclosure LxBxH

(b) Overall LxBxH

24 Untanking height

25 Approximate Weight

(a) Core and winding

(b) Tank fittings

(c) Oil (if applicable)

(d) Total Weight

26 Despatch details

(a) Approximate mass of heaviest package

(b) Approximate dimensions of largest package

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF 200 KVA 11/0.4 KV LT T/F

PARTICULARS

(i) Length

(ii) Breadth

(iii) Height

27 Reference Standards IS:2026

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

A Shunt Capacitor1 Name of manufacturer and

country 2 Applicable Standard IS:13925 (Part-I) 19983 Capacitor uniti.

Rated Voltage 7.3KV

ii Max. permissible continuous over voltage as a percentage of rated voltage

iii Short Time over voltagefor 30 minutesfor 1 minute for 3 cycles

iv a) Nominal capacitance at 250 C, 50 0 C

11.94 at 500C

b) Manufacturing tolerance on capacitance value

v a) Rated output at rated voltage and 50 HZ

200 KVAR

b) Maximum output 130% of the rated output

vi Type of impregnant used Non PCB Type impregnate vii Type of fuse used External Expulsion fuseviii Temp. category as per ISSix Discharge resistor value 50V of less with in 5 Minute as

per our technical specification

x Discharge time for 50 voltsxi BUSHINGS

a) Noofbushingsperunitand typeb) Rated voltagec) Rated insulation leveld) Total creepage distance

xii a) Type of dielectric usedb) Voltage stress for dielectricc) Thickness of dielectric

xiii a) 10 seconds test voltage

b) Lightning impulse test voltage

75 kV (Peak)

xiv a) Capacitor unit material Sheet steel of 2 mm CRCb) Finish/paint detailsc) Type of welding

GTP of 11 KV Capacitor

Particulars

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

GTP of 11 KV Capacitor

Particulars

xv FUSES External Expulsion fuseType No. per unitMax. energy which fuse carrier can withstand withoutDeterioration as a percentage of capacitor unit nominal currentMax. recovery voltage at which fuse can operate

xvi Overall Dimensiona) Heightb) Mountingc) Thickness

xvii Losses under stabilized condition

xviii Weight per unit4 CAPACITOR BANKS1. i. Rated Voltage 12.65 kV2. ii Max. permissible continuous

over voltage as a percentage of rated voltage

3. iii Nominal capacitance at 250C, 500C

59.67

4. iv Manufacturing tolerance on value

5. v. Variation of capacitance due to ambient temp. and load

6. vi Variation of capacitance due to loss of units/elementsa) At alarm stageb) At trip stage

7. vii No. of units in parallel per phase per series section

8. No. of series sections per phase

9. ix Connection Symbol Single star10. Rated output11. xi Rated current per phase12. xii Withstand voltage of capacitor

banks while switching on/off

13. Power frequency withstand voltage

28 kV RMS

14. Creepage distance15. xv Unbalance voltage in open

delta of RVT (Voltsa) Under normal condition

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

GTP of 11 KV Capacitor

Particulars

b) 1 capacitor unit is out in a sectionc) 2 capacitor units are out in a section

16. Total guaranteed losses at rated voltage and frequency under stabilised condition

17. Max. residual voltage at de-energisation

18. Time taken in attaining the residual voltage

19. Annual failure rate20. Total weight of

Capacitor unit and Capacitor Bank including elevating structure

21. Overall dimensions of capacitor bank

B RESIDUAL VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

1. Name of manufacturer and country

2. Type3. Rated voltage 114. VA Burden 100VA5. Connection Star/open delta 6. Accuracy class

a) Protection Winding 3Pb) Metering winding

7. Voltage factor8. Power frequency withstand

voltage28

9. Lightning impulse withstand voltage

75

10. Energy Discharge capability11. Total weight of RVT12. Overall Dimensions13. Whether inter stack and base

insulators and terminal connectors for bank included in scope of supply

14. Whether bus-bar material for capacitor banks included in scope of supply

15. Whether galvanized support structure and stack rack for capacitor banks included in scope of supply

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

GTP of 11 KV Capacitor

Particulars

ISOLATORS1. Make2. Type 3. Reference standard4. Rated voltage 12 Kv5. No. of poles 36. Rated normal current7. Rated peak withstand current8. Rated short time current for 1

second18.4 KA

9. i) 1.2/50 micro sec. Impulse withstand voltage positive and negative polarity

a) Across the isolating distanceb) To earth and between polesii) One minute power frequency withstand voltage

a) Across the isolating distanceb) To earth and between poles

10. Type of isolater11. Creepage distance12. Weight of complete isolator13. Type of operating mechanic14. No. of auxiliary contacts

provided15. Total weight16. Overall Dimension

Sr. No. DescritptionRequired Offered

1 Name of manufacturer2 Type of cable3 Voltage rating 11kV 4 Applicable standard IS: 7098 (pt-II) 1985, IS:

8130/84 with up to date amendment

5 Conductor Aluminium a. Material Aluminium Conductor as per

IS: 8130/84b. No & Nom Cross sectional area Single Corex630 mm2c. Minimum no. of wires in each Cored. Dia. Of each wire in Coree. Shape6 Conductor screen a. Material b. Thickness (mm) Min7 Insulationa. Material b. Nom. Thickness (mm)Nom8 Insulation screena. Non metallic parti. Material ii. Thickness (mm) minb. Metallic partI MaterialIi Thickness (mm) min9 Core Identification By coloured strips as per CI:

13.of 7098/8510 Inner Sheath a. Materialb. Minimum thickness mm11 Armour a. Material Non-magnetic materialb. Nom. Thickness of strip12 Outer Sheatha. Material Extruded PVC

i) Thickness (mm) Min13 Approx. overall dia. of cable mm14 Standard packing length15 Approx. weight of cable kg./ KM.16 Min Bending Radius17 Maximum D.C. resistance of conductor

ohm/Km

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 kV, Single Core 630 mm sq XLPE CABLE. Particulars

Sr. No. DescritptionRequired Offered

Particulars

18 Approx. reactance at 50 Hz ohm/KM19 Approx. A.C. resistance of conductor at

Maximum operating temp. ohm/Km

20 Approx. capacitance per phase mf/Km

21 Continuous current carrying capacity under standard conditions

a. In air at 400 Cb. In ground sat 300 Cc. In duct at 300 C22 Maximum permissible conductor

temperature a. At rated currentb. At short circuit condition 23 Short circuit rating of conductor

Sr. No. DescritptionRequired Offered

1 Name of manufacturer2 Type of cable3 Voltage rating 11kV 4 Applicable standard IS: 7098 (pt-II) 1985, IS:

8130/84 with up to date amendment

5 Conductora. Material Aluminium Conductor as per

IS: 8130/84b. No & Nom Cross sectional area 3Cx400 mm2c. Minimum no. of wires in each Core

d. Dia. Of each wire in Coree. Shape6 Conductor screen a. Material Semi conducting materialb. Thickness (mm) Min7 Insulationa. Material Cross linked polyethylene IS-

7098 (2) 1985b. Nom. Thickness (mm)Nom8 Insulation screena. Non metallic parti. Material Semi conducting compoundii. Thickness (mm) minb. Metallic partI MaterialIi Thickness (mm) min9 Core Identification By coloured strips as per CI:

13.of 7098/8510 Inner Sheath a. Materialb. Minimum thickness mm11 Armour a. Material b. Nom. Thickness of strip12 Outer Sheatha. Material PVC compound

i) Thickness (mm) Min13 Approx. overall dia. of cable mm14 Standard packing length15 Approx. weight of cable kg./ KM. --16 Min Bending Radius17 Maximum D.C. resistance of

conductor ohm/Km18 Approx. reactance at 50 Hz ohm/KM

19 Approx. A.C. resistance of conductor at Maximum operating temp. ohm/Km

20 Approx. capacitance per phase mf/Km

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 kV, 3Cx400 mm sq XLPE CABLE. Particulars

Sr. No. DescritptionRequired Offered

Particulars

21 Continuous current carrying capacity under standard conditions

a. In air at 400 Cb. In ground sat 300 Cc. In duct at 300 C22 Maximum permissible conductor

temperature a. At rated currentb. At short circuit condition 23 Short circuit rating of conductor

Sr. No. DescritptionRequired Offered

1 Name of manufacturer Nigam requirement 2 Type of cable A2XFY3 Voltage rating 11kV Earth system4 Applicable standard IS: 7098 (pt-II) 1985, IS:

8130/84 with up to date amendment

5 Conductora. Material EC Grade Aluminium of H2/H4

Grade Aluminium as per IS: 8130/84

b. No & Nom Cross sectional area 3Cx50 mm2c. Minimum no. of wires in each Core 6

d. Dia. Of each wire in Core In IS: 8130/84 latest only Min. No of wire are specified and hence not applicable.

e. Shape Stranded Compacted circular6 Conductor screen a. Material Semi conducting materialb. Thickness (mm) Min 0.37 Insulationa. Material Cross linked polyethylene IS-

7098 (2) 1985b. Nom. Thickness (mm)Nom 3.6 ( shall not be less than 3.6-

0.1 mm +0.1*3.6)8 Insulation screena. Non metallic parti. Material Semi conducting compoundii. Thickness (mm) min 0.3b. Metallic partI Material Copper tapeIi Thickness (mm) min 0.0459 Core Identification By coloured strips as per CI:

13.of 7098/8510 Inner Sheath a. Material PVC compound b. Minimum thickness mm 0.511 Armour a. Material GI strip as per IS: 3975/84 b. Nom. Thickness of strip 4.0mm +/-10% x 0.8mm +/-

10%12 Outer Sheatha. Material PVC compound

i) Thickness (mm) Min 1.8813 Approx. overall dia. of cable mm 48+/-2mm14 Standard packing length 500+/-5% Metre15 Approx. weight of cable kg./ KM. --

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR 11 kV, 3Cx50 mm sq XLPE CABLE. Particulars

16 Min Bending Radius 15 times the overall dia of the cable

17 Maximum D.C. resistance of conductor ohm/Km

18 Approx. reactance at 50 Hz ohm/KM

19 Approx. A.C. resistance of conductor at Maximum operating temp. ohm/Km

20 Approx. capacitance per phase mf/Km

21 Continuous current carrying capacity under standard conditions

a. In air at 400 Cb. In ground sat 300 Cc. In duct at 300 C22 Maximum permissible conductor

temperature a. At rated currentb. At short circuit condition 23 Short circuit rating of conductor

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

1 Switchgear:1.1 Manufacturer's name and Country of

Manufacturer1.2 Type Vacuum1.3 Nominal system voltage 11 kV1.4 Highest system voltage 12 kV1.5 Frequency 50 +1.5Hz1.6 Normal current ratings:a) At rated ambient temperature as per

relevant standardI/C 2000A O/G 400A

b) At site conditions1.7 Symmetrical breaking capacity 350MVA/18.4KA1.8 Asymmetrical breaking capacity1.9 a) Symmetrical breaking current 18.4KAb) Short time current rating for 1 sec. 18.4KA (min)1.1 Making capacity1.11 1.2/50 micro second impulse wave

withstand test voltage (KVp)75

1.12 One minute power frequency withstand test voltage (kV rms)

28

1.13 No. of poles 31.14 No. of breaks in circuit per pole 11.15 Length of break per phase1.16 Opening time (ms)1.17 Making time (ms)1.18 Arc duration1.19 a) Type and material of main Contacts

b) Material and thickness of plating of contacts

1.2 Type of arcing contacts and/or Control device

1.21 Whether the circuit breaker is trip free

trip free

Whether it is with lock out preventing closing?

1.22 Nominal voltage of closing mechanism

220V DC

1.23 Power required to close Circuit Breaker at nominal voltage

1.24 Minimum clearance in air :a) Between phasesb) Between the live parts and earth1.25 Minimum clearance in vacuuma) Between phasesb) Between live parts and earth1.26 Total weight of complete breaker1.27 Dimensions and mounting details

PARTICULARSGTP OF 11 KV SWITCHGEAR 2000A VCB

1.28 Applicable Standard IEC:56, IS:131181.29 Details of referance drawing attached

2 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS :

2.1 CURRENT TRANSFORMERa Rated primary currentb Rated secondary currentc Rated transformation ratiod VA output at rated current and

accuracy15VA

e Class of accuracy 1/5P10/PSf Rated over-current factor with time in

secondswith time in seconds

g Type of CTs (whether wound or bar type)

wound/ring type

h One minute power frequency withstand test voltage

28kV (rms)

i 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand voltage

75 kVp

j Applicable Standard IS:27052.2 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERa Rated primary voltage (V) 11000/root 3b Rated secondary voltage (V) 110/root 3c Rated burden 100VAd Class of accuracy 1e Rated voltage factor and timef One minute power frequency

withstand test voltage28 kV (rms)

g 1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand test voltage

75 kV (peak)

h Applicable standard IS:31562.3 RELAYSa Type and make numericalb Setting rangec Other detailsd Applicable Standaard IS:32312.4 BUS BARa Material Electrolytic Copperb Normal current rating 2000Ac Nominal area per phased Shapee Type of insulation heat shrunk PVC sleeves2.5 VACUUM INTERRUPTOR BOTTLE

a Name of manufacturerb Whether imported or indigenousc Manufacturer's type, normal Amps &

rupturing capacity for vacuum bottles used on incoming panel

2000A, 12 kV, 26.2 KA

d Manufacturer's type, normal Amps & rupturing capacity for vacuum bottles used on outgoing panel

2000A, 12 kV, 26.2KA

e Manufacturer's type, normal Amps & rupturing capacity for vacuum bottles used on Capacitor Control panel

2000A, 12 kV, 26.2 KA

f Degree of vacuum inside the vacuum interruptors

g Short time rating of vacuum bottles 26.2KA

h Number of full short circuit operation, as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56 Which the Vacuum bottles offered can safely withstand

Min 100

i Whether the vacuum bottles used on incoming and outgoing panels are same of different

same

j Whether the operating mechanism is imported indegenous

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

9kV 9kV1 GENERAL

a) Manufacturer’s Name

b) Country of origin

c) Manufacturer’s type designation Station Class Heavy Duty

d) Applicable standards IEC 99-4 IS : 3070

2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

a) Arrester class and type Gapless type, Station Class

b) Rated arrester voltage (kV) 09kV rms.

c) Maximum continuous operating voltage (COV) 7kV rms.at design ambient temperature

d) Nominal discharge current (8/20 micro sec.wave)(kA) 10KA

e) i) Minimum discharge 5 kJ/KVcapability (kJ/kV) referredto rated voltage at minimumof discharge characteristics

ii) Line Discharge class, as per IEC 1

f) Maximum equivalent front of wave protection level(discharge voltage with 0.5x1.5 micro sec, 10 kA impulse current)

g) Maximum switching surge residual voltage, at 211 kA (kVp)

h) Maximum residual voltage for 8/20 micro sec current wave

i. at 50 % nominal discharge current (kVp)

ii. at 100 % nominal discharge current (kVp) 25

iii. at 200 % nominal discharge current (kVp)

i) One minute power frequency (dry) withstand voltageof arrester (kV rms)(Min.)

PARTICULARSGTP OF 9 KV SURGE ARRESTERS

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

9kV 9kV

PARTICULARS

j) Impulse withstand test voltage of arrester housingwith 1.2/50 micro sec wave, (KVp)

k) impulse currentwithstanda) Transformers and Reactors (kVp) 75b) Other equipment and lines (kVp) 75

i. High current short duration (4/10 micro sec. wave) 100(kAp)

l) Maximum internal ionisation at 50 Hz voltage equalto

i. 1.05 COV

ii. 1.0 COV

m) Reference voltage and corresponding reference curre>9kV

n) Pressure relief class A

o) Energy absorption capability in kJ per operationof the arrester, during a switching surge discharge

p) Internal pressure required to operate pressure relief device as a percentage of burst pressure of porcelain

q) Minimum prospective symmetrical fault current 40(kA rms)

r) Rated voltage of ZnO disc (kV)

i) No. of ZnO discs in a unit

ii) No. of units/arrester

iii) Height/Thickness of ZnO discs (mm)

iv) Diameter of ZnO disc (mm)

3 EXTERNAL INSULATIONa) Applicable standard

b) Impulse voltage withstand test voltage of housingwith 1.2/50 micro sec wave (kVp)

c) One minute power frequency withstand voltage of arrester housing dry & wet (kV rms)

d) Total creepage distance of of arrester housing (mm) 300

4 Overall dimensions

a. Height(mm)b. Diameter(mm)5 Net weight(Kg.)6 Cantilever strength (Kg. M)

SR.NO. DESCRIPTION

220 V, 100AH 48V, 120 AH 220 V, 100AH 48V, 120 AH1 Manufacturer's name and

country of manufacturer2 Whether requirements of

Battery manufacturer's furnished

3 Guaranteed AH. Capacity at ten hours discharge rate to 1.75 volts per cell at 27°C

100 AH 120 AH

4 AH Capacity at one hour discharge rate to1.75 volts per cell at 27°C

>90% >90%

5 Cell designation in accordance with Indian Standards

Yes Yes

6 Applicable Indian Standards IS: 15549 IS: 155497 Average life in years (min) 20 Years 20 Years8 Recommended range of float

charging voltage/Boost Charging voltage

9 Boost charging current10 Open circuit voltage of cell

when completely discharged at 27Deg C

a.) At ten hours discharge rate 1.75V/cell 1.75V/cellb.) At one hour discharge rate11 Type of construction of

positive patesFlat pasted Flat pasted

12 Type of construction of negative plates

heavy duty,durable flat plate using lead alloy pasted semi radial squarish grid.

heavy duty,durable flat plate using lead alloy pasted semi radial squarish grid.

GTP OF 200V 48V BATTERY PARTICULARS

Required Offered

SR.NO. DESCRIPTION

220 V, 100AH 48V, 120 AH 220 V, 100AH 48V, 120 AH

PARTICULARS

Required Offered

13 Containersa. Type Sealed Sealed b. Material14 Sediment space (mm)15 Cell dimensions (mm)16 Recommended cell centres

distance (mm)17 Amount and specificgravity of

electrolyte per cell require for first filling at 27°C

18 Specific gravity of electrolyte when fully charged at 27°C

19 Maximum electrolyte temperature that cell can withstand continuously without injurious effects.

20 Battery Racksa. Type of material Metalic Stand with

two coats of acid resistant paint

Metalic Stand with two coats of acid resistant paint

b. Outline dimensions (mm)c. Whether anti-acid coating

providedYes Yes

d. Net weight (kg)21 Insulators material (for racks

and cells)Polypropylene Polypropylene

22 Weight per cella. Net dry weight (Kg)b. With electrolyte (Kg)23 Total shipping weight of acid

for one battery unit(Kg)24 Total shipping weight of one

battery unit (without electrolyte)

25 Short circuit current at Battery terminals

26 Time for which the battery can withstand short circuit at terminals

SR.NO. DESCRIPTION

220 V, 100AH 48V, 120 AH 220 V, 100AH 48V, 120 AH

PARTICULARS

Required Offered

27 Internal resistance of each cell

I. Full charged conditionII. Fully discharged condition28 Recommended air charges

per hour

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

1 Manufacturer’s Name & country of manufacture

2 Whether requirements of Charger manufacturer's

Yes

furnished

3 Charger dimensions

I. Height (mm)

II. Depth (mm)

III. Width (mm)

IV. Sheet thickness (mm) 2mm

4 Charger weight (Kg)

5 Charger rated output Current

a. Float charging mode

b. Boost charging mode 50 to 100%

6 Load limiter current setting range (Trickle mode)

7 Automatic voltage regulator (Float Mode):

I. Type

II. Percentage stabilisation of the output DC Voltage

0 to full load DC Load variation

III. Voltage setting range

IV. Response time of automatic voltage Regulator

8 Manual voltage regulator (Float mode):

I. Type

II. Voltage setting range

GTP OF 220 V BATTERY CHARGERPARTICULARS

9 Boost charging current setting range

10 Boost charging limit setting range

11 Rectifier assembly:

I. Type of semiconductor material

II. Rated direct current percell

III. Rated direct voltage

IV. Rated input voltage

V. Type of connections of rectifier elements

Fully/half controlled bridge type

VI. Standard applicable IS:4540

12 Rectifier transformer:

I. Type Dry- Aircooled of class F Insulation type

II. Rated KVA & % impedance As required

III. Input line winding connection in vector representation

IV. Cell winding connection in vector representation

V. One minute power frequency withstand voltage (KV)

VI. Standard applicable IS 2026/IS 4540

13 Instruments:

I. Type Flush Type dust proof and moisture resistant

II. DC Voltmeter range

III. DC Ammeter range

IV. Dial size

V. Accuracy class as per IS 15

14 Contactor:

I. Type

II. Rated voltage

III. Rated current

IV. No.of power contacts

V. No., type and rating of aux. contacts

VI. Operating coil voltage

VII. Drop out voltage

15 Thermal Overload relay:

I. Tripping current range

II. Whether single phasing protection provided

III. Standard applicable

16 Air Break Switches

I. Type Air Break Type

II. Rated voltage 500 V AC/250 V DC

III. Rated current

IV. Type and material of contacts

V. Standard applicable

17 Fuses:

I. Type HRC-Link Type

II. Rupturing capaity

III. Standard applicable

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered A Battery Charging equipmentI Rectifier Assemblies and Equipment

1 Manufacturer's name & trade mark of bridge rectifier for batterya) Float chargerb) Boost charger

2 Rated voltage (D.C)a) Float charger b) Boost charger

3 Rated direct currenta) Float chargerb) Boost charger

4 Rated input voltagea) Float charger 165V to 260V ACb) Boost charger

5 Rated input current per phasea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

6 Boost charger A.C component of D.C side i.e repple contentsa) Float chargerb) Boost charger

7 Max power draw KVA & KWa) Float chargerb) Boost charger

8 Efficiencya) Float chargerb) Boost charger

9 A.C.input current power factora) Float chargerb) Boost charger

BATTERY CHARGER FOR 48 V BATTERY CHARGERPARTICULARS

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

BATTERY CHARGER FOR 48 V BATTERY CHARGERPARTICULARS

10 Voltage variation (DC voltage)/current characteristicto be attached with the tendera) Float chargerb) Boost charger

11 Type of protection (over current protection/over voltage protection)a) Float chargerb) Boost charger

12 Euipment resistancea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

II Rectifier Transformer & chokes etc.

1 Type, make & capacity/ratinga) Float charger

b) Boost charger

2 Rated voltage line windinga) Float chargerb) Boost charger

3 Rated voltage cell windinga) Float chargerb) Boost charger

4 Rated current on line sidea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

5 Rated current on cell sidea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

6 Resistive D.C voltagea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

7 Inductive D.C voltage dropa) Float chargerb) Boost charger

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

BATTERY CHARGER FOR 48 V BATTERY CHARGERPARTICULARS

8 Temperature rise

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

BATTERY CHARGER FOR 48 V BATTERY CHARGERPARTICULARS

a) Float chargerb) Boost charger

III Rectifier cell/Stack

1 Average/forward current of devicea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

2 Forward over load currenta) Float chargerb) Boost charger

3 Reverse voltagea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

4 Cell temperaturea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

5 Temperature risea) Float chargerb) Boost charger

6 Forward voltage dropa) Float chargerb) Boost charger

IV Charger cabinet/cubicle

1 Size of steel sheet for charger cabinet

2 Colour shade of the charger cubicle

3 Dimensions (L*B*H)

4 Height of the lowest mounted equpment of the panel from ground level

V Other Data

1 Size of cable required for connection of the charger to the A.C incomming mains

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

BATTERY CHARGER FOR 48 V BATTERY CHARGERPARTICULARS

SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

BATTERY CHARGER FOR 48 V BATTERY CHARGERPARTICULARS

2 Number & size of cable glands & cable lugs

3 A.C mains input single phase to three phase

4 Permissible plus & minus A.C mains voltage & freequency varriation.

5 Max. Temperature at which the performance of the

50 deg C

equipment remains un-affected

6 Whether arrangement for automatic swicth ON and

Yes

switch OFF of float charger in the event of failure or restoration of mains supply, is provided (this will be in addition to manual operation)

7 List of major accessories provided Yes

8 Full details of arrangement made for alarm scheme for indicating any type of mal-functioning in working of the equipment

Yes

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

1. Standard: The specific standard to which the switches are designed

Rating of switches a) Number of phases 3b) Service voltage 415Vc) Normal currentd) Frequency 50 HZe) Type of contacts Quick make and break typef) Material of contacts of switches and their plating

Cu with silver plating

g) Clearance between phasesh) Between live parts and earth

3. Particulars of bus bara) Material

i) Phases High conductivity Cu or aluminum

ii) Neutral b) Normal current ratingc) Area

i) Phasesii) Neutral

d) Shape RectangularBus bar chambera) Whether vermin proof. Yesb) Thickness of sheetc) M. S. angle size

5. Rupturing capacity of bus bar switchgear/cartridges

2 MVA, 20KA at 415V

6. Temperature rise, under continuous load in oC

7 Thickness of the sheet for a) Main boardb) Metering chamber

GTP of 415 V ACDB

2.

4.

Particulars

Sr.No. DescriptionRequired Offered

GTP of 415 V ACDB Particulars

9 Rated short circuit making capacity of switches at 415 V in KA

10 Current transformer for metering

i) VA burden 15VAii) Accuracy class 1iii) Instrument security factor

11 Make of i) Switch boardsii) Switchesiii) Selector switchiv) HRC fusesv) CTs vi) KWH metervii) Voltmeterviii) Ammeter

12 Details of type test supplied13 Details of drawings supplied14 List of references to which similar

switch fuse units have been in service

8 Current density assumed for current conducting components

Offered a) Size of cable required for

connection of the battery charger to the DC Distribution Board.

b) Size of sheet steel(SWG)of the DC distribution Board Cabinet

c)Make of DCDB

Sr. No. Description of Instruments Make Range / Capacity

1 Incoming Rotary Switch 200A

2 Voltmeter 0-200 A 0-400 V

3 Ammeter

4 Ammeter/Voltmeter for detecting earth leakage

20-0-20 mA

5 Change over contactor 20 A

6 Outgoing feeder switches of rating 100 A, 50 A,10 A

7 H.R.C. fuses with fittings

b) Size of Main Bus Bar

c) Size of Negative Bus Bar

GTP OF DC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

Required

Make and type of instruments may be indicated as per details below

Type

Rotary

Moving Coil for DC

As Above

Moving Coil

Electro-mechanical

Rotary

25 X 6 mm

Aluminium

25 X 6 mm

Required Offered

1

2

2.1

(a) % 99.5

(b) % 0.04

2.2

(a) % 0.50 to 0.85

(b) % 0.50 to 1.10

(c ) % Not more than 0.03

(d) % Not more than 0.04

(e) % 0.10 to 0.35

2.3

(a) % 99.95

3

3.1

(a) mm

(b) mm

(c ) mm

3.2 kN

3.3 ohm

GTP OF ACSR CONDUCTORS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

ACSR ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

Name and address of manufacturer

PARTICULARS OF RAW MATERIALS

Aluminium

Minimum purity of aluminium

Maximum copper content

Steel Wires/Rods

Carbon

Manganese

Phosphorous

Sulphur

Silicon

Zinc

Minimum purity of zinc

ALUMINIUM STRANDS AFTER

Diameter

Nominal

Maximum

Minimum

Minimum Breaking load of strand

Maximum Resistance of 1 m length of strand at 20 deg.C

Required Offered

GTP OF ACSR CONDUCTORS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

4

4.1

(a) mm

(b) mm

(c ) mm

4.2 kN

4.3

(a) gm

(b) Nos.

(c ) Nos.

5

5.1 kN

5.2 Min.

(a) 13

(b) 10

( c ) 10

(d) 10

5.3 ohm/km

5.4 kV(rms) 154 (for 220kV)

STEEL STRANDS AFTER STRANDING

Diameter

Nominal

Maximum

Minimum

Minimum Breaking load of strand

Galvanising

Minimum weight of zinc coating per Sq.mtr of uncoated wire surface

Minimum number of one minute dips thatthe galvanised strand can withstand inthe standard preece test

Min. Number of twists in a guage lengthequal to 100 times dia of wire which thestrand can ithstand in the torsion test

ACSR CONDUCTOR

UTS of conductor

Lay ratio of conductor

Outer steel layer

12 wire aluminium layer

18 wire aluminium layer

24 wire aluminium layer

DC resistance of conductor at 20 deg. C

Minimum corona Extinction Voltage (line to ground) under Dry Condition

Required Offered

GTP OF ACSR CONDUCTORS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

5.5 microvolts Less than 1000

5.6 m

5.7 m

5.8 %

5.9 right

5.10

(a) kg/km 1621

(b) kg/km 1621-5%

(c ) kg/km 1621+5%

6.0 Yes

7.0 Nos.

RIV at 1 MHz at 154 kV (rms) under dry conditions

Standard length of conductor

Maximum length of conductor

Tolerance on standard length ofconductor

Direction of lay for outside layer

Linear mass of the Conductor

Standard

Minimum

No. of cold pressure butt welding equipments available at works

Maximum

Drum is as per specification

66kV1

2

3

4I)

ii)

iii)

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13 OGA Drg enclosed

Cantilever strength(Kg.)

Max. allowable span(mm)

Weight (Kg)

Radio interference Voltage at 1.1times the rated phase to earth voltage

1.2/50 microsec.impulse withstand Voltage

(KVrms) dry and wetPower Frequency withstand Voltage for 1 min

Rated voltage(KV) 72.5

Creepage Distance 25 mm/KV

Diameter (bottom)

Diameter (top)

Height

Applicable Standard IS 5350, IS:2544, IEC 168

Type Solid core

Manufacturer's name

GTP OF BUSHING/ SUPPORT INSULATORSS. NO. DESCRIPTION

66kV

Required Offered

1

2

2.1

(a) % Max. 0.55%

(b) % 0.40% to 0.90%

(c ) % Max.0.04%

(d) % Max.0.04%

(e) % 0.15% to 0.35%

2.2

(a) % 0.9995

3

3.1

(a) mm

(b) mm

(c ) mm

3.2 kN

3.3

(a) gm

(b) Nos. 1minute=3 dips1/2minute=1 dip

GTP OF EARTH WIRES. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

7/3.66 mm EARTHWIRE

Name and Address of Manufacturer

PARTICULARS OF RAW MATERIALS

Steel Wires/Rods

Carbon

Manganese

Phosphorous

Sulphur

Silicon

Zinc

Minimum purity of zinc

STEEL STRANDS AFTER STRANDING

Diameter

Nominal

Maximum

Minimum

Minimum Breaking load of strand

Galvanising

Minimum weight of zinc coating per Sq.mtr of uncoated wire surface

Minimum number of one minute dipsthat the galvanised strand canwithstand in the standard preece test

Required Offered

GTP OF EARTH WIRES. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

(c ) Nos. 18

4

4.1 kN 68.4

4.2 mm Std. 181mmMax. 198mmMin. 165mm

4.3 ohm/km 2.5 Ohms/Km(Max.)

4.4 m

4.5 m

4.6 right hand

4.7

(a) kg/km 583

(b) kg/km 595

(c ) kg/km 578

5 Yes

Min. Number of twists in a guage lengthequal to 100 times dia of wire which thestrand can withstand in the torsion test

STRANDED EARTHWIRE

UTS of earthwire

Lay length of outer steel layer

DC resistance of earyhwire at 20 deg.C

Standard length of earthwire

Tolerance on Standard length

Drum is as per specification

Direction of lay of outer layer

Linear mass of earthwire

Nominal

Maximum

Minimum

Required Offered 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 25mm/KV

10

11 45-90-120

12 Porcelain (Fog type)

13

(a) 28

(b) 28

14

(a) 28

(b) 28

15 28

16

(a) 75

(b) 75

DISC INSULATOR/LONG ROD INSULATORS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

Name of Manufacturer

Address of Manufacturer

Weight of single disc(kg)

Size and Designation of pin ball shank(mm)

Diameter of disc (mm)

Tolerence on Diameter (mm)

Ball to ball spacingbetween disc (mm)

Tolerance on spacing (mm)

Minimum nominal creepage distance of single disc (mm)

Tolerance on creepage distance (mm)

Electromechanical Strength of disc (kN)

Material of Shell (Porcelain/Toughened glass)

Power frequency flashover voltage of single disc

Dry (kV rms)

Wet (kV rms)

Power frequency withstand voltage of single disc

Dry (kV rms)

Wet (kV rms)

Power frequency puncture voltage of single disc(kV rms)

Impulse flashover voltage of single disc (dry)

Positive (kV peak)

Negative kV peak

Required Offered

DISC INSULATOR/LONG ROD INSULATORS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

17

(a) 75

(b) 75

18

19 9

20 50

21 99.95

22

(a) 6

(b) 6

23

(a)

(b)

24

Impulse withstand voltage of single disc (dry)

Positive (kV peak)

Negative (kV peak)

Steepness of impulse voltage which the disc insulators can withstand in steep wave fronttest (kV/micro sec)

Visible discharge test of single disc (dry) (kV rms)

Maximum RIV at 1 MHz and 10 kV AC (rms)voltage of single disc (micro V)

Purity of zinc used for galvanising (%)

No. of dips in standard preece test

Socket

Ball Pin

Axial and Radial run out (According to IEC)

Drawings enclosed

As per pointer A (mm)

As per pointer B (mm)

Required Offered 1

2 IS-5561-1970

3 Outdoor

4 Bolted type

5

a)

b)

6

a) Al. alloy CR(A6) 4600, IS-617, 1975

b) M.S. Hot dip Galv. IS-1367, 1979

c) Spring steel - Electro Galv.

d) Cu./Al./2mm thick

7

8

9 110

10 10mm

11

GTP OF CLAMPS AND CONNECTORSS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

Manufacturer’s Name and address

Applicable standards

Application

Type

For connection to

Conductor size and arrangement

Equipment terminal and arrangement

Material (state percentage composition of constituents and impurities present)

Clamp body

Bolts and Nuts

Spring washers

Liners, if any

Rated Current (A)

Minimum thickness of any part(mm)

Weight of Clamp complete with hardware

Maximum temperature rise over temperature specified in project current (°C)

Rated terminal load (kg)

Required Offered1

2 IS-2486 & IS-2633

3

a) Forged steel

b) MS Hot Dip Galvanised

c) Stainless steel/Brass

d) Stainless steel/Brass

e) Aluminium Alloy-LM-6

4

a)

b)

c)

d)

e)

f)

g)

h)

i)

j)

GTP OF INSULATOR HARDWARES. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

Manufacturer

Applicable Standards

Materials

Ferrous Parts

Nuts & C14Bolts

Cotter Pins

Suspension clamps (kg)

Split Pins

Strain and suspension clamps

Ultimate Strengths

Complete assembly (kg)

Strain clamp (kg)

Ball clevis (kg)

D-Shackle (kg)

Ball eye (Kg)

Clevis eye (Kg)

Yoke Plate (Kg)

Socket eye (kg)

Socket clevis (Kg)

Required Offered 1 Manufacturer

b) Hardware

2 Type of String

a) Single/Double Single/Double

b) Suspension/Tension Suspension/Tension

3 Applicable Standards IS:2486

4 Type of Insulators

a) Ball & Socket/ other Ball & Socket

b) Normal / antifog Fog Type

5 Insulating Material Porcelain

6 No. of Units per String

7 Size of each unit

a) Diameter of disc (mm)

b) Spacing between Units (mm)

8 Weight

a) Each Disc (Kg)

b) Complete string (Kg)

9 Creepage Distance

a) Each Disc (mm) 25mm/KV

b) Complete String (mm)

10 Power Frequency Withstand Voltage

a) Each Disc

i) Dry (KV) 28KV rms

GTP OF INSULATOR STRINGSS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

Required Offered

GTP OF INSULATOR STRINGSS. NO. DESCRIPTION PARTICULARS

ii) Wet (KV) 28KV rms

b) Complete string

i) Dry (KV)

ii) Wet (KV)

11 Impulse Withstand Voltage

a) Each disc

I) Positive (kVp) 75

ii) Negative (kVp) 75

b) Complete Strings

I) Positive (kVp)

ii) Negative (kVp)

12 Power Frequency Puncture Withstand Voltage of each Disc (KV rms)

13 Electro Mechanical Strength of each Disc (Kg)

S. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

1 Name of manufacturer and country

2 Type, model and catalogue No.3 Inductance of main coil in milli

henry (mH)1

4 Blocking capability in different ranges (resonant frequency range)

50-500KHz

5 Minimum guaranteed resistive component over blocking range

570 Ohms

6 Different tuning range offered7 Variation in resonant frequency

per degree centigrade change in ambient temperature .

Negligible

8 Variation in 50Hz impedance per degree centigrade over varied in ambient temperature.

Negligible

9 Detail of protection of capacitors and coil against voltage surges

Gapless/Gap type L.A.

10 Impedance at tuned frequency 570 Ohms11 Change in impedance per degree

centigrade variation in ambient temperature

Negligible

12 Material of main coil Aluminium13 Attenuation in the tuned

frequency band14 Maximum tapping loss (insert a

loss with a line impedance of 400 ohms and 600 ohms).

2.6dB

15 System voltage rating in K.V 13216 Continuous current rating in amp.

at ambient temperature 50 degree centigrade

630A

17 Continuous current rating in amp. at ambient temperature 65.5 degree centigrade

18 Maximum symmetrical short circuit current ratings for one second duration in K.V.

16

GTP OF 630A LINE TRAPSPARTICULARS

S. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

PARTICULARS

19 Asymmetrical peak value of first half wave of rated short time current.

40.8 KAP

20 Dynamic limiting current 40.8 KAP21 Rated current and corresponding

voltage630A/132 KV

22 Type of incoming and outgoing terminals

Suitable for either horizontal or vertical take off

23 Type of mounting Suspension24 Maximum working stress if

suspension mounted(2xMass of LT in Kg) 9.81+5000N

25 Ultimate tensile strength, if suspension mounted

> CI. 24

26 Class of insulation of line trap as per table-1 of IEC-353

F

27 Whether corona rings are provided

28 Whether bird barriers are provided

Yes

29 Dimensions of the equipment. i) Heightii) Diameter

30 Net weight (APPROXIMATELY)

31 Gross weight (APPROXIMATELY)

32 Make and type of lightning arrestor

Gapless/Gap type L.A.

33 Rated voltage of arrestor(protective device kV (rms)

6

34 Nominal discharge current for 8/20 ms wave impulse

10 KA

35 Discharge voltage at 10 kA 20 KVP36 Minimum power frequency spark

over voltage (peak) kV9 KV for Gap type LA

37 Maximum 1/50 as impulse spark over voltage (peak) kV

20 KV for Gap type LA

38 Impulse withstand voltage of main coil and tuning unit.

32KVP

39 Nominal discharge current of protective device

10 KA

40 Extinction potential of arrestor

S. NO. DESCRIPTION

Required Offered

PARTICULARS

41 Maximum residual discharge voltage for 8/20 ms impulse.a) at 5000 Amps 18 KVPb) at 10000 Amps 20 KVP

42 Impulse current withstand value of L.Aa) Long duration As per IEC-99b) High current. As per IEC-99

43 Residual voltage at 10 kA peak 20 KVP

Sr. No. Description

Required Offered 1. Name of manufacturer2. Type, designation and catalogue

No.3. Characteristic impedance 150 Ohms +10%

5. Attention per KM of H.F cable at various carrier Frequencies in the range of 40 to 500 KHz

1.0 dB to 5.1 dB /km

6. Conductor size and its material 1.40+0.03 mm Solid plan hard drawn copper

7. Details of shielding and other coverings

Single braid, 0.2 mm tinned copper wire min. coverage 90%GS Wiring braidingWire Dia- 0.3 mmMin. Coverage-70%

9. One minute P.F. withstand voltage between conductor and sheaths and between cores of the Cable

4 KV rms

10. Loop resistance per KM at 20 deg C

Max. 30 Ohms

11. Make up of H.F. cable12. Overall diameter of the cable 20-25 mm13. Minimum bending radius for

installation20xoverall dia. of cable

14. Net weight /KM of cable 350 kg/km (approx)15. Cable length / drum with

variation, if any 500 m + 5%

8. Details of protective armouring provided

GTP for HF CABLE

4. Nominal capacitance / KM 34 pF

Particulars

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

1 A) Name of Manufacturer & country B) Place of Manufacturer

2 Type, designation, model and catalogue No.

3 Type of Modulation Amplitude Modulation4 Mode of transmission Single side band (SSB)5 Carrier frequency range 40 KHz-500 KHz6 Nominal carrier frequency

band4 KHz

7 Carrier frequency accuracy from its nominal value.

Not more than + 10 Hz

8 Frequency difference between a voice frequency input (applied to transmit end) of a pair of PLCC terminals connected back to back.

Not more than 2 Hz

9 Max. H.F. amplifier output with single/multi tone keying (peak envelope power).

40W

10 Nominal carrier freq. Power (PEP) at the output of the terminals at highest carrier freq.

20W

11 Loss in the line filters/H.F. Hybrid at the highest carrier frequency

12 Mean Carrier freq. Power

13 Ratio between peak envelope power and mean power

Between 8.5 dB to 10 dB

14 Nominal impedance at the input (V. F. side) of carrier terminals.

600 Ohms

15 Nominal H.F. impedance at the output of carrier terminals

150 Ohms balanced

GTP OF POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION EQUIPEMENT

PARTICULARS

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION EQUIPEMENT

PARTICULARS

16 Return loss within nominal carrier frequency band.

Not more than 10 dB

17 Effectively transmitted V. F. Band.

300-3400 Hz

18 Return loss within VF Band. Not less than 14 dB

19 H.F. Oscillator details i.e. type and its freq. Stability.

20 I.F. Oscillator details i.e. type and its freq. Stability.

21 Automatic gain control (AGC) details

For 40 dB change in carrier frequency signal level within the regulation range, change in VF receive levels of both speech and other signals shall be less than 1dB

a) Rangeb) Regulation

22 Level of spurious emission at thea) Edge of nominal carrier band.

- 10 dBm (max)

b) One band away from nominal carrier freq. Band.

- 24 dBm (max)

c) Twice band away from nominal carrier freq. Band.

- 34 dBm (max)

23 Relative level at V.F, 4-wire terminal points.a) Send leg 0 dBr to - 17dBr (-3.5 dBr)b) Receive leg 8 dBr to - 3.5dBr (-3.5 dBr)

24 Relative level at V. F. 2-wire

a) Send leg 0 dBr b) Receive leg -7dBr

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION EQUIPEMENT

PARTICULARS

25 Permissible limits for variation of overall loss (relative to 600 Hz) in speech channel transmitted over a pair of PLCC terminals connected back to back for 300-2400 kHz. Effectively transmitted speech frequency band.

As pe fig. 11 of IS: 9482:1996

26 Group delay distortion measured between 4-wire transmit and 4-wire received-point of a pair of transmitting/receiving PLC terminals.

As pe fig. 12 of IS: 9482:1997

27 H.F. sensitivity28 Whether PLC terminal

alongwith HF line filters are tunable at site.

Yes

29 HF/IF send/receive filter sensitivity.

30 Details of provision of equalizers.

Equalizers be provided

31 Whether HF hybrid is used for speed band operation also.

32 Whether HF receive/send line filters have been provided at the input of receive leg and output of send leg.

33 List of important jack test points brought out on the front of the panel.

34 Details of automatic telephone switching unit, provided in the PLC terminal.

35 Details of modules in a set of spares.

36 Noise performance

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION EQUIPEMENT

PARTICULARS

a) Noise generated within the PLC terminal weighted telephone noise level measured at speech output of a pair of PLC terminals.

Shall not exceed -55 dBm

b) Near end far end cross talk due to signal channel either individually or collectively in a pair of PLC terminals without Compander.

Shall not exceed -50 dBm

c) Signal to noise ratio for voice communication referred to 1 Mw at relative level of zero.

Min. 25 dB

d) Minimum acceptable SNR for protection signaling at the input or receiver.

15 dB

e) Psophometric noise contribution of a pair of PLC terminals connected back to back

f) Cross talk attenuation between individual channels

Not more than -50 dBm

37 Type of modulation and frequency band for telephone signaling channels

38 Pulse distortion of telephone signaling channels when operated at a signaling speed of 10 pulses per sec. with mark to space ratio of 40/60 or 33-1/3/66-2/3 in a pair of PLC terminals.

Shall not exceed 10%

S. NO. DESCRIPTIONRequired Offered

GTP OF POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION EQUIPEMENT

PARTICULARS

39 The level between which the limiter action starts for any frequency 300 Hz to 2400 Hz.

Limiter action starts between-3dB and 0dB for any sinusodial signal of a frequency between 300 Hz an the upper frequency of the channel. The level of the frequency signal shall not exceed +3dB for an increase in athe voice frequency input signal to a level of +15 dB.

40 Distortion factor per 50% signal at 400 Hz with and without compandor.

Less than -40 dBm

41 Whether compandor/Expander provided.

Yes

42 The linearity as a function of voice frequency input level measuring set.

43 Details of meters provided on test panel their range and purpose.

44 Whether type test reports submitted with the bid.

Yes

45 D.C. supply requirement:a) Voltage & permissible variations

48V DC+15%, -10%(Positive pole earthed)

b) Maximum current46 Voltage withstand

capabilitiesYes

47 I} Dimension and weight of cabinetII) Whether steel cabinets are suitable to accommodate switching units and protection equipment’s also.

S. NO. Offered 1

2

3

4

5

6

a)

b)

7

i)

ii)

iii)

8

a)

b) Continuous Current 1A

Current carrying capacity at Power frequency:

Short time current for 0.2 sec. 50 A

Discharge Current 5 KA

Drainage Coil

Type Non-Linear

Rated Voltage 1 KV

1.2/50 micro sec impulse wave withstand Voltage 10 kv (Peak)

Arrester type and rating

Insulating level of isolating Transformer

Power Freq. withstand Voltage for 1 min. 5 kv (rms)

Secondary impedance 150 Ohms (Balanced)

Pass band range 35-500 KHz

Nominal peak envelope Power 650 Watt (min)

Primary impedance 600 Ohms

RequiredName of Manufacturer and address

GTP of COUPLING DEVICEDESCRIPTION